Skip to content
Subjects

A-Level Physics

Tips

A-Level Physics (9702) goes from measurement and motion all the way to quantum physics. The biggest jump from IGCSE is the algebra: you must rearrange and combine equations, not just remember them.

AS year: mechanics, waves, electricity, and the start of particle physics. A2 year: circular motion, gravitational, electric and magnetic fields, oscillations, thermodynamics and nuclear physics.

Read one topic, then do questions on it straight away. Physics does not stick from reading. When an answer is wrong, ask yourself: was it the physics or the algebra? The two need different fixes.

A-Level Physics Past Papers

  • 1

    Physical quantities and units

    1.1

    Physical quantities

    Syllabus
    1. understand that all physical quantities consist of a numerical magnitude and a unit
    2. make reasonable estimates of physical quantities included within the syllabus

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A physical quantity 物理量 has two parts: a number (its magnitude 大小) and a unit 单位. The number on its own tells you nothing. You must also say what is measured and in which unit.

    Example: "the length is 1.5" is not complete. "The length is 1.5 m" is a physical quantity.

    Making estimates

    You should be able to estimate 估算 the size of the physical quantities in this syllabus. Paper 1 usually opens with a question like this. Learn these rough values:

    • mass 质量 of an adult human: $\sim 70\ \text{kg}$; of a car: $\sim 1000\ \text{kg}$; of an apple: $\sim 0.1\ \text{kg}$
    • weight 重力 of an adult human: $\sim 700\ \text{N}$; of an apple: $\sim 1\ \text{N}$
    • height of an adult human: $\sim 1.7\ \text{m}$; height of a room: $\sim 3\ \text{m}$
    • walking speed: $\sim 1.5\ \text{m s}^{-1}$; a car on a fast road: $\sim 30\ \text{m s}^{-1}$
    • speed of sound in air: $\sim 340\ \text{m s}^{-1}$; speed of light in a vacuum 真空: $3.0 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$
    • acceleration 加速度 of free fall 自由落体: $g \approx 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$
    • density 密度 of water: $1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$; of air: $\sim 1.2\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$; of steel: $\sim 8000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$
    • atmospheric pressure 大气压强: $\sim 1.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$
    • room temperature: $\sim 20\ ^{\circ}\text{C} \approx 293\ \text{K}$
    • power of a kettle: $\sim 2\ \text{kW}$; of a person climbing stairs: $\sim 300\ \text{W}$
    • wavelength of visible light: $\sim 5 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$; diameter of an atom: $\sim 10^{-10}\ \text{m}$; of a nucleus: $\sim 10^{-15}\ \text{m}$

    A good estimate has the right order of magnitude 数量级 (the right power of ten). For a human, 70 kg is a good guess; 7 kg is not.

    To estimate a quantity that is not in the list, build it from ones that are. The kinetic energy of a moving car is $\tfrac{1}{2}mv^{2} \approx \tfrac{1}{2} \times 1000 \times 30^{2} \approx 5 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J}$. The pressure under a standing person is $700\ \text{N} / 0.02\ \text{m}^{2} \approx 4 \times 10^{4}\ \text{Pa}$. Always check that the power of ten looks sensible before you move on.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    physical quantity 物理量 wù lǐ liàng
    magnitude 大小 dà xiǎo
    unit 单位 dān wèi
    estimate 估算 gū suàn
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    vacuum 真空 zhēn kōng
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    free fall 自由落体 zì yóu luò tǐ
    density 密度 mì dù
    atmospheric pressure 大气压强 dà qì yā qiáng
    order of magnitude 数量级 shù liàng jí
    Exercise sheet
    1.2

    SI units 国际单位制

    Syllabus
    1. recall the following SI base quantities and their units: mass (kg), length (m), time (s), current (A), temperature (K)
    2. express derived units as products or quotients of the SI base units and use the derived units for quantities listed in this syllabus as appropriate
    3. use SI base units to check the homogeneity of physical equations
    4. recall and use the following prefixes and their symbols to indicate decimal submultiples or multiples of both base and derived units: pico (p), nano (n), micro (\mu), milli (m), centi (c), deci (d), kilo (k), mega (M), giga (G), tera (T)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Base units

    The SI system has seven base quantities 基本量; five of them are used in this topic. You must know these five and their units:

    • mass — kilogram, $\text{kg}$
    • length 长度 — metre, $\text{m}$
    • time — second, $\text{s}$
    • current 电流 — ampere 安培, $\text{A}$
    • temperature 温度 — kelvin 开尔文, $\text{K}$

    Every other unit in this syllabus is built from these five.

    Derived units

    A derived unit 导出单位 is made by multiplying or dividing base units. You should be able to write any quantity in this syllabus in base units.

    Build a derived unit from the equation that defines it:

    • speed 速率 = distance / time, so its unit is $\text{m s}^{-1}$
    • acceleration = change in velocity 速度 / time, so its unit is $\text{m s}^{-2}$
    • force = mass × acceleration, so its unit is $\text{kg m s}^{-2}$. The newton 牛顿 is $1\ \text{N} = 1\ \text{kg m s}^{-2}$.
    • work and energy 能量 = force × distance, so the unit is $\text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$. The joule 焦耳 is $1\ \text{J} = 1\ \text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$.
    • power 功率 = energy / time, so the unit is $\text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-3}$. The watt 瓦特 is $1\ \text{W} = 1\ \text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-3}$.
    • pressure 压强 and stress 应力 = force / area, so the unit is $\text{kg m}^{-1}\ \text{s}^{-2}$. The pascal 帕斯卡 is $1\ \text{Pa} = 1\ \text{kg m}^{-1}\ \text{s}^{-2}$.

    When a question asks for the SI base units of a quantity, replace each named unit with its base units, then simplify. Example: the SI base units of the watt are $\text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-3}$.

    Checking that the units match

    An equation is homogeneous 量纲一致 when both sides have the same base units. In plain words: the units on both sides match.

    Write each side in base units and compare. Take the equation $v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$:

    • left side: $(\text{m s}^{-1})^{2} = \text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$
    • right side, first term: $(\text{m s}^{-1})^{2} = \text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$
    • right side, second term: $\text{m s}^{-2} \cdot \text{m} = \text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$

    Both sides give $\text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$, so the units match.

    Be careful: matching units do not prove the whole equation is correct. It could still have a wrong number, or a missing factor of 2. But if the units do not match, the equation is wrong for sure.

    Worked example. The drag force on a falling ball is given by $F = kv^{2}$, where $v$ is the speed. Find the SI base units of the constant $k$.

    Rearrange: $k = F / v^{2}$. In base units, $F$ is $\text{kg m s}^{-2}$ and $v^{2}$ is $\text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$, so

    $$k:\ \frac{\text{kg m s}^{-2}}{\text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}} = \text{kg m}^{-1}.$$

    A multiple-choice question often asks "which equation could be correct?". Check the base units of each option; only a homogeneous equation can be correct. A pure number (like 2, $\pi$ or $\tfrac{1}{2}$) has no unit, so it never changes the check.

    Prefixes

    A prefix 词头 is a letter put in front of a unit to make it bigger or smaller by powers of ten. You must know these:

    The SI prefixes climb in steps of a thousand, from pico up to giga
    The SI prefixes climb in steps of a thousand, from pico to giga
    Prefix Symbol Factor
    tera T $10^{12}$
    giga G $10^{9}$
    mega M $10^{6}$
    kilo k $10^{3}$
    deci d $10^{-1}$
    centi c $10^{-2}$
    milli m $10^{-3}$
    micro $\mu$ $10^{-6}$
    nano n $10^{-9}$
    pico p $10^{-12}$

    To change a prefixed unit into base units, replace the prefix with its factor, then simplify. Example: change $0.25\ \text{kN mm}^{-2}$ into $\text{N m}^{-2}$:

    $$0.25\ \text{kN mm}^{-2} = 0.25 \times \frac{10^{3}\ \text{N}}{(10^{-3}\ \text{m})^{2}} = 0.25 \times \frac{10^{3}}{10^{-6}}\ \text{N m}^{-2} = 2.5 \times 10^{8}\ \text{N m}^{-2}.$$

    Take special care with squared units like $\text{mm}^{2}$: you must square the factor too.

    Explore

    Base or derived?

    Only seven quantities are base quantities. Everything else is built from them, and its unit can be written in base units.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    length 长度 cháng dù
    speed 速率 sù lǜ
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    temperature 温度 wēn dù
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    SI units 国际单位制 guó jì dān wèi zhì
    base quantity 基本量 jī běn liàng
    current 电流 diàn liú
    ampere 安培 ān péi
    kelvin 开尔文 kāi ěr wén
    derived unit 导出单位 dǎo chū dān wèi
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    force
    newton 牛顿 niú dùn
    work gōng
    joule 焦耳 jiāo ěr
    watt 瓦特 wǎ tè
    stress 应力 yīng lì
    pascal 帕斯卡 pà sī kǎ
    homogeneous 量纲一致 liàng gāng yí zhì
    prefix 词头 cí tóu
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    1.3

    Errors and uncertainties

    Syllabus
    1. understand and explain the effects of systematic errors (including zero errors) and random errors in measurements
    2. understand the distinction between precision and accuracy
    3. assess the uncertainty in a derived quantity by simple addition of absolute or percentage uncertainties

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A vernier caliper measuring an object
    A vernier caliper measures length precisely, with a small uncertainty.

    Every measurement 测量 has some uncertainty 不确定度 — we are never fully sure of the value. A good experimenter knows where the uncertainty comes from, makes a fair estimate of it, and carries it through to the final answer.

    A labelled photograph of a real micrometer screw gauge: the anvil and spindle close onto the object, the C-shaped frame holds them, the sleeve carries the main scale, the thimble carries the thimble scale, and the ratchet closes it gently
    The main parts of a real micrometer screw gauge, which measures to the nearest 0.01 mm
    Two micrometer readings. Panel a is a zero reading: the thimble edge is at 0 mm and the thimble 0 lines up with the datum line, so it reads 0.00 mm. Panel b is a measurement: the thimble edge has passed 5.5 mm on the main scale and the thimble 28 lines up with the datum line, giving 5.5 + 0.28 = 5.78 mm
    Reading a micrometer: add the main scale reading to the thimble reading
    A close-up photograph of a real micrometer scale: the sleeve's main scale on the left meets the rotating thimble scale on the right at the datum line
    Reading a real micrometer: read the mm and half-mm on the sleeve, then add the thimble scale
    A metal vernier caliper with its jaws and a main centimetre scale, and a shorter sliding vernier scale that gives the extra digit of the reading
    Vernier calipers measure to the nearest 0.1 mm — the sliding scale gives the extra digit
    How to read a vernier caliper. The main scale gives the whole millimetres at the vernier zero (here 15 mm); the one vernier line that lines up with a main line gives the tenths (line 4, so 0.4 mm); the reading is 15.4 mm
    Reading a vernier caliper: whole millimetres from the main scale, plus the tenths from the vernier line that lines up

    Systematic and random errors

    A systematic error 系统误差 changes every reading by the same amount, in the same direction. You cannot find it by repeating the measurement. Common causes:

    • a zero error 零点误差 (the scale does not read zero when the true value is zero)
    • a calibration 校准 error (the scale itself is wrong)
    • parallax 视差 (your eye is always to one side of the scale)
    An analogue ammeter with a 0 to 5 A scale. With no current flowing the needle should rest on zero, but it rests just below the zero mark. A dashed line shows the true zero position and a small arrow marks the gap, labelled zero error
    An ammeter with a zero error: the needle reads below zero before any current flows
    A pointer raised above a ruler, viewed by three eyes. The eye straight above reads the true value; an eye too far left reads too low and an eye too far right reads too high, because each sight line crosses the scale at a different mark
    Parallax error: different viewing angles give different scale readings

    A systematic error makes the accuracy 准确度 worse, but it does not change the precision 精密度.

    A random error 随机误差 makes readings jump above and below the true value, with no pattern. Causes include how carefully you read the scale, changing conditions, and the smallest step the instrument 仪器 can show. If you repeat the measurement many times and take the mean 平均值 (the average), random errors partly cancel out.

    A random error makes the precision worse. But with enough repeats, the mean can still be accurate.

    On a graph the two errors look different. A systematic error moves every point by the same amount, so the line of best fit keeps its gradient but no longer passes through the origin: the intercept 截距 changes. Random errors scatter the points above and below the line; a best-fit line drawn through the middle of the scatter still gives a reliable gradient.

    Two graphs of y against x. Left: a systematic zero error has lifted every point by the same amount, so the best-fit line is parallel to the true line but cuts the y-axis above the origin. Right: random errors scatter the points above and below the best-fit line, which still passes through the middle of them
    A systematic error shifts the whole line, so the intercept moves; random errors scatter the points about the line
    Error How to reduce it
    systematic check for a zero error and subtract it; calibrate the instrument against a known standard; read the scale from directly in front
    random repeat the reading and take the mean; use an instrument with smaller divisions; time many oscillations instead of one

    Precision and accuracy

    Precision is how close repeated readings are to each other. Precise readings are grouped very close together.

    Accuracy is how close a reading (or the mean of several readings) is to the true value.

    Two distribution curves, both centred on the true value T. The top curve is narrow and tall, labelled precise and accurate; the bottom curve is wide and low, labelled imprecise but accurate. Both peaks sit on T, so precision is about how narrow the curve is
    Precision: how narrow the distribution is around the true value T

    A set of readings can be:

    • precise and accurate — close together and near the true value
    • precise but not accurate — close together, but away from the true value (a systematic error)
    • accurate but not precise — spread out, but the mean is near the true value
    • neither — spread out and away from the true value
    Two distribution curves whose peaks are both offset from the true value T. The top curve is narrow but its peak is to the right of T, labelled precise but not accurate; the bottom curve is wide and its peak is also to the right of T, labelled imprecise and not accurate. A double-headed arrow marks the offset from T in each
    Accuracy: whether the peak of the distribution is centred on the true value T

    When a question gives a table of repeated readings, look at the spread (precision) and the mean (accuracy) separately.

    Estimating the uncertainty in a reading

    Before you combine uncertainties, you need a sensible uncertainty for each raw reading:

    • A single reading on an analogue scale: half the smallest division 分度 (a metre rule reads to $1\ \text{mm}$, so one reading is $\pm 0.5\ \text{mm}$). A length needs two readings, one at each end, so its uncertainty is $\pm 1\ \text{mm}$.
    • A digital meter: $\pm 1$ in the last digit shown (a stopwatch showing $2.47\ \text{s}$ is $\pm 0.01\ \text{s}$).
    • A hand-timed measurement: your reaction time 反应时间 matters more than the display. Allow about $\pm 0.1$ to $0.2\ \text{s}$, and time many oscillations instead of one, so the same uncertainty is shared between all of them.
    • Repeated readings: the uncertainty is half the range 极差的一半. Three timings of $2.42$, $2.48$ and $2.45\ \text{s}$ have a mean of $2.45\ \text{s}$ and a range of $0.06\ \text{s}$, so $t = (2.45 \pm 0.03)\ \text{s}$.

    Be honest. If the edge of a shadow is hard to see, the uncertainty in its position is several millimetres, however fine the scale. Examiners do not accept "the smallest division" as the uncertainty of a difficult reading.

    Uncertainty in a derived quantity

    A measurement is often written as $x \pm \Delta x$. Here $\Delta x$ is the absolute uncertainty 绝对不确定度. The percentage uncertainty 百分比不确定度 is

    $$\text{percentage uncertainty in } x = \frac{\Delta x}{|x|} \times 100\%.$$

    A derived quantity 导出量 is one you calculate from measured values. Its uncertainty is found by simple rules:

    • Adding or subtracting — add the absolute uncertainties. If $y = a + b$ or $y = a - b$, then $\Delta y = \Delta a + \Delta b$.
    • Multiplying or dividing — add the percentage uncertainties. If $y = \dfrac{a \cdot b}{c}$, then
      $$\frac{\Delta y}{|y|} = \frac{\Delta a}{|a|} + \frac{\Delta b}{|b|} + \frac{\Delta c}{|c|}.$$
    • Powers — multiply the percentage uncertainty by the power. If $y = a^{n}$, then $\dfrac{\Delta y}{|y|} = |n| \cdot \dfrac{\Delta a}{|a|}$.

    Worked example. A ball's diameter 直径 is measured as $d = (5.26 \pm 0.02)\ \text{cm}$. The volume 体积 of a sphere is $V = \tfrac{4}{3}\pi r^{3} = \tfrac{4}{3}\pi (d/2)^{3}$, so $V \propto d^{3}$ ($V$ depends on $d$ cubed).

    The percentage uncertainty in $d$ is

    $$\frac{0.02}{5.26} \times 100\% \approx 0.38\%.$$

    Because $V \propto d^{3}$, the percentage uncertainty in $V$ is three times this, about $1.14\%$. The volume is $\tfrac{4}{3}\pi(2.63)^{3} \approx 76.2\ \text{cm}^{3}$. So the absolute uncertainty is $0.0114 \times 76.2 \approx 0.87\ \text{cm}^{3}$. The final answer is $V = (76.2 \pm 0.9)\ \text{cm}^{3}$.

    Do two values agree? Practical questions often ask whether two calculated values of a constant support a suggested relationship. Do not just say "they are close". Work out the percentage difference 百分比差异 between them,

    $$\text{percentage difference} = \frac{|k_{1} - k_{2}|}{\text{mean of } k_{1} \text{ and } k_{2}} \times 100\%,$$

    and compare it with the percentage uncertainty in $k$ (or with the criterion the question gives, often 10%). If the difference is smaller, the two values agree within the uncertainty and the relationship is supported. If it is larger, they do not.

    Significant figures

    When you write a calculated quantity, give it the same number of significant figures 有效数字 as the least precise measurement you used — usually two or three in this syllabus. Too many significant figures makes the answer look more exact than it really is. Too few loses useful information.

    Practical papers ask you to justify the number you chose. Name the raw readings: "$a$ is given to 2 significant figures because $L$ and $t$ were each measured to 2 significant figures." The phrase "because of the raw data" on its own does not earn the mark. In a table of results, judge each row from the least precise raw reading in that row; do not force every row to the same number of figures.

    Uncertainties on a graph

    Paper 5 asks you to carry uncertainties through a graph:

    • Plot each point with an error bar 误差棒 whose length shows the absolute uncertainty in that value.
    • Draw the line of best fit 最佳拟合直线 through the points, then the worst acceptable line 最差可接受直线: the steepest (or shallowest) straight line that still passes through every error bar.
    • The uncertainty in the gradient is the difference between the two gradients, $\Delta m = |m_{\text{best}} - m_{\text{worst}}|$. The uncertainty in the intercept is found the same way.
    • When you plot a logarithm, the absolute uncertainty in $\ln x$ is $\Delta x / x$ (and in $\lg x$ it is $0.434\,\Delta x / x$). Work it out for the largest and smallest values of $x$ separately.
    A graph of y against x with six points, each with a vertical error bar. A solid best-fit line passes through the middle of the points; a dashed worst acceptable line runs from the bottom of the first error bar to the top of the last, steeper than the best line. A note reads: the uncertainty in the gradient is the difference between the two gradients
    The worst acceptable line still passes through every error bar; the gradient uncertainty is the difference between the two gradients

    A percentage uncertainty in the gradient then flows into any quantity you calculate from it, using the rules above.

    Explore

    Systematic or random?

    A systematic error shifts every reading the same way and survives repetition; a random error scatters the readings and shrinks when you average.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    diameter 直径 zhí jìng
    uncertainty 不确定度 bù què dìng dù
    measurement 测量 cè liáng
    random error 随机误差 suí jī wù chā
    systematic error 系统误差 xì tǒng wù chā
    zero error 零点误差 líng diǎn wù chā
    calibration 校准 jiào zhǔn
    parallax 视差 shì chā
    accuracy 准确度 zhǔn què dù
    precision 精密度 jīng mì dù
    instrument 仪器 yí qì
    mean 平均值 píng jūn zhí
    line of best fit 最佳拟合直线 zuì jiā nǐ hé zhí xiàn
    intercept 截距 jié jù
    division 分度 fēn dù
    reaction time 反应时间 fǎn yìng shí jiān
    half the range 极差的一半 jí chā de yí bàn
    derived quantity 导出量 dǎo chū liàng
    absolute uncertainty 绝对不确定度 jué duì bù què dìng dù
    percentage uncertainty 百分比不确定度 bǎi fēn bǐ bù què dìng dù
    volume 体积 tǐ jī
    percentage difference 百分比差异 bǎi fēn bǐ chā yì
    significant figures 有效数字 yǒu xiào shù zì
    same number of significant figures 有效数字 yǒu xiào shù zì
    error bar 误差棒 wù chā bàng
    worst acceptable line 最差可接受直线 zuì chà kě jiē shòu zhí xiàn
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    1.4

    Scalars and vectors

    Syllabus
    1. understand the difference between scalar and vector quantities and give examples of scalar and vector quantities included in the syllabus
    2. add and subtract coplanar vectors
    3. represent a vector as two perpendicular components

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Resolving a force into components

    A scalar 标量 has size only. A vector 矢量 has both size and direction.

    Examples from the syllabus:

    • scalars: mass, time, temperature, energy, work, power, distance, speed, pressure, density, electric charge 电荷
    • vectors: displacement 位移, velocity, acceleration, force (including weight), momentum 动量

    Quick test: if it makes sense to ask "in which direction?", the quantity is a vector. You cannot ask "in which direction is the temperature?", so temperature is a scalar. You can ask "in which direction is the velocity?", so velocity is a vector.

    Adding and subtracting vectors

    A vector is drawn as an arrow: the direction of the arrow gives the direction of the quantity, and the length of the arrow (drawn to scale) gives the magnitude.

    Two velocity vectors drawn as arrows to scale, with a north-south compass reference and a scale key of 1 unit to 5 metres per second. Arrow a points due east and is three units long for 15 metres per second; arrow b points due south and is two units long for 10 metres per second
    Vectors represented as arrows drawn to scale

    To add two coplanar 共面 vectors (vectors in the same flat plane), draw them tip to tail. The resultant 合矢量 goes from the tail of the first arrow to the tip of the second.

    To find $\vec{X} - \vec{Y}$, add the reverse of $\vec{Y}$: $\vec{X} + (-\vec{Y})$. The reverse of $\vec{Y}$ has the same size as $\vec{Y}$ but points the opposite way.

    Adding and subtracting parallel vectors, drawn tip to tail. Row a: 20 N up plus 30 N up, stacked tip to tail, gives a 50 N resultant pointing up. Row b: 20 N up minus 30 N down, so the 30 N is drawn pointing down tip to tail, giving a 10 N resultant pointing down
    Adding and subtracting parallel vectors

    If the two vectors are at right angles (90°), the size of the resultant is

    $$|\vec{R}| = \sqrt{X^{2} + Y^{2}},$$

    and its direction comes from $\tan\theta = Y / X$.

    Worked example. A swimmer heads north at $1.2\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ across a river that flows east at $0.5\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the size and direction of the resultant velocity.

    The two velocities are perpendicular, so

    $$|\vec{R}| = \sqrt{1.2^{2} + 0.5^{2}} = \sqrt{1.69} = 1.3\ \text{m s}^{-1},$$

    at an angle $\tan\theta = 0.5/1.2$, giving $\theta \approx 23°$ east of north.

    The swimmer example as a vector triangle: a 1.2 m/s north arrow and a 0.5 m/s east arrow drawn tip to tail, with the resultant from start to finish at angle theta east of north, of magnitude the square root of 1.2 squared plus 0.5 squared
    Two perpendicular vectors add to a resultant of size $\sqrt{X^2+Y^2}$ at angle $\theta$

    If two vectors have the same size $F$ with an angle $2\alpha$ between them, the resultant has size $2F\cos\alpha$ and lies along the line that cuts the angle in half.

    Worked example. Two forces of $6.0\ \text{N}$ act on an object with $60°$ between them. Find the resultant.

    Here $2\alpha = 60°$, so $\alpha = 30°$ and $R = 2 \times 6.0 \times \cos 30° = 10.4\ \text{N}$, along the line halfway between the two forces. Resolving gives the same answer: each force has a component $6.0\cos 30°$ along that line, and their components at right angles to it cancel.

    For two vectors at any other angle, either make a scale drawing 按比例作图 of the vector triangle and measure the resultant, or resolve both vectors into perpendicular components, add the components, and recombine with $\sqrt{X^{2} + Y^{2}}$.

    Worked example. A ball moving east at $5.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ is hit so that it moves north at $5.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find its change in velocity.

    A change in velocity is a vector subtraction: $\Delta\vec{v} = \vec{v}_{\text{final}} - \vec{v}_{\text{initial}}$. Draw $5.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ north, then add the reverse of the initial velocity, $5.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ west. The two are perpendicular, so $|\Delta\vec{v}| = \sqrt{5.0^{2} + 5.0^{2}} = 7.1\ \text{m s}^{-1}$, pointing north-west. The speed did not change, but the velocity did. That is why a force must have acted on the ball (topic 3).

    Splitting a vector into perpendicular parts

    Any vector can be split into two perpendicular 垂直 (at right angles) components 分量. Usually these are horizontal 水平 and vertical 竖直, or along and across a surface. For a vector $\vec{v}$ at angle $\theta$ to the horizontal:

    $$v_{\text{H}} = v\cos\theta, \qquad v_{\text{V}} = v\sin\theta.$$
    A force F at angle theta to the horizontal, resolved into perpendicular components. A dashed horizontal arrow is the horizontal component F_H = F cos theta and a dashed vertical arrow is the vertical component F_V = F sin theta; together with F they form a right-angled triangle
    Resolving a vector into horizontal and vertical components

    Choose the directions that make the problem easiest. On a slope (an inclined plane 斜面), split the weight into one part along the slope and one part at right angles to it:

    $$W_{\parallel} = W\sin\theta, \qquad W_{\perp} = W\cos\theta,$$

    where $\theta$ is the angle of the slope to the horizontal.

    A block resting on a slope inclined at angle theta. Its weight W is drawn straight down from the block and split into two dashed components: W sin theta pointing down along the slope and W cos theta pointing into the slope. The angle between W and the perpendicular component is marked theta, the same as the slope angle
    On a slope the weight splits into $W\sin\theta$ down the slope and $W\cos\theta$ into the slope; the angle between $W$ and the perpendicular is the slope angle $\theta$

    You split a vector into components whenever you need to know how much of it acts in one direction. For example: the part of a force that acts along a slope, or the horizontal and vertical parts of a ball's velocity after it is thrown.

    Explore

    Adding two vectors

    resultant = a + b

    Vectors add tip to tail. The resultant runs from the start of the first arrow to the tip of the second, and its length is found from a scale drawing or by Pythagoras, never by adding the two magnitudes.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    vertical 竖直 shù zhí
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    electric charge 电荷 diàn hè
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    coplanar 共面 gòng miàn
    resultant 合矢量 hé shǐ liàng
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    scale drawing 按比例作图 àn bǐ lì zuò tú
    horizontal 水平 shuǐ píng
    inclined plane 斜面 xié miàn
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    1.4

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    physical quantity a numerical magnitude together with a unit
    homogeneous equation an equation in which every term has the same base units
    systematic error an error that shifts every reading in the same direction by the same amount; not reduced by repeating
    random error an error that scatters readings above and below the true value; reduced by repeating and averaging
    zero error the reading an instrument shows when the true value is zero
    precision how close repeated readings are to each other
    accuracy how close a reading, or the mean of several readings, is to the true value
    absolute uncertainty the range within which the true value is expected to lie, in the units of the quantity
    percentage uncertainty the absolute uncertainty divided by the value, multiplied by 100%
    scalar a quantity with magnitude only
    vector a quantity with magnitude and direction
    1.4

    Exam tips

    • Give every answer a unit, and check homogeneity — both sides of an equation must have the same base units.
    • Distinguish random error (reduce by repeating and averaging) from systematic error (a zero or calibration error that repeats do not remove).
    • Combine uncertainties: add absolute uncertainties when adding/subtracting, add percentage uncertainties when multiplying/dividing (and multiply the % by any power).
    • Distinguish precision (small spread) from accuracy (close to the true value).
    • Resolve a vector into perpendicular components ($F\cos\theta$, $F\sin\theta$); add vectors tip-to-tail or by components.

    Common mistakes

    • Substituting 5 cm as 5, or 20 g as 20. Convert the prefix first: 0.05 m, 0.020 kg.
    • Giving the percentage uncertainty in $T^{2}$ as the same as in $T$. Squaring doubles it; a square root halves it.
    • Treating the percentage uncertainty and the absolute uncertainty as the same number.
    • Quoting "the smallest division" as the uncertainty of a reading that was hard to take.
    • Offering two answers to a definition. Commit to one.
  • 2

    Kinematics

    2.1

    Key definitions

    Syllabus
    1. define and use distance, displacement, speed, velocity and acceleration
    2. use graphical methods to represent distance, displacement, speed, velocity and acceleration
    3. determine displacement from the area under a velocity–time graph
    4. determine velocity using the gradient of a displacement–time graph
    5. determine acceleration using the gradient of a velocity–time graph
    6. derive, from the definitions of velocity and acceleration, equations that represent uniformly accelerated motion in a straight line
    7. solve problems using equations that represent uniformly accelerated motion in a straight line, including the motion of bodies falling in a uniform gravitational field without air resistance
    8. describe an experiment to determine the acceleration of free fall using a falling object
    9. describe and explain motion due to a uniform velocity in one direction and a uniform acceleration in a perpendicular direction

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Dropped vs thrown: falling together
    A car speedometer
    A speedometer shows speed: the distance travelled per unit time.

    These five quantities come up in almost every kinematics 运动学 question. Learn the exact words — the examiner gives marks for precise wording.

    • distance 距离 — the total length of the path travelled. A scalar 标量.
    • displacement 位移 — the straight-line distance from the start to the end, with a direction. A vector 矢量.
    • speed 速率 — the rate of change of distance with time. A scalar.
    • velocity 速度 — the rate of change of displacement with time. A vector.
    • acceleration 加速度 — the rate of change of velocity with time. A vector.

    The unit of speed and velocity is $\text{m s}^{-1}$; the unit of acceleration is $\text{m s}^{-2}$.

    Two more phrases the examiner uses: uniform acceleration 匀加速 means constant acceleration (a straight line on a velocity–time graph), and the acceleration of free fall 自由落体加速度 $g$ is the acceleration of an object falling freely in a uniform gravitational field 匀强重力场 when air resistance is negligible 可忽略的 (small enough to ignore).

    A common mistake: deceleration 减速度 just means acceleration in the opposite direction to the velocity. It is not a separate quantity.

    Speeds are sometimes given in $\text{km h}^{-1}$. Convert before you calculate: $85\ \text{km h}^{-1} = 85 \times 1000 / 3600 = 23.6\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.

    An average-speed enforcement camera on a gantry over a motorway
    A speed camera measures average speed over a known distance — displacement over time, made into a fine
    Explore

    The velocity–time graph

    v = u + at

    On a speed–time graph the gradient is the acceleration and the area underneath is the distance travelled.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    speed 速率 sù lǜ
    distance 距离 jù lí
    kinematics 运动学 yùn dòng xué
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    uniform acceleration 匀加速 yún jiā sù
    acceleration of free fall 自由落体加速度 zì yóu luò tǐ jiā sù dù
    uniform gravitational field 匀强重力场 yún qiáng zhòng lì chǎng
    negligible 可忽略的 kě hū lüè de
    deceleration 减速度 jiǎn sù dù
    Exercise sheet
    2.1

    Motion graphs

    Many marks come from reading or drawing motion graphs, the graphical methods 图像法 the syllabus names. Two graphs matter.

    Displacement–time graph

    The gradient 斜率 (steepness) of a displacement–time graph at a point gives the velocity at that moment.

    • flat line → the object is at rest.
    • straight sloping line → constant velocity (gradient = velocity).
    • curved line → changing velocity. Draw a tangent 切线 at the point and find its gradient.
    A displacement–time graph of a car on a test track: the curve starts shallow, steepens as the car speeds up, then levels off; a tangent drawn at one point shows the instantaneous velocity there
    Displacement–time graph of a car on a test track

    Velocity–time graph

    The gradient of a velocity–time graph gives the acceleration at that moment.

    The area between the line and the time axis gives the displacement in that time.

    • flat line → constant velocity (zero acceleration).
    • straight sloping line → uniform acceleration (constant acceleration).
    • curved line → changing acceleration.
    • area above the time axis is positive displacement; area below is negative (the object moved backwards).
    Velocity–time graph showing a triangular shape: velocity rises to a peak then falls back to zero; the gradient of each line is the acceleration and the shaded area under the line is the total displacement
    Velocity–time graph — gradient gives acceleration, area gives displacement
    Acceleration–time graph paired with the velocity–time graph above: a constant positive acceleration, then a step down to a constant negative acceleration
    Acceleration–time graph derived from the same motion

    To find the displacement, split the area into triangles and rectangles, or count grid squares. Area of a triangle is $\tfrac{1}{2} \times \text{base} \times \text{height}$; area of a rectangle is $\text{base} \times \text{height}$.

    Worked example. The graph shows the velocity of a lift. Find the acceleration in each stage and the total distance travelled.

    A velocity–time graph on a grid: the velocity rises in a straight line from 0 to 3.0 metres per second in the first 4.0 seconds (stage A), stays at 3.0 metres per second from 4.0 to 10.0 seconds (stage B), then falls in a straight line to zero at 12.0 seconds (stage C); the area under the whole line is shaded
    Velocity–time graph of a lift: gradient gives each acceleration, the shaded area gives the distance
    • Stage A: gradient $= \dfrac{3.0 - 0}{4.0} = 0.75\ \text{m s}^{-2}$.
    • Stage B: the line is flat, so the acceleration is zero.
    • Stage C: gradient $= \dfrac{0 - 3.0}{2.0} = -1.5\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ (a deceleration of $1.5\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).
    • Distance: triangle A $= \tfrac{1}{2} \times 4.0 \times 3.0 = 6.0\ \text{m}$, rectangle B $= 6.0 \times 3.0 = 18\ \text{m}$, triangle C $= \tfrac{1}{2} \times 2.0 \times 3.0 = 3.0\ \text{m}$; total $27\ \text{m}$.

    When the graph is a curve, the area is still the displacement: count the squares under the curve (half a square or more counts as one) and multiply by the value of one square.

    Explore

    Reading a velocity–time graph

    Change the start velocity u and the acceleration a. The gradient of the line is the acceleration; the area under it is the displacement.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    graphical methods 图像法 tú xiàng fǎ
    gradient 斜率 xié lǜ
    tangent 切线 qiè xiàn
    2.1

    The four SUVAT equations

    For motion in a straight line with uniform acceleration, we use five symbols: starting velocity $u$, final velocity $v$, acceleration $a$, displacement $s$, and time $t$. Four equations link them:

    $$v = u + at$$
    $$s = ut + \tfrac{1}{2} a t^{2}$$
    $$s = \tfrac{1}{2}(u + v)t$$
    $$v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$$

    Each equation uses four of the five symbols. To pick the right one: write down what you know and what you want, then choose the equation with exactly those four.

    Worked example. A car accelerates uniformly from $8\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ to $20\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ over a distance of $56\ \text{m}$. Find its acceleration.

    We know $u$, $v$ and $s$ and want $a$, so use $v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$:

    $$20^{2} = 8^{2} + 2a(56) \quad\Rightarrow\quad 336 = 112\,a \quad\Rightarrow\quad a = 3.0\ \text{m s}^{-2}.$$

    Where the SUVAT equations come from

    You should be able to get these from the definitions of velocity and acceleration. Think of the velocity–time graph of the motion: a straight line from $u$ at $t = 0$ to $v$ at time $t$.

    • $v = u + at$: acceleration is the gradient, $a = (v - u)/t$, so $v = u + at$.
    • $s = \tfrac{1}{2}(u + v) t$: displacement is the area under the line, a trapezium 梯形 with parallel sides $u$ and $v$ and width $t$, so $s = \tfrac{1}{2}(u + v)t$.
    • $s = ut + \tfrac{1}{2}at^{2}$: put $v = u + at$ into the area: $s = \tfrac{1}{2}(u + u + at)t = ut + \tfrac{1}{2}at^{2}$.
    • $v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$: from the first equation $t = (v - u)/a$; put this into $s = \tfrac{1}{2}(u + v)t$ to get $2as = (v + u)(v - u) = v^{2} - u^{2}$.

    A "derive" question wants exactly these steps, each starting from a definition or an equation already established, with no numbers.

    Displacement–time parabola for uniform acceleration: the curve rises from the origin and steepens, with a tangent drawn at one point labelled slope equals v
    Displacement–time graph for uniform acceleration — the slope at any point equals the instantaneous velocity

    If a question asks "which equation can be found using only the gradient of a velocity–time graph?", the answer is $v = u + at$ (the gradient is the acceleration).

    "Show that" questions. When the question gives the answer ("show that the height is 3.2 km"), the marks are for the method. State the equation, substitute every value with its unit, and give the result to one more significant figure than the value quoted ($3.24\ \text{km}$, which rounds to $3.2\ \text{km}$). Reaching the quoted value proves nothing on its own.

    Choosing a positive direction

    Pick a positive direction at the start and keep it. Anything pointing the other way gets a minus sign. For a ball thrown straight up, if "up" is positive: $u$ is positive, $a = -g$ (gravity 重力 pulls down), and at the highest point the displacement is positive but the velocity is zero.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    trapezium 梯形 tī xíng
    gravity 重力 zhòng lì
    2.1

    Free fall under gravity

    When air resistance 空气阻力 can be ignored, an object in free fall 自由落体 has a constant acceleration $g \approx 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ downwards. This is the same for every mass.

    For a ball dropped from rest and falling a distance $h$:

    $$h = \tfrac{1}{2}gt^{2}, \qquad v = gt, \qquad v^{2} = 2gh.$$

    For a ball thrown straight up with speed $u$:

    • greatest height: put $v = 0$ in $v^{2} = u^{2} - 2gh$, giving $h = u^{2}/(2g)$.
    • time to reach the top: put $v = 0$ in $v = u - gt$, giving $t = u/g$.
    • total time to fall back to the start height: $2u/g$ (the motion is symmetric 对称).

    Worked example. A ball is thrown straight up at $20\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the greatest height it reaches (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    At the highest point $v = 0$, so from $h = u^{2}/(2g)$:

    $$h = \frac{20^{2}}{2 \times 9.81} = \frac{400}{19.62} \approx 20.4\ \text{m}.$$

    When air resistance is not negligible

    The equations above assume the only force is the weight. With air resistance, the resultant force on a falling object is smaller than its weight, so the acceleration is less than $g$; and because air resistance grows with speed, the acceleration keeps decreasing as the object speeds up. On a velocity–time graph the line curves, its gradient falling towards zero as the object approaches terminal velocity 收尾速度 (topic 3). For a projectile, air resistance shortens the range and lowers the maximum height, and the path is no longer a symmetrical parabola 抛物线: the object comes down more steeply than it went up. A "state and explain" question wants the force first, then its effect on the acceleration, then the effect on the motion.

    Experiment to find $g$

    A common method: drop an object from rest, then measure the distance $h$ it falls and the time $t$ it takes. Then

    $$g = \frac{2h}{t^{2}}.$$

    Repeat for several heights and plot $h$ against $t^{2}$. The gradient of the best straight line is $g/2$, so $g$ is twice the gradient. Repeating reduces random error 随机误差. An electronic timer — using light gates 光电门, or a switch the ball hits — removes reaction-time 反应时间 error.

    Experimental set-up to measure g: a release switch cuts the current to an electromagnet so a steel ball drops and starts an electronic timer; the ball falls a measured height h and strikes a trapdoor switch that stops the timer
    Experimental set-up for measuring the acceleration due to free fall
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    free fall 自由落体 zì yóu luò tǐ
    air resistance 空气阻力 kōng qì zǔ lì
    parabola 抛物线 pāo wù xiàn
    symmetric 对称 duì chèn
    terminal velocity 收尾速度 shōu wěi sù dù
    random error 随机误差 suí jī wù chā
    light gates 光电门 guāng diàn mén
    light gate 光电门 guāng diàn mén
    reaction-time 反应时间 fǎn yìng shí jiān
    2.1

    Motion in two directions

    Water jets leave one sprinkler nozzle at the same speed but different angles (, , ); each traces a parabola, and the  jet reaches the greatest range
    Water jets from a sprinkler trace parabola paths — a real example of projectile motion

    When an object moves at constant velocity in one direction (say horizontal 水平) and speeds up in a direction at right angles to it (say vertical 竖直, under gravity), the two motions do not affect each other. Treat each direction on its own, with its own SUVAT equation.

    Horizontal throw

    An object thrown horizontally with speed $u_{\text{H}}$ from height $h$, with air resistance ignored:

    • horizontal: constant velocity $u_{\text{H}}$. After time $t$, the horizontal distance is $x = u_{\text{H}} t$.
    • vertical: starts from rest and speeds up downwards at $g$. After time $t$, it has fallen $y = \tfrac{1}{2} g t^{2}$ and has vertical velocity $v_{\text{V}} = g t$.

    The time to reach the ground depends only on the height $h$, not on $u_{\text{H}}$. Solve $h = \tfrac{1}{2} g t^{2}$ for $t$; then the horizontal range 射程 is $u_{\text{H}} t$.

    Worked example. A ball is thrown horizontally at $15\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ from the top of a cliff $20\ \text{m}$ high. Find the time it takes to land and how far from the base it lands (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    Vertical motion gives the time: from $h = \tfrac{1}{2}g t^{2}$,

    $$t = \sqrt{\frac{2h}{g}} = \sqrt{\frac{2 \times 20}{9.81}} \approx 2.0\ \text{s}.$$

    Horizontal motion then gives the range: $x = u_{\text{H}} t = 15 \times 2.0 \approx 30\ \text{m}.$

    The horizontal-velocity graph is a flat line at $u_{\text{H}}$. The vertical-velocity graph is a straight line from the origin with gradient $g$.

    Comparing two objects. If object A is dropped and object B is thrown horizontally from the same height at the same moment, both reach the ground at the same time: their vertical motions are identical. If instead B is thrown with an upward component, it takes longer, because it must first rise and come back to the start height before it falls the same distance. Its speed on landing is still found from energy: the kinetic energy gained equals the potential energy lost, whatever the direction of the throw, so a ball launched at any angle with the same speed from the same height lands at the same speed (topic 5).

    Projectile at an angle

    A projectile 抛体 thrown at speed $u$ at angle $\theta$ above the horizontal:

    Diagram of a projectile launched at angle  above the horizontal: parabolic path from the origin, the initial velocity  resolved into horizontal component  and vertical component , with  and  axes labelled
    Projectile launched at angle $\theta$ — horizontal and vertical motions are independent
    • horizontal component 分量 of the starting velocity: $u_{\text{H}} = u \cos\theta$ (stays constant during the flight).
    • vertical component of the starting velocity: $u_{\text{V}} = u \sin\theta$ (gets smaller, becomes zero at the top, then grows downwards).

    At the highest point, $v_{\text{V}} = 0$, but $v_{\text{H}}$ is still $u\cos\theta$. The time to the top is $t_{\text{up}} = u\sin\theta / g$; the total flight time (back to the start height) is $2t_{\text{up}}$.

    Sketching the velocity graphs. Examiners often ask you to sketch $v_{\text{H}}$ and $v_{\text{V}}$ against time on the same axes, taking upwards as positive. The horizontal component is a flat line at $u\cos\theta$ for the whole flight. The vertical component is a straight line of gradient $-g$: it starts at $+u\sin\theta$, crosses zero at the top of the flight, and reaches $-u\sin\theta$ on landing at the start height. Label each line, mark the times where the lines start and stop, and make the crossing sit exactly at $t_{\text{up}}$.

    Two velocity–time sketches for a projectile with upwards positive. Left: the horizontal component is a flat line at u cos theta for the whole flight. Right: the vertical component is a straight line of gradient minus g from plus u sin theta, through zero at the top of the flight, to minus u sin theta at landing
    Velocity–time sketches for a projectile: the horizontal component stays constant; the vertical component falls in a straight line through zero at the top

    Worked example. A ball leaves the ground at $18\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ at $60°$ to the horizontal. Show that it reaches its maximum height at $t = 1.6\ \text{s}$.

    $u_{\text{V}} = 18 \sin 60° = 15.6\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. At the top $v_{\text{V}} = 0$, so from $v = u + at$ with $a = -9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$: $t = 15.6 / 9.81 = 1.59\ \text{s} \approx 1.6\ \text{s}$.

    Projectile launched at angle  from level ground: a parabolic path showing the range  from launch to landing point and the maximum height  at the midpoint
    Range $R$ of a projectile launched from and landing on level ground

    Bouncing ball

    When a ball bounces, its velocity–time graph is a set of straight sloping lines (constant $g$) with a sudden jump at each bounce (the velocity flips direction, and gets smaller if some energy 能量 is lost). Add up the times and the distances across the bounces.

    Velocity–time graph of a ball dropped from rest that bounces three times, with downwards positive: each flight is a straight line of gradient g; at each bounce the velocity flips sign in a near-vertical line and comes back smaller, so each flight is shorter than the one before
    A bouncing ball: every sloping line has gradient $g$; the velocity flips sign and shrinks at each bounce

    Read such a graph carefully: the gradient of every sloping line is the same $g$; the ball is at its highest point wherever the line crosses the time axis; and the height of each bounce comes from the area of the triangle above (or below) the axis for that flight.

    Explore

    Launch a projectile

    Fire the ball, then change the angle and speed. The horizontal motion is steady while gravity pulls it down — together they trace a parabola. Find the angle for the longest range, and try the Moon.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    projectile 抛体 pāo tǐ
    range 射程 shè chéng
    horizontal 水平 shuǐ píng
    vertical 竖直 shù zhí
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    2.1

    Two objects meeting

    When two objects move along the same line in different ways, write a displacement equation for each. Use the same start time and the same positive direction. Then set the two displacements equal (or set their difference to a given gap).

    For a goods train at constant velocity $u_{\text{G}}$ and an express train starting from rest with acceleration $a$, both passing the same point at $t = 0$:

    $$s_{\text{G}} = u_{\text{G}} t, \qquad s_{\text{E}} = \tfrac{1}{2} a t^{2}.$$

    They are level again when $s_{\text{G}} = s_{\text{E}}$, giving $t = 2 u_{\text{G}} / a$.

    Two s–t graphs meet where the objects are level at the same time
    Meet where the displacement–time graphs cross (same s at same t)
    2.1

    Tips for solving problems

    1. Draw a diagram and mark the positive direction.
    2. List the SUVAT symbols with their known and unknown values, including signs.
    3. Choose the SUVAT equation with exactly the four symbols you have, plus the one you want.
    4. For projectile motion, split into horizontal and vertical SUVAT problems, linked only by the time $t$.
    5. Always check the units of your answer, and that its size is sensible.
    2.1

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    distance the total length of the path travelled (a scalar)
    displacement the distance moved in a stated direction, from start to finish (a vector)
    speed the rate of change of distance with time
    velocity the rate of change of displacement with time
    acceleration the rate of change of velocity with time
    uniform acceleration acceleration that is constant in magnitude and direction
    acceleration of free fall the acceleration of an object falling freely under gravity alone, with air resistance negligible
    2.1

    Exam tips

    • Use the SUVAT equations only for constant acceleration; list $s, u, v, a, t$ and pick the equation missing your unknown.
    • Choose one direction as positive and keep signs consistent (usually $g = -9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).
    • On a velocity-time graph, gradient $=$ acceleration and area $=$ displacement.
    • For projectiles, treat horizontal (constant velocity) and vertical ($a = g$) motion separately, linked by the same time.

    Common mistakes

    • Saying the heavier ball hits the ground first, or faster, when air resistance is ignored. Both fall with the same acceleration and land at the same speed.
    • Taking the gradient of a $v$$t$ graph when the question wants the area, or the area when it wants the gradient. Gradient is acceleration; area is displacement.
    • Drawing a curve on a $v$$t$ graph for a body under constant acceleration. Constant acceleration is a straight line; only the sign of $v$ changes at a bounce.
    • Using $g = +9.81$ for a ball thrown upwards with "up" as positive. Once up is positive, $a = -9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ for the whole flight, on the way down too.
    • Using a SUVAT equation when the acceleration is changing (air resistance, a curved graph). Then only the graph methods work.
  • 3

    Dynamics

    3.1

    Mass, momentum and force

    Syllabus
    1. understand that mass is the property of an object that resists change in motion
    2. recall $F = ma$ and solve problems using it, understanding that acceleration and resultant force are always in the same direction
    3. define and use linear momentum as the product of mass and velocity
    4. define and use force as rate of change of momentum
    5. state and apply each of Newton’s laws of motion
    6. describe and use the concept of weight as the effect of a gravitational field on a mass and recall that the weight of an object is equal to the product of its mass and the acceleration of free fall

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Mass

    Mass 质量 tells you how hard it is to change an object's motion. The larger the mass, the larger the force needed to give it a certain acceleration 加速度. Mass is measured in kilograms ($\text{kg}$) and is a scalar 标量.

    Momentum

    Linear momentum 动量 is the product of mass and velocity:

    $$p = mv.$$

    Momentum is a vector 矢量 — it points the same way as the velocity 速度. Its unit is $\text{kg m s}^{-1}$, which is the same as $\text{N s}$.

    Force as the rate of change of momentum

    Newton's second law, in its general form: the resultant force 合力 on an object equals the rate of change of its momentum.

    Impulse is the area under a force–time graph, and equals the change in momentum
    Impulse is the area under a force-time graph, equal to the change in momentum
    $$F = \frac{\Delta p}{\Delta t}.$$

    When the mass is constant this becomes $F = ma$, because $\Delta p = m\,\Delta v$ and $\Delta v / \Delta t = a$. Cambridge questions often want you to use $F = \Delta p / \Delta t$ directly for a collision 碰撞 or an impulse 冲量: the average force equals the change in momentum divided by the contact time.

    A ball hits a wall with momentum $p_{1}$ and bounces back with momentum $p_{2}$ in the opposite direction. The change in momentum is $\Delta p = p_{2} - p_{1}$ (give each direction the correct sign). The average force is $\Delta p / \Delta t$, where $\Delta t$ is the contact time.

    Worked example. A $0.20\ \text{kg}$ ball hits a wall at $8.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ and bounces straight back at $6.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. The contact lasts $0.050\ \text{s}$. Find the average force on the ball.

    Take the rebound direction as positive, so $u = -8.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ and $v = +6.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$:

    $$\Delta p = m(v - u) = 0.20 \times \big(6.0 - (-8.0)\big) = 2.8\ \text{kg m s}^{-1},$$
    $$F = \frac{\Delta p}{\Delta t} = \frac{2.8}{0.050} = 56\ \text{N}.$$

    When you know the momentum but not the speed, the change in kinetic energy 动能 is

    $$\Delta E_{\text{k}} = \frac{p_{2}^{2} - p_{1}^{2}}{2m}.$$

    This comes from $E_{\text{k}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2} = p^{2} / (2m)$.

    Momentum–time graphs

    Because $F = \Delta p / \Delta t$, the gradient of a momentum–time graph is the resultant force, just as the gradient of a velocity–time graph is the acceleration. A straight line means a constant resultant force; a horizontal line means zero resultant force; a line sloping down means a force acting against the motion.

    A momentum–time graph for a motorcycle: momentum rises in a straight line from zero to 5000 kilogram metres per second in the first 10 seconds, stays constant from 10 to 16 seconds, then falls in a straight line while braking. The gradient of the first section, 500 newtons, is the resultant force
    The gradient of a momentum–time graph is the resultant force: 500 N while accelerating, zero while the momentum is constant, negative while braking

    Worked example. The graph shows the momentum of a motorcycle. Find the resultant force on it during the first $10\ \text{s}$.

    Gradient $= \Delta p / \Delta t = 5000 / 10 = 500\ \text{N}$. Between $10\ \text{s}$ and $16\ \text{s}$ the momentum is constant, so the resultant force is zero: the driving force just balances the resistive forces. From $16\ \text{s}$ to $20\ \text{s}$ the momentum falls by $2000\ \text{kg m s}^{-1}$, so the resultant force is $-500\ \text{N}$, acting backwards.

    If a question tells you the speed is changing while the resultant force stays constant, that force cannot be air resistance: drag depends on speed, so it would change as the speed changes, and drag always acts against the motion.

    Explore

    Free-body diagram (F = ma)

    The resultant of the forces, divided by the mass, gives the acceleration.

    Explore

    Newton's second law

    F = ma (resultant)

    The resultant force sets the acceleration; balanced forces ⇒ none.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    force
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    linear momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    resultant force 合力 hé lì
    impulse 冲量 chōng liàng
    collision 碰撞 pèng zhuàng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    3.1

    Newton's three laws of motion

    A space shuttle launching
    A rocket pushes gas down; by Newton's third law the gas pushes the rocket up.

    First law

    An object stays at rest, or keeps moving at constant velocity in a straight line, unless a resultant external force 外力 acts on it. In short: zero resultant force means zero acceleration.

    Second law

    The resultant force on an object equals its rate of change of momentum, and acts in the same direction as that change. In SI units,

    $$F = \frac{\Delta p}{\Delta t} = ma \quad\text{(for constant mass)}.$$

    Acceleration and resultant force always point the same way.

    Free-body diagram of a box on a floor with four force arrows: P pulling at 20 degrees above horizontal to the left, R upward, W downward, and F friction to the right
    Free-body diagram showing all forces on a block being pulled at an angle
    A book resting on a table with weight arrow pointing down and normal contact force R arrow pointing up, the two arrows equal in length to show equilibrium
    Weight and normal contact force on a book resting on a table

    Third law

    When body A pushes on body B, body B pushes back on body A with an equal and opposite force. The two forces:

    • act on different objects,
    • are of the same type (both gravitational, both contact, both electrostatic 静电, and so on),
    • have the same size and opposite direction.

    A common trap: the weight 重力 of a block on a table and the normal contact force 支持力 from the table are not a third-law pair (they act on the same object and are different types). The third-law partner of the block's weight is the pull the block makes on the Earth. The third-law partner of the table's contact force is the push the block makes on the table.

    To name a third-law partner, swap the two bodies in the sentence. "The back wheel of a bicycle pushes backwards on the road" pairs with "the road pushes forwards on the back wheel", and that forward push is what drives the bicycle. "The Earth pulls the Moon" pairs with "the Moon pulls the Earth", with the same size of force.

    For a rocket: the thrust 推力 on the rocket and the force on the gases are a third-law pair (the engine pushes the gas down, the gas pushes the engine up). Weight and air resistance are not part of this pair.

    A book on a table with the contact-point arrows: R acting upward on the book (the table pushing the book up) and R-prime acting downward on the table (the book pushing the table down) — equal and opposite forces on different objects
    Newton's third-law pair: R on the book (up) and R′ on the table (down)
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    thrust 推力 tuī lì
    external force 外力 wài lì
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    normal contact force 支持力 zhī chí lì
    electrostatic 静电 jìng diàn
    3.1

    Weight

    Weight is the force on an object from a gravitational field 重力场. Near the Earth's surface,

    $$W = mg,$$

    where $g \approx 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ is the acceleration of free fall. Weight is a vector that points towards the centre of the Earth. Do not mix it up with mass: mass is the same everywhere, but weight changes with place.

    On the Moon $g$ is about $1.6\ \text{m s}^{-2}$, so an astronaut's mass is unchanged but their weight is about one sixth of its value on Earth. When a multiple-choice question asks which statement describes weight, the answer is the one that says "the force on the object due to a gravitational field", not "mass times acceleration" and not "the resultant force".

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gravitational field 重力场 zhòng lì chǎng
    3.2

    Non-uniform motion: friction, drag and terminal velocity

    Syllabus
    1. show a qualitative understanding of frictional forces and viscous/drag forces including air resistance (no treatment of the coefficients of friction and viscosity is required, and a simple model of drag force increasing as speed increases is sufficient)
    2. describe and explain qualitatively the motion of objects in a uniform gravitational field with air resistance
    3. understand that objects moving against a resistive force may reach a terminal (constant) velocity

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Friction and drag forces

    A friction 摩擦力 force between two solid surfaces acts along the surface and opposes the sliding. A viscous 黏性 or drag 阻力 force is the resistive force from a fluid 流体 (a liquid or gas) on an object moving through it; air resistance is the case for air. You do not need to use any coefficient 系数 of friction or viscosity.

    A simple model: the drag gets bigger as the speed gets bigger. At zero speed, the drag is zero. Drag also grows with the cross-sectional area 横截面积 of the object and with the density of the fluid; a parachute works by making the area, and so the drag, much larger. These frictional forces and drag forces are all resistive forces: they act against the direction of motion and transfer kinetic energy to thermal energy.

    A book being pulled along a table with four force arrows: normal contact force up, weight down, pulling force P to the right, frictional force F to the left
    Free-body diagram of a book being pulled on a table

    An object falling through air

    For an object dropped from rest and falling through air:

    1. At first, only weight acts, so the object speeds up downwards at $g$.
    2. As the speed grows, the upward drag grows. The resultant force gets smaller, so the acceleration gets smaller.
    3. In the end, the drag equals the weight. The resultant force is zero, the acceleration is zero, and the speed stays constant — the terminal velocity 收尾速度.

    On a velocity–time graph, the line starts straight with gradient $g$, then bends and flattens at the terminal velocity. This shape (fast start, then slowing acceleration, then constant speed) is how "falling with air resistance" differs from "free fall in a vacuum" in a uniform gravitational field 匀强重力场. On an acceleration–time graph the acceleration starts at $g$ and decreases, curving down to zero.

    Two spheres of the same size but different density have different terminal velocities: the denser sphere has the larger weight, so it needs a larger drag to balance it, and drag only reaches that value at a higher speed. That is also why a parachute changes everything: when it opens, the drag suddenly exceeds the weight, the resultant force is upwards, and the skydiver decelerates (the acceleration is upwards while the velocity is still downwards) until the drag has fallen back to equal the weight at a new, much lower terminal velocity.

    A velocity–time graph of a skydiver. The velocity rises with a gradient that falls from g to zero and levels off at a first terminal velocity where drag equals weight. When the parachute opens the velocity drops steeply, then levels off again at a second, much lower terminal velocity
    A skydiver's velocity–time graph: the acceleration falls from $g$ to zero at the first terminal velocity; opening the parachute makes the drag exceed the weight, so the velocity falls to a new, lower terminal velocity
    Velocity-time graph showing speed rising with initial gradient g, then curving and levelling off at the terminal velocity, with a dashed tangent at the origin and a dashed asymptote
    Velocity–time graph for an object falling through air
    An object falling through a fluid with drag (viscous force) plus upthrust acting upward and weight acting downward, and a velocity arrow pointing down
    Forces on a falling object in a fluid

    Falling through a liquid: three forces

    A ball falling through a liquid has three forces on it: its weight downwards, the upthrust 浮力 upwards, and the viscous drag upwards. The upthrust comes from hydrostatic pressure 流体静压强: the pressure in a liquid increases with depth, so the liquid pushes harder on the bottom of the ball than on the top, and the resultant of these pushes is upwards. Its size is the weight of the liquid the ball displaces, $U = \rho_{\text{liquid}} V g$ (topic 4). The drag grows with speed. When weight $=$ upthrust $+$ drag, the resultant force is zero and the ball falls at its terminal speed. A "draw labelled arrows" question wants exactly these three, with the upthrust and drag both up and the weight down.

    Worked example. A steel ball of radius $2.0\ \text{mm}$ and weight $2.56 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{N}$ falls through oil of density $850\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$. The viscous drag on it is $F = 6\pi \eta r v$, where $\eta$ is the viscosity 黏度 of the oil and $v$ the speed. (a) Find the SI base units of $\eta$. (b) Show that the upthrust on the ball is $2.8 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{N}$. (c) Taking $\eta = 0.20$ in SI units, find the terminal speed.

    (a) $\eta = F / (6\pi r v)$, so its units are $\text{N} / (\text{m} \cdot \text{m s}^{-1}) = \text{kg m s}^{-2} / (\text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-1}) = \text{kg m}^{-1}\ \text{s}^{-1}$.

    (b) $V = \tfrac{4}{3}\pi r^{3} = \tfrac{4}{3}\pi (2.0 \times 10^{-3})^{3} = 3.35 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{m}^{3}$, so $U = 850 \times 3.35 \times 10^{-8} \times 9.81 = 2.79 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{N} \approx 2.8 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{N}$.

    (c) At the terminal speed, drag $= W - U = 2.56 \times 10^{-3} - 2.8 \times 10^{-4} = 2.28 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{N}$. So $v = F / (6\pi \eta r) = 2.28 \times 10^{-3} / (6\pi \times 0.20 \times 2.0 \times 10^{-3}) = 0.30\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.

    Skydivers in free fall, arms and legs spread wide, high above the ground at sunset
    Why the spread-eagle pose? Spreading out gives the largest area, so the most drag. The bigger the drag, the sooner drag balances weight — and the lower the steady terminal velocity they fall at

    Energy during a terminal-velocity fall

    At terminal velocity, a parachutist 跳伞者 has constant kinetic energy. But the gravitational potential energy 重力势能 keeps falling as they go down. Where does it go? Almost all of it turns into thermal energy 热能 of the air around them. It does not become kinetic energy of the parachutist — that stays constant.

    Cyclist or car at constant speed

    A vehicle at constant speed on a flat road has zero resultant force. The forward driving force 驱动力 is equal and opposite to the total resistive force (friction, air resistance, and rolling resistance). At higher speed the drag is larger, so the driving force must be larger too — and so the power 功率 must be larger.

    On a slope the weight has a component along the road. Going up at constant speed, the driving force must balance the resistive force and the part of the weight that pulls down the slope, $W\sin\theta$; going down, that same component helps the motion.

    A car on a slope inclined at angle theta, drawn as a free-body diagram: the driving force D up the slope, the resistive force R down the slope, the normal contact force N perpendicular to the slope, the weight W vertically down, and the dashed component of the weight along the slope, W sin theta
    A car climbing a slope at constant speed: along the slope the driving force balances the resistive force plus the weight's component $W\sin\theta$

    Worked example. A car of mass $1500\ \text{kg}$ climbs a road inclined at $12°$ to the horizontal at a constant $30\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. The total resistive force is $1600\ \text{N}$. Find the driving force and the useful output power of the engine.

    Constant speed means zero resultant force along the slope: $D = 1600 + 1500 \times 9.81 \times \sin 12° = 1600 + 3060 = 4660\ \text{N} \approx 4700\ \text{N}$. Power is force times velocity (topic 5): $P = Dv = 4660 \times 30 = 1.4 \times 10^{5}\ \text{W}$.

    Explore

    Stopping a car

    Friction is what brakes a car. Set a speed and brake — the car keeps moving while the driver reacts, then friction slows it. Double the speed and watch the braking distance quadruple.

    Explore

    Reach terminal velocity

    Jump and watch the air-resistance arrow grow until it balances the weight — then the speed is constant. Open the parachute and the much bigger drag drops the diver to a slow, safe terminal velocity.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    driving force 驱动力 qū dòng lì
    drag 阻力 zǔ lì
    friction 摩擦力 mó cā lì
    terminal velocity 收尾速度 shōu wěi sù dù
    viscous 黏性 nián xìng
    fluid 流体 liú tǐ
    coefficient 系数 xì shù
    viscosity 黏度 nián dù
    cross-sectional area 横截面积 héng jié miàn jī
    thermal energy 热能 rè néng
    uniform gravitational field 匀强重力场 yún qiáng zhòng lì chǎng
    upthrust 浮力 fú lì
    hydrostatic pressure 流体静压强 liú tǐ jìng yā qiáng
    parachutist 跳伞者 tiào sǎn zhě
    gravitational potential energy 重力势能 zhòng lì shì néng
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    3.3

    Conservation of linear momentum

    Syllabus
    1. state the principle of conservation of momentum
    2. apply the principle of conservation of momentum to solve simple problems, including elastic and inelastic interactions between objects in both one and two dimensions (knowledge of the concept of coefficient of restitution is not required)
    3. recall that, for an elastic collision, total kinetic energy is conserved and the relative speed of approach is equal to the relative speed of separation
    4. understand that, while momentum of a system is always conserved in interactions between objects, some change in kinetic energy may take place

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Conservation of momentum in a collision
    A car crash test
    In a crash, a large force acts over a very short time to change momentum.

    The principle

    For a system with no resultant external force, the total momentum stays constant. This is conservation of momentum 动量守恒. Stated for the two marks the examiner gives: the total momentum of a system of objects remains constant provided no resultant external force acts on the system. Both halves are needed: "total momentum is constant" alone scores one.

    It always holds when there is no outside resultant force — in collisions, explosions 爆炸, and recoil 反冲. In two dimensions, momentum is conserved along each direction on its own.

    Worked example. A $2.0\ \text{kg}$ trolley and a $3.0\ \text{kg}$ trolley are held together against a compressed spring, then released from rest. The $2.0\ \text{kg}$ trolley flies off at $6.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the speed of the other trolley.

    The total momentum stays zero (it started at rest), so

    $$0 = (2.0)(6.0) + (3.0)(-v) \quad\Rightarrow\quad v = \frac{12}{3.0} = 4.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$$

    in the opposite direction.

    Two particles A and B with equal and opposite force arrows F pointing toward each other, illustrating Newton's third law in a two-body system
    Newton's third law in an isolated two-particle system: equal and opposite forces

    Elastic and inelastic collisions

    In every collision, momentum is conserved (if there is no outside resultant force).

    An elastic collision 弹性碰撞 is one where the total kinetic energy is also conserved. A quick test: in an elastic collision, the relative speed 相对速率 of approach equals the relative speed of separation.

    In an inelastic collision 非弹性碰撞, momentum is conserved but kinetic energy goes down — some becomes thermal, sound, or deformation 形变 energy. If the two objects stick together, the collision is perfectly inelastic.

    Solving collision problems (one dimension)

    Two particles A and B shown before and after a head-on collision: before, A moves right with u1 and B moves left with u2; after, A moves left with v1 and B moves right with v2
    Head-on collision: velocities before and after

    For two objects with masses $m_{1}, m_{2}$ and starting velocities $u_{1}, u_{2}$ that hit head-on 正面, write

    $$m_{1} u_{1} + m_{2} u_{2} = m_{1} v_{1} + m_{2} v_{2}.$$

    Use signed velocities (positive in one chosen direction). If the collision is elastic, add the relative-speed equation

    $$u_{1} - u_{2} = -(v_{1} - v_{2}),$$

    or, the same thing, $\tfrac{1}{2} m_{1} u_{1}^{2} + \tfrac{1}{2} m_{2} u_{2}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2} m_{1} v_{1}^{2} + \tfrac{1}{2} m_{2} v_{2}^{2}$. That gives two equations for two unknowns.

    Worked example. A $1500\ \text{kg}$ car moving at $12\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ runs into a stationary $1000\ \text{kg}$ car and they lock together. Find their common velocity just after the collision.

    Momentum is conserved (the cars stick, so $v_{1} = v_{2} = v$):

    $$1500 \times 12 + 1000 \times 0 = (1500 + 1000)\,v \quad\Rightarrow\quad v = \frac{18\,000}{2500} = 7.2\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    Questions often go on to ask what fraction of the kinetic energy is transferred to other forms. Before: $E_{\text{k}} = \tfrac{1}{2} \times 1500 \times 12^{2} = 1.08 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J}$. After: $\tfrac{1}{2} \times 2500 \times 7.2^{2} = 6.48 \times 10^{4}\ \text{J}$. So $4.3 \times 10^{4}\ \text{J}$, which is $40\%$ of the original kinetic energy, becomes thermal energy, sound and deformation of the cars. Momentum is conserved; kinetic energy is not.

    Worked example. A stationary nucleus of mass $222\,u$ decays by emitting an alpha particle α粒子 of mass $4\,u$ at $1.6 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the speed of the remaining nucleus.

    Before the decay the total momentum is zero, so afterwards the two momenta are equal and opposite: $218\,u \times v = 4\,u \times 1.6 \times 10^{7}$, giving $v = 2.9 \times 10^{5}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ in the opposite direction to the alpha particle. The unit $u$ cancels, so its value is never needed. In a decay the momentum, the charge (proton number), the nucleon number and the total mass–energy are all conserved (topic 11).

    A useful result for a head-on elastic collision of mass $m$ with a stationary 静止 mass $M$:

    $$v_{m} = \frac{m - M}{m + M} u, \qquad v_{M} = \frac{2m}{m + M} u.$$

    Collisions in two dimensions

    If the objects move in two dimensions, split the velocities into perpendicular 垂直 components 分量 and apply conservation of momentum along each direction on its own. For a collision where the objects hit at an angle, choose one axis along the first object's motion and one across it. The total momentum is conserved along each axis.

    Worked example. On a frictionless surface, ball A has momentum $4.0\ \text{N s}$ due east and ball B has momentum $3.0\ \text{N s}$ due north. They collide and stick together. Find the momentum of the combined object.

    Momentum is conserved along each axis: $4.0\ \text{N s}$ east and $3.0\ \text{N s}$ north after the collision, exactly as before. The total momentum is the vector sum, $\sqrt{4.0^{2} + 3.0^{2}} = 5.0\ \text{N s}$ at $\tan^{-1}(3.0 / 4.0) = 37°$ north of east; the combined object moves that way at $5.0\ \text{N s}$ divided by the total mass. A multiple-choice diagram of two momentum arrows is asking exactly this: add the arrows tip to tail.

    A glancing collision: an incoming particle of mass m moving along the x-axis strikes a stationary particle; the two move off at angles phi and beta above and below the x-axis with velocities v1 and v2
    A glancing collision resolved along two perpendicular axes

    Rocket / pushing out mass

    A rocket pushes out gas at velocity $u$ (relative to itself) at a mass-flow rate 质量流率 $\dot m$ (kg per second). It feels a thrust

    $$F = \dot m \cdot u,$$

    which comes from $F = \Delta p / \Delta t$. The momentum given to the gas each second equals the thrust on the rocket (Newton's third law: the rocket pushes the gas one way, the gas pushes the rocket the other way). An engine ejecting $90\ \text{kg}$ of gas per second at $190\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ produces a thrust of $90 \times 190 = 1.7 \times 10^{4}\ \text{N}$.

    Worked example. A rocket of weight $W$ leaves the ground with an initial acceleration $a$. What thrust does its engine produce?

    Take upwards as positive. The resultant force is thrust minus weight, so $T - W = ma$. With $m = W / g$, $T = W + Wa / g = W(1 + a / g)$. A rocket of weight $2.0 \times 10^{6}\ \text{N}$ accelerating at $4.0\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ needs a thrust of $2.0 \times 10^{6} \times (1 + 4.0 / 9.81) = 2.8 \times 10^{6}\ \text{N}$. The thrust must exceed the weight before the rocket moves at all.

    Explore

    A collision

    Set the masses and speeds, then collide them. Total momentum is conserved — the total before equals the total after.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    conservation of momentum 动量守恒 dòng liàng shǒu héng
    explosion 爆炸 bào zhà
    recoil 反冲 fǎn chōng
    inelastic collision 非弹性碰撞 fēi tán xìng pèng zhuàng
    elastic collision 弹性碰撞 tán xìng pèng zhuàng
    relative speed 相对速率 xiāng duì sù lǜ
    deformation 形变 xíng biàn
    head-on 正面 zhèng miàn
    stationary 静止 jìng zhǐ
    alpha particle α粒子 α lì zi
    mass-flow rate 质量流率 zhì liàng liú lǜ
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    3.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    mass the property of an object that resists a change in its motion
    linear momentum the product of an object's mass and its velocity
    force the rate of change of momentum
    Newton's first law an object remains at rest or moves at constant velocity unless acted on by a resultant force
    Newton's second law the resultant force on an object is proportional to the rate of change of its momentum, and acts in the direction of the change
    Newton's third law when two bodies interact, the force on one is equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to the force on the other
    weight the force on an object due to a gravitational field; equal to the product of its mass and the acceleration of free fall
    principle of conservation of momentum the total momentum of a system of objects remains constant provided no resultant external force acts on the system
    elastic collision a collision in which total kinetic energy is conserved (and the relative speed of approach equals the relative speed of separation)
    inelastic collision a collision in which momentum is conserved but some kinetic energy is transferred to other forms
    terminal velocity the constant velocity reached when the resistive force on a moving object equals the force driving it, so the resultant force is zero
    3.3

    Exam tips

    • Newton's second law is $F = \Delta p / \Delta t$ (rate of change of momentum); $F = ma$ is the special case for constant mass.
    • Identify third-law pairs correctly: the same type of force, acting on two different bodies — not the balanced forces on one body.
    • Momentum is conserved in every collision; kinetic energy is conserved only in an elastic collision.
    • For terminal velocity, explain that drag rises with speed until drag $=$ weight, so the acceleration becomes zero.

    Common mistakes

    • Writing "the forces are balanced" or "the forces cancel out". Say "the resultant force on the object is zero".
    • Adding both speeds in a head-on collision because momentum is "total". Choose a positive direction, give the opposing velocity a minus sign, then add.
    • Calculating kinetic energy from a component of the velocity. Kinetic energy uses the full speed of each body.
    • Calling the weight and the normal contact force on one object a third-law pair. A pair acts on two different objects and is one type of force.
    • Stating conservation of momentum without the condition. It holds only when no resultant external force acts on the system.
  • 4

    Forces, density and pressure

    4.1

    Turning effects of forces

    Syllabus
    1. understand that the weight of an object may be taken as acting at a single point known as its centre of gravity
    2. define and apply the moment of a force
    3. understand that a couple is a pair of forces that acts to produce rotation only
    4. define and apply the torque of a couple

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The principle of moments

    Centre of gravity

    The weight 重力 of a large object can be treated as acting at one single point, called the centre of gravity 重心 (the same as the centre of mass 质心 in a uniform gravitational field). For a uniform, regular shape — a rectangle, a sphere, a uniform rod — the centre of gravity is at the middle.

    When you draw a free-body diagram 受力图, always put the weight arrow at the centre of gravity.

    For an irregular shape, find the centre of gravity by experiment. Hang the object freely from a pin: in equilibrium it settles with its centre of gravity vertically below the pin, because only then does the weight have no moment about the pin. A plumb line 铅垂线 hung from the same pin marks that vertical. Hang the object from a second point and draw the second line; the centre of gravity is where the two lines cross. The same fact answers the exam's "explain why the sheet hangs like this": its centre of gravity is directly below the support, so the weight's line of action passes through the pivot and there is no resultant torque.

    An irregular sheet hanging from a pin, with a plumb line from the pin drawn across it; a second pin and its dashed line cross the first at the centre of gravity, marked with a cross
    Finding a centre of gravity: hung freely, an object settles with its centre of gravity vertically below the pin, so two plumb lines from two pins cross at it

    For a non-uniform 非均匀 bar, the centre of gravity is not at the middle. Find it by balancing the bar on a pivot, or by taking moments: if the bar's weight $W$ balances a known weight, the distance of its centre of gravity from the pivot is the one moment that makes the two sides equal.

    Moment of a force

    The moment 力矩 of a force about a point is

    $$M = F \cdot d,$$

    where $F$ is the size of the force and $d$ is the perpendicular distance 垂直距离 from the point to the line of action 作用线 of the force. Unit: $\text{N m}$.

    If the force acts at angle $\theta$ to a lever arm 力臂 of length $r$ from the pivot 支点, then $d = r\sin\theta$, so $M = F r\sin\theta$. Only the part of the force perpendicular 垂直 to the lever arm makes it turn.

    Worked example. A force of $50\ \text{N}$ is applied to the end of a spanner $0.40\ \text{m}$ long, at $30°$ to the spanner. Find the moment of the force about the nut.

    $$M = F r\sin\theta = 50 \times 0.40 \times \sin 30° = 50 \times 0.40 \times 0.50 = 10\ \text{N m}.$$
    A pivot with a force F acting at the end of a lever arm of length r at angle theta; the perpendicular distance d from the pivot to the force's line of action is shown as a dashed horizontal line
    The moment depends on the perpendicular distance $d$ from the pivot to the line of action of the force

    A moment is either clockwise 顺时针 or anticlockwise 逆时针 about the chosen point.

    Couple and torque

    A couple 力偶 is a pair of forces that are:

    • equal in size,
    • opposite in direction,
    • with their lines of action a perpendicular distance apart.

    A couple makes the body turn only — its resultant force is zero, so it gives no straight-line acceleration.

    The torque 力偶矩 of a couple is the turning effect it makes:

    $$\tau = F \cdot d,$$

    where $F$ is the size of one force and $d$ is the perpendicular distance between the two lines of action. Unit: $\text{N m}$. The torque is the same about any point — a special property of couples.

    A disc with two equal and opposite forces F applied at opposite ends, separated by the diameter 2r, with a curved arrow showing the torque turning the disc
    A couple: two equal and opposite forces, a distance apart, producing a torque

    A common multiple-choice trap: two equal forces in the same direction are not a couple (they have a resultant force and cause translation 平动). A couple needs equal size and opposite direction.

    Watch the distance in the formula. For a couple of two forces $F$ each acting a distance $d$ from a central pivot, on opposite sides, the perpendicular distance between the two lines of action is $2d$, so the torque is $F \times 2d = 2Fd$. Taking moments about the pivot gives the same answer, $Fd + Fd$. The two-mark definition wants both parts: the product of one of the forces and the perpendicular distance between the lines of action of the forces.

    Explore

    Balance the see-saw

    Put a weight on each side and slide it in or out. A small weight far from the pivot can balance a big weight close in — the beam is level when force × distance matches on both sides.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    force
    moment 力矩 lì jǔ
    centre of gravity 重心 zhòng xīn
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    centre of mass 质心 zhì xīn
    free-body diagram 受力图 shòu lì tú
    plumb line 铅垂线 qiān chuí xiàn
    line of action 作用线 zuò yòng xiàn
    pivot 支点 zhī diǎn
    torque 力偶矩 lì ǒu jǔ
    non-uniform 非均匀 fēi jūn yún
    perpendicular distance 垂直距离 chuí zhí jù lí
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    lever arm 力臂 lì bì
    clockwise 顺时针 shùn shí zhēn
    anticlockwise 逆时针 nì shí zhēn
    couple 力偶 lì ǒu
    translation 平动 píng dòng
    Exercise sheet
    4.2

    Equilibrium of forces

    Syllabus
    1. state and apply the principle of moments
    2. understand that, when there is no resultant force and no resultant torque, a system is in equilibrium
    3. use a vector triangle to represent coplanar forces in equilibrium

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Conditions for equilibrium

    A body is in equilibrium 平衡 when:

    1. the resultant force 合力 is zero (no straight-line acceleration), AND
    2. the resultant moment about any point is zero (no angular acceleration 角加速度).

    Both must hold. A body with no resultant force can still be turning; a body with no resultant moment can still be moving in a straight line.

    The classic multiple-choice case: four forces, two equal pairs pointing in opposite directions but not along the same lines. The resultant force is zero, so the centre of mass does not accelerate, but the pairs form couples with a resultant torque, so the object spins faster and faster while its centre of mass moves at constant velocity. Only when both conditions hold is the body in equilibrium.

    Principle of moments

    For a body that is not turning, the total clockwise moment about any point equals the total anticlockwise moment about the same point. This is the principle of moments 力矩原理.

    To solve a balance problem:

    1. Choose a pivot — usually where an unknown force acts, so that force drops out (its distance is zero).
    2. List every force and its perpendicular distance from the pivot.
    3. Set $\sum M_{\text{clockwise}} = \sum M_{\text{anticlockwise}}$.
    4. Use $\sum F = 0$ if you need a second equation.

    A ruler balanced on a pivot with masses on each side is solved this way. For a heavy uniform rod, remember to include its weight acting at its centre of gravity. Stated for the marks: for a body in equilibrium, the sum of the clockwise moments about any point equals the sum of the anticlockwise moments about that same point.

    Worked example. A uniform beam of length $4.0\ \text{m}$ is pivoted at its centre. A $40\ \text{N}$ weight hangs $1.5\ \text{m}$ from the pivot on one side. How far from the pivot, on the other side, must a $30\ \text{N}$ weight hang to balance the beam?

    The beam's own weight acts at the centre (the pivot), so it has no moment. Setting clockwise $=$ anticlockwise moments:

    $$40 \times 1.5 = 30 \times d \quad\Rightarrow\quad d = \frac{60}{30} = 2.0\ \text{m}.$$
    A horizontal rule balanced on a central pivot with weights hanging at different distances; weights on the left give anticlockwise moments and weights on the right give clockwise moments
    Weights on a rule balanced at a pivot — used to test the principle of moments
    Tower cranes on a city building site, each with its long jib and a counterweight on the short arm behind the mast
    A tower crane is a moments problem: the counterweight's moment about the mast balances the moment of the load

    Worked example. A uniform rod of length $L$ and weight $W = 28\ \text{N}$ is hinged to a wall at one end and held horizontal by a wire from its other end. The wire makes $40°$ with the rod. Find the tension $T$ in the wire.

    A uniform rod hinged to a wall at its left end, held horizontal by a wire from its right end up to the wall at angle theta to the rod. The weight W acts at the centre of the rod, the tension T acts along the wire, and an unknown force acts at the hinge; the distances L/2 and L/2 are marked
    A hinged rod held by a wire: taking moments about the hinge removes the unknown hinge force

    Take moments about the hinge, so the unknown hinge force drops out. The weight acts at the centre, a distance $L/2$ from the hinge: its moment is $W \times L/2$, clockwise. The tension acts at the end, but not at right angles to the rod, so its moment is $T\sin 40° \times L$, anticlockwise (only the component of $T$ perpendicular to the rod turns it). Equate them:

    $$T \sin 40° \times L = W \times \frac{L}{2} \quad\Rightarrow\quad T = \frac{28}{2 \sin 40°} = 22\ \text{N}.$$

    The length $L$ cancels, which is why the question need not give it. If a load hangs from the rod as well, add its moment on the clockwise side. This is the shape of almost every moments question: choose the pivot where the unknown force acts, use the perpendicular component of any angled force, and let unknown lengths cancel.

    Worked example. A uniform beam of weight $200\ \text{N}$ and length $9.0\ \text{m}$ rests on two supports, X at $1.0\ \text{m}$ from the left end and Y at $6.5\ \text{m}$. A person of weight $700\ \text{N}$ stands $1.7\ \text{m}$ from Y, beyond it. Find the force from each support.

    A horizontal beam resting on two triangular supports X and Y with upward support forces R_X and R_Y drawn at them. The beam's weight acts down at its centre and a person's weight acts down near the right end; a distance bar below shows 3.5 metres from X to the centre, 2.0 metres from the centre to Y and 1.7 metres from Y to the person
    A beam on two supports: moments about one support give the other support's force; the sum of forces then gives the first

    Two unknown forces, $R_{\text{X}}$ and $R_{\text{Y}}$, so take moments about X to remove $R_{\text{X}}$. The beam's weight acts at its centre, $3.5\ \text{m}$ from X; Y is $5.5\ \text{m}$ from X; the person is $7.2\ \text{m}$ from X:

    $$R_{\text{Y}} \times 5.5 = 200 \times 3.5 + 700 \times 7.2 \quad\Rightarrow\quad R_{\text{Y}} = \frac{700 + 5040}{5.5} = 1040\ \text{N}.$$

    Then the resultant force is zero: $R_{\text{X}} + R_{\text{Y}} = 200 + 700$, so $R_{\text{X}} = 900 - 1040 = -140\ \text{N}$. A negative answer means the beam would lift off X: with the person that far past Y, X must hold the beam down, not up. Questions often ask where a person can stand before the beam tips; that is the position at which $R_{\text{X}}$ becomes zero.

    Vector triangle

    Three forces in the same plane that are in equilibrium can be drawn as a closed vector triangle 矢量三角形 — drawn tip-to-tail, the three arrows come back to the start. This is a drawing method instead of splitting into components 分量.

    Three forces in equilibrium (a weight W and two tensions) drawn tip to tail form a closed triangle that returns to the start
    Three forces in equilibrium form a closed vector triangle

    Use the sine rule 正弦定理 or the cosine rule 余弦定理 on the triangle to find unknown sizes or directions, or draw the triangle to scale on graph paper.

    You can also split each force into horizontal 水平 and vertical 竖直 components and set $\sum F_{x} = 0$ and $\sum F_{y} = 0$.

    To draw the triangle for the marks: draw the weight first (vertical, to scale), then add the other two forces tip to tail in their real directions, so the third arrow closes the triangle; label every side with its force and mark the angles. For a block resting on a slope the three forces are the weight (vertical), the normal contact force (perpendicular to the slope) and friction (along the slope), so the triangle is right-angled with the weight as the hypotenuse. For a picture hanging from a string over a pin, the two equal tensions make an isosceles triangle with the weight. The test of any answer is that the triangle closes; if it does not, the object is not in equilibrium.

    Worked example. A pulley of negligible weight is held by a spring. A single cable passes under the pulley, and each side of the cable makes $30°$ with the vertical. The tension in the cable is $T = 60\ \text{N}$. Find the force from the spring and the extension of the spring, given its spring constant is $2000\ \text{N m}^{-1}$.

    A pulley hanging from a spring fixed to a ceiling. A cable passes under the pulley and its two sides rise at angle theta to the vertical. Three force arrows act on the pulley: two tensions T along the cable and the spring force upwards
    A pulley held by a spring: the two tensions in the one cable are equal, and the spring force balances their vertical components

    Because it is one continuous cable, the tension is the same on both sides. The two tensions pull down and outwards; their horizontal components cancel and their vertical components add, so the spring must pull up with $F = 2T\cos 30° = 2 \times 60 \times 0.866 = 104\ \text{N}$. From Hooke's law (topic 6), $x = F / k = 104 / 2000 = 0.052\ \text{m}$. If the angle to the vertical grows, $\cos\theta$ falls, so the spring force and extension fall: the cable is pulling more sideways and less upwards.

    Explore

    Forces in equilibrium

    When forces are balanced the resultant is zero — the vectors form a closed loop. Drag the arrows to keep them cancelling.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    principle of moments 力矩原理 lì jǔ yuán lǐ
    equilibrium 平衡 píng héng
    vertical 竖直 shù zhí
    horizontal 水平 shuǐ píng
    resultant force 合力 hé lì
    angular acceleration 角加速度 jiǎo jiā sù dù
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    vector triangle 矢量三角形 shǐ liàng sān jiǎo xíng
    closed vector triangle 矢量三角形 shǐ liàng sān jiǎo xíng
    sine rule 正弦定理 zhèng xián dìng lǐ
    cosine rule 余弦定理 yú xián dìng lǐ
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    4.3

    Density

    Syllabus
    1. define and use density
    2. define and use pressure
    3. derive, from the definitions of pressure and density, the equation for hydrostatic pressure $\Delta p = \rho g \Delta h$
    4. use the equation $\Delta p = \rho g \Delta h$
    5. understand that the upthrust acting on an object in a fluid is due to a difference in hydrostatic pressure
    6. calculate the upthrust acting on an object in a fluid using the equation $F = \rho g V$ (Archimedes' principle)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A large iceberg floating in the sea
    An iceberg floats with most of its volume hidden: ice is slightly less dense than water.

    Density 密度 is the mass per unit volume:

    $$\rho = \frac{m}{V}.$$

    Unit: $\text{kg m}^{-3}$ (or $\text{g cm}^{-3}$; $1\ \text{g cm}^{-3} = 1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$). Density is a scalar 标量.

    Some useful densities to know:

    • water: $1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$
    • air at room conditions: $\sim 1.2\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$
    • iron / steel: $\sim 7800\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$

    Measuring density is a practical question in disguise. For a cuboid, measure the mass on a balance and the three side lengths with a rule or calipers, then $\rho = m / (xyz)$. Because density is a product and quotient, the percentage uncertainty in $\rho$ is the sum of the percentage uncertainties in $m$, $x$, $y$ and $z$ (topic 1). A zero error on the balance, or a rule whose end is worn, is a systematic error; repeating the readings does not remove it, but subtracting the zero reading does.

    Worked example. A block has mass $(120 \pm 1)\ \text{g}$ and sides $(4.0 \pm 0.1)\ \text{cm}$, $(3.0 \pm 0.1)\ \text{cm}$ and $(2.0 \pm 0.1)\ \text{cm}$. Find its density and the percentage uncertainty.

    $\rho = 120 / (4.0 \times 3.0 \times 2.0) = 5.0\ \text{g cm}^{-3} = 5000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$. The percentage uncertainties are $0.8\%$, $2.5\%$, $3.3\%$ and $5.0\%$, so the density is uncertain by $12\%$, about $\pm 600\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$. The shortest side contributes most, which is why a question asks which measurement to improve first.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    density 密度 mì dù
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    4.3

    Pressure

    Pressure 压强 is the force per unit area, where the force acts at right angles to the surface:

    $$p = \frac{F}{A}.$$

    Unit: $\text{Pa} = \text{N m}^{-2}$. Pressure is a scalar.

    The force is the one pressing at right angles to the surface, and the area is the area of contact. A tree trunk of weight $9.0\ \text{kN}$ standing on a post of diameter $0.28\ \text{m}$ presses with $p = F / A = 9000 / (\pi \times 0.14^{2}) = 1.5 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$; the same weight on a wider post gives a smaller pressure. Convert diameters to radii, and centimetres to metres, before squaring.

    A precision aneroid barometer with a brass case and a white dial, its needle pointing to a scale marked in hectopascals (hPa) and inches of mercury (inHg)
    A precision aneroid barometer measures atmospheric pressure

    Hydrostatic pressure

    Take a column of fluid 流体 with density $\rho$, cross-sectional area 横截面积 $A$ and height $\Delta h$. Its weight is

    $$W = m g = (\rho \cdot A \cdot \Delta h) \cdot g.$$

    This weight presses down on the area $A$ at the bottom, so the extra pressure at the bottom compared with the top is

    $$\Delta p = \frac{W}{A} = \rho g \Delta h.$$

    This is the hydrostatic pressure 流体静压强 equation. It depends only on the density of the fluid and the depth 深度 — the shape of the container does not matter.

    Worked example. Find the extra pressure due to the water at the bottom of a swimming pool $2.5\ \text{m}$ deep. (Water density $1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$.)

    $$\Delta p = \rho g \Delta h = 1000 \times 9.81 \times 2.5 \approx 2.5 \times 10^{4}\ \text{Pa}.$$
    A rectangular column of liquid of cross-sectional area A inside a container, with depths h1 to the top and h2 to the bottom marked; the column's weight W acts down and gives an extra pressure on its base
    A column of liquid of area $A$: its weight sets the extra pressure at the depth below

    For a submarine at depth $h$ below the surface, the pressure from the water is $\rho_{\text{seawater}}\, g\, h$. For the total pressure, add the atmospheric pressure 大气压强 at the surface (about $1.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$).

    Upthrust and Archimedes' principle

    When an object is submerged 浸没 in a fluid, the pressure at the bottom of the object is greater than the pressure at the top (by $\rho g \Delta h$, where $\Delta h$ is the object's height). This difference gives a net upward force called the upthrust 浮力.

    A block submerged in liquid showing a smaller downward force F_down on its top face and a larger upward force F_up on its bottom face, giving a net upthrust
    Upthrust arises because the pressure on the bottom of the object is greater than on the top

    For an object of volume $V$ (the volume of fluid displaced 排开), the upthrust is

    $$F_{\text{upthrust}} = \rho_{\text{fluid}}\, g\, V.$$

    This is Archimedes' principle 阿基米德原理: the upthrust on a body in a fluid equals the weight of the fluid it pushes aside.

    Worked example. A metal block of volume $2.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$ is fully submerged in water. Find the upthrust on it. (Water density $1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$.)

    $$F_{\text{upthrust}} = \rho_{\text{fluid}}\, g\, V = 1000 \times 9.81 \times 2.0 \times 10^{-3} \approx 20\ \text{N}.$$

    For a fully submerged object, $V$ is its full volume. For a floating 漂浮 object, $V$ is only the volume below the surface — the object floats when the upthrust on the part below the surface equals its weight.

    Whether an object floats at all depends on densities: for a fully submerged object the ratio of upthrust to weight is $\rho_{\text{fluid}} V g / \rho_{\text{object}} V g = \rho_{\text{fluid}} / \rho_{\text{object}}$, so it floats if it is less dense than the fluid and sinks if it is denser. Halving the object's density doubles that ratio; changing its volume or the depth changes nothing.

    Worked example. A cylinder of mass $11\ \text{kg}$ and diameter $0.78\ \text{m}$ floats upright in water of density $990\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$. Find the depth $y$ of its base below the surface.

    Floating means upthrust $=$ weight. The submerged volume is the base area times the depth, $A y$, with $A = \pi \times 0.39^{2} = 0.478\ \text{m}^{2}$:

    $$\rho g A y = m g \quad\Rightarrow\quad y = \frac{m}{\rho A} = \frac{11}{990 \times 0.478} = 0.023\ \text{m}.$$

    Each extra newton of load on the cylinder needs an extra $1 / (\rho g A)$ of depth, so the depth rises in a straight line with the added weight, wherever on the cylinder it is placed.

    A block floats partly below the water line; its weight acts down and the upthrust on the submerged part acts up, and it floats when the upthrust equals the weight
    A floating object sinks until the upthrust on the submerged part equals its weight

    Force balance with upthrust

    A block held under water by a string tied to the bottom of the container is in equilibrium under three vertical forces: weight (down), tension 张力 (down), upthrust (up). Set $F_{\text{upthrust}} = W + T$ to find the tension.

    A submerged block hanging from a newton meter 弹簧测力计 reads less than its weight in air, because of the upthrust: reading $= W - F_{\text{upthrust}}$.

    Worked example. A cylinder of weight $25.0\ \text{N}$ hangs from a newton meter fully submerged in water, and the meter reads $10.0\ \text{N}$. Find the volume of the cylinder.

    The upthrust is the missing $15.0\ \text{N}$, and upthrust $= \rho g V$, so $V = 15.0 / (1000 \times 9.81) = 1.53 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$. The same method finds the density of the cylinder: $25.0 / (9.81 \times 1.53 \times 10^{-3}) = 1670\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$.

    The upthrust depends on the fluid density and the displaced volume, not on the object's material or depth (for an incompressible 不可压缩 fluid). On a planet with smaller $g$, the upthrust is smaller in the same ratio as the weight, so a floating object still floats with the same fraction below the surface.

    Explore

    Pressure with depth

    p = ρg·h

    Pressure is proportional to depth — the gradient is ρg.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    tension 张力 zhāng lì
    floating 漂浮 piāo fú
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    atmospheric pressure 大气压强 dà qì yā qiáng
    hydrostatic pressure 流体静压强 liú tǐ jìng yā qiáng
    fluid 流体 liú tǐ
    cross-sectional area 横截面积 héng jié miàn jī
    depth 深度 shēn dù
    upthrust 浮力 fú lì
    Archimedes' principle 阿基米德原理 ā jī mǐ dé yuán lǐ
    submerged 浸没 jìn mò
    displaced 排开 pái kāi
    newton meter 弹簧测力计 tán huáng cè lì jì
    incompressible 不可压缩 bù kě yā suō
    4.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    centre of gravity the point at which the whole weight of an object may be considered to act
    moment of a force the product of the force and the perpendicular distance from the point to the line of action of the force
    couple a pair of equal and opposite forces whose lines of action do not coincide, which produces rotation only
    torque of a couple the product of one of the forces and the perpendicular distance between the lines of action of the forces
    principle of moments for a body in equilibrium, the sum of the clockwise moments about any point equals the sum of the anticlockwise moments about that point
    equilibrium the state of a body on which the resultant force and the resultant torque are both zero
    density mass per unit volume
    pressure force per unit area, where the force acts at right angles to the surface
    upthrust the upward force on a body in a fluid caused by the pressure being greater on its lower surface than on its upper surface
    Archimedes' principle the upthrust on a body in a fluid is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by the body
    4.3

    Exam tips

    • Take moments about a chosen pivot; for equilibrium, total clockwise $=$ total anticlockwise moments and the resultant force is zero.
    • A body in equilibrium under three forces gives a closed triangle of forces.
    • Fluid pressure $= \rho g h$; upthrust $=$ weight of fluid displaced (Archimedes).
    • Distinguish mass, weight and density, and give the base unit each time.

    Common mistakes

    • Resolving with $\cos\theta$ where the geometry needs $\sin\theta$. Draw the triangle and check which side the angle is next to before choosing.
    • Substituting the weight of the object where the question is about the upthrust on it. Upthrust is the weight of the fluid displaced, $\rho_{\text{fluid}} V g$.
    • Leaving out the weight of a uniform beam. It acts at the centre, and it has a moment about any pivot that is not at the centre.
    • Using the distance along the rod for an angled force. The moment needs the perpendicular distance, or the perpendicular component of the force.
    • Taking the torque of a couple as $Fd$ with $d$ measured from the pivot. The distance is between the two lines of action, so a symmetric couple gives $2Fd$.
  • 5

    Work, energy and power

    5.1

    Work, energy and power

    Syllabus
    1. understand the concept of work, and recall and use $\text{work done} = \text{force} \times \text{displacement in the direction of the force}$
    2. recall and apply the principle of conservation of energy
    3. recall and understand that the efficiency of a system is the ratio of useful energy output from the system to the total energy input
    4. use the concept of efficiency to solve problems
    5. define power as work done per unit time
    6. solve problems using $P = W/t$
    7. derive $P = Fv$ and use it to solve problems

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A row of wind turbines
    Wind turbines transfer the kinetic energy of the wind into electrical energy.

    Work done by a force

    Work is done when a force moves its point of contact along the line of the force. For the one-mark definition write: work done is the product of the force and the distance moved in the direction of the force. The work done by a constant force $F$ that causes a displacement 位移 $s$ is

    $$W = F \cdot s \cdot \cos\theta,$$

    where $\theta$ is the angle between the force and the displacement. Only the component 分量 of the force along the displacement does work.

    A block on a surface pulled by a force F at angle theta to the horizontal displacement s; F is split into the component F cos theta along s and the perpendicular component F sin theta, and only F cos theta does work
    Only the component of the force along the displacement ($F\cos\theta$) does work

    Worked example. A child pulls a sledge $5.0\ \text{m}$ across the snow with a rope, using a force of $20\ \text{N}$ at $60°$ to the ground. Find the work done by the rope.

    $$W = Fs\cos\theta = 20 \times 5.0 \times \cos 60° = 20 \times 5.0 \times 0.50 = 50\ \text{J}.$$

    Unit: $\text{J} = \text{N m}$. Work is a scalar 标量.

    Special cases:

    • force in the same direction as the motion ($\theta = 0$): $W = Fs$, positive work, energy 能量 given to the object.
    • force at right angles to the motion ($\theta = 90°$): $W = 0$. The normal contact force 支持力 on a car on a flat road does no work.
    • force opposite to the motion ($\theta = 180°$): $W = -Fs$, negative work, energy taken from the object (for example friction 摩擦力).
    Two diagrams: top, the force F points along the displacement s, giving positive work W = +Fs and energy to the object; bottom, the force F points opposite to the displacement s, giving negative work W = -Fs and taking energy from the object
    Positive work ($W = +Fs$): force along the motion (top). Negative work ($W = -Fs$): force opposite to the motion, e.g. friction (bottom)

    For an object moving up a slope at angle $\alpha$ to the horizontal 水平, the work done against gravity in rising a height $h$ is $mgh$, while the work done by a horizontal push over the slope length $L$ uses $\cos\alpha$.

    Two multiple-choice tests of the definition: no work is done on an object that slides at constant velocity along a frictionless surface (no force along the motion), or on one that is simply held still (no distance moved); work is done when a force lifts it. And when a box is pushed at constant velocity across a rough floor, the work done by the push is $F \times d$ for the whole distance, however the path is split into stages.

    Worked example. A block of mass $4.9\ \text{kg}$ is pushed at constant velocity up a rough slope of length $8.0\ \text{m}$ that rises $1.5\ \text{m}$, by a force of $12\ \text{N}$ acting along the slope. Find the work done against friction.

    A box on a slope inclined at angle theta, pushed up the slope at constant velocity by a force P along the slope, with friction f acting down the slope and the weight acting vertically; the slope length L and the vertical rise h are marked
    A box pushed up a rough slope at constant velocity: the work done by the push pays for the gain in GPE, which needs only the vertical rise $h$, and for the work against friction along the whole length $L$

    Constant velocity means no change in kinetic energy, so the work done by the push is shared between the gain in gravitational potential energy and the work done against friction. Work by the push: $12 \times 8.0 = 96\ \text{J}$. Gain in GPE, using the vertical rise: $4.9 \times 9.81 \times 1.5 = 72\ \text{J}$. So the work done against friction is $96 - 72 = 24\ \text{J}$, and the friction force is $24 / 8.0 = 3.0\ \text{N}$. Using the slope length in $mgh$ is the commonest error on this question.

    Conservation of energy

    Energy is never made or destroyed — it only changes from one form to another, or moves from one object to another. In a closed system 封闭系统, the total energy stays constant. This is conservation of energy 能量守恒, stated for the marks as: energy cannot be created or destroyed; it can only be transferred from one form to another (so the total energy of a closed system is constant).

    When you write an energy equation, list every form the energy starts as and ends as. Common forms in this syllabus: kinetic, gravitational potential, elastic potential energy 弹性势能, electrical 电能, thermal, sound, chemical energy 化学能.

    A ball rolling down a frictionless 无摩擦 ramp 斜坡 turns gravitational potential energy 重力势能 into kinetic energy 动能: $mgh = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$, so $v = \sqrt{2gh}$. With friction, some of this energy becomes thermal energy 热能 of the ramp and the air.

    Three energy bars for a ball descending a frictionless ramp: at the top all the energy is GPE, at the middle it is half GPE and half KE, at the bottom it is all KE — the total height stays the same
    On a frictionless ramp, GPE turns into KE while the total energy stays constant

    Worked example. A ball is released from rest at the top of a smooth ramp $1.2\ \text{m}$ high. Find its speed at the bottom (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    All the gravitational potential energy becomes kinetic energy, so $v = \sqrt{2gh}$ (the mass cancels):

    $$v = \sqrt{2 \times 9.81 \times 1.2} \approx 4.9\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The same idea reads a graph. For a ball falling from height $H$ with air resistance negligible, the GPE falls in a straight line with height ($mgh$), the KE rises in a straight line ($mg(H - h)$), and the two add to the constant $mgH$ at every height.

    A graph of energy against height above the ground for a falling ball: the GPE line rises in proportion to height, the KE line falls in proportion to height, and a dashed total line stays level at mgH
    A falling ball: GPE and KE both change in a straight line with height, and their sum is constant

    The energy chain can pass through a spring. A block that hits a spring with kinetic energy $110\ \text{J}$ while sliding a little downhill, so that its GPE falls by a further $20\ \text{J}$ before the spring stops it, stores $110 + 20 = 130\ \text{J}$ of elastic potential energy at the greatest compression, if nothing is lost to friction. The spring's force–compression graph then gives the compression: the energy stored is the area under the line, $\tfrac{1}{2} F_{0} x_{0}$ for a spring that obeys Hooke's law (topic 6), so a maximum force of $2600\ \text{N}$ means $x_{0} = 2 \times 130 / 2600 = 0.10\ \text{m}$. At that instant the resultant force on the block is the spring force minus the component of the weight down the slope, and its acceleration follows from $F = ma$ (topic 3).

    A force–compression graph for a spring, a straight line through the origin with gradient k; the area under the line up to the compression x0 is shaded and labelled as one half F0 x0, the elastic potential energy stored
    The energy stored in a spring is the area under its force–compression graph: $\tfrac{1}{2} F_{0} x_{0}$, which equals $\tfrac{1}{2} k x_{0}^{2}$

    Efficiency

    The efficiency 效率 of a system is

    $$\text{efficiency} = \frac{\text{useful energy output}}{\text{total energy input}} \times 100\%.$$

    The same idea with power:

    $$\text{efficiency} = \frac{\text{useful power output}}{\text{total power input}} \times 100\%.$$

    Efficiency is always less than 100% in a real system, because some input energy becomes "useless" forms — usually thermal energy. If a total energy $E$ is supplied and an amount $Q$ is wasted, the useful output is $E - Q$ and the efficiency is $(E - Q) / E$; a motor rated at $1.7\ \text{kW}$ input with efficiency $53\%$ delivers $0.53 \times 1.7 = 0.90\ \text{kW}$ of useful output.

    Of the total energy input, a thick arrow shows the useful output and a thinner arrow the energy wasted as heat; efficiency is the useful output divided by the total input
    Efficiency: only part of the energy input leaves as useful output; the rest is wasted, usually as heat

    For an electric motor lifting a load with efficiency $\eta$ at voltage 电压 $V$ and current 电流 $I$, the useful output power is $\eta V I$. From this you can find a force, a lifting speed, or a tension 张力.

    Worked example. An electric motor lifts a $50\ \text{kg}$ load at a steady $0.40\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ while drawing $250\ \text{W}$ of electrical power. Find its efficiency (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    The useful output power is $P = mgv = 50 \times 9.81 \times 0.40 = 196\ \text{W}$, so

    $$\text{efficiency} = \frac{196}{250} \times 100\% \approx 78\%.$$

    Worked example. A motor raises a block with a force of $240\ \text{N}$ through a vertical distance of $12\ \text{m}$ in $60\ \text{s}$. The input power to the motor is $900\ \text{W}$. Find the useful output power and the efficiency.

    Work done on the block: $W = Fd = 240 \times 12 = 2880\ \text{J}$. Useful output power: $P = W / t = 2880 / 60 = 48\ \text{W}$. Efficiency: $48 / 900 \times 100\% = 5.3\%$. Most of the input goes into thermal energy in the motor and its cable. Turned round, a lift motor of useful output $20\ \text{kW}$ raising $1500\ \text{kg}$ through $20\ \text{m}$ takes $t = mgh / P = 1500 \times 9.81 \times 20 / 20\,000 = 15\ \text{s}$.

    Explore

    Energy flow & efficiency

    The input energy divides into useful work and wasted energy; efficiency = useful ÷ input, and useful + wasted always equals the input.

    Explore

    Work, energy & power

    PE + KE = constant

    Work transfers energy; as it falls, PE becomes KE with the total fixed.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    work gōng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    electrical 电能 diàn néng
    electrical energy 电能 diàn néng
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    horizontal 水平 shuǐ píng
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    normal contact force 支持力 zhī chí lì
    friction 摩擦力 mó cā lì
    frictionless 无摩擦 wú mó cā
    gravitational potential energy 重力势能 zhòng lì shì néng
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    closed system 封闭系统 fēng bì xì tǒng
    elastic potential energy 弹性势能 tán xìng shì néng
    chemical energy 化学能 huà xué néng
    ramp 斜坡 xié pō
    thermal energy 热能 rè néng
    efficiency 效率 xiào lǜ
    voltage 电压 diàn yā
    current 电流 diàn liú
    tension 张力 zhāng lì
    Exercise sheet
    5.1

    Power

    Power 功率 is the rate of doing work, or the rate of transferring energy:

    Power is work per second: the same work done in less time means more power
    The same work done in less time means more power
    $$P = \frac{W}{t} = \frac{\Delta E}{\Delta t}.$$

    Unit: $\text{W} = \text{J s}^{-1}$. Power is a scalar.

    Power, force and velocity

    For an object moving at velocity 速度 $v$ with a force $F$ along the direction of motion, in a short time $\Delta t$ the displacement is $v\,\Delta t$ and the work done is $F v\,\Delta t$. Dividing by $\Delta t$:

    $$P = F v.$$

    This is one of the most useful results in mechanics. A "derive $P = Fv$" answer needs exactly those three lines: $P = W / t$, $W = Fs$ for a force along the motion, and $s / t = v$; then use it to solve problems in which a vehicle or a load moves at constant speed.

    Worked example. A car travels at a steady $25\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ against a total resistive force of $600\ \text{N}$. Find the output power of its engine.

    At constant speed the driving force equals the resistive force, so

    $$P = Fv = 600 \times 25 = 15\,000\ \text{W} = 15\ \text{kW}.$$
    • For a car at constant velocity $v$ on a flat road, the engine power must balance the total resistive force: $P = F_{\text{resist}} \cdot v$. If the drag 阻力 grows with $v^{2}$, doubling the speed roughly quadruples the power needed.
    • For lifting a weight 重力 $mg$ straight up at constant speed $v$, the useful output power is $P = mg \cdot v$.
    • For an aircraft hovering at a fixed height, the lift force equals the weight, and a large power is needed because air must be pushed downwards all the time.
    • A crane raising $600\ \text{kg}$ at a steady $12\ \text{m}$ per minute lifts at $v = 0.20\ \text{m s}^{-1}$, so its useful output power is $mgv = 600 \times 9.81 \times 0.20 = 1.2\ \text{kW}$. Convert the speed to $\text{m s}^{-1}$ first.
    • A sailboat pushed by a constant wind force at constant velocity must also feel an equal resistive force from the water: constant velocity means zero resultant force, so the wind's power $Fv$ is all going into work against the water.
    A hydroelectric dam and power station, with water held high behind the wall
    A hydroelectric station is rated in megawatts: the energy of the stored water, divided by the time it takes to release it
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    drag 阻力 zǔ lì
    5.2

    Gravitational potential energy

    Syllabus
    1. derive, using $W = Fs$, the formula $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg\Delta h$ for gravitational potential energy changes in a uniform gravitational field
    2. recall and use the formula $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg\Delta h$ for gravitational potential energy changes in a uniform gravitational field
    3. derive, using the equations of motion, the formula for kinetic energy $E_{\text{K}} = \frac{1}{2}mv^2$
    4. recall and use $E_{\text{K}} = \frac{1}{2}mv^2$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Energy exchange in a pendulum

    In a uniform gravitational field (close to a planet's surface), the change in gravitational potential energy of mass 质量 $m$ rising or falling through a height $\Delta h$ is

    $$\Delta E_{\text{P}} = m g \Delta h.$$

    Where it comes from

    The work done against gravity to raise a mass $m$ slowly (no change in kinetic energy) through height $\Delta h$ equals the gravitational potential energy gained:

    • the gravitational force on the mass is $mg$ downwards,
    • the force needed to lift it slowly is $mg$ upwards,
    • the work done by this force is $W = F \cdot s = mg \cdot \Delta h$,
    • this work becomes $\Delta E_{\text{P}}$.

    So $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg \Delta h$. To use it you need $m$ and $\Delta h$ (and $g$). You do not need speed or time. The two-mark derivation wants the same four lines, with the condition stated: the block is raised at constant speed, so the lifting force equals the weight $mg$, and the work done by that force over the vertical distance $\Delta h$ is $mg\Delta h$, which is the gain in gravitational potential energy. A $100\ \text{g}$ object falling $10\ \text{m}$ loses $0.100 \times 9.81 \times 10 = 9.8\ \text{J}$, about $10\ \text{J}$; the mass must be in kilograms.

    A steep path and a gentle zig-zag path both rise to the same height h; the gain in gravitational PE is mgh either way, because only the height matters
    Gravitational PE depends only on the height risen, not the path taken
    A roller-coaster train being hauled up the steep lift hill by its chain
    A coaster train hauled up the lift hill: the work done against gravity is stored as gravitational potential energy
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    Exercise sheet
    5.2

    Kinetic energy

    The kinetic energy of an object of mass $m$ moving at speed $v$ is

    $$E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}.$$

    Where it comes from

    Apply a resultant force $F$ to a mass $m$ that starts at rest. It speeds up evenly from $0$ to $v$ over a displacement $s$. From $v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$ with $u = 0$,

    $$s = \frac{v^{2}}{2a}.$$

    The work done on the mass is

    $$W = F \cdot s = m a \cdot \frac{v^{2}}{2a} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}.$$

    All this work becomes kinetic energy, so $E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$. In the exam, state the assumptions as you go: the object starts from rest, the force is constant, so the acceleration is uniform, and $F = ma$ is Newton's second law.

    Because $E_{\text{K}} \propto v^{2}$, quadrupling the speed multiplies the kinetic energy by sixteen: an object with $1500\ \text{J}$ at $10\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ has $24\,000\ \text{J}$ at $40\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. The same square is why a stopping force is found from energy: a ball of mass $1.2\ \text{kg}$ moving at $3.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ that is stopped by a cushion over $0.020\ \text{m}$ loses $\tfrac{1}{2} \times 1.2 \times 3.0^{2} = 5.4\ \text{J}$, so the average force on it is $5.4 / 0.020 = 270\ \text{N}$: the work done by the cushion equals the kinetic energy lost.

    Kinetic energy and momentum

    Combining $p = mv$ and $E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$:

    $$E_{\text{K}} = \frac{p^{2}}{2m}.$$

    This is handy when the momentum 动量 is given but not the velocity. For a momentum change from $p_{1}$ to $p_{2}$ at constant mass, the change in kinetic energy is $(p_{2}^{2} - p_{1}^{2}) / (2m)$.

    A pole vaulter at the moment of take-off, the pole bent almost double beneath them
    A pole vaulter: kinetic energy from the run-up is stored in the bent pole, then given back as height
    Explore

    Kinetic & potential energy

    PE + KE = constant

    Potential energy turns into kinetic energy — the total never changes.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    5.2

    Using energy methods

    A useful plan for problems that mix forces and energy:

    1. Find the start and end states. Write the kinetic and potential energies in each.
    2. List any work done by outside forces (friction, a push). Friction usually takes energy out; a push can add it.
    3. Conservation of energy: $E_{\text{start}} + W_{\text{in}} = E_{\text{end}} + W_{\text{lost as heat etc.}}$.

    Examples:

    • A box pushed at constant velocity up a ramp of length $L$ rising by $h$: $E_{\text{K}}$ does not change, so the work done by the push goes into $\Delta E_{\text{P}}$ plus the work done against friction.
    • A block sliding into a spring 弹簧 with kinetic energy $E_{\text{K}}$ on a frictionless surface: at greatest compression 压缩 $x$, all the kinetic energy has become elastic potential energy $\tfrac{1}{2} k x^{2}$ (where $k$ is the spring constant 劲度系数).
    • A ball dropped from height $h_{1}$ that bounces to height $h_{2}$: the ratio $h_{2}/h_{1}$ is the fraction of mechanical energy kept, $h_{2}/h_{1} = (v_{\text{up}}/v_{\text{down}})^{2}$.
    • A projectile 抛体 thrown to the same height at different angles: the final speed is the same (only the height matters); use components to get its direction.
    • A bungee jumper 蹦极者: from the platform to the point where the cord goes taut, GPE becomes KE; from there the cord stretches and takes energy as elastic potential energy, so the KE reaches its maximum where the cord's pull first equals the weight, then falls to zero at the lowest point, where GPE lost $=$ elastic PE stored (plus any thermal energy).
    A block moving at speed v (kinetic energy one-half m v squared) slides into a spring; at greatest compression x all that energy has become elastic PE one-half k x squared
    A block's kinetic energy becomes elastic potential energy as it compresses the spring
    Explore

    Conservation of energy

    Drop the mass and watch GPE turn into KE. With no friction the total energy stays the same — that's the energy method.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    spring 弹簧 tán huáng
    compression 压缩 yā suō
    spring constant 劲度系数 jìn dù xì shù
    projectile 抛体 pāo tǐ
    bungee jumper 蹦极者 bèng jí zhě
    5.2

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    work done by a force the product of the force and the distance moved in the direction of the force
    principle of conservation of energy energy cannot be created or destroyed, only transferred from one form to another, so the total energy of a closed system is constant
    efficiency the ratio of useful energy (or power) output from a system to the total energy (or power) input, usually as a percentage
    power the work done per unit time, or the rate at which energy is transferred
    gravitational potential energy the energy an object has because of its position in a gravitational field
    kinetic energy the energy an object has because of its motion
    elastic potential energy the energy stored in an object that has been stretched or compressed
    5.2

    Exam tips

    • Work $=$ force $\times$ distance moved in the direction of the force — use $Fs\cos\theta$ when they are at an angle.
    • Use conservation of energy: loss in GPE $=$ gain in KE ($+$ work done against resistance).
    • Power $=$ work $/$ time $= Fv$; efficiency $=$ useful output $\div$ total input.
    • GPE uses the vertical height gained, not the distance along a slope.

    Common mistakes

    • Giving the change in height as the answer to a change-in-energy question. Finish the calculation: $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg\Delta h$.
    • Using the distance along a slope as the height in $mg\Delta h$, or using mass where weight is needed. Use the vertical height gained, and check whether the quantity wanted is $m$ in kg or $W$ in N.
    • Putting the resistive force into $P = Fv$ for a car that is accelerating. $F$ is the driving force; only at constant speed does it equal the resistive force.
    • Efficiency above 100%, or efficiency as output divided by wasted. It is useful output divided by total input, and the total input is always the larger number.
    • Reading a force–extension graph's gradient when the question wants the energy. Energy stored is the area under the line, not its slope.
  • 6

    Deformation of solids

    6.1

    Forces that cause deformation

    Syllabus
    1. understand that deformation is caused by tensile or compressive forces (forces and deformations will be assumed to be in one dimension only)
    2. understand and use the terms load, extension, compression and limit of proportionality
    3. recall and use Hooke's law
    4. recall and use the formula for the spring constant $k = F/x$
    5. define and use the terms stress, strain and the Young modulus
    6. describe an experiment to determine the Young modulus of a metal in the form of a wire

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Hooke's law & the elastic limit

    When a force acts on a solid along its length, the object changes shape (deformation 形变). Two cases (treated as one-dimensional here):

    • a tensile 拉伸 force stretches the object — it makes an extension 伸长量 $x$,
    • a compressive force squeezes the object — it makes a compression 压缩, treated as a negative extension.

    The applied force is the load 负载. The change from the natural length is the extension (or compression).

    Both are measured from the natural, unstretched length, never from the loaded length: on a diagram of a spring under a box, the distance the spring has shortened is its compression. A spring's own mass is usually said to be negligible 可忽略的, so the only forces on it are the load and the tension it provides.

    Explore

    Hooke's law spring

    Hang a load on the real spring: up to the elastic limit the extension is proportional to the force; beyond it the spring is stretched for good.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    deformation 形变 xíng biàn
    tensile 拉伸 lā shēn
    extension 伸长量 shēn cháng liàng
    compression 压缩 yā suō
    load 负载 fù zài
    negligible 可忽略的 kě hū lüè de
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    6.1

    Hooke's law and the spring constant

    A coiled metal spring
    A spring obeys Hooke's law: extension is proportional to the force applied.

    For many materials at small extensions, the extension is proportional to the load — this is Hooke's law 胡克定律. The constant that links them is the spring constant 劲度系数 $k$:

    $$F = kx \qquad\Longleftrightarrow\qquad k = \frac{F}{x}.$$

    Unit of $k$: $\text{N m}^{-1}$.

    Worked example. A spring stretches by $4.0\ \text{cm}$ when a $2.0\ \text{N}$ load is hung from it. Find its spring constant.

    Converting the extension to metres ($4.0\ \text{cm} = 0.040\ \text{m}$):

    $$k = \frac{F}{x} = \frac{2.0}{0.040} = 50\ \text{N m}^{-1}.$$

    For the one-mark "state Hooke's law", write it in words: the extension is directly proportional to the applied force (load), provided the limit of proportionality is not exceeded. The spring constant is the force per unit extension; the multiple-choice distractors are "extension per unit force" (that is $1/k$) and $\tfrac{1}{2}Fx$ (the energy stored).

    A load against extension graph: a straight line from the origin up to point P, then the line curves and flattens
    A load–extension graph: straight up to the limit of proportionality $P$, then it curves

    Reading a graph:

    • A force–extension ($F$ against $x$) graph has gradient $k$ in the Hooke's-law region.
    • An extension–force ($x$ against $F$) graph has gradient $1/k$ in the Hooke's-law region.

    A common trap: if a graph plots length $L$ against force, you can still find the spring constant from the gradient (since $L = L_{0} + F/k$, the gradient is $1/k$ — read it off carefully).

    Worked example. A spring has length $90\ \text{mm}$ under a force of $0.80\ \text{N}$ and $115\ \text{mm}$ under $1.30\ \text{N}$. Find the spring constant and the unstretched length.

    The extra force $0.50\ \text{N}$ produces the extra extension $25\ \text{mm} = 0.025\ \text{m}$, so $k = 0.50 / 0.025 = 20\ \text{N m}^{-1}$. At $0.80\ \text{N}$ the extension is $x = F/k = 0.80 / 20 = 0.040\ \text{m}$, so the unstretched length is $90 - 40 = 50\ \text{mm}$. On a graph of length against force the intercept on the length axis is $L_{0}$, the gradient is $1/k$, and the work done in stretching the spring is the triangle between the line and the level $L = L_{0}$, not the whole area down to the force axis: the rectangle below $L_{0}$ is the unstretched length multiplied by the force, which means nothing.

    A graph of a spring's length against the applied force: a straight line starting at L0 on the length axis with gradient one over k; the triangle between the line and the level L0, up to the force F1, is shaded as the work done, and the rectangle below L0 is hatched as not work
    Length against force: the intercept is $L_{0}$, the gradient is $1/k$, and only the triangle above $L_{0}$ is the work done

    Limit of proportionality

    Hooke's law only holds up to the limit of proportionality 比例极限. Past this point the $F$ against $x$ line curves and is no longer straight. The material may still be elastic 弹性 (it returns to its first length when you remove the load) a little further, then it becomes plastic 塑性.

    Springs in series and parallel

    You may need to combine spring constants:

    • Series 串联 (one spring hangs from another): the same load passes through both, the total extension is the sum, so $\dfrac{1}{k_{\text{total}}} = \dfrac{1}{k_{1}} + \dfrac{1}{k_{2}}$.
    • Parallel 并联 (two springs side by side holding the same load): each takes half the load (if they are identical), the extensions are equal, so $k_{\text{total}} = k_{1} + k_{2}$.
    Two springs in series, end to end, combine as 1/k = 1/k1 + 1/k2; two springs in parallel, side by side, combine as k = k1 + k2
    Combining spring constants: series gives a softer spring, parallel a stiffer one

    Worked example. Springs of spring constant $6.0\ \text{N cm}^{-1}$ and $4.0\ \text{N cm}^{-1}$ are joined end to end and a load of $80\ \text{N}$ hangs from them. Find the total extension.

    Each spring carries the full $80\ \text{N}$, so the extensions are $80/6.0 = 13.3\ \text{cm}$ and $80/4.0 = 20\ \text{cm}$: a total of $33\ \text{cm}$ (the same as $k = 2.4\ \text{N cm}^{-1}$ from $1/k = 1/6.0 + 1/4.0$). Three identical springs give the largest combined constant when all three are in parallel ($3k$) and the smallest when all are in series ($k/3$). When a load is shared by two identical springs in parallel, each carries half the force and so stores a quarter of the energy of one spring holding the whole load; the pair together stores half as much as the single spring did. A spring constant in $\text{N cm}^{-1}$ is $100$ times smaller than the same constant in $\text{N m}^{-1}$; give the unit the question asks for.

    Explore

    Hooke's law

    F = k·x

    Force is proportional to extension — the gradient is the spring constant k.

    Explore

    Hooke's law

    F = kx

    Up to the limit, extension is proportional to force — the gradient is the spring constant k.

    Explore

    Hooke's law: F = kx

    F = ax

    Drag the spring constant. Force is proportional to extension — a straight line through the origin whose gradient is the spring constant.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Hooke's law 胡克定律 hú kè dìng lǜ
    elastic 弹性 tán xìng
    spring constant 劲度系数 jìn dù xì shù
    limit of proportionality 比例极限 bǐ lì jí xiàn
    plastic 塑性 sù xìng
    series 串联 chuàn lián
    parallel 并联 bìng lián
    6.1

    Stress, strain and the Young modulus

    For a wire of uniform cross-section under a tensile load:

    • Stress 应力 $\sigma = \dfrac{F}{A}$, where $F$ is the load and $A$ is the cross-sectional area 横截面积. Unit: $\text{Pa}$.
    • Strain 应变 $\varepsilon = \dfrac{x}{L_{0}}$, where $x$ is the extension and $L_{0}$ is the original length. Strain has no unit (it is a ratio of lengths).

    For the one-mark definitions: stress is the force per unit cross-sectional area (the force acting normally to the area); strain is the extension per unit original length. The unit of stress, $\text{Pa} = \text{N m}^{-2}$, is $\text{kg m}^{-1}\ \text{s}^{-2}$ in base units. The area of a round wire comes from its diameter $d$: $A = \pi d^{2}/4 = \pi r^{2}$, and using $d$ in place of $r$ makes the area four times too big. Convert $\text{mm}^{2}$ to $\text{m}^{2}$ with $10^{-6}$.

    Worked example. A tensile force of $18\ \text{N}$ acts on a wire of cross-sectional area $3.2\ \text{mm}^{2}$. Find the stress.

    $\sigma = F/A = 18 / (3.2 \times 10^{-6}) = 5.6 \times 10^{6}\ \text{Pa}$. The same force acts along the whole wire, so a bolt whose diameter is $2d$ at one end and $d$ at the other has four times the stress at the narrow end ($\sigma \propto 1/d^{2}$), and a wire of three times the radius carries one ninth of the stress.

    A wire of original length L0 and cross-sectional area A clamped at the top with a load F hanging from it; stress is F over A and strain is the extension x over L0
    Stress is the load per cross-sectional area; strain is the extension per original length

    The Young modulus 杨氏模量 is the ratio of stress to strain in the Hooke's-law region:

    $$E = \frac{\sigma}{\varepsilon} = \frac{F / A}{x / L_{0}} = \frac{F L_{0}}{A x}.$$

    Unit: $\text{Pa}$ (about $10^{11}$ for metals; e.g. steel $\approx 2.0 \times 10^{11}$ Pa).

    Worked example. A steel wire of length $2.0\ \text{m}$ and cross-sectional area $1.5 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}^{2}$ stretches by $1.0\ \text{mm}$ under a load of $15\ \text{N}$. Find the Young modulus.

    $$E = \frac{F L_{0}}{A x} = \frac{15 \times 2.0}{(1.5 \times 10^{-7})(1.0 \times 10^{-3})} = 2.0 \times 10^{11}\ \text{Pa}.$$
    A stress against strain graph: a straight line from the origin up to point P, then the line curves over
    A stress–strain graph, straight up to the limit of proportionality $P$

    The Young modulus is a property of the material — it does not depend on the wire's shape or size. The spring constant $k$ depends on both the material and the size: $k = EA/L_{0}$.

    For the one-mark definition: the Young modulus is the ratio of stress to strain (for a material deformed within its limit of proportionality). Because it belongs to the material, a thicker wire of the same metal has the same Young modulus: it stretches less under the same load because its area is larger, not because the metal is stiffer. A "show that $k = EA/L_{0}$" question wants two lines: $k = F/x$ and $E = FL_{0}/(Ax)$, so $E = kL_{0}/A$. Two things follow: a wire's spring constant stays constant while Hooke's law holds, whatever the force, and a wire of the same metal with twice the diameter has four times the spring constant.

    Worked example. A copper wire of length $1.7\ \text{m}$ and diameter $0.64\ \text{mm}$ has Young modulus $1.2 \times 10^{11}\ \text{Pa}$. Find its spring constant.

    $A = \pi (0.32 \times 10^{-3})^{2} = 3.2 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}^{2}$, so $k = EA/L_{0} = 1.2 \times 10^{11} \times 3.2 \times 10^{-7} / 1.7 = 2.3 \times 10^{4}\ \text{N m}^{-1}$.

    On a stress–strain graph the gradient of the straight part is $E$, so of two materials drawn on the same axes the steeper line is the stiffer material, and a wire with double the Young modulus is drawn as a line through the origin with twice the gradient. On a force–extension graph the gradient is $EA/L_{0}$ and the Young modulus is the gradient multiplied by $L_{0}/A$; only a stress–strain graph has a gradient equal to $E$ itself.

    Stress against strain for steel and brass on the same axes: two straight lines from the origin, the steel line steeper, each marked with a cross where it leaves its straight path at its limit of proportionality
    Two metals on one stress–strain graph: the steeper line has the larger Young modulus

    Experiment to find the Young modulus of a metal wire

    A standard setup:

    1. Clamp one end of a long, thin wire to a fixed support. Pass the wire over a pulley 滑轮 at the edge of the bench so it hangs straight down.
    2. Measure the original length $L_{0}$ between the clamp and a marker near the pulley, using a metre rule.
    3. Measure the diameter 直径 $d$ of the wire at several places with a micrometer 螺旋测微器 and take the average. Work out $A = \pi d^{2}/4$.
    4. Hang weights one at a time. Record the load $F$ and the extension $x$ (how far the marker moves against a fixed scale).
    5. Plot $F$ against $x$. In the straight region the gradient is $EA/L_{0}$, so $E = \text{gradient} \times L_{0}/A$.

    Why a long, thin wire? To make the extension big enough to measure well. Why repeat readings and measure $d$ at several places? To reduce random error 随机误差 and check the wire is uniform.

    A "describe an experiment" answer earns its marks for the quantities measured and how ($L_{0}$ with a metre rule; $d$ with a micrometer at several points; the load from the masses or a newton meter; the extension from a marker read against a fixed scale, or a vernier scale), the graph ($F$ against $x$, gradient $EA/L_{0}$, or stress against strain, gradient $E$) and the precautions: safety goggles in case the wire snaps, a small load first to straighten kinks, and readings taken on unloading as well as loading to check the wire stayed elastic.

    A long wire clamped at one end, running horizontally over a pulley at the edge of a bench, with a paper flag marker on the wire read against a fixed scale and masses hanging from the end past the pulley
    Apparatus for measuring the Young modulus of a wire
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    stress 应力 yīng lì
    strain 应变 yìng biàn
    Young modulus 杨氏模量 yáng shì mó liàng
    cross-sectional area 横截面积 héng jié miàn jī
    diameter 直径 zhí jìng
    pulley 滑轮 huá lún
    micrometer 螺旋测微器 luó xuán cè wēi qì
    random error 随机误差 suí jī wù chā
    6.2

    Elastic and plastic behaviour

    Syllabus
    1. understand and use the terms elastic deformation, plastic deformation and elastic limit
    2. understand that the area under the force–extension graph represents the work done
    3. determine the elastic potential energy of a material deformed within its limit of proportionality from the area under the force–extension graph
    4. recall and use $E_p = \frac{1}{2}Fx = \frac{1}{2}kx^2$ for a material deformed within its limit of proportionality

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    As the load grows:

    1. Elastic and straight (Hooke obeyed) — up to the limit of proportionality. Removing the load returns the object to its first length.
    2. Elastic but curved — between the limit of proportionality and the elastic limit 弹性极限. The extension is no longer straight in the load, but on unloading the object still returns to its first length.
    3. Plastic — past the elastic limit. On unloading, the object does not return to its first length; a permanent extension stays.

    Hooke's law only holds in the straight, elastic region.

    In words: elastic deformation means the object returns to its original length (or shape) when the load is removed; plastic deformation means it does not, and a permanent extension remains; the elastic limit is the maximum load (or extension) for which the deformation is still elastic; the limit of proportionality is the point beyond which the extension is no longer proportional to the load. On a graph the limit of proportionality is where the line stops being straight. The elastic limit lies a little beyond it and cannot be read from a loading line alone. So in a "which statement must be correct" item, the end of the straight part is the limit of proportionality, but whether a later point is the elastic limit or the breaking point cannot be told from the shape of the loading line.

    A force against extension graph with the loading line passing through the limit of proportionality P and the elastic limit E, and a dashed unloading line returning to a permanent extension B on the extension axis
    Force–extension past the elastic limit: $P$ and $E$ marked, with a permanent extension $B$ left after unloading
    Two modern universal testing machines: a sample is held between two grips on a tall rigid frame, and the machine pulls the grips apart while measuring the force and the extension
    A modern universal (tensile) testing machine stretches a sample and records the force and extension

    On a force–extension graph for a material taken into the plastic region and then unloaded, the loading line and the unloading line are different. The unloading line is parallel to the first Hooke line but shifted to the right (the permanent extension left when the load reaches zero). The area between the loading and unloading lines is the energy turned into thermal energy 热能 in the material.

    A rubber band 橡皮筋 also has different loading and unloading curves, but it returns to its original length: its deformation is elastic. The area between the two curves is again energy dissipated as thermal energy (elastic hysteresis 弹性滞后), and the energy recovered on unloading is the area under the lower curve. The two-mark "explain why the work done in stretching the wire is not equal to the energy recovered when the force is removed" answer says that the wire was taken past its elastic limit, so part of the deformation is plastic and a permanent extension remains, and that part of the work done became thermal energy in the wire.

    Force against extension for a rubber band: the loading curve lies above the unloading curve, both run from the origin to the same maximum point, and the area between them is shaded as the energy dissipated as thermal energy
    A rubber band returns to its original length, but the area between loading and unloading is energy lost as thermal energy
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    elastic limit 弹性极限 tán xìng jí xiàn
    thermal energy 热能 rè néng
    rubber band 橡皮筋 xiàng pí jīn
    elastic hysteresis 弹性滞后 tán xìng zhì hòu
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    6.2

    Energy stored in a stretched material

    The work done in stretching a material from $0$ to extension $x$, as the load grows from $0$ to $F$, is the area under the force–extension graph.

    A straight force against extension line with the triangle between the line and the extension axis shaded, labelled area equals one half F x
    The work done stretching a material is the area under the force–extension graph

    Why the area: work done is force multiplied by the distance moved, but here the force grows as the material stretches, so the work is the sum of $F\,\Delta x$ over many small extensions, which is the area under the line. Within the limit of proportionality the force rises uniformly from $0$ to $F$, so the average force is $\tfrac{1}{2}F$ and the work is $\tfrac{1}{2}Fx$. On a force–extension graph the gradient is the spring constant.

    Hooke's-law material

    When Hooke's law holds, the $F$ against $x$ graph is a straight line through the origin. The area under it from $0$ to $x$ is a triangle:

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \tfrac{1}{2} F x = \tfrac{1}{2} k x^{2}.$$

    This is the elastic potential energy 弹性势能 stored in a spring or wire stretched within its limit of proportionality. An equal form:

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \frac{F^{2}}{2k}.$$

    Worked example. A spring of spring constant $50\ \text{N m}^{-1}$ is stretched by $0.20\ \text{m}$, within its limit of proportionality. Find the elastic potential energy stored.

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \tfrac{1}{2} k x^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2} \times 50 \times 0.20^{2} = 1.0\ \text{J}.$$

    Worked example. A wire of spring constant $2.0 \times 10^{4}\ \text{N m}^{-1}$ is already extended by $2.0\ \text{mm}$. Find the work done to increase its extension to $3.0\ \text{mm}$.

    The stored energy rises from $\tfrac{1}{2} k x_{1}^{2}$ to $\tfrac{1}{2} k x_{2}^{2}$: $W = \tfrac{1}{2} \times 2.0 \times 10^{4} \times \left[(3.0 \times 10^{-3})^{2} - (2.0 \times 10^{-3})^{2}\right] = 0.050\ \text{J}$. This is the trapezium under the line between the two extensions, not $\tfrac{1}{2} k (x_{2} - x_{1})^{2}$. Because $E_{\text{P}} \propto x^{2}$ at fixed $k$, doubling the extension of a wire stores four times the energy ($0.65\ \text{J}$ becomes $2.6\ \text{J}$), and a stored energy gives the extension as $x = \sqrt{2E_{\text{P}}/k}$: a spring of $k = 400\ \text{N m}^{-1}$ storing $0.32\ \text{J}$ is compressed by $\sqrt{2 \times 0.32 / 400} = 0.040\ \text{m}$. For two wires joined end to end the tension is the same in both, so the total energy stored is $\tfrac{1}{2}F x_{1} + \tfrac{1}{2}F x_{2}$ with each wire's own extension.

    Non-Hooke material

    For a graph that is not a straight line (a stretched rubber band, or a spring past its limit of proportionality), find the area by counting grid squares or by using trapezia 梯形. The same idea holds: the area under the force–extension graph is the work done on the material. To estimate the work done up to the breaking point, count the squares under the whole curve (part squares as halves) and multiply by the energy one square represents, the force step multiplied by the extension step; saying that the area was found by counting squares is the "explain your reasoning" mark.

    Comparing stored energy

    A common multiple-choice case: two materials are stretched by the same force, or by the same extension. Using $E_{\text{P}} = \tfrac{1}{2} F x$:

    • same $F$, smaller $k$ (less stiff) → larger $x$ → more energy stored.
    • same $x$, larger $k$ (stiffer) → larger $F$ → more energy stored.

    A sketch of $E_{\text{P}}$ against extension or compression is a curve through the origin that gets steeper ($E_{\text{P}} \propto x^{2}$), not a straight line. Of two wires of the same length and area under the same load, the one with the smaller Young modulus extends more and so stores more energy.

    When a stretched spring is released onto a mass, the elastic potential energy becomes kinetic energy 动能 (and gravitational potential energy if the mass rises). Set $\tfrac{1}{2} k x^{2}$ equal to $\tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$ (plus any $mgh$) to find the speed or height.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    elastic potential energy 弹性势能 tán xìng shì néng
    trapezia 梯形 tī xíng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    6.2

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    Hooke's law the extension is directly proportional to the applied force, provided the limit of proportionality is not exceeded
    spring constant the force per unit extension
    limit of proportionality the point beyond which the extension is no longer proportional to the applied force
    elastic limit the maximum force (or extension) for which the material returns to its original length when the force is removed
    elastic deformation the material returns to its original length (shape) when the force is removed
    plastic deformation the material does not return to its original length when the force is removed; a permanent extension remains
    stress the force per unit cross-sectional area
    strain the extension per unit original length
    Young modulus the ratio of stress to strain (within the limit of proportionality)
    elastic potential energy the energy stored in an object because it has been stretched or compressed
    6.2

    Exam tips

    • Hooke's law ($F = kx$) holds only up to the limit of proportionality.
    • Stress $= F/A$, strain $= x/L$, Young modulus $=$ stress$/$strain (gradient of the straight part of the stress-strain graph) — watch the units (Pa).
    • Energy stored $=$ area under the force-extension graph $= \frac{1}{2}Fx$ in the elastic region.
    • Distinguish elastic (returns to shape) from plastic (permanent) deformation.

    Common mistakes

    • Using the diameter as the radius in $A = \pi r^{2}$, or leaving an area in $\text{mm}^{2}$. Halve the diameter first; $1\ \text{mm}^{2} = 10^{-6}\ \text{m}^{2}$.
    • Reading the work done off a length–force graph as the whole area down to the axis. Only the triangle above $L_{0}$ is work.
    • Treating stored energy as proportional to extension. It goes as $x^{2}$: double the extension, four times the energy; and the work done between two extensions is the difference of two $\tfrac{1}{2}kx^{2}$ values.
    • Stating Hooke's law without its condition. "Provided the limit of proportionality is not exceeded" is part of the law.
    • Swapping the limit of proportionality (the end of the straight line) and the elastic limit (the end of elastic behaviour, a little beyond it).
    • Saying a thicker wire has a larger Young modulus. The modulus is the material's; the thicker wire has a larger spring constant.
  • 7

    Waves

    7.1

    Progressive waves

    Syllabus
    1. describe what is meant by wave motion as illustrated by vibration in ropes, springs and ripple tanks
    2. understand and use the terms displacement, amplitude, phase difference, period, frequency, wavelength and speed
    3. understand the use of the time-base and $y$-gain of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (CRO) to determine frequency and amplitude
    4. derive, using the definitions of speed, frequency and wavelength, the wave equation $v = f\lambda$
    5. recall and use $v = f\lambda$
    6. understand that energy is transferred by a progressive wave
    7. recall and use $\text{intensity} = \text{power}/\text{area}$ and $\text{intensity} \propto (\text{amplitude})^2$ for a progressive wave

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Concentric ripples spreading on water
    Ripples spreading on water are progressive waves that carry energy outward.
    Two waves of the same frequency shifted by a phase difference
    Two waves of the same frequency, shifted by a phase difference

    A wave carries energy 能量 from one place to another without moving matter overall. The particles of the medium 介质 oscillate 振动 about fixed rest positions; only the disturbance (and its energy) propagates 传播. Examples: a transverse wave 横波 on a rope, a longitudinal wave 纵波 on a slinky spring, ripples on water, and sound in air. A wave that travels and carries energy is a progressive wave 行波.

    Wave motion 波动 is a series of oscillations of the particles of a medium, each passing the disturbance on to the next: shake one end of a rope, push one end of a spring, or touch the surface of the water in a ripple tank 水波槽, and the oscillation travels away from where it started. For the one-mark definition, a progressive wave transfers energy from one place to another without transferring matter; the particles only oscillate about their rest positions.

    Key terms

    • displacement 位移 $y$ — how far a particle has moved from its rest position at a moment. A vector 矢量.
    • amplitude 振幅 $A$ — the largest displacement from the rest position.
    • wavelength 波长 $\lambda$ — the shortest distance along the wave between two points that move in phase 同相 (for example, two next-door crests 波峰).
    • period 周期 $T$ — the time for one full oscillation of a particle.
    • frequency 频率 $f$ — the number of full oscillations per second; $f = 1/T$. Unit: hertz 赫兹, $\text{Hz}$.
    • speed 速率 $v$ — how fast a crest travels along the medium.
    • phase difference 相位差 — the fraction of a cycle by which one oscillation leads or lags another. Given in radians 弧度 (a full cycle is $2\pi$) or degrees (a full cycle is $360°$).

    Two points one wavelength apart are in phase (phase difference 0 or $2\pi$). Two points half a wavelength apart are exactly out of phase (phase difference $\pi$).

    To find the phase difference between two points from a displacement–distance graph, divide their separation by the wavelength and multiply by $360°$ (or $2\pi$): two points $0.50\ \text{m}$ apart on a wave of wavelength $2.0\ \text{m}$ ($v = 600\ \text{m s}^{-1}$, $f = 300\ \text{Hz}$) differ in phase by $0.25 \times 360° = 90°$. Only the fraction of a cycle matters, so $450°$ is the same as $90°$. From two displacement–time graphs, read the time shift between the peaks as a fraction of the period. Which way is a point moving at the instant a graph shows? The whole profile moves along, so each point takes up the displacement that its neighbour on the side the wave comes from has now; a point at a crest or a trough is momentarily at rest.

    A transverse wave profile moving to the right, with its position a moment later dashed; marked point R is moving up, point S at the trough is momentarily at rest and point T is moving down, each shown by an arrow
    Which way each point moves: towards the displacement its neighbour on the incoming side has now; a crest or trough is momentarily at rest

    Worked example. Points R and T on a string are $0.62\ \text{cm}$ apart and a quarter of a cycle out of phase. The wave speed is $0.27\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the frequency.

    A quarter of a cycle is a quarter of a wavelength, so $\lambda = 4 \times 0.62 = 2.5\ \text{cm}$ and $f = v / \lambda = 0.27 / 0.025 = 11\ \text{Hz}$.

    The wave equation

    In one period $T$, the wave moves forward by one wavelength $\lambda$. So speed $= \text{distance} / \text{time} = \lambda / T = \lambda f$:

    $$v = f \lambda.$$

    This comes straight from the definitions of speed, frequency and wavelength, and works for every progressive wave. For the two-mark derivation write both steps: in one period $T$ the wave travels one wavelength $\lambda$, so $v = \lambda / T$; and $f = 1/T$, so $v = f\lambda$. Because $v$ is fixed by the medium, a higher frequency means a shorter wavelength. A period question is the same equation the other way round: light of wavelength $460\ \text{nm}$ has $f = c / \lambda = 6.5 \times 10^{14}\ \text{Hz}$ and $T = 1/f = 1.5 \times 10^{-15}\ \text{s}$.

    Reading a CRO trace

    A cathode-ray oscilloscope 示波器 (CRO) draws a voltage signal — for sound, the output of a microphone — against time. Two controls matter:

    • time-base 时基 (seconds per division across): turns horizontal distance on the screen into time. Read the period $T$ as the distance between two next-door peaks, then $f = 1/T$.
    • y-gain 垂直增益 (volts per division up): turns vertical distance into voltage. The amplitude in volts is the peak height from the centre line.

    If the time-base is $5\ \text{ms}/\text{div}$ and one full cycle takes $4$ divisions, then $T = 4 \times 5\ \text{ms} = 20\ \text{ms}$ and $f = 50\ \text{Hz}$.

    The time-base is the time represented by one division (or one centimetre) across the screen, in $\text{s}\ \text{div}^{-1}$. To set it for a given signal, work backwards: a $2000\ \text{Hz}$ sound has $T = 0.50\ \text{ms}$, so for one cycle to span $2.5\ \text{cm}$ the time-base must be $0.50 / 2.5 = 0.20\ \text{ms cm}^{-1}$. For the amplitude, multiply the peak height in divisions by the y-gain: $2.0$ divisions at $3.5\ \text{mV cm}^{-1}$ is $7.0\ \text{mV}$. When the intensity of the sound is reduced to a quarter at the same frequency, the trace keeps its period and its peaks halve in height, because $I \propto A^{2}$.

    A cathode-ray oscilloscope screen with a square grid and a sine trace; the period  is marked as the horizontal distance between two next-door peaks, spanning four divisions, with scale bars showing one division across and one division up
    Reading the period T from a CRO trace using the grid and time-base
    A modern digital oscilloscope with a grid screen showing a yellow voltage signal against time, a row of control knobs and buttons, and four probe leads plugged into the input sockets
    A real oscilloscope: the grid lets you read off the period and the amplitude

    Intensity of a wave

    A wave carries energy. The intensity 强度 at a point is the power 功率 passing through unit area at right angles to the direction of travel:

    $$I = \frac{P}{A}.$$

    Unit: $\text{W m}^{-2}$.

    Intensity is proportional to the square of the amplitude:

    $$I \propto A^{2}.$$

    For a point source 点源 sending out energy equally in all directions, the wavefronts 波前 are spheres; the surface area at distance $r$ is $4\pi r^{2}$, so

    $$I = \frac{P}{4\pi r^{2}}, \qquad I \propto \frac{1}{r^{2}}.$$

    Doubling the distance cuts the intensity to a quarter, which means the amplitude is halved (since $I \propto A^{2}$).

    Worked example. A lamp emits $60\ \text{W}$ of light equally in all directions. Find the intensity of the light $2.0\ \text{m}$ away.

    $$I = \frac{P}{4\pi r^{2}} = \frac{60}{4\pi (2.0)^{2}} \approx 1.2\ \text{W m}^{-2}.$$

    Worked example. Light of power $750\ \text{W}$ falls at right angles on a square solar panel of side $1.2\ \text{m}$. Find the intensity.

    $I = P/A = 750 / 1.2^{2} = 520\ \text{W m}^{-2}$. A smaller panel in the same light receives the same intensity but less power, in proportion to its area. The other way round, a magnifying glass of radius $r$ collects a power $I \times \pi r^{2}$ and concentrates it on a small spot.

    Two rules the multiple-choice questions turn on. Because $I \propto A^{2}$, the ratio of two intensities is the square of the ratio of the amplitudes: waves of amplitude $3.0\ \text{cm}$ and $2.0\ \text{cm}$ have intensities in the ratio $2.25$, and when an amplitude falls to a half the intensity falls to a quarter. For a point source, $I \propto 1/r^{2}$ means $A \propto 1/r$, so a sketch of $A/A_{0}$ against $d/x_{0}$ is a curve falling as $1/d$, not a straight line. The one-line statement the scheme wants: intensity is proportional to the amplitude squared.

    Explore

    Progressive waves

    y = a sin(bx + c)

    A wave: a is amplitude, b sets the wavelength, c the phase.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    progressive wave 行波 xíng bō
    wave
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    phase difference 相位差 xiàng wèi chā
    medium 介质 jiè zhì
    oscillate 振动 zhèn dòng
    propagates 传播 chuán bō
    propagate 传播 chuán bō
    transverse wave 横波 héng bō
    longitudinal wave 纵波 zòng bō
    Wave motion 波动 bō dòng
    ripple tank 水波槽 shuǐ bō cáo
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    amplitude 振幅 zhèn fú
    wavelength 波长 bō cháng
    in phase 同相 tóng xiāng
    crest 波峰 bō fēng
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    hertz 赫兹 hè zī
    speed 速率 sù lǜ
    radian 弧度 hú dù
    cathode-ray oscilloscope 示波器 shì bō qì
    time-base 时基 shí jī
    y-gain 垂直增益 chuí zhí zēng yì
    intensity 强度 qiáng dù
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    point source 点源 diǎn yuán
    wavefront 波前 bō qián
    Exercise sheet
    7.2

    Transverse and longitudinal waves

    Syllabus
    1. compare transverse and longitudinal waves
    2. analyse and interpret graphical representations of transverse and longitudinal waves

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Transverse vs longitudinal waves

    Transverse waves

    The particles oscillate perpendicular 垂直 to the direction the energy travels. A wave on a rope, all electromagnetic waves, and S-waves in the Earth are transverse.

    Transverse wave on a rope drawn as a sine curve: each piece of rope vibrates up and down (a vertical double arrow), while the energy moves to the right along the rope
    Transverse wave on a rope

    Longitudinal waves

    The particles oscillate parallel to the direction the energy travels. Sound in any medium, P-waves in the Earth, and the squashes on a slinky are longitudinal. The wave is made of compressions 压缩 (higher pressure, particles close together) and rarefactions 稀疏 (lower pressure, particles spread out).

    Longitudinal wave on a slinky spring: the coils bunch into compressions and spread into rarefactions; each coil vibrates back and forth (a horizontal double arrow) parallel to the direction the energy travels
    Longitudinal wave on a slinky spring

    Graphs of waves

    A graph of particle displacement against position at one moment looks like a sine curve 正弦曲线 for both kinds of wave. The difference: for a transverse wave the displacement axis is the real sideways displacement; for a longitudinal wave it is the small back-and-forth displacement along the direction of travel (positive one way, negative the other).

    For a longitudinal wave take displacement to the right as positive. Where the graph crosses zero going from positive to negative, the particles on either side have moved towards that point, so it is a compression; where it crosses from negative to positive they have moved apart, a rarefaction. Two neighbouring compressions are one wavelength apart, and a compression and the next rarefaction are half a wavelength apart. The direction of motion of a particle follows the same rule as for a transverse wave: it moves towards the displacement of its neighbour on the side the wave comes from.

    A longitudinal wave drawn twice: a row of particle dots bunched into compressions C and spread into rarefactions R, above the displacement–distance graph of the same particles with displacement to the right positive; dotted lines show that a compression sits where the graph crosses zero from positive to negative and a rarefaction where it crosses from negative to positive
    The same longitudinal wave as particles and as a graph: a compression where the displacement changes from positive to negative, a rarefaction where it changes from negative to positive
    A displacement against distance graph drawn as a sine curve, with the amplitude  marked from the rest axis to a crest and the wavelength  marked between two next-door crests
    A displacement–distance graph shows the wave's amplitude and wavelength

    A graph of particle displacement against time at one point in space is also a sine curve for both kinds. Read the period $T$ from this graph.

    A displacement against time graph drawn as a sine curve, with the amplitude  marked from the rest axis to a peak and the period  marked between two next-door peaks
    A displacement–time graph shows the wave's amplitude and period

    The two-mark comparison, with reference to the direction of energy transfer: in a transverse wave the oscillations are perpendicular to the direction of energy transfer; in a longitudinal wave they are parallel to it. Both kinds transfer energy without transferring matter, both can be reflected, refracted and diffracted, and both can form stationary waves (topic 8). Only transverse waves can be polarised, and only electromagnetic waves, which are all transverse, can travel through a vacuum; sound needs a medium. Reading the two graphs together: the displacement–distance graph gives $\lambda$, the displacement–time graph gives $T$, and $v = \lambda / T$.

    Explore

    Transverse waves

    y = a sin(bx + c)

    Change the amplitude and wavelength of the wave.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    electromagnetic wave 电磁波 diàn cí bō
    sine curve 正弦曲线 zhèng xián qū xiàn
    compression 压缩 yā suō
    rarefaction 稀疏 xī shū
    Exercise sheet
    7.3

    Doppler effect (moving source, stationary observer)

    Syllabus
    1. understand that when a source of sound waves moves relative to a stationary observer, the observed frequency is different from the source frequency (understanding of the Doppler effect for a stationary source and a moving observer is not required)
    2. use the expression $f_{\text{o}} = f_{\text{s}} v / (v \pm v_{\text{s}})$ for the observed frequency when a source of sound waves moves relative to a stationary observer

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    When the source 波源 of a sound moves relative to a stationary 静止 observer 观察者, the heard frequency is different from the source frequency. This is the Doppler effect 多普勒效应.

    • source moving towards the observer: the wavefronts in front are squashed, so the wavelength is shorter and the heard frequency is higher.
    • source moving away from the observer: the wavefronts behind are spread out, so the wavelength is longer and the heard frequency is lower.
    Circular wavefronts from a source moving to the right at speed  towards a stationary observer; the wavefronts ahead of the source (towards the observer) are bunched closer together and those behind (towards point P) are spread further apart
    A moving source squashes the wavefronts ahead of it, raising the observed frequency

    The formula (source moving at speed $v_{\text{s}}$ along the line to the observer; wave speed $v$, source frequency $f_{\text{s}}$, heard frequency $f_{\text{o}}$):

    $$f_{\text{o}} = \frac{v \cdot f_{\text{s}}}{v \pm v_{\text{s}}}.$$

    Choose the sign to match the physics:

    • minus sign on the bottom when the source moves towards the observer ($f_{\text{o}} > f_{\text{s}}$),
    • plus sign when the source moves away ($f_{\text{o}} < f_{\text{s}}$).

    You only need the case of a stationary observer.

    Worked example. A car horn at $f_{\text{s}} = 800\ \text{Hz}$ moves at $30\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ towards a still listener. Speed of sound $v = 340\ \text{m s}^{-1}$:

    $$f_{\text{o}} = \frac{340 \times 800}{340 - 30} = \frac{272\,000}{310} \approx 877\ \text{Hz}.$$

    Moving away at the same speed, the listener hears $340 \times 800 / (340 + 30) = 735\ \text{Hz}$: the frequency is constant while the car approaches, drops as it passes, and is constant again, lower, as it recedes. A sketch of observed frequency against time for a source passing at constant speed is two level lines joined by a fall. Working backwards, a source of $1200\ \text{Hz}$ heard as $960\ \text{Hz}$ is moving away ($f_{\text{o}} < f_{\text{s}}$): $960 = 1200 \times 340 / (340 + v_{\text{s}})$ gives $v_{\text{s}} = 85\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. A buzzer swung in a horizontal circle at $25\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ while emitting $846\ \text{Hz}$ is heard between $846 \times 330 / 355 = 786\ \text{Hz}$ (moving directly away) and $846 \times 330 / 305 = 915\ \text{Hz}$ (moving directly towards), once each per revolution. If the period of a CRO trace of the sound rises continuously, the observed frequency is falling: the source is moving away with increasing speed. The Doppler effect happens for all waves, light included (topic 25); only the sound formula is examined here.

    Explore

    Doppler effect

    Send the source moving and watch the wavefronts bunch up ahead (higher pitch) and stretch out behind — the siren effect, controlled by the source's speed.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    source 波源 bō yuán
    stationary 静止 jìng zhǐ
    Doppler effect 多普勒效应 duō pǔ lè xiào yìng
    observer 观察者 guān chá zhě
    Exercise sheet
    7.4

    Electromagnetic spectrum

    Syllabus
    1. state that all electromagnetic waves are transverse waves that travel with the same speed $c$ in free space
    2. recall the approximate range of wavelengths in free space of the principal regions of the electromagnetic spectrum from radio waves to $\gamma$-rays
    3. recall that wavelengths in the range 400–700 nm in free space are visible to the human eye

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    All electromagnetic waves 电磁波 (EM waves) are transverse and travel in a vacuum 真空 at the same speed:

    $$c = 3.00 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The electromagnetic spectrum 电磁波谱 includes radio waves, microwaves 微波, infrared 红外线, visible light, ultraviolet 紫外线, X-rays X射线 and $\gamma$-rays γ射线.

    The electromagnetic spectrum as a horizontal band from radio waves to gamma rays, with a frequency scale in Hz above and a wavelength scale in m below; left to right the wavelength decreases and the frequency increases
    The electromagnetic spectrum

    Approximate wavelength ranges in free space (learn the orders of magnitude):

    • radio waves: $> 10^{-1}\ \text{m}$ (up to many km).
    • microwaves: $10^{-3}\ \text{m}$ to $10^{-1}\ \text{m}$.
    • infrared: $\sim 7 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ to $10^{-3}\ \text{m}$.
    • visible light: $400\ \text{nm}$ (violet) to $700\ \text{nm}$ (red), i.e. $4 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ to $7 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$.
    • ultraviolet: $\sim 10^{-8}\ \text{m}$ to $4 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$.
    • X-rays: $\sim 10^{-11}\ \text{m}$ to $10^{-8}\ \text{m}$.
    • $\gamma$-rays: $< 10^{-11}\ \text{m}$.

    The boundaries between regions are not sharp. Use $c = f\lambda$ to change between wavelength and frequency. Only light with wavelengths $400$$700\ \text{nm}$ can be seen.

    To identify a region, convert to a wavelength with $\lambda = c / f$ and compare with the ranges: $2.1\ \text{cm}$ is a microwave; $138\ \text{pm} = 1.4 \times 10^{-10}\ \text{m}$ is an X-ray; $30\ \text{THz}$ gives $\lambda = 1.0 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{m}$, infrared; $3.0 \times 10^{16}\ \text{Hz}$ gives $1.0 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{m}$, ultraviolet. Visible light spans frequencies of about $4.3 \times 10^{14}$ to $7.5 \times 10^{14}\ \text{Hz}$, so a wave of $5.0 \times 10^{14}\ \text{Hz}$ can be seen and one of wavelength $5.0 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{m}$ (infrared) cannot. Red light has a longer wavelength and a lower frequency than green. A list "in order of increasing wavelength" runs $\gamma$-rays, X-rays, ultraviolet, visible, infrared, microwaves, radio waves. A pulse of light reflected from a wall $150\ \text{m}$ away returns after $2 \times 150 / (3.00 \times 10^{8}) = 1.0\ \mu\text{s}$.

    Explore

    Slide across the spectrum

    Radio waves, visible light and gamma rays are all the same wave — only the wavelength changes, and with it the frequency, photon energy and everyday use.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electromagnetic waves 电磁波 diàn cí bō
    vacuum 真空 zhēn kōng
    electromagnetic spectrum 电磁波谱 diàn cí bō pǔ
    microwaves 微波 wēi bō
    infrared 红外线 hóng wài xiàn
    ultraviolet 紫外线 zǐ wài xiàn
    X-rays X射线 X shè xiàn
    gamma-rays γ射线 γ shè xiàn
    Exercise sheet
    7.5

    Polarisation

    Syllabus
    1. understand that polarisation is a phenomenon associated with transverse waves
    2. recall and use Malus’s law ($I = I_0 \cos^2\theta$) to calculate the intensity of a plane-polarised electromagnetic wave after transmission through a polarising filter or a series of polarising filters (calculation of the effect of a polarising filter on the intensity of an unpolarised wave is not required)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Polarisation 偏振 means making a transverse wave oscillate in one plane only.

    • Only transverse waves can be polarised — the oscillation is perpendicular to the direction of travel, so different perpendicular planes are real choices.
    • Longitudinal waves (sound) cannot be polarised — the oscillation is along the direction of travel, so there is no other plane.

    So polarisation is a test: if a wave can be polarised, it must be transverse.

    Two diagrams along a direction of wave energy: an unpolarised wave with red vibration double-arrows pointing in many planes, and a polarised wave with a single red double-arrow in one plane
    Unpolarised waves vibrate in many planes; a polarised wave vibrates in one plane
    A clear plastic protractor glowing with bands of rainbow colour against a black background
    A see-through plastic protractor placed between two crossed polarising filters. Light only reaches your eye because the stressed plastic rotates its plane of polarisation — the colours map where the plastic is squeezed most. With ordinary light it would just look clear

    Malus's law

    Plane-polarised 平面偏振 light of intensity $I_{0}$ passes through a polarising filter 偏振片 whose transmission axis 透光轴 is at angle $\theta$ to the plane of polarisation. The transmitted intensity is given by Malus's law 马吕斯定律:

    $$I = I_{0} \cos^{2}\theta.$$
    • $\theta = 0°$: filter lined up with the polarisation, $I = I_{0}$, all passes through.
    • $\theta = 90°$: filter at right angles, $I = 0$, all blocked.
    • $\theta = 60°$: $I = I_{0} \cos^{2} 60° = I_{0} \cdot 0.25 = I_{0}/4$.

    Worked example. Plane-polarised light of intensity $12\ \text{W m}^{-2}$ meets a polarising filter whose axis is at $30°$ to the plane of polarisation. Find the transmitted intensity.

    $$I = I_{0}\cos^{2}\theta = 12 \times \cos^{2} 30° = 12 \times 0.75 = 9.0\ \text{W m}^{-2}.$$
    Unpolarised light passes through a polariser to become plane polarised, then meets an analyser: in (a) the analyser's transmission axis is crossed (at right angles) and no light passes; in (b) it is parallel and the polarised light passes through
    Crossed filters (a) block the light; parallel filters (b) let it pass

    For two filters in a row, use Malus's law twice with the angle between each pair. Be careful with the angle each time — after the first filter the polarisation is along that filter's axis, and the second filter's angle is measured from there.

    (You do not need to work out the effect of a polarising filter on an unpolarised wave.)

    When a filter is rotated through $360°$ in front of plane-polarised light, the transmitted intensity varies as $\cos^{2}\theta$: it is a maximum when the transmission axis is parallel to the plane of polarisation ($0°$ and $180°$), zero when perpendicular ($90°$ and $270°$), and never negative. Because $I \propto A^{2}$, the transmitted amplitude is $A_{0}\cos\theta$: at $45°$ the intensity halves and the amplitude falls to $0.71$ of its value. For two filters, the first sets the plane of polarisation along its own axis, so the second filter's angle is measured from that: vertically polarised light through filters at $50°$ and then $80°$ to the vertical keeps $\cos^{2} 50° \times \cos^{2} 30° = 0.31$ of its intensity. The one-mark definitions: polarisation is the oscillation of a transverse wave in a single plane, which contains the direction of travel; sound cannot be polarised because its oscillations are along the direction of travel, so there is no plane to select.

    Explore

    Polarisation intensity lab

    intensity changes with polariser angle

    Rotate a polariser and see why only transverse waves can be polarised.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    polarisation 偏振 piān zhèn
    polarising filter 偏振片 piān zhèn piàn
    Malus's law 马吕斯定律 mǎ lǚ sī dìng lǜ
    plane-polarised 平面偏振 píng miàn piān zhèn
    transmission axis 透光轴 tòu guāng zhóu
    γ-rays γ射线 γ shè xiàn
    Exercise sheet
    7.5

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    progressive wave a wave that transfers energy from one place to another without transferring matter
    transverse wave a wave whose oscillations are perpendicular to the direction of energy transfer
    longitudinal wave a wave whose oscillations are parallel to the direction of energy transfer
    displacement the distance of a particle from its equilibrium (rest) position, in a stated direction
    amplitude the maximum displacement of a particle from its equilibrium position
    wavelength the minimum distance between two points on the wave that are in phase (for example, adjacent crests)
    period the time for one complete oscillation of a particle (or for the wave to travel one wavelength)
    frequency the number of oscillations per unit time (or the number of wavefronts passing a point per unit time)
    phase difference the fraction of a cycle, as an angle, by which one oscillation leads or lags another
    intensity the power per unit area, at right angles to the direction of travel
    Doppler effect the change in the observed frequency of a wave when the source moves relative to the observer
    polarisation the oscillations of a transverse wave are in one plane only, containing the direction of travel
    time-base the time represented by one division across the screen of a CRO
    7.5

    Exam tips

    • Define terms precisely (displacement, amplitude, wavelength, period, frequency) and use $v = f\lambda$.
    • Distinguish transverse (vibration perpendicular to travel) from longitudinal (parallel); only transverse waves can be polarised.
    • For the Doppler effect, the observed frequency rises as the source approaches and falls as it recedes.
    • Learn the electromagnetic spectrum order; all its waves travel at $c$ in a vacuum.

    Common mistakes

    • A phase difference bigger than one cycle, or degrees where radians were asked. Only the fraction of a cycle matters: $450°$ is $90°$, and $90°$ is $\pi/2$.
    • Reading the wavelength from a displacement–time graph. That graph gives the period; the wavelength comes from the displacement–distance graph.
    • Doubling the amplitude and "doubling" the intensity. Intensity goes as the amplitude squared: four times.
    • Choosing the Doppler sign by feel. Towards means minus on the bottom (frequency up); away means plus (frequency down). Check that the answer lies on the right side of $f_{\text{s}}$.
    • Using the first filter's angle for the second. After a filter the light is polarised along that filter's axis, and the next angle is measured from there.
    • Saying that sound can be polarised. Only transverse waves can.
  • 8

    Superposition

    8.1

    Principle of superposition

    Syllabus
    1. explain and use the principle of superposition
    2. show an understanding of experiments that demonstrate stationary waves using microwaves, stretched strings and air columns (it will be assumed that end corrections are negligible; knowledge of the concept of end corrections is not required)
    3. explain the formation of a stationary wave using a graphical method, and identify nodes and antinodes
    4. understand how wavelength may be determined from the positions of nodes or antinodes of a stationary wave

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Two waves make a standing wave

    When two or more waves overlap at a point, the displacement 位移 there is the vector sum 矢量和 of the displacements each wave would make on its own. This is the principle of superposition 叠加.

    The waves pass through each other and come out unchanged. Superposition is the base of everything in this topic.

    For the two-mark statement: when two or more waves meet at a point, the resultant displacement is the sum of the displacements of the individual waves. It is the displacements that add, not the amplitudes or the intensities, and the principle applies whenever waves of the same type overlap; the waves do not have to be coherent or of equal amplitude.

    If two waves of amplitude 振幅 $A_{1}$ and $A_{2}$ meet:

    • in phase 同相 (crest 波峰 meets crest): the amplitude is $A_{1} + A_{2}$ (constructive interference 相长干涉).
    • exactly out of phase (crest meets trough 波谷, phase difference 相位差 $\pi$): the amplitude is $|A_{1} - A_{2}|$ (destructive interference 相消干涉).
    • any other phase difference $\phi$: the amplitude is somewhere between these two.
    Two identical waves drawn in phase, one above the other, adding to give a resultant wave of twice the amplitude
    Two waves arriving in phase add to give double the amplitude (constructive)
    Two identical waves drawn exactly out of phase adding to give a flat resultant line of zero amplitude
    Two waves arriving exactly out of phase cancel to zero (destructive)

    For intensity 强度, $I \propto A^{2}$. Two equal waves meeting in phase give intensity $(2A)^{2} = 4A^{2}$four times the intensity of one wave alone.

    Because $I \propto A^{2}$, work in amplitudes first. Two waves of intensities $I$ and $4I$ have amplitudes $A$ and $2A$: superposing in phase gives amplitude $3A$ and intensity $9I$, in antiphase amplitude $A$ and intensity $I$. So two coherent waves of different intensities never cancel completely: the minima have intensity $(A_{2} - A_{1})^{2}$, not zero. A wave of amplitude $2A$ meeting one of amplitude $A/2$ travelling the opposite way gives a resultant that varies between $2.5A$ and $1.5A$, a stationary pattern with no true nodes. Doubling the amplitude of one of two equal waves that meet in phase takes the resultant from $2A$ to $3A$, so the intensity rises from $4A^{2}$ to $9A^{2}$: $2.25$ times.

    Explore

    Adding two waves

    Two waves overlap and add. Line them up for constructive interference, or oppose them for destructive — change the phase to see both.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    principle of superposition 叠加 dié jiā
    superposition 叠加 dié jiā
    waves
    wave
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    vector sum 矢量和 shǐ liàng hé
    amplitude 振幅 zhèn fú
    in phase 同相 tóng xiāng
    crest 波峰 bō fēng
    constructive interference 相长干涉 xiāng zhǎng gān shè
    trough 波谷 bō gǔ
    phase difference 相位差 xiàng wèi chā
    destructive interference 相消干涉 xiāng xiāo gān shè
    intensity 强度 qiáng dù
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    8.1

    Stationary (standing) waves

    When two identical progressive waves 行波 travel in opposite directions and overlap, they make a stationary wave 驻波. Examples: a wave on a string reflected 反射 from a fixed end overlapping the incoming wave; sound in an air column reflected from a closed end; microwaves between an emitter and a metal sheet.

    Explain how the stationary wave is formed (three or four marks, asked for a string, an air column and microwaves alike): the wave from the source travels to the far end (the wall, the closed end, the metal plate) and is reflected; the incident and reflected waves have the same frequency, wavelength and speed and travel in opposite directions; they superpose where they overlap; at the points where they always meet in phase the displacements add to give the maximum amplitude, an antinode, and at the points where they always meet in antiphase they cancel, a node. For "state the conditions": two waves of the same type, with the same frequency (and wavelength) and speed, travelling in opposite directions along the same line; equal amplitudes are needed only for the nodes to have zero amplitude. The metal plate in the microwave experiment is there to reflect the waves back along their own path.

    Five stacked snapshots at t = 0, T/4, T/2, 3T/4 and T showing two progressive waves travelling in opposite directions and their resultant, with fixed nodes (N) and antinodes (A) marked across the top
    A stationary wave forms where two opposite waves overlap (N marks a node, A an antinode)

    Nodes and antinodes

    In a stationary wave:

    • node 波节 — a point that is always at zero displacement (the two waves always cancel). The distance between next-door nodes is $\lambda/2$.
    • antinode 波腹 — a point of largest amplitude (the two waves always add). The distance between next-door antinodes is $\lambda/2$.
    • a node and the next antinode are $\lambda/4$ apart.

    Particles between two nodes oscillate in phase with each other, but with different amplitudes (largest at the antinode, zero at the nodes). Particles on opposite sides of a node oscillate in antiphase 反相 (phase difference $\pi$).

    So the phase difference between two points on the same loop (between adjacent nodes) is $0°$; between points on neighbouring loops it is $180°$; and between points on loops separated by one whole loop it is $0°$ again. Every point reaches its maximum displacement at the same instant and passes through zero at the same instant. A sketch of the string a quarter of a cycle after the instant of maximum displacement is a straight line along the rest position; half a cycle later it is the mirror image of the first sketch. In one period a particle at an antinode travels four amplitudes, so a particle that moves $72\ \text{mm}$ in one and a half periods has an amplitude of $12\ \text{mm}$.

    A stretched string vibrating in its fundamental mode: a single loop with a node at each fixed end and an antinode in the middle, length L equals half a wavelength
    Fundamental mode on a stretched string — one loop, with L equal to half a wavelength

    Worked example. A string of length $0.80\ \text{m}$ is fixed at both ends and vibrates in its fundamental mode, where the wave speed is $240\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the fundamental frequency.

    One loop fits the string, so $\lambda = 2L = 1.60\ \text{m}$. Then

    $$f = \frac{v}{\lambda} = \frac{240}{1.60} = 150\ \text{Hz}.$$

    How a stationary wave differs from a progressive wave: it does not carry energy 能量 along its length, the pattern does not move along, and the nodes stay fixed; a progressive wave has the same amplitude everywhere and carries energy. The three differences the scheme lists: a progressive wave transfers energy and a stationary wave does not; in a progressive wave every point has the same amplitude, in a stationary wave the amplitude varies from zero at a node to a maximum at an antinode; in a progressive wave neighbouring points differ in phase, in a stationary wave all the points between two nodes are in phase.

    Measuring wavelength from node spacing

    Drive a string with a vibrator at frequency $f$ until a stationary pattern appears. Measure the distance between two well-separated nodes and divide by the number of half-wavelengths 波长 between them. Then $\lambda$ is known, and $v = f\lambda$ gives the wave speed.

    For a tube closed at one end and open at the other (a resonance tube 共鸣管), the closed end is a displacement node and the open end is a displacement antinode. The fundamental 基频 has $L = \lambda/4$; the next resonance is at $L = 3\lambda/4$; and so on. For a tube open at both ends, both ends are antinodes; the fundamental is at $L = \lambda/2$.

    The general rule: a closed end is a node and an open end an antinode, and a string fixed at both ends has a node at each end. So a closed pipe fits an odd number of quarter-wavelengths ($L = \lambda/4, 3\lambda/4, 5\lambda/4, \ldots$), while an open pipe and a fixed string fit whole half-wavelengths ($L = \lambda/2, \lambda, 3\lambda/2, \ldots$); a pipe open at both ends with $n$ nodes has $n + 1$ antinodes. Frequencies follow from $f = v/\lambda$: a closed pipe whose lowest note is $820\ \text{Hz}$ has $\lambda = 4L$, and a corridor $13.2\ \text{m}$ long with a reflecting door at each end resonates lowest at $f = v/2L = 330/26.4 = 12.5\ \text{Hz}$.

    Five air columns side by side: a pipe closed at one end in its first three modes, with a node at the closed end and an antinode at the open end and L equal to a quarter, three quarters and five quarters of a wavelength; and a pipe open at both ends in its first two modes, with antinodes at both ends and L equal to half a wavelength and one wavelength
    Modes of an air column: a closed end is a node, an open end an antinode

    Worked example. A loudspeaker at the open end of a tube $0.51\ \text{m}$ long, closed at the other end, sets up a stationary wave with two nodes and two antinodes. Find the wavelength and, with $v = 340\ \text{m s}^{-1}$, the frequency.

    Two nodes and two antinodes is the second mode of a closed pipe, $L = 3\lambda/4$, so $\lambda = 4 \times 0.51 / 3 = 0.68\ \text{m}$ and $f = 340 / 0.68 = 500\ \text{Hz}$. The longest wavelength that can resonate in this tube is $4L = 2.0\ \text{m}$.

    The experiments the syllabus names all measure $\lambda$ from node or antinode spacing. In the resonance tube, a tube is raised out of water while a loudspeaker or tuning fork sounds at its open end; the sound is suddenly loud at the first resonance, when the air column is $\lambda/4$ long, and again at $3\lambda/4$, so the tube moves $\lambda/2$ between the two (a student needs no equipment to detect the resonance: the note becomes loud). In a dust tube, fine powder settles into heaps at the displacement nodes, $\lambda/2$ apart. With microwaves, a receiver moved along the line between the transmitter and a metal reflecting plate reads a minimum every $\lambda/2$: a receiver that starts at a minimum and passes six more minima in $1.05\ \text{m}$ has crossed $3\lambda$, so $\lambda = 0.35\ \text{m}$ and, with $v = 340\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ for the equivalent sound experiment, $f = 970\ \text{Hz}$. A stationary wave in a microwave oven melts chocolate at the antinodes, $\lambda/2$ apart, so the spot spacing and the oven's frequency ($2.45\ \text{GHz}$) give the speed of light from $c = f\lambda$.

    A pipe closed at the bottom and open at the top, length L, with the displacement-amplitude curve showing a node (N) at the closed end and an antinode (A) at the open end
    Fundamental mode in a closed pipe — a node at the closed end, an antinode at the open end
    Explore

    Standing waves & harmonics

    A string fixed at both ends only resonates at its harmonics. Drag n to see the nodes, antinodes and how the wavelength changes.

    Explore

    Stationary waves

    y = y₁ + y₂

    Two waves superpose: where they reinforce you get antinodes, where they cancel, nodes.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    antiphase 反相 fǎn xiāng
    node 波节 bō jié
    progressive waves 行波 xíng bō
    progressive wave 行波 xíng bō
    stationary wave 驻波 zhù bō
    reflected 反射 fǎn shè
    wavelength 波长 bō cháng
    antinode 波腹 bō fù
    fundamental 基频 jī pín
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    resonance tube 共鸣管 gòng míng guǎn
    8.2

    Diffraction

    Syllabus
    1. explain the meaning of the term diffraction
    2. show an understanding of experiments that demonstrate diffraction including the qualitative effect of the gap width relative to the wavelength of the wave; for example diffraction of water waves in a ripple tank

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Diffraction 衍射 is the spreading of a wave after it passes through a gap or around an obstacle 障碍物. All waves diffract — water, sound, light, microwaves.

    For the two-mark "state what is meant by diffraction": the spreading of a wave as it passes through a gap (an aperture) or around the edge of an obstacle, into the region behind it. Diffraction changes the direction the wave travels in, but not its speed, frequency or wavelength.

    The amount of spreading depends on the ratio of wavelength to gap width:

    • gap much wider than $\lambda$: very little spreading; the wave goes nearly straight through.
    • gap about the size of $\lambda$: a lot of spreading; the wave fans out.
    • gap smaller than $\lambda$: very strong spreading; the gap acts almost like a point source.

    Show this with water waves in a ripple tank 水波槽: straight waves meet a barrier with a gap, and the waves curve more as the gap is made narrower. The same idea is why you can hear someone around a corner (speech has $\lambda$ near 1 m, close to the gap size) but cannot see them (visible light has $\lambda \sim 500\ \text{nm}$, far smaller than the gap).

    For the strongest spreading the gap should be about one wavelength wide. So to increase the diffraction of a given wave, make the gap narrower; for a given gap, use a longer wavelength, which means a lower frequency. Radio waves of wavelength $1.5\ \text{km}$ diffract around a mountain and reach an aerial behind it; microwaves of $1.5\ \text{cm}$ do not. Sound of $0.44\ \text{kHz}$ in air has $\lambda = 330 / 440 = 0.75\ \text{m}$, so features of about $0.75\ \text{m}$ diffract it most, and of the sounds passing through a doorway $0.80\ \text{m}$ wide the low frequencies spread out most. Making the gap many wavelengths wide, or raising the frequency, reduces the spreading.

    Straight water waves in a ripple tank meeting a barrier with a gap: through a wide gap (a) they pass almost straight, through a narrow gap (b) they spread out in curved wavefronts
    Diffraction in a ripple tank — a wide gap (a) spreads the waves little, a narrow gap (b) much more
    Explore

    Waves adding and cancelling

    Two overlapping waves add where they are in phase and cancel where out of phase — change the phase to see the result. This is what makes diffraction patterns.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    diffraction 衍射 yǎn shè
    obstacle 障碍物 zhàng ài wù
    ripple tank 水波槽 shuǐ bō cáo
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    8.3

    Interference

    Syllabus
    1. understand the terms interference and coherence
    2. show an understanding of experiments that demonstrate two-source interference using water waves in a ripple tank, sound, light and microwaves
    3. understand the conditions required if two-source interference fringes are to be observed
    4. recall and use $\lambda = ax / D$ for double-slit interference using light

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Two-slit interference
    An iridescent soap bubble
    The shifting colours on a soap bubble come from the interference of light.

    Interference 干涉 is the superposition of two coherent 相干 waves to give a steady pattern of high-amplitude regions (constructive) and low-amplitude regions (destructive).

    Overlapping circular wavefronts from two coherent point sources, with blue dots marking where crest meets crest and lines of maximum displacement fanning out from between the sources
    Two coherent sources give lines of maximum displacement where crests meet crests
    A real ripple-tank photograph: two sets of circular water waves from two side-by-side sources overlap, leaving calm lines (cancellation) fanning out between the two bright sets of ripples
    The same effect in a real ripple tank — two coherent sources give a steady interference pattern

    Coherence

    Two sources are coherent when they emit waves with a constant phase difference (which also needs the same frequency). Two separate lamps are not coherent — their phase changes randomly, so any pattern flickers too fast to see and you get only an average.

    The one-mark definition: coherent waves have a constant phase difference, which requires the same frequency. They need not be in phase with each other: two coherent sources emitting $180°$ apart give a pattern whose central line is a minimum. Two separate lasers, or a lamp and a laser, are not coherent even when their frequencies happen to match, so no steady pattern forms.

    To make coherent light from one source, pass it through two slits 狭缝 in a double-slit 双缝 setup. Both slits are lit by the same wavefront, so the two beams keep a fixed phase relationship.

    Conditions for a clear pattern

    To see two-source fringes you need:

    1. two coherent sources (constant phase difference).
    2. roughly equal amplitudes (or the dark regions are not very dark).
    3. the waves overlap where you look.
    4. for light (a transverse wave), the same plane of polarisation 偏振.

    In practice, for light: a single slit (or a laser) makes the two slits coherent; the slits are narrow, so each diffracts the light into the region where the two beams overlap; and the slits are close together with the screen far away, so that the fringes are wide enough to see.

    Path difference

    For two coherent sources, what happens at a point depends on the path difference 路程差 $\Delta x$ between the two waves arriving there:

    • constructive: $\Delta x = n\lambda$ (for whole numbers $n = 0, 1, 2, \ldots$).
    • destructive: $\Delta x = (n + \tfrac{1}{2})\lambda$.

    The path difference fixes the phase difference: one wavelength of path is $360°$. Waves that have travelled $100\ \text{cm}$ and $80\ \text{cm}$ from two in-phase sources of wavelength $8.0\ \text{cm}$ arrive with a path difference of $2.5\lambda$, a phase difference of $180°$, and cancel; microwaves of wavelength $4\ \text{cm}$ whose paths differ by $6\ \text{cm}$ ($1.5\lambda$) give a minimum, of zero intensity only if the two amplitudes are equal. Lowering both source frequencies equally lengthens the wavelength, so the same path difference is a smaller number of wavelengths and the point is no longer a minimum.

    Two coherent sources X and Y and a point Z, with the two paths XZ and YZ drawn; the path difference is XZ minus YZ, a whole number of wavelengths for a maximum and an odd number of half-wavelengths for a minimum
    What happens at Z depends on the path difference XZ − YZ, measured in wavelengths

    Double-slit (Young's) experiment

    For two slits a distance $a$ apart, with a screen a distance $D$ away (assume $D \gg a$), light of wavelength $\lambda$ makes fringes on the screen.

    Monochromatic light through a single slit then a double slit a apart; diffracted light from each slit overlaps to form an interference pattern on a screen a distance D away, with fringe spacing x
    Young's double-slit experiment — the single slit makes the two slits coherent sources

    The fringe spacing 条纹间距 $x$ (one fringe 条纹 to the next) is

    $$\lambda = \frac{a x}{D}, \qquad x = \frac{\lambda D}{a}.$$

    Bright fringes (maximum 极大) are where the path difference is a whole number of $\lambda$; dark fringes (minimum 极小) where it is $(n + \tfrac{1}{2})\lambda$. The fringes are equally spaced.

    To make the fringe spacing smaller: increase $a$ (slits further apart), reduce $D$ (screen closer), or use a shorter $\lambda$ (bluer light).

    Explain how the pattern of bright and dark fringes is formed (three marks): the light diffracts at each slit; the two diffracted beams overlap and superpose; where the path difference from the two slits is a whole number of wavelengths the waves arrive in phase and interfere constructively, giving a bright fringe, and where it is an odd number of half-wavelengths they arrive in antiphase and interfere destructively, giving a dark fringe. A brighter source makes the bright fringes brighter but does not change their spacing; changing to blue light makes the spacing smaller, so to keep the same spacing the slits must be moved closer together; making each slit narrower increases the diffraction, so fringes appear across a wider region, with the spacing unchanged.

    Worked example. In a double-slit experiment the slits are $0.50\ \text{mm}$ apart and lit by light of wavelength $600\ \text{nm}$. The screen is $2.0\ \text{m}$ away. Find the fringe spacing.

    $$x = \frac{\lambda D}{a} = \frac{(600 \times 10^{-9})(2.0)}{0.50 \times 10^{-3}} = 2.4 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m} = 2.4\ \text{mm}.$$

    Worked example. Red light of wavelength $680\ \text{nm}$ falls on slits $0.16\ \text{mm}$ apart. The distance between the centres of the first and ninth dark fringes is $3.2\ \text{cm}$. Find the distance $D$ to the screen.

    Eight fringe spacings make $3.2\ \text{cm}$, so $x = 4.0\ \text{mm}$ and $D = ax / \lambda = (0.16 \times 10^{-3})(4.0 \times 10^{-3}) / (680 \times 10^{-9}) = 0.94\ \text{m}$. On a screen $5.0\ \text{cm}$ wide centred on the pattern, with $x = 2.4\ \text{mm}$, ten bright fringes fit on each side of the central one: $21$ in all. A graph of $x$ against $a$ is a curve falling as $1/a$; a graph of $x$ against $\lambda$ (or against $D$) is a straight line through the origin with gradient $D/a$ (or $\lambda/a$), from which $a$ can be found.

    Explore

    Interference

    y = y₁ + y₂

    In phase → constructive (bright/loud); antiphase → destructive (dark/quiet).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    coherent 相干 xiāng gān
    interference 干涉 gān shè
    maximum 极大 jí dà
    minimum 极小 jí xiǎo
    slit 狭缝 xiá fèng
    double-slit 双缝 shuāng fèng
    fringe 条纹 tiáo wén
    polarisation 偏振 piān zhèn
    path difference 路程差 lù chéng chā
    fringe spacing 条纹间距 tiáo wén jiān jù
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    8.4

    Diffraction grating

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use $d \sin \theta = n\lambda$
    2. describe the use of a diffraction grating to determine the wavelength of light (the structure and use of the spectrometer are not included)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A diffraction grating 衍射光栅 has many equally spaced slits — often hundreds or thousands per millimetre. Each slit is a coherent source. A maximum is seen at angle $\theta$ from the normal 法线 to the grating when

    $$d \sin\theta = n \lambda,$$

    where $d$ is the slit spacing 缝间距 (centre to centre), $n = 0, \pm 1, \pm 2, \ldots$ is the order 级次, and $\lambda$ is the wavelength.

    Worked example. A diffraction grating has $500$ lines per mm. Light of wavelength $600\ \text{nm}$ is shone normally on it. Find the angle of the first-order ($n = 1$) maximum.

    The slit spacing is $d = \dfrac{1}{500}\ \text{mm} = 2.0 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{m}$, so

    $$\sin\theta = \frac{n\lambda}{d} = \frac{600 \times 10^{-9}}{2.0 \times 10^{-6}} = 0.30 \quad\Rightarrow\quad \theta \approx 17°.$$

    Compared with the double slit, a grating gives much sharper maxima, because more slits add together — every other direction is cancelled by many slits.

    To describe the diffraction at the grating: the light spreads out (diffracts) at every slit, and the waves from all the slits superpose; in the directions where the path difference between neighbouring slits is a whole number of wavelengths they are all in phase, so sharp maxima form there and almost nothing in between. A graph of intensity against angle is a set of narrow peaks at $\theta = 0$ and at $\pm\theta_{1}, \pm\theta_{2}, \ldots$, where $\sin\theta_{n} = n\lambda/d$: equally spaced in $\sin\theta$, so slightly further apart in $\theta$ at the higher orders.

    A graph of intensity against angle for a diffraction grating: narrow sharp peaks of similar height at zero and at plus and minus theta one and theta two, labelled n = 0, plus or minus 1, plus or minus 2, with almost no intensity between them
    Intensity against angle for a grating: sharp maxima where $d\sin\theta = n\lambda$

    Worked example. Light of wavelength $680\ \text{nm}$ is incident normally on a grating with $450$ lines per mm. Find the angle between the two second-order maxima.

    $d = 1/450\ \text{mm} = 2.22 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{m}$, so $\sin\theta_{2} = 2 \times 680 \times 10^{-9} / (2.22 \times 10^{-6}) = 0.612$ and $\theta_{2} = 37.7°$; the two second-order beams are $2\theta_{2} = 75°$ apart.

    A parallel beam of monochromatic light striking a diffraction grating and splitting into several sharp beams that reach a screen at different angles (the orders)
    A diffraction grating splits monochromatic light into sharp maxima on a screen

    Slit spacing from "lines per mm"

    If a grating has $N$ lines per millimetre, then $d = 1/N$ millimetres $= 10^{-3}/N$ metres. For $450$ lines per mm, $d = 1/450\ \text{mm} \approx 2.22\ \mu\text{m}$.

    Highest order

    For a given grating and wavelength, $\sin\theta = n\lambda/d$ cannot be more than $1$, so the highest order seen is

    $$n_{\text{max}} = \left\lfloor \frac{d}{\lambda} \right\rfloor.$$

    If $d/\lambda = 3.27$, orders up to $n = 3$ exist; $n = 4$ would need $\sin\theta > 1$ and is not seen.

    So the total number of maxima on a wide screen is $2n_{\text{max}} + 1$: for $700\ \text{nm}$ light and $400$ lines per mm, $d/\lambda = 3.57$, so $n_{\text{max}} = 3$ and seven beams are seen. A shorter wavelength gives more orders at smaller angles. With white light every order except the zero order is a spectrum, violet nearest the centre and red furthest out, because $\theta$ grows with $\lambda$; the zero order stays white. Two wavelengths give a maximum at the same angle when $n_{1}\lambda_{1} = n_{2}\lambda_{2}$: the third order of $400\ \text{nm}$ coincides with the second order of $600\ \text{nm}$.

    Finding $\lambda$ with a grating

    Shine parallel light of unknown wavelength straight at the grating. Measure the angle $\theta_{1}$ of the first-order maximum from the centre. Then $\lambda = d \sin\theta_{1}$. Repeating for higher orders and averaging reduces error.

    Measure the angle between the first-order maxima on the two sides and halve it, which cancels any error in setting the zero; higher orders give larger angles and so a smaller percentage uncertainty; and plotting $\sin\theta$ against $n$ for several orders gives a straight line through the origin of gradient $\lambda/d$, so $\lambda = Gd$ (or, for a known wavelength, $d = \lambda/G$). Two things must be right: $\theta$ is measured from the normal to the grating, not from its surface, and $d$ is the distance between adjacent lines, so $400$ lines per mm means $d = 2.5\ \mu\text{m}$, never $400$.

    Explore

    Why the grating gives sharp maxima

    Two waves add when in phase and cancel when out of phase — change the phase and watch the resultant. A grating's many slits make the bright fringes razor-sharp.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    diffraction grating 衍射光栅 yǎn shè guāng shān
    normal 法线 fǎ xiàn
    slit spacing 缝间距 fèng jiān jù
    order 级次 jí cì
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    8.4

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    principle of superposition when two or more waves meet at a point, the resultant displacement is the sum of the displacements of the individual waves
    stationary wave the pattern formed when two progressive waves of the same frequency and speed travel in opposite directions and superpose, with nodes and antinodes that do not move
    node a point on a stationary wave where the displacement is always zero
    antinode a point on a stationary wave where the amplitude is a maximum
    diffraction the spreading of a wave as it passes through a gap or around the edge of an obstacle
    interference the superposition of waves from coherent sources, giving a steady pattern of maxima and minima
    coherence waves that have a constant phase difference (and so the same frequency)
    path difference the difference between the distances travelled by two waves from their sources to a point
    fringe spacing the distance between the centres of two adjacent bright (or dark) fringes
    order of a maximum the whole number $n$ in $d\sin\theta = n\lambda$, the number of wavelengths of path difference between adjacent slits
    8.4

    Exam tips

    • Two-source interference: constructive when path difference $= n\lambda$, destructive when $= (n + \tfrac{1}{2})\lambda$; the sources must be coherent.
    • Double slit: $\lambda = ax/D$; diffraction grating: $d\sin\theta = n\lambda$ — know every symbol.
    • On a stationary wave mark nodes and antinodes; adjacent nodes are $\lambda/2$ apart; it stores energy but does not transfer it.
    • A stationary wave needs two waves of the same frequency travelling in opposite directions.

    Common mistakes

    • Adding amplitudes or intensities in the principle of superposition. Displacements add; the intensity then follows from the resultant amplitude squared.
    • "Adjacent nodes are one wavelength apart." Half a wavelength; a node to the next antinode is a quarter.
    • Using $d =$ lines per millimetre in $d\sin\theta = n\lambda$. Invert: $d = 10^{-3}/N$ metres.
    • Measuring $\theta$ from the grating surface, or forgetting that the angle between the two first-order beams is $2\theta_{1}$.
    • Writing "in phase" for coherent. Coherent means a constant phase difference; the sources may be permanently out of step.
    • Saying the fringe spacing changes when the source is made brighter, or that narrower slits change the spacing. Brightness and slit width change the contrast and the number of visible fringes, not $x = \lambda D/a$.
  • 9

    Electricity

    9.1

    Electric current

    Syllabus
    1. understand that an electric current is a flow of charge carriers
    2. understand that the charge on charge carriers is quantised
    3. recall and use $Q = It$
    4. use, for a current-carrying conductor, the expression $I = Anvq$, where $n$ is the number density of charge carriers

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An electric current 电流 is a flow of charge carriers 载流子. In a metal the carriers are negative conduction electrons 电子; in an electrolyte 电解质 they are positive and negative ions 离子; in a semiconductor 半导体 they may be electrons or "holes" 空穴. The conventional current 常规电流 direction is the way positive charge would flow — opposite to the real flow of electrons in a wire.

    Charge

    Charge is quantised 量子化: the smallest free unit of charge is the elementary charge 基本电荷

    $$e = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}.$$

    Every free charge in this syllabus is a whole-number multiple of $e$. The unit of charge is the coulomb 库仑, $\text{C}$.

    So a particle can carry $4.8 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$ (three electrons' worth) or $-2.4 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{C}$ (fifteen), but never $1.1 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$ or $6.4 \times 10^{-20}\ \text{C}$; a set of measurements that gives a charge carrier $2.5 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$ cannot be right, because that is not a multiple of $e$. For the one-mark definitions: an electric current is a flow of charge carriers; the coulomb is the charge that passes a point in one second when the current is one ampere (an ampere multiplied by a second); a charge carrier can be an electron, a proton, an ion or an $\alpha$-particle, but never a neutron.

    Current as the rate of flow of charge

    If charge $Q$ passes a point in time $t$, the current is

    $$I = \frac{Q}{t}, \qquad Q = It.$$

    Unit of current: ampere, $\text{A}$ ($= \text{C s}^{-1}$). For a changing current, the charge that has flowed in a time is the area under an $I$$t$ graph.

    Worked example. A current of $0.50\ \text{A}$ flows for $2.0$ minutes. Find the charge that passes, and how many electrons this represents. ($e = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$.)

    $$Q = It = 0.50 \times 120 = 60\ \text{C}, \qquad N = \frac{Q}{e} = \frac{60}{1.60 \times 10^{-19}} \approx 3.8 \times 10^{20}.$$

    The same two lines answer "how many electrons pass in $10$ hours at $4.0\ \text{mA}$" (convert the time to seconds: $N = It/e = 4.0 \times 10^{-3} \times 36\,000 / (1.60 \times 10^{-19}) = 9.0 \times 10^{20}$) and, the other way round, "the average current when $6.0 \times 10^{23}$ electrons pass in $24$ hours" ($I = Ne/t = 1.1\ \text{A}$). A beam of $\alpha$-particles carries a current too: each carries $2e$, so a beam current of $6.9 \times 10^{-9}\ \text{A}$ is $6.9 \times 10^{-9} / (2 \times 1.60 \times 10^{-19}) = 2.2 \times 10^{10}$ particles per second. A lightning strike that transfers $1 \times 10^{20}$ electrons in $30\ \mu\text{s}$ is a current of $Ne/t = 5.3 \times 10^{5}\ \text{A}$.

    Drift velocity equation

    For a uniform conductor of cross-section area $A$, with $n$ charge carriers per unit volume (the number density 数密度), each carrying charge $q$, moving with average drift velocity 漂移速度 $v$:

    $$I = A n v q.$$
    Two conductors of cross-section A: in (a) positive carriers +q drift the same way as the conventional current I; in (b) electrons -q drift the opposite way to I. Drift velocity v is shown along the axis.
    Charge carriers drifting inside a conductor: positive carriers drift with $I$, electrons against it

    Worked example. A copper wire of cross-sectional area $1.0 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{m}^{2}$ carries a current of $5.0\ \text{A}$. Copper has $n = 8.5 \times 10^{28}$ free electrons per $\text{m}^{3}$. Find the drift velocity. ($e = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$.)

    Rearranging $I = Anvq$ gives $v = \dfrac{I}{Anq}$:

    $$v = \frac{5.0}{(1.0 \times 10^{-6})(8.5 \times 10^{28})(1.60 \times 10^{-19})} \approx 3.7 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The electrons drift very slowly — less than a millimetre per second.

    Two "show that" steps that often precede this calculation. The number density of a metal with one free electron per atom is $n = \dfrac{\text{density} \times N_{\text{A}}}{\text{molar mass}}$: for copper, $8.9 \times 10^{3} \times 6.02 \times 10^{23} / 0.0635 = 8.5 \times 10^{28}\ \text{m}^{-3}$. And the time for an electron to drift the length of a wire is $t = L / v$: at $3.7 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ a $2.0\ \text{m}$ wire takes $5\,400\ \text{s}$, an hour and a half, even though the current is established almost instantly. Between them, the equation $I = Anvq$ is used as a ratio far more often than as a calculation:

    • two wires in series carry the same current; if wire Y has twice the diameter of X (four times the area) and the same metal, its electrons drift at a quarter of the speed. Two wires of the same length and diameter but different metals have drift speeds in the inverse ratio of their number densities.
    • a wire that narrows (a wedge, a tapered rod, a cable of thick and thin strands) carries the same current at every cross-section, so the drift speed rises where the area falls: $v \propto 1/A \propto 1/r^{2}$. A sketch of $v$ against distance along a tapering wire is a curve that rises more and more steeply towards the narrow end, not a straight line.
    • the p.d. across a uniform wire is proportional to its length at fixed current, because $V = IR = I\rho L / A$ with $I$, $\rho$ and $A$ constant.
    A conductor that narrows from a wide end X to a narrow end Y with current arrows of equal size along it: the drift is slow where the area is large and fast where the area is small, because the current is the same everywhere
    The same current everywhere, so the electrons drift faster where the wire is thinner

    Use this to compare currents:

    • a thinner wire (smaller $A$) at the same $I$ needs a faster drift $v$.
    • a semiconductor has far fewer free carriers than a metal (smaller $n$), so for the same $I$ the drift velocity is much larger.
    • in series 串联 components, $I$ is the same everywhere, so if $A$ stays the same but the material changes, $nv$ changes the other way.
    Explore

    Current, voltage and resistance

    Current is the rate of flow of charge. Raise the voltage and current rises; raise the resistance and it falls — I = V / R.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electric current 电流 diàn liú
    charge carrier 载流子 zài liú zǐ
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    electrolyte 电解质 diàn jiě zhì
    ion 离子 lí zi
    semiconductor 半导体 bàn dǎo tǐ
    holes 空穴 kōng xué
    hole 空穴 kōng xué
    conventional current 常规电流 cháng guī diàn liú
    quantised 量子化 liàng zǐ huà
    elementary charge 基本电荷 jī běn diàn hè
    coulomb 库仑 kù lún
    drift velocity 漂移速度 piāo yí sù dù
    number density 数密度 shù mì dù
    series 串联 chuàn lián
    Exercise sheet
    9.2

    Potential difference

    Syllabus
    1. define the potential difference across a component as the energy transferred per unit charge
    2. recall and use $V = W/Q$
    3. recall and use $P = VI$, $P = I^2R$ and $P = V^2/R$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The potential difference 电势差 (p.d.) across a component is the energy 能量 transferred per unit charge as that charge passes through it:

    $$V = \frac{W}{Q}.$$

    Unit: volt 伏特, $\text{V}$ ($= \text{J C}^{-1}$).

    If $1\ \text{J}$ of electrical energy changes into other forms (thermal, light, kinetic, …) when $1\ \text{C}$ of charge passes through a component, the p.d. across it is $1\ \text{V}$.

    The electromotive force 电动势 (e.m.f.) of a source is the energy given per unit charge by the source. The formula is the same as for p.d.; the difference is direction: e.m.f. is energy given to the charge by the change; p.d. is energy given up by the charge to the component.

    The definitions the examiner accepts: the potential difference across a component is the energy transferred (from electrical to other forms) per unit charge passing through it; the e.m.f. of a source is the energy transferred from other forms (chemical, in a cell) to electrical energy per unit charge in driving the charge round a complete circuit; one volt is one joule per coulomb. A battery "marked $9.0\ \text{V}$" therefore gives each coulomb $9.0\ \text{J}$ of electrical energy for the whole circuit, and the product of charge and p.d. is the energy transferred.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chā
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    volt 伏特 fú tè
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    9.2

    Electrical power

    High-voltage electricity pylons and power lines
    High-voltage power lines carry electrical energy across the country.

    Combining $V = W/Q$ and $I = Q/t$:

    $$P = \frac{W}{t} = V I.$$

    Using Ohm's law $V = IR$:

    $$P = V I = I^{2} R = \frac{V^{2}}{R}.$$

    Pick the form with the quantities you know. Examples:

    • two heaters of equal resistance — the one with the larger current gives more power 功率 ($P = I^{2}R$).
    • two resistors in parallel 并联 across the same voltage 电压 — the one with smaller $R$ gives more power ($P = V^{2}/R$).
    • a kettle marked "$2.4\ \text{kW}, 240\ \text{V}$" draws $I = P/V = 10\ \text{A}$ and has resistance $R = V^{2}/P = 24\ \Omega$.

    Energy transferred in time $t$ is $E = P t$.

    Worked example. Two lamps, P rated $250\ \text{V}$, $50\ \text{W}$ and Q rated $250\ \text{V}$, $200\ \text{W}$, are connected in series to a $250\ \text{V}$ supply. Which is brighter?

    Their resistances at the rated p.d. are $R = V^{2}/P$: $1250\ \Omega$ for P and $313\ \Omega$ for Q. In series they carry the same current, so $P = I^{2}R$ makes the larger resistance, lamp P, dissipate more power: the "weaker" lamp is the brighter one. In parallel the p.d. is the same across both and $P = V^{2}/R$ favours the smaller resistance: Q. "State and explain which resistor dissipates more power" is answered by naming the quantity the two share (current in series, p.d. in parallel) and the form of the power equation that uses it.

    Worked example. A supply delivers $2.4\ \text{kW}$ at $240\ \text{V}$ to a kettle through two cables of resistance $0.10\ \Omega$ each. Find the power lost in the cables.

    The current is $I = P/V = 10\ \text{A}$, so the cables dissipate $I^{2}R = 10^{2} \times 0.20 = 20\ \text{W}$, and the kettle receives $2380\ \text{W}$. The efficiency of a circuit that exists to power one component is that component's power divided by the total power from the supply: with $6.0\ \text{V}$ across a $0.86\ \Omega$ series resistor and $4.5\ \text{V}$ across the component at the same current, the efficiency is $4.5 / (6.0 + 4.5) = 43\%$. A thermistor across a fixed p.d. dissipates $P = V^{2}/R$, so as its temperature rises and $R$ falls, the power rises. A kettle draws about $10\ \text{A}$ from a $250\ \text{V}$ supply; a mobile phone charger a fraction of an ampere.

    Explore

    Electrical power

    P = VI

    At a fixed voltage, power is proportional to the current it drives.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    voltage 电压 diàn yā
    parallel 并联 bìng lián
    9.3

    Resistance and Ohm's law

    Syllabus
    1. define resistance
    2. recall and use $V = IR$
    3. sketch the $I\text{--}V$ characteristics of a metallic conductor at constant temperature, a semiconductor diode and a filament lamp
    4. explain that the resistance of a filament lamp increases as current increases because its temperature increases
    5. state Ohm's law
    6. recall and use $R = \rho L/A$
    7. understand that the resistance of a light-dependent resistor (LDR) decreases as the light intensity increases
    8. understand that the resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases (it will be assumed that thermistors have a negative temperature coefficient)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The resistance 电阻 $R$ of a component is

    $$R = \frac{V}{I}.$$

    Unit: ohm 欧姆, $\Omega$ ($= \text{V A}^{-1}$). Resistance depends on the conditions (such as temperature) when it is measured.

    Six real fixed resistors in a row on a white background, each a small barrel with metal wire leads and several coloured bands painted around it that code its resistance value
    Real fixed resistors — the coloured bands code the resistance in ohms

    Ohm's law

    A conductor obeys Ohm's law 欧姆定律 when the current through it is proportional to the p.d. across it, as long as the conditions (especially temperature) stay constant. For such a conductor $R$ is constant and the $I$$V$ graph is a straight line through the origin.

    Ohm's law is an experimental result, not a definition. The definition $R = V/I$ works for any component; only ohmic ones have constant $R$.

    For the marks: resistance is the ratio of the potential difference across a component to the current in it; the ohm is the resistance of a component in which a p.d. of one volt produces a current of one ampere (a volt per ampere); Ohm's law states that the current in a metallic conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference across it, provided that its temperature (and other physical conditions) remains constant. Of several $I$$V$ graphs, only a straight line through the origin obeys Ohm's law; a straight line that misses the origin, or any curve, does not.

    $I$$V$ characteristics

    You should be able to sketch these:

    • metal wire at constant temperature — a straight line through the origin (constant $R$). Reversing the p.d. drives the current the other way, giving a straight line in both directions.
    • filament lamp 灯丝灯泡 — through the origin, steep at first, then flatter as $V$ (and $I$) grow. Reason: more current heats the filament, so its resistance rises and the gradient $1/R$ falls.
    • semiconductor diode 二极管 — almost no current for negative $V$ or small positive $V$. Above a "switch-on" voltage (about $0.7\ \text{V}$ for silicon), the current rises sharply.

    Explain the shape of the filament lamp's line (three marks): as the current increases the filament's temperature rises; the lattice ions vibrate with larger amplitude, so the free electrons collide with them more often; each collision takes energy from the electrons, so the resistance increases; on the graph the ratio $V/I$ grows and the gradient falls. Run backwards for "the current decreases": the temperature falls, so the resistance falls. Two things to read off any characteristic. The resistance at a point is $V/I$ for that point, never the gradient of a curve, so a diode's resistance is very large (infinite, in practice) up to the switch-on p.d. and then falls steeply as $V$ rises further, and of four components at the same p.d. the one with the smallest current has the greatest resistance. And when a lamp (or a diode) is in series with a resistor, the two carry the same current and their p.d.s add: read the current from the component's curve at its own p.d., then use $V = IR$ for the resistor, and the supply p.d. is the sum.

    I–V graph for an ohmic conductor: a straight line through the origin in both directions, so resistance is constant
    $I$$V$ characteristic of an ohmic conductor (metal wire at constant temperature)
    I–V graph for a filament lamp: an S-shaped curve through the origin, steep near zero and flattening at high voltage as the filament heats and its resistance rises
    $I$$V$ characteristic of a filament lamp
    I–V graph for a diode: current stays near zero in reverse and below the switch-on voltage, then rises sharply above about 0.7 V
    $I$$V$ characteristic of a semiconductor diode

    Resistivity

    For a uniform conductor of length $L$ and cross-section area $A$,

    $$R = \frac{\rho L}{A}.$$

    $\rho$ is the resistivity 电阻率, a property of the material, with unit $\Omega\ \text{m}$. Doubling the length doubles $R$; doubling the area halves it; halving the diameter quarters the area and so makes $R$ four times bigger.

    Worked example. A copper wire of length $2.0\ \text{m}$ and cross-sectional area $1.7 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}^{2}$ has resistivity $1.7 \times 10^{-8}\ \Omega\ \text{m}$. Find its resistance.

    $$R = \frac{\rho L}{A} = \frac{(1.7 \times 10^{-8})(2.0)}{1.7 \times 10^{-7}} = 0.20\ \Omega.$$

    Typical values: copper at room temperature $\rho \sim 1.7 \times 10^{-8}\ \Omega\ \text{m}$; an insulator 绝缘体 $\rho \sim 10^{15}\ \Omega\ \text{m}$ or more.

    Two conductors of equal cross-section A: one of length L with resistance R, one of length 2L with resistance 2R. Resistance is proportional to length.
    A longer conductor has more resistance — doubling $L$ doubles $R$
    Two conductors of equal length L: one of cross-section area A with resistance R, one of area 2A with half the resistance. Resistance is inversely proportional to area.
    A wider conductor has less resistance — doubling $A$ halves $R$

    The resistivity of a metal rises with temperature (more lattice vibration 晶格振动 scatters 散射 the electrons), which is why the filament lamp's $I$$V$ line curves.

    Most resistivity questions are ratios. Stretching a wire keeps its volume ($A \times L$) constant, so if the length becomes $k$ times longer the area becomes $k$ times smaller and $R = \rho L / A$ becomes $k^{2}$ times larger: a wire three times as long (same mass, same metal) has nine times the resistance, and a wire whose diameter falls to $0.940$ of its value has its area multiplied by $0.884$, its length divided by $0.884$, and its resistance multiplied by $1/0.884^{2} = 1.28$.

    A wire of length L and area A with resistance R, and below it the same wire stretched to length 2L, its area halved to A/2, with resistance 4R: at constant volume the resistance goes as the square of the length
    Stretched at constant volume: twice the length, half the area, four times the resistance

    Worked example. A copper lightning rod of resistance $9.6\ \Omega$ and length $20\ \text{m}$ has resistivity $1.7 \times 10^{-8}\ \Omega\ \text{m}$. Find its radius.

    $A = \rho L / R = 1.7 \times 10^{-8} \times 20 / 9.6 = 3.5 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{m}^{2}$, and $r = \sqrt{A / \pi} = 1.1 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{m}$. Doubling the radius (same length) quarters the resistance. The other standard ratios: strands in parallel — seven identical strands share the current, so the cable's resistance is one seventh of one strand's; two wires of the same resistance where one metal has twice the resistivity need the second wire to have twice the area (a diameter $\sqrt{2}$ times larger) for the same length; a wire's resistance per unit length, $0.92\ \Omega\ \text{m}^{-1}$, multiplied by its area, $5.3 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}^{2}$, is its resistivity, $4.9 \times 10^{-7}\ \Omega\ \text{m}$; and a cylinder of conducting putty $60\ \text{mm}$ long and $20\ \text{mm}$ across, or a cube of side $a$ ($R = \rho a / a^{2} = \rho / a$), uses the same $R = \rho L / A$ with the shape's own length and end area. When the wire is held under tension, $R_{0} = \rho L / A$ still gives its resistance, and a stretch that lengthens it and thins it raises $R$ for both reasons. Because $\rho = RA/L = R\pi d^{2}/(4L)$, the percentage uncertainty in a measured resistivity is the sum of the percentage uncertainties in $R$ and $L$ plus twice that in $d$.

    Explore

    What resistance depends on: R = ρL/A

    A longer wire has more resistance; a thicker one (bigger area) has less. Change the length, area and metal.

    Explore

    Resistance (Ohm's law)

    V = R·I

    Ohm's law: voltage is proportional to current — the gradient is the resistance R.

    Explore

    Ohm's law: V = IR

    V = aI

    Drag the resistance. For an ohmic conductor voltage is proportional to current — a straight line whose gradient is the resistance.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    ohm 欧姆 ōu mǔ
    Ohm's law 欧姆定律 ōu mǔ dìng lǜ
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    filament lamp 灯丝灯泡 dēng sī dēng pào
    semiconductor diode 二极管 èr jí guǎn
    diode 二极管 èr jí guǎn
    resistivity 电阻率 diàn zǔ lǜ
    insulator 绝缘体 jué yuán tǐ
    lattice vibration 晶格振动 jīng gé zhèn dòng
    scatters 散射 sǎn shè
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    9.3

    Light-dependent resistor (LDR)

    A light-dependent resistor 光敏电阻 (LDR) is a semiconductor whose resistance falls as the light intensity rises. In bright light $R$ may be a few hundred $\Omega$; in the dark it can be in the megaohms. LDRs are used in light-sensing circuits (street lamps, camera light meters). Here the light intensity 光强 controls the resistance.

    Log-log graph: resistance in kilo-ohms on the y-axis falling from 1000 to 0.1 as light intensity in lux rises from 0.1 to 10000
    Resistance of an LDR decreases as light intensity increases
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    light-dependent resistor 光敏电阻 guāng mǐn diàn zǔ
    light intensity 光强 guāng qiáng
    9.3

    Thermistor

    In this syllabus a thermistor 热敏电阻 has a negative temperature coefficient 负温度系数: its resistance falls as its temperature rises. This is useful for sensing temperature — put it in a potential divider 分压器 and the output voltage changes with temperature.

    Graph of resistance in ohms versus temperature in degrees Celsius: a steeply falling curve from about 3800 ohms at 0 degrees C down to about 650 ohms at 50 degrees C
    Resistance of a thermistor falls as temperature rises

    This is the opposite of a metal: in a semiconductor, more thermal energy frees more charge carriers, and this matters more than the extra scattering.

    A sketch of a thermistor's resistance against temperature starts at $R_{0}$ at $0\ °\text{C}$ and falls along a curve that flattens: the fall is not linear, which is the disadvantage of a thermistor as a thermometer (its scale is not uniform, so it needs calibrating). When the light on an LDR is increased, or a thermistor is warmed, its resistance falls, the current in its circuit rises, and the p.d. across it (in series with a fixed resistor) falls while the p.d. across the resistor rises; a fixed resistor and a metal wire at constant temperature keep their resistance, and a filament lamp's rises with current.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    thermistor 热敏电阻 rè mǐn diàn zǔ
    negative temperature coefficient 负温度系数 fù wēn dù xì shù
    potential divider 分压器 fēn yā qì
    9.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    electric current a flow of charge carriers
    coulomb the charge passing a point in one second when the current is one ampere
    potential difference the energy transferred from electrical to other forms per unit charge passing through a component
    electromotive force (e.m.f.) the energy transferred from other forms to electrical energy per unit charge, by a source driving charge round a complete circuit
    volt one joule per coulomb
    resistance the ratio of the potential difference across a component to the current in it
    ohm the resistance of a component in which a potential difference of one volt produces a current of one ampere
    Ohm's law the current in a metallic conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference across it, provided its temperature remains constant
    resistivity the constant $\rho$ in $R = \rho L / A$, a property of the material with unit $\Omega\ \text{m}$
    number density the number of charge carriers per unit volume of the conductor
    9.3

    Exam tips

    • Use $I = Q/t$, $V = W/Q$ (energy per unit charge) and $P = VI = I^2 R = V^2/R$.
    • Ohm's law ($V = IR$) applies only to an ohmic conductor at constant temperature — a filament lamp is non-ohmic.
    • Sketch and interpret the $I$-$V$ characteristics of a resistor, filament lamp and diode.
    • An LDR's resistance falls with light; a thermistor's falls as temperature rises.

    Common mistakes

    • Taking the resistance from the gradient of a curved $I$$V$ graph. Resistance is $V/I$ at the point; only for a straight line through the origin is it the reciprocal of the gradient.
    • Leaving a time in minutes or hours in $Q = It$. Convert to seconds first.
    • Saying the filament lamp's resistance rises "because of the voltage". The chain is current, temperature, ion vibration, more collisions, more resistance.
    • Forgetting that a stretched wire changes in two ways. At constant volume the area falls as the length rises, so $R \propto L^{2}$.
    • Using the diameter as the radius in $A = \pi r^{2}$, or leaving $\text{mm}^{2}$ unconverted.
    • Comparing powers with the wrong form. Series components share the current, so use $I^{2}R$; parallel components share the p.d., so use $V^{2}/R$.
  • 10

    D.C. circuits

    10.1

    Practical circuits

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use the circuit symbols shown in section 6 of this syllabus
    2. draw and interpret circuit diagrams containing the circuit symbols shown in section 6 of this syllabus
    3. define and use the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a source as energy transferred per unit charge in driving charge around a complete circuit
    4. distinguish between e.m.f. and potential difference (p.d.) in terms of energy considerations
    5. understand the effects of the internal resistance of a source of e.m.f. on the terminal potential difference

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    e.m.f. and p.d.

    The electromotive force 电动势 (e.m.f.) $\varepsilon$ of a source is the energy 能量 given to each unit of charge by the source as it drives the charge around a full circuit. Unit: volt.

    The potential difference 电势差 (p.d.) across a component is the energy changed from electrical to other forms by each unit of charge as it passes through that component.

    Both are in volts; they differ in energy direction:

    • e.m.f. — energy put into the circuit by the source (chemical → electrical in a battery, mechanical → electrical in a generator).
    • p.d. — energy taken out of the electrical form (electrical → thermal in a resistor, → light in a lamp, → kinetic in a motor).

    The examiner's wording is fixed. e.m.f. is "the energy transferred per unit charge by the source in driving charge round a complete circuit"; p.d. is "the energy transferred per unit charge from electrical to other forms". Both are energy per charge, so the volt is a joule per coulomb ($1\ \text{V} = 1\ \text{J C}^{-1}$). Statements that are always true of a source: the e.m.f. is the terminal p.d. when no current flows; the total energy it gives to a charge $Q$ is $\varepsilon Q$. The name is a trap: an electromotive "force" is not a force and is not measured in newtons.

    Worked example. A cell of e.m.f. $\varepsilon$ and internal resistance $r$ drives a charge $Q$ round a circuit whose terminal p.d. is $V$. Compare the energy transferred by the cell with the energy dissipated outside it.

    The cell transfers $\varepsilon Q$ in total; the external circuit receives $VQ$. Since $V = \varepsilon - Ir < \varepsilon$ whenever a current flows, $VQ < \varepsilon Q$ — the difference $(\varepsilon - V)Q = IrQ$ is the energy turned to heat inside the cell.

    In the lab you often build a circuit on a breadboard 面包板 (a board with rows of holes that connect components without soldering) and measure currents and p.d.s with a multimeter 万用表.

    An empty 400-point breadboard seen from above: two long rails marked with a red and a blue line down the edges, and short rows of five holes filling the middle
    The bare board: the two long rails carry power, and each short row of holes is joined underneath
    A small circuit on a breadboard: a resistor and a glowing red LED are plugged into the rows, wired to a microcontroller, while the red and black probes of a multimeter touch the circuit to take a reading
    A real circuit on a breadboard, being measured with a multimeter

    Internal resistance

    A real source has some internal resistance 内阻 $r$ — usually the resistance of the electrolyte 电解质 in a cell 电池, or the wire windings in a generator. When current $I$ flows, an internal p.d. of $Ir$ is "lost" inside the source, so the terminal p.d. 端电压 across the outside circuit is

    $$V_{\text{terminal}} = \varepsilon - I r.$$

    So:

    • no current (open circuit 开路, $I = 0$): the terminal p.d. equals the e.m.f.
    • larger current: the terminal p.d. falls.
    • short circuit 短路 ($R_{\text{external}} \to 0$): $I = \varepsilon / r$, a large current, with all the energy turned to heat inside the source.

    To measure $r$, change the outside resistance and plot $V_{\text{terminal}}$ against $I$: the line has $y$-intercept $\varepsilon$ and gradient $-r$.

    Worked example. A cell of e.m.f. $1.5\ \text{V}$ and internal resistance $0.50\ \Omega$ is connected to a $2.5\ \Omega$ resistor. Find the current and the terminal p.d.

    The e.m.f. drives the current through both resistances: $I = \dfrac{\varepsilon}{R + r} = \dfrac{1.5}{2.5 + 0.50} = 0.50\ \text{A}$. Then

    $$V_{\text{terminal}} = \varepsilon - Ir = 1.5 - 0.50 \times 0.50 = 1.25\ \text{V}.$$
    A circuit with a cell drawn as e.m.f. E in series with internal resistance r inside a dashed box, connected to a voltmeter across the terminals, an ammeter, and a variable resistor
    Circuit for measuring the e.m.f. and internal resistance of a cell
    A graph of terminal p.d. V against current I: a straight line starting at E on the V-axis and sloping down with gradient minus r
    Terminal p.d. against current — the intercept is the e.m.f. and the gradient is minus the internal resistance

    The power 功率 given to the outside load is $P_{\text{ext}} = (\varepsilon - Ir) I$; the power lost inside is $P_{\text{int}} = I^{2} r$; the total power from the source is $\varepsilon I$.

    The efficiency 效率 of the source is $\dfrac{P_{\text{ext}}}{\varepsilon I} = \dfrac{VI}{\varepsilon I} = \dfrac{V}{\varepsilon} = \dfrac{R}{R + r}$: a large load resistance wastes little energy inside the source.

    Worked example. A cell of e.m.f. $2.0\ \text{V}$ and internal resistance $0.40\ \Omega$ drives a current of $1.5\ \text{A}$ through a wire. Show that the terminal p.d. is $1.4\ \text{V}$ and find the percentage efficiency with which the cell supplies power to the wire.

    $V = \varepsilon - Ir = 2.0 - 1.5 \times 0.40 = 2.0 - 0.60 = 1.40\ \text{V}$. Power to the wire $= VI = 1.4 \times 1.5 = 2.1\ \text{W}$; total power from the cell $= \varepsilon I = 2.0 \times 1.5 = 3.0\ \text{W}$. Efficiency $= 2.1 / 3.0 = 0.70$, i.e. $70\%$. In a "show that" question, write every step and the unrounded value ($1.40\ \text{V}$) before the value you were given.

    When the outside circuit changes, argue through the current. Closing a switch that adds a second resistor in parallel lowers the total external resistance, so the current in the cell rises, the internal "lost volts" $Ir$ rise, and the terminal p.d. $\varepsilon - Ir$ falls; the p.d. across the original resistor (which is the terminal p.d.) therefore falls, and so does its current, even though the cell's current rose. This chain — resistance → current in the cell → $Ir$ → terminal p.d. — is the model answer for almost every "state and explain the effect" question in this topic.

    A cell of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r with a voltmeter across its terminals, feeding a resistor R1; a switch S and a second resistor R2 form a parallel branch that can be added by closing S
    Closing S adds a parallel branch: the current in the cell rises, so Ir rises and the terminal p.d. read by the voltmeter falls

    Cells joined together. In series, e.m.f.s add and internal resistances add: three cells of e.m.f. $\varepsilon$ and internal resistance $r$ give $3\varepsilon$ and $3r$. A cell connected the wrong way round subtracts its e.m.f. (ten $1.5\ \text{V}$ cells with one reversed give $8 \times 1.5 = 12\ \text{V}$). Identical cells in parallel give the same e.m.f. $\varepsilon$ with a smaller internal resistance $r/N$, so they can supply a larger current.

    Circuit symbols

    You must recognise and draw the standard symbols in the syllabus: cell, battery, switch, resistor, variable resistor, ammeter 电流表, voltmeter 电压表, lamp, diode (and LED 发光二极管), capacitor 电容器, inductor, thermistor, light-dependent resistor, fuse 保险丝, earth, junction. An ideal ammeter has zero resistance 电阻 and goes in series 串联. An ideal voltmeter has infinite resistance and goes in parallel 并联.

    A grid of standard circuit symbols including cell, battery, switch, earth, lamp, fixed and variable resistor, LDR, thermistor, diode, LED, capacitor, inductor, fuse, ammeter, voltmeter, galvanometer, potentiometer, junction and motor
    The standard circuit symbols you need to recognise and draw

    Drawing a circuit diagram. Marks are lost for symbols, not physics. Use ruler-straight lines and the standard symbols; an ammeter goes in series with the component whose current it measures and a voltmeter in parallel with (across) the component whose p.d. it measures; a cell with internal resistance is drawn as an ideal cell in series with a resistor $r$; and a variable resistor may be used in two ways, shown below. A "complete the circuit diagram" question usually wants exactly this measuring arrangement: source, ammeter and variable resistor in one series loop, voltmeter across the component under test.

    A digital multimeter with its probes across a bank of resistors
    A digital multimeter across a resistor bank: the voltmeter goes in parallel, the ammeter in series
    Two circuits side by side: a rheostat with two connections in series with a lamp, which sets the current; and a potentiometer with three connections across the cell, whose sliding contact gives an output p.d. anywhere between zero and the full e.m.f.
    A variable resistor as a rheostat (two connections, sets the current) and as a potential divider (three connections, sets a p.d. from 0 to E)
    Explore

    Internal resistance

    V = ε − I·r

    Terminal p.d. falls with current: it starts at the e.m.f. ε and drops by I·r.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chā
    breadboard 面包板 miàn bāo bǎn
    multimeter 万用表 wàn yòng biǎo
    internal resistance 内阻 nèi zǔ
    electrolyte 电解质 diàn jiě zhì
    cell 电池 diàn chí
    terminal p.d. 端电压 duān diàn yā
    open circuit 开路 kāi lù
    short circuit 短路 duǎn lù
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    efficiency 效率 xiào lǜ
    ammeter 电流表 diàn liú biǎo
    voltmeter 电压表 diàn yā biǎo
    LED 发光二极管 fā guāng èr jí guǎn
    capacitor 电容器 diàn róng qì
    fuse 保险丝 bǎo xiǎn sī
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    series 串联 chuàn lián
    parallel 并联 bìng lián
    loop 回路 huí lù
    Exercise sheet
    10.2

    Kirchhoff's laws

    Syllabus
    1. recall Kirchhoff's first law and understand that it is a consequence of conservation of charge
    2. recall Kirchhoff's second law and understand that it is a consequence of conservation of energy
    3. derive, using Kirchhoff's laws, a formula for the combined resistance of two or more resistors in series
    4. use the formula for the combined resistance of two or more resistors in series
    5. derive, using Kirchhoff's laws, a formula for the combined resistance of two or more resistors in parallel
    6. use the formula for the combined resistance of two or more resistors in parallel
    7. use Kirchhoff's laws to solve simple circuit problems

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    First law (junction rule)

    At any junction 节点, the total current flowing in equals the total current flowing out. This follows from conservation of charge 电荷守恒 — charge cannot build up at a point in a steady circuit, so charge in per second equals charge out per second.

    For a junction with three wires: $I_{1} = I_{2} + I_{3}$ if currents 2 and 3 flow out and current 1 flows in.

    A parallel circuit where a 3 A current from the battery splits at a junction into a 2 A branch and a 1 A branch, then recombines to 3 A
    Current divides at a junction in a parallel circuit (3 A in equals 2 A plus 1 A)

    Two ways the examiner asks it: "state the law" (one mark: the sum of the currents into a junction equals the sum of the currents out of it) and "state the conservation law behind it" (charge). Do not answer "energy" for the first law or "charge" for the second — the pairing is tested in almost every Paper 1.

    Second law (loop rule)

    Around any closed loop 回路, the total e.m.f. equals the total p.d. across the components in that loop. This follows from conservation of energy 能量守恒: as a unit of charge goes once round a loop, the energy it gains from sources equals the energy it gives up to components.

    Pick a direction round the loop. Take an e.m.f. as positive when the loop direction goes from − to + of the source, and a p.d. as positive when the loop direction is the conventional current direction through the resistor.

    In symbols, round any closed loop $\sum \varepsilon = \sum IR$. A source you pass from $+$ to $-$ counts as a negative e.m.f. (it is being charged, or opposes the other source), and a resistor you pass against its current counts as a negative p.d.

    Worked example. Two batteries are in one loop with their e.m.f.s opposed: $12.0\ \text{V}$ with internal resistance $1.0\ \Omega$, and $8.0\ \text{V}$ with internal resistance $0.50\ \Omega$. Find the current.

    Going round the loop, the net e.m.f. is $12.0 - 8.0 = 4.0\ \text{V}$ and the total resistance is $1.0 + 0.50 = 1.5\ \Omega$ (the internal resistances are in series), so $I = 4.0 / 1.5 = 2.7\ \text{A}$. The current flows in the direction driven by the larger e.m.f.

    Combining resistors

    Resistors in series. Derivation using Kirchhoff's laws: there is no junction between the resistors, so by the first law the same current $I$ passes through each. By the second law the e.m.f. round the loop equals the sum of the p.d.s:

    $$\varepsilon = I R_{1} + I R_{2} + \ldots = I (R_{1} + R_{2} + \ldots),$$

    so $R_{\text{series}} = R_{1} + R_{2} + \ldots$.

    Two resistors R1 and R2 in series carrying the same current I, with p.d.s V1 and V2, shown as equivalent to a single resistor R with p.d. V
    Two resistors in series and their single equivalent resistor

    Resistors in parallel. Derivation: by the second law, each resistor forms its own loop with the source, so each has the same p.d. $V$ across it. By the first law the current entering the junction equals the sum of the branch currents:

    $$I = \frac{V}{R_{1}} + \frac{V}{R_{2}} + \ldots = V \left(\frac{1}{R_{1}} + \frac{1}{R_{2}} + \ldots\right),$$

    so $\dfrac{1}{R_{\text{parallel}}} = \dfrac{1}{R_{1}} + \dfrac{1}{R_{2}} + \ldots$.

    Two resistors R1 and R2 in parallel sharing the current I as I1 and I2 across the same p.d. V, shown as equivalent to a single resistor R
    Two resistors in parallel and their single equivalent resistor

    Two equal resistors $R$ in parallel give $R/2$; $N$ equal ones give $R/N$. A parallel combination is always smaller than any of its resistors; a series combination is always larger.

    Worked example. A $4.0\ \Omega$ resistor and a $12\ \Omega$ resistor are connected in parallel. Find their combined resistance.

    $$\frac{1}{R} = \frac{1}{4.0} + \frac{1}{12} = \frac{3}{12} + \frac{1}{12} = \frac{4}{12} = \frac{1}{3} \quad\Rightarrow\quad R = 3.0\ \Omega.$$

    Resistor networks and power

    Reduce a mixed network one step at a time: replace each series chain by its sum and each parallel pair by $\dfrac{R_{1}R_{2}}{R_{1} + R_{2}}$ (the "product over sum" form, valid for two resistors only), redraw, and repeat until one resistor is left. Two rules decide which resistor dissipates the most power without any arithmetic: components carrying the same current dissipate more in the larger resistance ($P = I^{2}R$); components with the same p.d. dissipate more in the smaller resistance ($P = V^{2}/R$). In a series–parallel mix the single resistor that carries the whole current usually dissipates the most, because a parallel branch carries only a share of it.

    Worked example. Three resistors, each of resistance $R$, are connected with two in series and that pair in parallel with the third. The total resistance between the ends is $8.0\ \Omega$. Find $R$.

    The series pair is $2R$; in parallel with $R$: $R_{\text{T}} = \dfrac{2R \times R}{2R + R} = \dfrac{2R}{3}$. So $\dfrac{2R}{3} = 8.0$, giving $R = 12\ \Omega$. Check: the single resistor $R$ carries twice the current of the pair (same p.d., half the resistance), so it dissipates the most power.

    Solving a circuit

    1. Label every current with a symbol and a chosen direction.
    2. Use Kirchhoff's first law 基尔霍夫第一定律 at each junction to link the currents.
    3. Use Kirchhoff's second law 基尔霍夫第二定律 around each loop to get equations in the p.d.s.
    4. Use $V = IR$ for each resistor.
    5. Solve the equations together.

    For symmetric resistor networks, use the symmetry to spot branches with equal currents — the branch with the most current gives the most power ($P = I^{2}R$).

    A circuit with a cell of e.m.f. E in the left rail, a resistor R1 in the top rail, then a junction where the current I1 splits into I2 through R2 and I3 through R3 in two parallel branches; two loops are marked, loop 1 through E, R1 and R2, and loop 2 through R2 and R3
    The standard two-loop circuit: one junction equation and two loop equations fix all three currents

    Worked example. In the circuit above $\varepsilon = 12\ \text{V}$ (negligible internal resistance), $R_{1} = 2.0\ \Omega$, $R_{2} = 6.0\ \Omega$ and $R_{3} = 3.0\ \Omega$. Find the three currents.

    Kirchhoff's method. Junction: $I_{1} = I_{2} + I_{3}$. Loop 1 (through $\varepsilon$, $R_{1}$, $R_{2}$): $12 = 2.0 I_{1} + 6.0 I_{2}$. Loop 2 (through $R_{2}$ and $R_{3}$, no source): $0 = 6.0 I_{2} - 3.0 I_{3}$, so $I_{3} = 2 I_{2}$. Then $I_{1} = 3 I_{2}$ and $12 = 6.0 I_{2} + 6.0 I_{2}$, giving $I_{2} = 1.0\ \text{A}$, $I_{3} = 2.0\ \text{A}$ and $I_{1} = 3.0\ \text{A}$.

    Reduction check. $6.0\ \Omega$ and $3.0\ \Omega$ in parallel give $2.0\ \Omega$; with $R_{1}$ the total is $4.0\ \Omega$, so $I_{1} = 12 / 4.0 = 3.0\ \text{A}$ and the p.d. across the parallel pair is $3.0 \times 2.0 = 6.0\ \text{V}$, giving $I_{2} = 6.0/6.0 = 1.0\ \text{A}$ and $I_{3} = 6.0/3.0 = 2.0\ \text{A}$. Both methods must agree; a negative answer for a current simply means you guessed its direction the wrong way.

    Explore

    Series & parallel circuits

    Switch between series and parallel and add bulbs. In series they share the voltage and one break kills them all; in parallel each gets the full voltage and a break only loses its branch.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    junction 节点 jié diǎn
    conservation of charge 电荷守恒 diàn hè shǒu héng
    closed loop 回路 huí lù
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    Kirchhoff's first law 基尔霍夫第一定律 jī ěr huò fū dì yí dìng lǜ
    Kirchhoff's second law 基尔霍夫第二定律 jī ěr huò fū dì èr dìng lǜ
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    10.3

    Potential dividers

    Syllabus
    1. understand the principle of a potential divider circuit
    2. recall and use the principle of the potentiometer as a means of comparing potential differences
    3. understand the use of a galvanometer in null methods
    4. explain the use of thermistors and light-dependent resistors in potential dividers to provide a potential difference that is dependent on temperature and light intensity

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A potential divider 分压器 is two (or more) resistors in series across a source. The p.d. across each resistor is in direct proportion to its resistance:

    $$V_{1} = V_{\text{in}} \cdot \frac{R_{1}}{R_{1} + R_{2}}, \qquad V_{2} = V_{\text{in}} \cdot \frac{R_{2}}{R_{1} + R_{2}}.$$

    The output (tapped between $R_{1}$ and $R_{2}$) can be set to any voltage 电压 between $0$ and $V_{\text{in}}$ by choosing the resistances. A potentiometer 电位差计 used with all three of its connections (a slider on a uniform-resistance track) gives a smoothly variable divider; the same component with only two connections is a rheostat 变阻器, which just changes the current.

    Worked example. A $6.0\ \text{V}$ supply is connected across a $2.0\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor in series with a $4.0\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor. Find the output voltage tapped across the $4.0\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor.

    $$V_{2} = V_{\text{in}} \cdot \frac{R_{2}}{R_{1} + R_{2}} = 6.0 \times \frac{4.0}{2.0 + 4.0} = 4.0\ \text{V}.$$

    The same answer comes from the current-first route the mark scheme often lays out: $I = V_{\text{in}} / (R_{1} + R_{2}) = 6.0 / 6000 = 1.0\ \text{mA}$, then $V_{2} = I R_{2} = 1.0 \times 10^{-3} \times 4000 = 4.0\ \text{V}$. Two consequences worth remembering: the larger resistance takes the larger share of the p.d.; and the ratio formula holds only while no current is drawn from the output — a load (or a low-resistance voltmeter) in parallel with $R_{2}$ lowers the effective resistance of $R_{2}$ and so lowers $V_{2}$.

    A potential divider: a source drives current I through R1 and R2 in series, with the total p.d. V split into V1 across R1 and V2 across R2, the output tapped across R2
    A potential divider — the p.d. splits between R1 and R2 in proportion to their resistances

    Sensor circuits

    Replace one fixed resistor with a sensor 传感器 whose resistance changes with a physical quantity:

    • thermistor 热敏电阻 (NTC): $R$ falls as temperature rises. In a divider, the output voltage changes with temperature in a fixed direction.
    • light-dependent resistor 光敏电阻 (LDR): $R$ falls as light intensity 光强 rises, giving a brightness-dependent output.

    Connect the output to a transistor 晶体管 base or a comparator 比较器 to switch a load on or off when the temperature or light passes a threshold 阈值.

    A potential divider with a fixed resistor R in series with a thermistor S across a cell of e.m.f. E, the output voltage V taken across the thermistor
    A thermistor in a potential divider gives an output voltage that changes with temperature

    Which way does the output go? The output can be taken across the sensor or across the fixed resistor, and the two choices respond in opposite directions. Argue through the current, in this order, and you have the full three-mark answer:

    1. the light gets brighter (or the temperature rises), so the resistance of the LDR (or thermistor) falls;
    2. the total resistance of the series circuit falls, so the current rises ($I = \varepsilon / R_{\text{total}}$);
    3. the p.d. across the fixed resistor $= IR$ rises, so the p.d. across the sensor $= \varepsilon - IR$ falls.

    So an output across the fixed resistor rises with light or temperature; an output across the sensor falls. If the source has internal resistance, add one more link: the larger current also increases $Ir$, so the terminal p.d. falls slightly.

    Two LDR potential dividers: in circuit A the LDR is above a fixed resistor and the output is taken across the fixed resistor, so the output rises when the light gets brighter; in circuit B the fixed resistor is above the LDR and the output is taken across the LDR, so the output falls when the light gets brighter
    Where you take the output decides the direction of the change: across the fixed resistor it rises with light, across the LDR it falls

    Worked example. A battery of e.m.f. $9.0\ \text{V}$ and negligible internal resistance is connected in series with an LDR and a $1200\ \Omega$ resistor. In the light the LDR has a resistance of $1800\ \Omega$. Calculate the p.d. across the LDR, and state and explain what happens to it when the light intensity decreases.

    $V_{\text{LDR}} = 9.0 \times \dfrac{1800}{1800 + 1200} = 5.4\ \text{V}$. Less light → the resistance of the LDR increases → the total resistance increases and the current decreases → the p.d. across the $1200\ \Omega$ resistor ($IR$) decreases → the p.d. across the LDR ($9.0 - IR$) increases.

    Worked example. A thermistor in series with a $5800\ \Omega$ resistor across a $6.0\ \text{V}$ supply gives a p.d. of $2.9\ \text{V}$ across the resistor. Find the resistance of the thermistor.

    Current $= 2.9 / 5800 = 5.0 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{A}$. The thermistor takes the remaining $6.0 - 2.9 = 3.1\ \text{V}$, so $R = 3.1 / (5.0 \times 10^{-4}) = 6200\ \Omega$ (or, by ratio, $R = 5800 \times 3.1/2.9$).

    Potentiometer and the null method

    A potentiometer is a uniform resistance wire of length $L_{0}$ with a sliding contact (jockey 滑动触头). The resistance per unit length is uniform, so the p.d. from one end to the jockey is proportional to the length:

    $$V_{x} = V_{\text{full}} \cdot \frac{x}{L_{0}}.$$

    To compare two e.m.f.s (an unknown cell against a standard cell), connect each in turn with the jockey through a galvanometer 检流计. Slide the jockey until the galvanometer reads zero (a null — no current flows through the cell being measured, because the potentiometer's voltage there exactly opposes the cell's e.m.f.). The balance length 平衡长度 — the wire length from the end to the jockey at balance — is proportional to the e.m.f. being measured, so the two lengths are in the ratio of the e.m.f.s:

    $$\frac{\varepsilon_{1}}{\varepsilon_{2}} = \frac{l_{1}}{l_{2}}.$$

    This is a null method 零点法: you find the balance (zero current) instead of measuring a current's value. Its advantage is that at balance the unknown cell gives no current, so its internal resistance does not affect the result.

    A potentiometer circuit: a driver cell sends current along a uniform wire; a two-way switch selects cell E_A or E_B, each connected through a galvanometer to a sliding contact, balanced at length l_A
    A potentiometer comparing two cell e.m.f.s by the null method

    Why the null method is better than a voltmeter. At balance no current is drawn from the cell being measured, so there is no $Ir$ drop inside it: the balance point measures the e.m.f., not the terminal p.d. A voltmeter always draws some current, so it reads slightly less than the e.m.f.

    Reading the balance point. The p.d. per unit length of the wire is fixed by the driver cell 驱动电池 and the resistance of the wire. Anything that makes the p.d. being balanced larger moves the balance point further along the wire; anything that makes the p.d. per unit length larger (a driver cell of larger e.m.f., or a wire that takes a larger share of the driver's p.d.) makes the balance length shorter. Replacing the wire by one of the same length but greater diameter lowers its resistance ($R = \rho L / A$): if the driver cell has negligible internal resistance and nothing else is in series, the p.d. across the wire is still the full e.m.f. and the balance length does not move; if the driver has internal resistance or a series resistor, the wire's share of the e.m.f. falls, the p.d. per metre falls, and the balance length grows. Say which case you are in.

    Worked example. A potentiometer wire XY of length $2.0\ \text{m}$ carries a p.d. of $1.50\ \text{V}$. A cell of e.m.f. $E$ is balanced when the jockey is $1.6\ \text{m}$ from X. Find $E$, and state what happens to the balance length if the driver cell is replaced by one of larger e.m.f.

    $E = 1.50 \times \dfrac{1.6}{2.0} = 1.2\ \text{V}$. A larger driver e.m.f. gives a larger p.d. per metre, so the same $1.2\ \text{V}$ is reached at a shorter length: the jockey must move towards X.

    Explore

    Sharing voltage in series

    In a series loop the same current flows everywhere and the cell's voltage splits across the components — that split is how a potential divider works.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    potential divider 分压器 fēn yā qì
    voltage 电压 diàn yā
    potentiometer 电位差计 diàn wèi chā jì
    rheostat 变阻器 biàn zǔ qì
    sensor 传感器 chuán gǎn qì
    thermistor 热敏电阻 rè mǐn diàn zǔ
    light-dependent resistor 光敏电阻 guāng mǐn diàn zǔ
    light intensity 光强 guāng qiáng
    transistor 晶体管 jīng tǐ guǎn
    comparator 比较器 bǐ jiào qì
    threshold 阈值 yù zhí
    jockey 滑动触头 huá dòng chù tóu
    galvanometer 检流计 jiǎn liú jì
    balance length 平衡长度 píng héng cháng dù
    null method 零点法 líng diǎn fǎ
    driver cell 驱动电池 qū dòng diàn chí
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    10.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    electromotive force (e.m.f.) the energy transferred per unit charge by a source in driving charge round a complete circuit
    potential difference (p.d.) the energy transferred per unit charge from electrical energy to other forms of energy
    internal resistance the resistance to current inside a source of e.m.f., which causes a p.d. $Ir$ across the source when a current flows
    terminal p.d. the p.d. across the terminals of a source, equal to e.m.f. $- Ir$
    Kirchhoff's first law the sum of the currents into a junction is equal to the sum of the currents out of the junction (conservation of charge)
    Kirchhoff's second law the sum of the e.m.f.s round a closed loop is equal to the sum of the p.d.s round the loop (conservation of energy)
    potential divider two or more resistors in series across a supply, giving a p.d. across one of them that is a fraction of the supply p.d.
    potentiometer a uniform resistance wire with a sliding contact, used to compare p.d.s by finding the length at which a galvanometer reads zero
    null method a measurement made by adjusting a circuit until a meter reads zero, so no current is drawn from the component being measured
    balance length the length of potentiometer wire between one end and the sliding contact when the galvanometer reads zero
    10.3

    Exam tips

    • Apply Kirchhoff's laws: current into a junction $=$ current out (charge conserved); $\sum \text{e.m.f.} = \sum \text{p.d.}$ round a loop (energy conserved). Name the law you are using when a question says "use Kirchhoff's laws".
    • Combine resistors: series $R = R_1 + R_2$; parallel $1/R = 1/R_1 + 1/R_2$. A parallel combination is always smaller than its smallest resistor.
    • A potential divider splits voltage in the ratio of the resistances; the larger resistance takes the larger p.d.
    • Include internal resistance: $\text{e.m.f.} = I(R + r)$ — the "lost volts" are $Ir$. When a circuit changes, argue resistance → current in the cell → $Ir$ → terminal p.d.
    • "Negligible internal resistance" means the terminal p.d. is the e.m.f., whatever the current. Look for the phrase before you start.
    • Read a $V$$I$ graph of a source as $V = \varepsilon - Ir$: intercept $\varepsilon$, gradient $-r$, and the current at $V = 0$ is the maximum (short-circuit) current $\varepsilon / r$.
    • In Paper 5, rearrange the circuit relation into $y = mx + c$ before plotting: a cell of e.m.f. $\varepsilon$ and internal resistance $r$ feeding $n$ equal resistors $R$ in parallel obeys $\varepsilon = I\left(\dfrac{R}{n} + r\right)$, so $\dfrac{1}{I} = \dfrac{R}{\varepsilon} \cdot \dfrac{1}{n} + \dfrac{r}{\varepsilon}$ — a graph of $1/I$ against $1/n$ has gradient $R/\varepsilon$ and intercept $r/\varepsilon$.

    Common mistakes

    • Writing $V = IR$ with the e.m.f. and the external resistance only, forgetting $r$. Use $\varepsilon = I(R + r)$.
    • Saying e.m.f. is "the force that pushes the charge". It is energy per unit charge; the volt is a joule per coulomb.
    • Pairing the laws with the wrong conservation law. First law — charge; second law — energy.
    • Using "product over sum" for three parallel resistors. It works for two only; otherwise add the reciprocals.
    • Explaining a sensor circuit by "the resistance changes so the voltage changes". The marks are for the chain: resistance → total resistance → current → $IR$ across the fixed resistor → the rest across the sensor.
    • Claiming a potentiometer at balance "draws no current from the driver cell". It draws none from the cell being measured; the driver cell always supplies the wire current.
    • Rounding a "show that" value before the last line — write $1.40\ \text{V}$, then say it is $1.4\ \text{V}$.
  • 11

    Particle physics

    11.1

    The nuclear atom

    Syllabus
    1. infer from the results of the $\alpha$-particle scattering experiment the existence and small size of the nucleus
    2. describe a simple model for the nuclear atom to include protons, neutrons and orbital electrons
    3. distinguish between nucleon number and proton number
    4. understand that isotopes are forms of the same element with different numbers of neutrons in their nuclei
    5. understand and use the notation $_Z^A\text{X}$ for the representation of nuclides
    6. understand that nucleon number and charge are conserved in nuclear processes
    7. describe the composition, mass and charge of $\alpha$-, $\beta$- and $\gamma$-radiations (both $\beta^-$ (electrons) and $\beta^+$ (positrons) are included)
    8. understand that an antiparticle has the same mass but opposite charge to the corresponding particle, and that a positron is the antiparticle of an electron
    9. state that (electron) antineutrinos are produced during $\beta^-$ decay and (electron) neutrinos are produced during $\beta^+$ decay
    10. understand that $\alpha$-particles have discrete energies but that $\beta$-particles have a continuous range of energies because (anti)neutrinos are emitted in $\beta$-decay
    11. represent $\alpha$- and $\beta$-decay by a radioactive decay equation of the form $^{238}_{92}\text{U} \rightarrow ^{234}_{90}\text{Th} + ^4_2\alpha$
    12. use the unified atomic mass unit (u) as a unit of mass

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Geiger–Marsden α-particle scattering

    Alpha particles α粒子 fired at a thin gold foil were seen to:

    • mostly pass straight through, with very little deflection 偏转,
    • sometimes deflect through small angles,
    • rarely (about $1$ in $8000$) deflect through angles greater than $90°$.

    From this Rutherford worked out:

    • the atom is mostly empty space (most α-particles pass straight through),
    • there is a tiny, dense, positively charged nucleus 原子核 at the centre (the rare large deflections need a concentrated charge to push the α away),
    • almost all of the atom's mass is in this nucleus.

    Order of magnitude: atom diameter $\sim 10^{-10}\ \text{m}$, nucleus diameter $\sim 10^{-15}\ \text{m}$ — the nucleus is about $10^{5}$ times smaller than the atom.

    The three results and what each proves — the mark scheme pairs them exactly like this:

    Observation Conclusion
    the vast majority pass straight through with little or no deflection most of the atom is empty space
    a small number are deflected through small angles there is a concentrated positive charge (the nucleus) that repels the positive α-particles
    a very small minority (about 1 in 8000) are deflected through more than 90°, some straight back the nucleus is very small compared with the atom, and contains almost all of the atom's mass

    Three details of the experiment are also asked: the foil is thin so that each α-particle meets at most one nucleus (and is not absorbed); the chamber is a vacuum so the α-particles are not stopped or scattered by air; gold is used because it can be beaten into a very thin sheet and has a heavy, highly charged nucleus.

    Worked example. Explain why a very small minority of the α-particles are scattered through angles greater than 90°.

    Only an α-particle that approaches a nucleus almost head-on is turned back. The nucleus and the α-particle are both positive, so the electrostatic 静电 repulsion is very large at small separation, and the nucleus is much more massive than the α-particle, so it is the α-particle that is turned round. Because the nucleus is tiny, very few α-particles get that close — hence the small minority. As the α-particle approaches, its kinetic energy is converted to electric potential energy; at the point of closest approach it is momentarily at rest and all of its kinetic energy has become potential energy.

    The deflection depends on how close the path passes to the nucleus: the smaller the distance, the larger the angle, and the paths are symmetrical about the line through the nucleus.

    The alpha-scattering apparatus: an alpha source and a thin gold foil inside an evacuated chamber, with a zinc sulfide detector on a microscope that can be moved round to different angles
    The $\alpha$-scattering experiment — $\alpha$-particles strike a thin gold foil in a vacuum
    Paths of alpha particles near a tiny dense nucleus: most pass almost straight through, some are deflected through small angles, and a rare one approaching head-on is scattered back at its closest approach
    Most $\alpha$-particles pass nearly straight through; a few are deflected sharply by the tiny nucleus

    Simple nuclear model

    An atom has:

    • a central nucleus of protons 质子 (positive, charge $+e$) and neutrons 中子 (no charge),
    • electrons 电子 (charge $-e$) around the nucleus.

    The proton and neutron have almost the same mass ($\approx 1\ \text{u}$); the electron is about $\tfrac{1}{1836}$ of the proton's mass.

    Two atom models: a) a helium atom with two protons and two neutrons in the nucleus and two electrons on one shell, b) a lithium atom with three protons and four neutrons and electrons on two shells (two inner, one outer)
    Simple models of a helium atom and a lithium atom (not to scale)

    Worked example. Describe the structure of an atom of uranium-238, $^{238}_{92}\text{U}$.

    A nucleus containing 92 protons and $238 - 92 = 146$ neutrons, with 92 electrons in orbit around it. "Orbital electrons" is the syllabus phrase — the electrons are outside the nucleus, and the neutral atom has as many electrons as protons.

    Notation and key numbers

    For a nuclide 核素 written $^{A}_{Z}\text{X}$:

    Nuclide notation: the top number is the nucleon number A, the bottom is the proton number Z
    Nuclide notation: nucleon number on top, proton number below
    • proton number 质子数 $Z$ (also the atomic number): the number of protons. It fixes the element.
    • nucleon number 核子数 $A$ (also the mass number): the total number of nucleons 核子 (protons + neutrons).
    • number of neutrons $N = A - Z$.

    A neutral atom has the same number of electrons as protons.

    Isotopes

    Isotopes 同位素 are atoms of the same element (same $Z$) with different numbers of neutrons (different $A$). They behave the same chemically but differently in the nucleus. Example: $^{12}_{6}\text{C}$ and $^{14}_{6}\text{C}$ are isotopes of carbon.

    The examiner's wording: isotopes are nuclei (or atoms) with the same number of protons but different numbers of neutrons — equivalently the same proton number $Z$ and different nucleon numbers $A$. Hydrogen has three:

    Three hydrogen isotopes drawn as simple atoms: hydrogen-1 with one proton and one orbiting electron, hydrogen-2 (deuterium) with one proton and one neutron, hydrogen-3 (tritium) with one proton and two neutrons; all have one electron
    The three isotopes of hydrogen: the same one proton, different numbers of neutrons

    Worked example. Tritium, $^{3}_{1}\text{H}$, is an isotope of hydrogen. State the numbers of protons, neutrons and electrons in a neutral tritium atom, and give the quark composition of its nucleus.

    $Z = 1$ proton; $A - Z = 3 - 1 = 2$ neutrons; 1 electron (neutral, so electrons $=$ protons). The nucleus is one proton (uud) and two neutrons (udd, udd): 4 up quarks and 5 down quarks. Charge check: $4 \times \tfrac{2}{3} - 5 \times \tfrac{1}{3} = +1$, the proton number. A "labelled diagram" of the atom is the nucleus (1 p, 2 n) with one electron orbiting outside it.

    Conservation laws in nuclear processes

    In any nuclear process:

    • nucleon number $A$ is conserved (total $A$ before $=$ total $A$ after),
    • charge is conserved (this is conservation of charge 电荷守恒).

    These two rules let you balance decay and reaction equations.

    Unified atomic mass unit

    The unified atomic mass unit 统一原子质量单位, symbol $\text{u}$, is set so that an atom of $^{12}_{6}\text{C}$ has mass exactly $12\ \text{u}$. Numerically,

    $$1\ \text{u} = 1.661 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}.$$

    A proton has mass $\approx 1.007\ \text{u}$; a neutron $\approx 1.009\ \text{u}$; an electron $\approx 5.5 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{u}$.

    Worked example. A nucleus X has 14 nucleons and $p$ protons. Its charge-to-mass ratio is $4.1 \times 10^{7}\ \text{C kg}^{-1}$. Find $p$ and identify X.

    Charge $= pe$; mass $\approx 14\ \text{u}$. So $\dfrac{pe}{14\text{u}} = 4.1 \times 10^{7}$, giving $p = \dfrac{4.1 \times 10^{7} \times 14 \times 1.66 \times 10^{-27}}{1.60 \times 10^{-19}} = 5.96 \approx 6$. Six protons and 14 nucleons: X is carbon-14, $^{14}_{6}\text{C}$. Keep every figure until the end, then round to the nearest whole number of protons.

    Explore

    Nuclear atom evidence lab

    Connect observations to the nuclear model of the atom.

    Explore

    Radioactive decay

    A = A₀·b

    Activity decays exponentially — set the base b below 1.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    alpha particles α粒子 α lì zi
    alpha particle α粒子 α lì zi
    deflection 偏转 piān zhuǎn
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    electrostatic 静电 jìng diàn
    proton 质子 zhì zi
    neutron 中子 zhōng zǐ
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    nuclide 核素 hé sù
    nucleon number 核子数 hé zǐ shù
    nucleon 核子 hé zǐ
    proton number 质子数 zhì zǐ shù
    isotopes 同位素 tóng wèi sù
    isotope 同位素 tóng wèi sù
    conservation of charge 电荷守恒 diàn hè shǒu héng
    unified atomic mass unit 统一原子质量单位 tǒng yī yuán zi zhì liàng dān wèi
    Exercise sheet
    11.1

    Radioactive emissions

    An unstable nucleus rearranges itself and gives out one of three kinds of radiation 辐射. This is radioactive 放射性 decay. Each kind has its own properties.

    α-radiation

    • Made of: a helium-4 nucleus, $^{4}_{2}\alpha$ (two protons + two neutrons).
    • Mass: $\approx 4\ \text{u}$.
    • Charge: $+2e$.
    • Range in air: a few cm. Stopped by a sheet of paper.
    • Ionising power: strong — it is good at ionising 电离.
    • Energy spectrum: discrete 分立 (one decay gives α-particles at one or a few sharp energies).

    A cloud chamber 云室 makes the tracks visible: each α-particle leaves a short, straight, thick trail of tiny droplets as it ionises the air. The short equal lengths show the α-particles all carry about the same energy.

    A cloud chamber photograph: short, straight, thick white trails of vapour fan out from a small radioactive source, marking the paths of alpha particles through the cold gas
    Alpha-particle tracks in a cloud chamber, fanning out from an americium-241 source

    β-radiation

    Two types of beta particle β粒子:

    • $\beta^{-}$: a fast electron, given out when a neutron turns into a proton.
    • $\beta^{+}$: a positron 正电子 (the electron's antiparticle), given out when a proton in a proton-rich nucleus turns into a neutron.

    Properties (both types):

    • Mass: $\approx 1/1836\ \text{u}$ (much less than α).
    • Charge: $-e$ for $\beta^{-}$, $+e$ for $\beta^{+}$.
    • Range in air: about $1\ \text{m}$. Stopped by a few mm of aluminium.
    • Energy spectrum: continuous 连续 up to a maximum (see below).

    γ-radiation

    • Made of: a high-energy photon 光子 — part of the electromagnetic spectrum 电磁波谱.
    • Mass: zero (rest mass).
    • Charge: zero.
    • Range in air: large (follows the inverse-square law). Strongly attenuated 衰减 by several cm of lead or about a metre of concrete.
    • Ionising power: weakest.
    • Energy spectrum: discrete (a gamma ray γ射线 is given out as the nucleus drops between two nuclear energy levels).

    A nucleus often gives out a γ-photon as a "tidy-up" step after an α or β decay leaves the daughter nucleus 子核 in an excited state 激发态.

    Penetrating power: an alpha beam is stopped by paper, a beta beam by a few mm of aluminium, and a gamma beam is only attenuated by thick lead
    Penetrating power: $\alpha$ is stopped by paper, $\beta$ by aluminium, $\gamma$ only attenuated by lead

    Mass and charge, side by side — a table question asks for exactly these, in units of $\text{u}$ and $e$:

    Particle Mass Charge
    proton $1\ \text{u}$ (1.007 u) $+e$
    neutron $1\ \text{u}$ (1.009 u) $0$
    electron, $\beta^{-}$ $\tfrac{1}{1836}\ \text{u}$ ($5.5 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{u}$) $-e$
    positron, $\beta^{+}$ $\tfrac{1}{1836}\ \text{u}$ $+e$
    $\alpha$-particle $4\ \text{u}$ $+2e$
    $\gamma$-photon $0$ $0$
    neutrino, antineutrino almost zero $0$

    Worked example. Compare an α-particle with a $\beta^{+}$ particle in terms of their masses and charges (3 marks).

    Both are positively charged, but the α-particle's charge ($+2e$) is twice that of the $\beta^{+}$ ($+e$). The α-particle's mass ($4\ \text{u}$) is about $7300$ times the mass of the $\beta^{+}$ ($5.5 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{u}$). Give a ratio, not just "heavier": twice the charge and about 7000 times the mass are the marking points.

    Because they carry charge, α- and β-particles are deflected by electric and magnetic fields — in opposite directions for opposite signs, the light β far more than the heavy α — while γ-rays, being uncharged, pass straight through.

    Antiparticles, neutrinos and antineutrinos

    Every particle has an antiparticle 反粒子 with the same mass but opposite charge. The positron is the antiparticle of the electron.

    In β-decay, a third particle is always given out as well:

    • $\beta^{-}$ decay: an antineutrino 反中微子 $\bar{\nu}_{\text{e}}$.
    • $\beta^{+}$ decay: a neutrino 中微子 $\nu_{\text{e}}$.

    Neutrinos and antineutrinos have zero charge, very small mass, and barely interact — they are very hard to detect, but they must be there to balance energy, momentum 动量 and other conserved quantities in β-decay.

    Why β has a continuous spectrum (and α does not)

    In α-decay the energy 能量 released is shared between just two particles (the daughter nucleus and the α). Conservation of momentum and energy then fixes the α's energy to one value (discrete).

    In β-decay the energy is shared between three particles (the daughter nucleus, the β, and the (anti)neutrino). The β can take any share from zero up to a maximum, so its energy spectrum is continuous.

    Two graphs of number of particles against kinetic energy: for alpha particles two sharp lines at fixed energies; for beta particles a smooth continuous curve from zero up to a maximum energy
    α-particles from one decay have fixed (discrete) energies; β-particles share the energy with an (anti)neutrino, so their spectrum is continuous up to a maximum

    Worked example. The energy spectrum of the $\beta^{-}$ particles from a source is continuous, from zero up to a maximum. Explain why (3 marks).

    Each decay releases a fixed amount of energy. That energy is shared between the $\beta^{-}$ particle, the antineutrino and the recoiling daughter nucleus. The antineutrino can take any share, so the $\beta^{-}$ particle is left with any energy from zero up to the maximum — the maximum being when the antineutrino carries away almost none. (For an α-particle there are only two bodies, so momentum conservation fixes the share and the energy is discrete.)

    Writing decay equations

    A general α-decay:

    $$^{A}_{Z}\text{X} \to {}^{A-4}_{Z-2}\text{Y} + {}^{4}_{2}\alpha$$

    (check: $A = (A-4) + 4$, $Z = (Z-2) + 2$.)

    A general $\beta^{-}$ decay:

    $$^{A}_{Z}\text{X} \to {}^{A}_{Z+1}\text{Y} + {}^{0}_{-1}\beta + \bar{\nu}_{\text{e}}.$$

    A general $\beta^{+}$ decay:

    $$^{A}_{Z}\text{X} \to {}^{A}_{Z-1}\text{Y} + {}^{0}_{+1}\beta + \nu_{\text{e}}.$$

    Worked example. Uranium-238, $^{238}_{92}\text{U}$, decays by α-emission; carbon-14, $^{14}_{6}\text{C}$, decays by $\beta^{-}$-emission. Find each daughter nuclide.

    α-decay lowers $A$ by 4 and $Z$ by 2; $\beta^{-}$-decay leaves $A$ unchanged and raises $Z$ by 1:

    $$^{238}_{92}\text{U} \to {}^{234}_{90}\text{Th} + {}^{4}_{2}\alpha, \qquad {}^{14}_{6}\text{C} \to {}^{14}_{7}\text{N} + {}^{0}_{-1}\beta + \bar{\nu}_{\text{e}}.$$

    Determine quantitatively the changes. α-emission: $A$ decreases by 4, $Z$ decreases by 2. $\beta^{-}$-emission: $A$ unchanged, $Z$ increases by 1. $\beta^{+}$-emission: $A$ unchanged, $Z$ decreases by 1. γ-emission: no change in either. A decay chain that ends at a known nuclide is solved from these: the number of α-decays is $(A_{\text{start}} - A_{\text{end}})/4$, and then the number of $\beta^{-}$-decays makes $Z$ come out right.

    Worked example. Thorium-230, $^{230}_{90}\text{Th}$, decays in stages, by α- and $\beta^{-}$-emission, to lead-206, $^{206}_{82}\text{Pb}$. Find the number of each kind of decay.

    α-decays: $(230 - 206)/4 = 6$. Six α-decays alone would lower $Z$ by 12, to 78; the final $Z$ is 82, so there are $82 - 78 = 4$ $\beta^{-}$-decays.

    A nucleus at rest recoils. When a stationary nucleus emits an α-particle, momentum is conserved: the daughter nucleus and the α-particle move off in opposite directions with momenta of equal magnitude. Since $p = mv$, the lighter α-particle moves much faster, and since $E_{\text{k}} = p^{2}/2m$ it also takes most of the kinetic energy — the shares are in inverse proportion to the masses.

    Alpha decay of a nucleus at rest: before, the parent P is stationary; after, the daughter Q moves one way and the alpha particle the other, with momenta of equal magnitude so the alpha, being lighter, is faster
    A nucleus at rest decays: the daughter recoils with momentum equal and opposite to the α-particle's

    Worked example. A stationary nucleus P of mass $243\ \text{u}$ emits an α-particle of mass $4\ \text{u}$ at $1.5 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the speed of the daughter nucleus Q and the ratio of the kinetic energy of the α-particle to that of Q.

    Q has mass $243 - 4 = 239\ \text{u}$. Momentum: $239 v_{\text{Q}} = 4 \times 1.5 \times 10^{7}$, so $v_{\text{Q}} = 2.5 \times 10^{5}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$, in the opposite direction to the α-particle. Kinetic energies: $\dfrac{E_{\alpha}}{E_{\text{Q}}} = \dfrac{p^{2}/2m_{\alpha}}{p^{2}/2m_{\text{Q}}} = \dfrac{m_{\text{Q}}}{m_{\alpha}} = \dfrac{239}{4} \approx 60$. The α-particle takes about 98% of the energy released.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    radioactive 放射性 fàng shè xìng
    radiation 辐射 fú shè
    ionising 电离 diàn lí
    discrete 分立 fēn lì
    cloud chamber 云室 yún shì
    beta particle β粒子 β lì zi
    positron 正电子 zhèng diàn zi
    antiparticle 反粒子 fǎn lì zi
    continuous 连续 lián xù
    photon 光子 guāng zi
    electromagnetic spectrum 电磁波谱 diàn cí bō pǔ
    attenuated 衰减 shuāi jiǎn
    gamma ray γ射线 γ shè xiàn
    daughter nucleus 子核 zi hé
    excited state 激发态 jī fā tài
    neutrino 中微子 zhōng wēi zǐ
    antineutrino 反中微子 fǎn zhōng wēi zǐ
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    11.2

    Fundamental particles

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a quark is a fundamental particle and that there are six flavours (types) of quark: up, down, strange, charm, top and bottom
    2. recall and use the charge of each flavour of quark and understand that its respective antiquark has the opposite charge (no knowledge of any other properties of quarks is required)
    3. recall that protons and neutrons are not fundamental particles and describe protons and neutrons in terms of their quark composition
    4. understand that a hadron may be either a baryon (consisting of three quarks) or a meson (consisting of one quark and one antiquark)
    5. describe the changes to quark composition that take place during $\beta^-$ and $\beta^+$ decay
    6. recall that electrons and neutrinos are fundamental particles called leptons

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Tracks of particles in a bubble chamber
    A bubble chamber reveals the curved tracks of charged particles.
    A linear accelerator hall: a long line of accelerating cavities and beam pipes running away down the room
    Where the particles come from: a linear accelerator uses electric fields to drive charged particles fast enough to probe the nucleus

    Some particles are fundamental particles 基本粒子 (point-like, with no smaller parts as far as we know); others are built from fundamental ones.

    The one-mark definition: a fundamental particle is one that cannot be broken down into smaller particles (it has no internal structure). Electrons, neutrinos and quarks are fundamental; protons and neutrons are not.

    Quarks

    A quark 夸克 is a fundamental particle. There are six flavours:

    • up (u), charge $+\tfrac{2}{3}e$,
    • down (d), charge $-\tfrac{1}{3}e$,
    • charm (c), charge $+\tfrac{2}{3}e$,
    • strange (s), charge $-\tfrac{1}{3}e$,
    • top (t), charge $+\tfrac{2}{3}e$,
    • bottom (b), charge $-\tfrac{1}{3}e$.

    Each quark has an antiquark 反夸克 with the same size of charge but the opposite sign: $\bar{u}$ (charge $-\tfrac{2}{3}e$), $\bar{d}$ (charge $+\tfrac{1}{3}e$). No other quark property is tested.

    The six quark flavours by charge: up, charm and top each carry +2/3 e; down, strange and bottom each carry -1/3 e; each antiquark has the opposite charge
    The six quarks: up/charm/top carry $+\tfrac23 e$, down/strange/bottom carry $-\tfrac13 e$

    Written as the table a question asks you to complete:

    Quark Charge Antiquark Charge
    up (u), charm (c), top (t) $+\tfrac{2}{3}e$ $\bar{\text{u}}$, $\bar{\text{c}}$, $\bar{\text{t}}$ $-\tfrac{2}{3}e$
    down (d), strange (s), bottom (b) $-\tfrac{1}{3}e$ $\bar{\text{d}}$, $\bar{\text{s}}$, $\bar{\text{b}}$ $+\tfrac{1}{3}e$

    Worked example. By reference to quark composition, show that the charge of a proton is $+1.6 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$.

    A proton is uud: charge $= \tfrac{2}{3}e + \tfrac{2}{3}e - \tfrac{1}{3}e = +e = +1.6 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$. Write the three fractions and their sum — the mark is for the arithmetic, not the answer.

    Hadrons: baryons and mesons

    Particles built from quarks are hadrons 强子. Two types:

    • baryons 重子 — three quarks. Examples: proton (u u d), neutron (u d d). Charge check: $\tfrac{2}{3} + \tfrac{2}{3} - \tfrac{1}{3} = +1$ for the proton; $\tfrac{2}{3} - \tfrac{1}{3} - \tfrac{1}{3} = 0$ for the neutron.
    • mesons 介子 — one quark and one antiquark (for example $\pi^{+}$ is u$\bar{\text{d}}$).

    Protons and neutrons are not fundamental — they are baryons made of quarks.

    "Compare baryons and mesons in terms of their constituent particles" (2 marks): both are hadrons made of quarks; a baryon is three quarks (or three antiquarks, for an antibaryon), a meson is one quark and one antiquark. Any charge you are given must come out of the quark charges:

    Worked example. (a) A meson has charge $-1e$. Give a possible quark composition. (b) A meson Q has charge 0. Give a possible composition. (c) A baryon is made of three quarks of different flavours, u, d and s. Find its charge. (d) Give the quark composition of an antineutron and its charge.

    (a) d$\bar{\text{u}}$: $-\tfrac{1}{3} - \tfrac{2}{3} = -1$ (s$\bar{\text{u}}$ also works). (b) u$\bar{\text{u}}$: $+\tfrac{2}{3} - \tfrac{2}{3} = 0$ (or d$\bar{\text{d}}$). (c) uds: $\tfrac{2}{3} - \tfrac{1}{3} - \tfrac{1}{3} = 0$. (d) The antineutron is the antiparticle of udd, so it is $\bar{\text{u}}\bar{\text{d}}\bar{\text{d}}$: $-\tfrac{2}{3} + \tfrac{1}{3} + \tfrac{1}{3} = 0$ — the same mass and charge as the neutron, since both have charge zero.

    Quark changes in β-decay

    In $\beta^{-}$ decay a neutron turns into a proton; in quark terms, one down quark turns into an up quark:

    $$\text{d} \to \text{u} + \beta^{-} + \bar{\nu}_{\text{e}}.$$

    In $\beta^{+}$ decay a proton turns into a neutron; one up quark turns into a down quark:

    $$\text{u} \to \text{d} + \beta^{+} + \nu_{\text{e}}.$$
    Beta-minus decay at the quark level: a neutron (u d d) becomes a proton (u u d) as one down quark turns into an up quark, emitting a beta-minus particle and an electron antineutrino
    Beta-minus decay: one down quark becomes an up quark, turning a neutron into a proton

    "Describe $\beta^{+}$ decay in terms of the fundamental particles involved" (2 marks): an up quark in a proton changes into a down quark, so the proton becomes a neutron, and a positron and an electron neutrino are emitted — $\text{u} \to \text{d} + \beta^{+} + \nu_{\text{e}}$. For $\beta^{-}$ decay swap the roles: a down quark becomes an up quark, emitting an electron and an electron antineutrino. Name the (anti)neutrino: it is the "other lepton" the question asks for, and it is what makes the β energy continuous.

    Leptons

    Leptons 轻子 are fundamental particles that are not made of quarks. The leptons you need are the electron and the electron neutrino, with their antiparticles the positron and the electron antineutrino. (Heavier leptons — the muon and tau — exist but are not tested.) Asked for "two different leptons", give electron and neutrino.

    Classifying particles

    To answer "which are fundamental?": quarks and leptons (electrons, positrons, neutrinos, antineutrinos) are fundamental; protons, neutrons, baryons, mesons and hadrons are not — they are built from quarks.

    A tree classifying particles into fundamental ones (quarks and leptons such as the electron and neutrino) and hadrons made of quarks (baryons like the proton and neutron, and mesons)
    Fundamental particles (quarks, leptons) versus hadrons (baryons, mesons)

    Worked example. In the list — antineutrino, $\beta^{+}$ particle, neutron, positron, proton — underline the hadrons.

    Neutron and proton (three quarks each). The antineutrino and the positron are leptons; the $\beta^{+}$ particle is a positron. The same list asked as "which are not fundamental?" has the same answer: neutron and proton.

    Antimatter. Every particle has an antiparticle of the same mass and opposite charge; a positron and an electron are alike in mass (and in the size of their charge) and differ in the sign of their charge. An antihydrogen atom is an antiproton (charge $-e$, made of $\bar{\text{u}}\bar{\text{u}}\bar{\text{d}}$) with a positron in orbit.

    Explore

    Fundamental particle lab

    Sort particles by the family or interaction that defines them.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    quark 夸克 kuā kè
    fundamental particles 基本粒子 jī běn lì zi
    fundamental 基本粒子 jī běn lì zi
    flavours wèi
    antiquark 反夸克 fǎn kuā kè
    hadrons 强子 qiáng zǐ
    baryons 重子 zhòng zǐ
    mesons 介子 jiè zi
    leptons 轻子 qīng zi
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    11.2

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    proton number $Z$ the number of protons in a nucleus
    nucleon number $A$ the total number of protons and neutrons in a nucleus
    isotopes nuclei of the same element (same number of protons) with different numbers of neutrons
    nuclide a nucleus with a particular number of protons and a particular number of neutrons
    unified atomic mass unit one twelfth of the mass of an atom of carbon-12
    antiparticle a particle with the same mass as the corresponding particle but the opposite charge
    fundamental particle a particle that cannot be broken down into smaller particles
    hadron a particle made of quarks: a baryon (three quarks) or a meson (a quark and an antiquark)
    lepton a fundamental particle that is not made of quarks, such as the electron or the neutrino
    α-particle a helium-4 nucleus: two protons and two neutrons, charge $+2e$, mass $4\ \text{u}$
    $\beta^{-}$ / $\beta^{+}$ particle an electron / a positron emitted from a nucleus when a neutron becomes a proton / a proton becomes a neutron
    11.2

    Exam tips

    • Describe the nuclear atom (a small, dense, positive nucleus) using the alpha-scattering evidence — pair each observation with its conclusion.
    • Compare $\alpha$, $\beta$ and $\gamma$ by charge, mass, ionising power and penetration; when asked to compare two particles, give the ratio ("twice the charge", "about 7000 times the mass").
    • Use quark composition (proton $uud$, neutron $udd$) and check that charge and nucleon number balance in every equation you write.
    • In $\beta^-$ decay a neutron becomes a proton, an electron and an antineutrino; in $\beta^{+}$ decay a proton becomes a neutron, a positron and a neutrino. Name the (anti)neutrino every time.
    • A nucleus at rest that decays gives its two products equal and opposite momentum, so the lighter one is faster and carries most of the kinetic energy.
    • For a decay chain, count the α-decays from the change in $A$ first, then fix $Z$ with $\beta$-decays.

    Common mistakes

    • Concluding "the nucleus is positive" from the straight-through result. That result shows empty space; the large-angle deflections show the concentrated positive charge.
    • Defining isotopes by "different mass" only. The mark needs same number of protons, different number of neutrons.
    • Writing $^{0}_{-1}\beta$ for $\beta^{+}$ decay. A positron is $^{0}_{+1}\beta$, and $Z$ goes down by one.
    • Forgetting the (anti)neutrino in a β-decay equation, or putting a neutrino with $\beta^{-}$. $\beta^{-}$ goes with the antineutrino, $\beta^{+}$ with the neutrino.
    • Saying protons or neutrons are fundamental. Only quarks and leptons are.
    • Giving a meson as "two quarks". It is a quark and an antiquark.
    • Treating an antiquark's charge as the same sign as the quark's. $\bar{\text{u}}$ is $-\tfrac{2}{3}e$, $\bar{\text{d}}$ is $+\tfrac{1}{3}e$.
  • 12

    Motion in a circle

    12.1

    Angles in radians

    Syllabus
    1. define the radian and express angular displacement in radians
    2. understand and use the concept of angular speed
    3. recall and use $\omega = 2\pi / T$ and $v = r\omega$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Uniform circular motion: velocity & acceleration

    The radian 弧度 is the angle made at the centre of a circle by an arc whose length equals the radius. For an arc of length $s$ on a circle of radius $r$, the angle in radians is

    $$\theta = \frac{s}{r}.$$

    Radians have no unit (a ratio of lengths). A full circle has $s = 2\pi r$, so $\theta = 2\pi\ \text{rad}$. A half-circle is $\pi\ \text{rad}$; a quarter is $\pi/2\ \text{rad}$.

    A circle with a shaded sector; the two bounding radii each have length r and the arc has length s = r, so the angle at the centre is one radian
    One radian is the angle whose arc length equals the radius

    To convert: $1\ \text{rad} = 180°/\pi \approx 57.3°$. Set your calculator to radians for this topic; "degree" mode will give wrong answers.

    The one-mark definition. The radian is the angle subtended at the centre of a circle by an arc equal in length to the radius of the circle. Give it in words — $\theta = s/r$ on its own is not a definition — and keep $s = r\theta$ ready for turning a distance along the arc into an angle, or back.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    radian 弧度 hú dù
    arc
    Exercise sheet
    12.1

    Uniform circular motion: angular speed

    A spinning fairground ride lit up at night
    A spinning fairground ride: every rider turns through the same angle each second.

    An object moves in a circle of radius $r$ at constant speed $v$. Define:

    • angular displacement 角位移 $\theta$ — the angle (in radians) turned through by the radius from a chosen start line.
    • angular speed 角速度 $\omega$ — the rate of change of angular displacement.

    For uniform motion $\omega$ is constant and

    $$\omega = \frac{\theta}{t}.$$

    Unit: $\text{rad s}^{-1}$.

    What stays constant and what varies. In uniform circular motion the speed, the angular speed, the period and the magnitude of the acceleration are constant; the velocity, the displacement from the centre and the acceleration all change continuously, because their direction changes. Asked to "state two quantities that vary", give two of velocity, acceleration, displacement and momentum — and say it is the direction that varies.

    Period and frequency

    If the object goes once round ($2\pi\ \text{rad}$, one revolution) in time $T$ (the period 周期), then

    $$\omega = \frac{2\pi}{T} = 2\pi f,$$

    where $f = 1/T$ is the frequency 频率 of turning (Hz).

    Linear and angular speed

    In one period $T$ the object travels a distance $2\pi r$ (the circumference 周长) at constant speed, so

    $$v = \frac{2\pi r}{T} = r \omega.$$

    This links the linear (tangential 切向) speed $v$ with the angular speed $\omega$. At a larger radius (for the same angular speed) the linear speed is larger — a child on the edge of a merry-go-round moves faster than one near the centre, even though both go round once in the same time.

    A turntable with two riders sharing the same angular speed; the inner rider has a short velocity arrow and the outer rider a long one, because v equals r times omega
    Same angular speed, but the rider at the larger radius has the larger linear speed ($v = r\omega$)

    Worked example. A fairground ride of radius $4.0\ \text{m}$ completes one turn every $8.0\ \text{s}$. Find its angular speed and the linear speed of a rider on the edge.

    $$\omega = \frac{2\pi}{T} = \frac{2\pi}{8.0} = 0.79\ \text{rad s}^{-1}, \qquad v = r\omega = 4.0 \times 0.79 = 3.1\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    Worked example. The minute hand of a clock turns once every hour. A piece of modelling clay on the hand moves a total distance of $0.44\ \text{m}$ in $1400\ \text{s}$. Find the angular speed of the hand, the angle the clay turns through in that time, and its distance from the centre of the clock.

    $\omega = 2\pi/T = 2\pi/3600 = 1.75 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. Angular displacement $\theta = \omega t = 1.75 \times 10^{-3} \times 1400 = 2.44\ \text{rad}$. Distance along the arc $s = r\theta$, so $r = s/\theta = 0.44/2.44 = 0.18\ \text{m}$. Check: $v = s/t = 3.1 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ and $r\omega = 0.18 \times 1.75 \times 10^{-3} = 3.1 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ — the same. A common trap in these questions is a radius measured from the rim: a lump $1.2\ \text{cm}$ in from the edge of a $9.3\ \text{cm}$ disc moves in a circle of radius $8.1\ \text{cm}$.

    A bicycle chain round a large pedal cog and a small rear cog; every link of the chain moves at the same speed v, so v equals r1 omega1 equals r2 omega2 and the small cog turns faster
    Two cogs joined by a chain share the chain's speed, not its angular speed: $v = r_{1}\omega_{1} = r_{2}\omega_{2}$

    Worked example. A bicycle chain passes round a pedal cog of radius $0.095\ \text{m}$ and a rear-wheel cog of radius $0.038\ \text{m}$. The pedals turn at $1.2$ revolutions per second. Find the speed of the chain and the angular speed of the rear cog. The chain is then moved to a smaller rear cog while the bicycle's speed stays the same; explain, without calculation, what happens to the angular speed of the pedals.

    Pedal angular speed $\omega_{1} = 2\pi \times 1.2 = 7.5\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. Every link of the chain moves at the speed of the rim of the pedal cog: $v = r_{1}\omega_{1} = 0.095 \times 7.5 = 0.72\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. The rear cog's rim moves at the same speed, so $\omega_{2} = v/r_{2} = 0.72/0.038 = 19\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. With the bicycle's speed unchanged, the rear wheel keeps the same angular speed; the smaller cog's rim therefore moves more slowly ($v = r\omega$ with a smaller $r$), so the chain moves more slowly, and the pedal cog, driven by the same chain, turns at a lower angular speed.

    An object moving round a circle of radius r; as the radius sweeps through an angle the object moves along an arc, and its velocity v points along the tangent
    As the radius turns through $\Delta\theta$ the object moves an arc $\Delta s$ at speed $v$
    Explore

    Angular speed

    s = rθ

    Angular speed turns angle per time; arc length s = rθ.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    angular speed 角速度 jiǎo sù dù
    angular displacement 角位移 jiǎo wèi yí
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    revolution quān
    circumference 周长 zhōu cháng
    tangential 切向 qiè xiàng
    12.2

    Centripetal acceleration

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a force of constant magnitude that is always perpendicular to the direction of motion causes centripetal acceleration
    2. understand that centripetal acceleration causes circular motion with a constant angular speed
    3. recall and use $a = r\omega^2$ and $a = v^2 / r$
    4. recall and use $F = mr\omega^2$ and $F = mv^2 / r$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An object moving in a circle at constant speed still has a changing velocity 速度 — its direction keeps changing, even though its size stays the same. A changing velocity needs an acceleration 加速度. This acceleration points towards the centre and is the centripetal acceleration 向心加速度.

    The two-mark description. In uniform circular motion the speed is constant but the velocity is continuously changing, because its direction changes; the acceleration is constant in magnitude and is always directed towards the centre of the circle, perpendicular to the velocity. "State what is meant by centripetal acceleration": the acceleration of an object moving along a circular path, directed towards the centre of the circle.

    Size

    $$a = \frac{v^{2}}{r} = r\omega^{2}.$$

    The two forms are equal because $v = r\omega$. Pick the one with the quantities you have.

    The centripetal acceleration is perpendicular 垂直 to the velocity at every instant — never along the direction of motion. (If part of it were along the motion, the speed would change.) Unit: $\text{m s}^{-2}$.

    A ball moving along a circular path: its velocity points along the tangent while the force and acceleration point inwards towards the centre
    The velocity points along the tangent; the force and acceleration point to the centre

    Why the speed does not change. The centripetal force is perpendicular to the displacement at every instant, so it does no work on the object; its kinetic energy, and so its speed, stays constant. Only the direction of the velocity changes — which is exactly what an acceleration perpendicular to the velocity does.

    The Earth with its axis of rotation; a point P at latitude lambda moves in a small circle about the axis of radius R cos lambda, and its centripetal acceleration points towards the axis
    A point on the rotating Earth moves in a circle about the axis, of radius $R\cos\lambda$, not about the Earth's centre

    Worked example. The Earth is a sphere of radius $6.37 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$ rotating once in $24$ hours. Cambridge is at latitude 纬度 $52.2°$ north. Find the radius of the circle in which Cambridge moves, its speed, and its centripetal acceleration. A student of mass $58.6\ \text{kg}$ stands on bathroom scales there; state and explain the effect of the rotation on the reading.

    The circle is about the axis, so $r = R\cos\lambda = 6.37 \times 10^{6} \times \cos 52.2° = 3.90 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$. $\omega = 2\pi/(24 \times 3600) = 7.27 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$, so $v = r\omega = 284\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ and $a = r\omega^{2} = 3.90 \times 10^{6} \times (7.27 \times 10^{-5})^{2} = 2.1 \times 10^{-2}\ \text{m s}^{-2}$. The student needs a resultant force $ma = 1.2\ \text{N}$ towards the axis, which can only come from the weight exceeding the upward contact force; so the scales read less than the weight $mg = 575\ \text{N}$ — by about one newton (the acceleration has a component $a\cos\lambda = 0.013\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ along the vertical, i.e. $0.7\ \text{N}$ of the $1.2\ \text{N}$). Small, but the sign and the reason are the marks.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    centripetal acceleration 向心加速度 xiàng xīn jiā sù dù
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    latitude 纬度 wěi dù
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    12.2

    Centripetal force

    A large Ferris wheel
    A Ferris wheel: a centripetal force toward the centre keeps each car moving in a circle.

    By Newton's second law, the resultant force on a body in circular motion at constant speed is

    $$F = m a = \frac{m v^{2}}{r} = m r \omega^{2}.$$

    This is the centripetal force 向心力. It always points towards the centre — perpendicular to the velocity.

    The centripetal force is not a new kind of force — it is the net result of the real forces acting (tension, gravity, friction, electric attraction, normal contact force, …). In a problem, work out which real force(s) provide it.

    Worked example. A $0.20\ \text{kg}$ ball on a string is whirled in a horizontal circle of radius $0.50\ \text{m}$ at $3.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the centripetal force (the tension in the string).

    $$F = \frac{mv^{2}}{r} = \frac{0.20 \times 3.0^{2}}{0.50} = 3.6\ \text{N}.$$

    Where the centripetal force comes from

    • Ball on a string in a horizontal circle: the tension 张力 in the string.
    • Car turning a flat corner: the friction 摩擦力 between tyres and road ($F = m v^{2}/r$). If the car goes too fast, friction is not enough and it skids outwards.
    • Banked corner 倾斜 (no friction): the horizontal part of the normal contact force 支持力; $\tan\theta = v^{2}/(rg)$ for the angle that needs no friction.
    • A planet or satellite 卫星 in orbit 轨道: the gravitational attraction 引力, $G M m / r^{2} = m v^{2}/r$.
    • Electron 电子 in a circular orbit (Bohr-style model): the electrostatic 静电 attraction between the electron and the positive nucleus 原子核:
    $$\frac{kZe^{2}}{r^{2}} = \frac{m_{e} v^{2}}{r},$$

    where $k = 1/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0})$ and $Z$ is the nuclear charge. Solve for $v$ to get the orbital speed; then $T = 2\pi r/v$.

    A car on a banked track; the normal contact force F of the road on the car resolves into a vertical part F_v balancing the weight and a horizontal part F_h pointing to the centre of the circle
    On a banked track the horizontal part of the road's force provides the centripetal force

    The tilted force: conical pendulum, cone and swing-ride

    A ball on a string swung in a horizontal circle (a conical pendulum 圆锥摆), a ball rolling round the inside of a smooth cone, a chair on a fairground swing-ride and a car on a banked track are all the same problem: one force (the tension or the normal contact force) is tilted at an angle $\theta$ to the vertical. Resolve it. Its vertical component balances the weight; its horizontal component is the whole centripetal force:

    $$F\cos\theta = mg, \qquad F\sin\theta = \frac{mv^{2}}{r} \qquad\Rightarrow\qquad \tan\theta = \frac{v^{2}}{rg}.$$

    Never add a separate "centripetal force" to the diagram: the two real forces are the weight and the tilted force, and their resultant is horizontal, towards the centre.

    A conical pendulum: the string makes an angle theta with the vertical while the bob moves in a horizontal circle; the tension T is resolved into T cos theta upwards, balancing the weight, and T sin theta towards the centre, providing the centripetal force
    Resolve the tilted force: vertical component $= mg$, horizontal component $= mv^{2}/r$

    Worked example. A steel ball moves in a horizontal circle of radius $0.12\ \text{m}$ on the smooth inside surface of a cone whose surface makes $52°$ with the horizontal. Name the two forces on the ball, state the direction of their resultant, and find the speed of the ball and the period of its motion.

    The forces are the weight (vertically down) and the normal contact force from the cone's surface (perpendicular to the surface, so at $52°$ to the vertical); their resultant is horizontal, towards the centre of the circle. Vertically $N\cos 52° = mg$; horizontally $N\sin 52° = mv^{2}/r$. Dividing: $v^{2} = rg\tan 52° = 0.12 \times 9.81 \times 1.28 = 1.51$, so $v = 1.2\ \text{m s}^{-1}$, and $T = 2\pi r/v = 2\pi \times 0.12/1.23 = 0.61\ \text{s}$. The mass cancels — the speed does not depend on it.

    Worked example. A sphere of mass $0.29\ \text{kg}$ hangs from a spring of spring constant $40\ \text{N m}^{-1}$ and unstretched length $6.0\ \text{cm}$. It is set moving in a horizontal circle so that the spring makes $30°$ with the vertical. Find the tension, the radius of the circle and the speed.

    Vertically $T\cos 30° = mg$, so $T = 0.29 \times 9.81/0.866 = 3.3\ \text{N}$. The extension is $x = T/k = 3.28/40 = 0.082\ \text{m}$, so the spring's length is $0.060 + 0.082 = 0.142\ \text{m}$ and $r = 0.142\sin 30° = 0.071\ \text{m}$. Horizontally $T\sin 30° = mv^{2}/r$: $v^{2} = 3.28 \times 0.5 \times 0.071/0.29 = 0.40$, $v = 0.63\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Hooke's law supplies the length; the circle supplies the rest.

    Vertical circles

    When the circle is upright, the speed is not constant (gravity does work) — but at each instant the net force towards the centre still equals $m v^{2}/r$:

    • at the bottom of a loop: tension up, weight 重力 down, so $T - mg = m v^{2}/r$ — the tension is largest here.
    • at the top of a loop: tension and weight both point down (towards the centre), so $T + mg = m v^{2}/r$ — the tension is smallest. For the slowest speed at the top with the string just tight, set $T = 0$: $mg = m v_{\text{min}}^{2}/r$, giving $v_{\text{min}} = \sqrt{gr}$.
    An object on a circular ride drawn at the top and bottom of the loop; at the top the weight W and normal contact force R_t both point down, at the bottom the normal contact force R_b points up and the weight W points down
    Forces on a person at the top and bottom of a vertical circle

    Worked example. A car goes round a vertical loop of radius $2.0\ \text{m}$. Find the minimum speed at the top for the car to keep contact with the track (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    At the slowest speed the track force is zero, so gravity alone provides the centripetal force: $mg = m v_{\text{min}}^{2}/r$, giving $v_{\text{min}} = \sqrt{gr}$:

    $$v_{\text{min}} = \sqrt{9.81 \times 2.0} \approx 4.4\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The constant-speed result ($v = r\omega$, $\omega$ constant) holds for horizontal circles, or where the force only bends the path (orbits in gravity, charges in a magnetic field 磁场).

    Circles in fields

    Worked example. A helium atom is modelled as a nucleus of charge $+2e$ with two electrons in the same circular orbit of radius $170\ \text{pm}$, always on opposite sides of the nucleus. Find the resultant electric force on one electron and its speed.

    Each electron is attracted by the nucleus, distance $r$ away, and repelled by the other electron, distance $2r$ away, along the same line: $F = \dfrac{1}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0}}\left(\dfrac{2e^{2}}{r^{2}} - \dfrac{e^{2}}{(2r)^{2}}\right) = \dfrac{e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0}r^{2}} \times 1.75 = \dfrac{2.31 \times 10^{-28}}{(1.7 \times 10^{-10})^{2}} \times 1.75 = 1.4 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{N}$. This is the centripetal force: $v = \sqrt{Fr/m} = \sqrt{1.40 \times 10^{-8} \times 1.7 \times 10^{-10}/(9.11 \times 10^{-31})} = 1.6 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.

    Worked example. A proton (mass $1.67 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$) moving at $2.0 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ enters a uniform magnetic field of flux density $0.50\ \text{T}$ at right angles to the field. Find the radius of its path and the time for one revolution.

    The magnetic force $Bqv$ is always perpendicular to the velocity, so it is a centripetal force and the speed is constant: $Bqv = mv^{2}/r$ gives $r = \dfrac{mv}{Bq} = \dfrac{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times 2.0 \times 10^{6}}{0.50 \times 1.60 \times 10^{-19}} = 4.2 \times 10^{-2}\ \text{m}$, and $T = \dfrac{2\pi r}{v} = \dfrac{2\pi m}{Bq} = 1.3 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{s}$ — independent of the speed, which is why a faster proton makes a larger circle in the same time. For a satellite the gravitational force plays the same part: $\dfrac{GMm}{r^{2}} = mr\omega^{2}$, and the orbital speed and period follow from $r$ alone.

    Explore

    Centripetal force and speed

    F = mv²/r

    For circular motion the force needed grows with the square of the speed — double v, four times the force.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    force
    centripetal force 向心力 xiàng xīn lì
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    tension 张力 zhāng lì
    friction 摩擦力 mó cā lì
    normal contact force 支持力 zhī chí lì
    Banked corner 倾斜 qīng xié
    banked 倾斜 qīng xié
    satellite 卫星 wèi xīng
    orbit 轨道 guǐ dào
    gravitational attraction 引力 yǐn lì
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    electrostatic 静电 jìng diàn
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    conical pendulum 圆锥摆 yuán zhuī bǎi
    magnetic field 磁场 cí chǎng
    12.2

    How to structure a circular-motion answer

    1. Find the radius $r$ and choose $v$ or $\omega$. Use $v = r\omega$ to switch between them.
    2. Find the centripetal acceleration with $a = v^{2}/r$ or $r\omega^{2}$.
    3. List the real forces and write Newton's second law in the radial 径向 direction (towards the centre is positive). Set the net inward force equal to $m v^{2}/r$.
    4. For period or frequency: use $\omega = 2\pi/T$, or $T = 2\pi r / v$.
    5. Check the directions: centripetal force and acceleration point to the centre; the velocity is along the tangent.
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    radial 径向 jìng xiàng
    12.2

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    radian the angle subtended at the centre of a circle by an arc equal in length to the radius
    angular displacement the angle, in radians, through which the radius has turned from its starting position
    angular speed the angle swept out by the radius per unit time (the rate of change of angular displacement)
    period the time taken for one complete revolution
    uniform circular motion motion in a circle at constant speed, with a velocity that changes continuously in direction and an acceleration of constant magnitude directed towards the centre
    centripetal acceleration the acceleration of an object moving in a circular path, directed towards the centre of the circle and perpendicular to the velocity
    centripetal force the resultant force on an object in circular motion, directed towards the centre, of magnitude $mv^{2}/r$
    12.2

    Exam tips

    • Work in radians; angular speed $\omega = 2\pi/T = v/r$, and arc length $s = r\theta$ turns a distance along the circle into an angle.
    • Centripetal acceleration $a = v^2/r = \omega^2 r$; the net force acts towards the centre — it is provided by tension/gravity/friction/a contact force, not an extra force.
    • Always state what provides the centripetal force in the situation given, and for a tilted force resolve it: vertical component $= mg$, horizontal component $= mv^{2}/r$.
    • Read the radius carefully: a point measured from the rim moves in a smaller circle; a point on the rotating Earth moves in a circle about the axis, radius $R\cos\lambda$.
    • Two cogs on one chain share the chain's speed; two points on one rigid wheel share its angular speed.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining the radian as "$180/\pi$ degrees" or as $\theta = s/r$. The mark needs the arc equal in length to the radius.
    • Saying the velocity is constant in uniform circular motion. The speed is constant; the velocity changes direction, which is why there is an acceleration.
    • Drawing a "centripetal force" arrow as an extra force alongside the tension or contact force. It is their resultant, not a third force.
    • Using degrees in $\omega t$ or $v = r\omega$. Every formula in this topic assumes radians.
    • Forgetting that the force does no work: a force perpendicular to the motion changes direction, not speed, so kinetic energy is constant.
    • Taking $r$ as the Earth's radius for a point at latitude $\lambda$. The circle is about the axis, so $r = R\cos\lambda$.
  • 13

    Gravitational fields

    13.1

    Gravitational fields

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a gravitational field is an example of a field of force and define gravitational field as force per unit mass
    2. represent a gravitational field by means of field lines

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Definition

    A gravitational field 重力场 is a region where a mass 质量 feels a force from other masses. The gravitational field strength 重力场强度 $g$ at a point is the gravitational force per unit mass on a small test mass 检验质量 placed there:

    $$g = \frac{F}{m}.$$

    Unit: $\text{N kg}^{-1}$ (the same as $\text{m s}^{-2}$ — the acceleration of free fall in the field). $g$ is a vector 矢量, pointing the way the force acts — towards the source mass.

    The examiner's wording. A gravitational field is a region of space in which a mass experiences a force. Gravitational field strength at a point is the gravitational force per unit mass acting on a small test mass placed at the point. The direction of a field line at a point is the direction of the force on a (small test) mass placed there. All three are one-mark definitions; "force per unit mass" is the phrase that scores, "the force on 1 kg" is not.

    Field lines

    A gravitational field is drawn with field lines 场线 that point the way the force acts on a test mass:

    • around a point mass 质点 or a uniform sphere (treated as a point mass from outside), the field lines are radial 径向, pointing inwards.
    • near the Earth's surface over a small area, the field lines are nearly parallel and equally spaced, pointing straight down — a uniform field 匀强场.

    Closer lines mean a stronger field.

    Three sets of gravitational field lines: equally spaced parallel lines for constant field strength, lines spreading apart for decreasing strength, and lines converging for increasing strength
    Field-line spacing shows the field strength — closer lines mean a stronger field

    Why $g$ is constant near the surface, in terms of field lines (a two-mark explanation): over a region whose size is small compared with the Earth's radius, the radial field lines are almost parallel and their spacing hardly changes with height, so the field strength — which the spacing represents — is almost the same at the top of the region as at the bottom. Over the whole planet the lines spread out with distance and the field falls.

    Worked example. A point P represents a point mass. Draw lines to represent the gravitational field around P, and state what the direction of a line shows.

    Straight radial lines, evenly spaced around P, with arrows pointing inwards towards P. The direction of a line is the direction of the force on a small test mass placed there — always towards the mass that produces the field, because gravity only attracts.

    Explore

    A radial field

    Change the mass. The field lines point inward and get denser close in, where the field is stronger — a radial field around a point mass.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gravitational field 重力场 zhòng lì chǎng
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    force
    gravitational field strength 重力场强度 zhòng lì chǎng qiáng dù
    test mass 检验质量 jiǎn yàn zhì liàng
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    field line 场线 chǎng xiàn
    field lines 场线 chǎng xiàn
    point mass 质点 zhì diǎn
    radial 径向 jìng xiàng
    uniform field 匀强场 yún qiáng chǎng
    Exercise sheet
    13.2 13.3

    Newton's law of gravitation

    Syllabus
    1. understand that, for a point outside a uniform sphere, the mass of the sphere may be considered to be a point mass at its centre
    2. recall and use Newton's law of gravitation $F = Gm_1m_2 / r^2$ for the force between two point masses
    3. analyse circular orbits in gravitational fields by relating the gravitational force to the centripetal acceleration it causes
    4. understand that a satellite in a geostationary orbit remains at the same point above the Earth's surface, with an orbital period of 24 hours, orbiting from west to east, directly above the Equator
    1. derive, from Newton's law of gravitation and the definition of gravitational field, the equation $g = GM/r^2$ for the gravitational field strength due to a point mass
    2. recall and use $g = GM/r^2$
    3. understand why $g$ is approximately constant for small changes in height near the Earth's surface

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    For two point masses $m_{1}, m_{2}$ a distance $r$ apart, the force on each is

    Two masses pull on each other along the line joining them
    Two masses attract along the line joining them
    $$F = \frac{G m_{1} m_{2}}{r^{2}},$$

    pulling them together along the line joining them. This is Newton's law of gravitation 万有引力定律. The constant $G = 6.67 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{kg}^{-2}$ is the universal gravitational constant 万有引力常量.

    In words, as the mark scheme wants it: the gravitational force between two point masses is proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of their separation — both proportionalities, and "point masses". Asked to "state the equation and the meaning of any other symbols", give $F = Gm_{1}m_{2}/r^{2}$ with $G$ the gravitational constant and $r$ the distance between the centres.

    Worked example. Two isolated uniform spheres, each of mass $1.0 \times 10^{3}\ \text{kg}$, have their centres $2.0\ \text{m}$ apart. Find the gravitational force between them and comment on its size.

    $F = \dfrac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 1.0 \times 10^{3} \times 1.0 \times 10^{3}}{2.0^{2}} = 1.7 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{N}$. This is about $10^{-9}$ of each sphere's weight ($9.8 \times 10^{3}\ \text{N}$): gravity between everyday objects is negligible, and only a planet-sized mass produces a noticeable field. "Isolated" in a question means that no other masses need be considered.

    Spheres treated as point masses

    For a uniform sphere (such as a planet or star), the field at any point outside is the same as that of a point mass equal to the total mass at the centre. So from above the surface, you can treat the Earth as a point mass at its centre. (Points inside a sphere are different, and are not in the syllabus.)

    Radial gravitational field lines pointing inwards towards a point mass, and the identical pattern of inward radial lines around a uniform sphere
    Outside a uniform sphere the field is radial, exactly like a point mass at the centre

    Between two masses the fields subtract and the potentials add. Field strength is a vector: on the line joining two spheres the two fields point in opposite directions, so there is a point where they cancel and the resultant field is zero. Potential is a scalar: the two potentials simply add, and both are negative, so the potential is least negative (a maximum) at the point where the field is zero.

    Two graphs along the line joining two identical spheres X and Y: the resultant field strength g falls from the surface of X, passes through zero at the midpoint and reverses; the potential is negative throughout and rises to a maximum, its least negative value, at the midpoint
    Along the line between two equal masses the field strength passes through zero at the midpoint, where the potential has its maximum

    Worked example. Two identical isolated uniform spheres X and Y, each of mass $M$ and radius $R$, have their centres a distance $L$ apart. Point P lies on the line joining the centres. State where on the line the resultant field strength is zero, and find the gravitational potential there.

    By symmetry the fields of X and Y are equal and opposite at the midpoint, $L/2$ from each centre, so the resultant field is zero there. The potential at P is the sum $\phi = -\dfrac{GM}{L/2} - \dfrac{GM}{L/2} = -\dfrac{4GM}{L}$. A mass released at P would stay there; a mass released anywhere else on the line falls towards the nearer sphere.

    Field strength from a point mass

    Put the gravitational force on a test mass $m$ at distance $r$ from a point mass $M$ into $g = F/m$:

    $$F = \frac{G M m}{r^{2}}, \qquad g = \frac{G M}{r^{2}}.$$

    So $g$ falls off as $1/r^{2}$ as you move away from the source.

    The two-mark derivation. The force on a test mass $m$ at distance $r$ from a point mass $M$ is $F = GMm/r^{2}$ (Newton's law). Field strength is force per unit mass, $g = F/m$, so $g = GM/r^{2}$. Write both lines: the law and the definition are the two marks. Because $g \propto 1/r^{2}$, halving the distance makes the field four times stronger: at distance $x/2$ the field is $4g$, in the same direction, towards $M$.

    A graph of gravitational field strength g against distance r: g equals GM over r squared, so it is large near the surface r = R and falls off as one over r squared with distance
    Field strength falls off as $1/r^2$ with distance from a point mass

    Worked example. Find the gravitational field strength at the Earth's surface. (Earth's mass $M = 6.0 \times 10^{24}\ \text{kg}$, radius $R = 6.4 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$, $G = 6.67 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{kg}^{-2}$.)

    $$g = \frac{GM}{R^{2}} = \frac{(6.67 \times 10^{-11})(6.0 \times 10^{24})}{(6.4 \times 10^{6})^{2}} \approx 9.8\ \text{N kg}^{-1}.$$

    Why $g$ is nearly constant near the Earth's surface

    The Earth's radius is $R \approx 6.4 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$. Rising to height $h$ changes the distance from the centre from $R$ to $R + h$. For $h \ll R$ (any building or mountain), $(R + h)/R \approx 1$, so $g$ barely changes — going from $5\ \text{m}$ to $10\ \text{m}$ high changes $r$ by about one part in a million. In the laboratory, $g$ is effectively constant.

    Explore

    Newton's law of gravitation

    F ∝ Mm / r²

    Gravity pulls inward and weakens with the square of the distance.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Newton's law of gravitation 万有引力定律 wàn yǒu yǐn lì dìng lǜ
    universal gravitational constant 万有引力常量 wàn yǒu yǐn lì cháng liàng
    Exercise sheet Exercise sheet
    13.2 13.3

    Orbital motion in a gravitational field

    The International Space Station in orbit above Earth
    The International Space Station orbits Earth, held in its path by gravity.
    A planet of mass m on a dashed circular orbit of radius r around the Sun of mass M at the centre, with the gravitational force F pointing to the centre and the speed v along the tangent
    Gravity provides the centripetal force that keeps a planet in a circular orbit
    A NASA photograph of Saturn against black space: the round planet with pale cloud bands, surrounded by its wide flat ring system, with a few small moons visible as bright dots
    Saturn, its rings (countless small orbiting pieces) and its moons are all held in orbit by gravity

    For a satellite 卫星 of mass $m$ in a circular orbit 轨道 of radius $r$ around a body of mass $M$, gravity provides the centripetal force 向心力:

    $$\frac{G M m}{r^{2}} = \frac{m v^{2}}{r}.$$

    Cancel $m$ (the orbital speed does not depend on the satellite's mass):

    $$v = \sqrt{\frac{G M}{r}}.$$

    Worked example. A satellite orbits the Earth in a circular orbit of radius $r = 7.0 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$. Find its orbital speed. (For the Earth, $GM = 4.0 \times 10^{14}\ \text{m}^{3}\ \text{s}^{-2}$.)

    $$v = \sqrt{\frac{GM}{r}} = \sqrt{\frac{4.0 \times 10^{14}}{7.0 \times 10^{6}}} \approx 7.6 \times 10^{3}\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The period 周期 follows from $T = 2\pi r / v$:

    $$T = 2\pi \sqrt{\frac{r^{3}}{G M}}, \quad\text{so}\quad T^{2} = \frac{4\pi^{2}}{G M} \cdot r^{3}.$$

    This is Kepler's third law 开普勒第三定律 for circular orbits: $T^{2} \propto r^{3}$. A plot of $T^{2}$ against $r^{3}$ is a straight line through the origin with gradient $4\pi^{2}/(GM)$, so orbital data gives the central mass.

    A graph of T squared against r cubed: the orbital data lie on a straight line through the origin, confirming Kepler's third law, with gradient 4 pi squared over GM
    Kepler's third law: $T^2 \propto r^3$, a straight line through the origin

    The two-mark derivation, as the exam sets it. For a satellite of mass $m$ in a circular orbit of radius $R$ and period $T$ around a planet of mass $M$: the gravitational force provides the centripetal force, $\dfrac{GMm}{R^{2}} = mR\omega^{2}$, and $\omega = 2\pi/T$; so $\dfrac{GM}{R^{2}} = \dfrac{4\pi^{2}R}{T^{2}}$, giving $T^{2} = \dfrac{4\pi^{2}R^{3}}{GM}$. For an orbit at height $h$ above a planet of radius $R_{\text{p}}$ the orbital radius is $R_{\text{p}} + h$, so $T^{2} = 4\pi^{2}(R_{\text{p}} + h)^{3}/GM$: a graph of $T^{2}$ against $(R_{\text{p}} + h)^{3}$ is a straight line through the origin whose gradient gives $M$.

    Worked example. Satellite X, of mass $M_{\text{s}}$, orbits a planet at a distance $4R$ from its centre; satellite Y, of mass $2M_{\text{s}}$, orbits at $3R$. Compare their speeds, periods and kinetic energies.

    From $v = \sqrt{GM/r}$, $\dfrac{v_{\text{Y}}}{v_{\text{X}}} = \sqrt{\dfrac{4R}{3R}} = 1.15$: Y moves faster, and the satellite masses do not enter. From $T \propto r^{3/2}$, $\dfrac{T_{\text{Y}}}{T_{\text{X}}} = \left(\dfrac{3}{4}\right)^{3/2} = 0.65$. Kinetic energy $= \tfrac{1}{2}mv^{2} = \dfrac{GMm}{2r}$, so $\dfrac{E_{\text{Y}}}{E_{\text{X}}} = \dfrac{2M_{\text{s}}/3R}{M_{\text{s}}/4R} = \dfrac{8}{3}$. In ratio questions cancel $G$, $M$ and the satellite mass first; only the radii and masses that differ survive.

    Binary stars. Two stars of masses $M_{\text{A}}$ and $M_{\text{B}}$ a distance $d$ apart orbit their common centre of mass 质心, always on opposite sides of it, with the same period. The centre of mass divides $d$ in the inverse ratio of the masses, $M_{\text{A}}r_{\text{A}} = M_{\text{B}}r_{\text{B}}$ with $r_{\text{A}} + r_{\text{B}} = d$, and the same gravitational force $GM_{\text{A}}M_{\text{B}}/d^{2}$ is the centripetal force on each star.

    Two stars A and B orbiting their common centre of mass C on dashed circles of radii rA and rB, always diametrically opposite, with the heavier star A on the smaller circle; the attraction between them acts along the line joining them
    A binary star: both stars circle the centre of mass with the same period, the heavier one on the smaller circle

    Worked example. A binary star consists of star A, mass $4.0 \times 10^{30}\ \text{kg}$, and star B, mass $2.0 \times 10^{30}\ \text{kg}$, with centres $3.3 \times 10^{11}\ \text{m}$ apart. Find the distance of A from the centre of mass and the period of the orbit.

    $M_{\text{A}}r_{\text{A}} = M_{\text{B}}r_{\text{B}}$ with $r_{\text{A}} + r_{\text{B}} = 3.3 \times 10^{11}$ gives $r_{\text{A}} = \dfrac{2.0}{6.0} \times 3.3 \times 10^{11} = 1.1 \times 10^{11}\ \text{m}$ (and $r_{\text{B}} = 2.2 \times 10^{11}\ \text{m}$). For star A: $\dfrac{GM_{\text{A}}M_{\text{B}}}{d^{2}} = M_{\text{A}}r_{\text{A}}\omega^{2}$, so $\omega^{2} = \dfrac{GM_{\text{B}}}{d^{2}r_{\text{A}}} = \dfrac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 2.0 \times 10^{30}}{(3.3 \times 10^{11})^{2} \times 1.1 \times 10^{11}} = 1.1 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{s}^{-2}$, $\omega = 1.06 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$ and $T = 2\pi/\omega = 6.0 \times 10^{7}\ \text{s}$, about $1.9$ years. Using $d$ in the force but $r_{\text{A}}$ in the centripetal term is the whole point of the question.

    Geostationary orbit

    A geostationary 地球同步 satellite:

    • stays directly above the same point on the Earth (so a fixed dish always points at it),
    • has a period of 24 hours (the same as the Earth's rotation),
    • orbits west to east (the same way the Earth turns),
    • must be directly above the equator 赤道.

    It must have the same angular speed 角速度 as the Earth, in the same direction, in the equatorial plane (or it would drift north–south during the day). From $T = 24\ \text{h}$ and $T^{2} = 4\pi^{2} r^{3}/(GM)$, the radius is $r \approx 4.2 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m}$ (about $3.6 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m}$ above the surface).

    Worked example. Calculate the radius of a geostationary orbit around the Earth ($M = 5.98 \times 10^{24}\ \text{kg}$), and explain why a satellite with the same orbital radius and period may still not be geostationary.

    $T = 24 \times 3600 = 8.64 \times 10^{4}\ \text{s}$; $r^{3} = \dfrac{GMT^{2}}{4\pi^{2}} = \dfrac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 5.98 \times 10^{24} \times (8.64 \times 10^{4})^{2}}{4\pi^{2}} = 7.5 \times 10^{22}\ \text{m}^{3}$, so $r = 4.2 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m}$ — a height of about $3.6 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m}$ above the surface. A satellite with this period is geostationary only if its orbit is in the plane of the equator and it travels from west to east; with the same period in a tilted orbit (over the poles, say) it returns to the same point each day but is not always above it. Mars turns once in about $25$ hours, so a satellite that stays above one point on Mars has a $25$-hour period and the same two other features.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    orbit 轨道 guǐ dào
    centripetal force 向心力 xiàng xīn lì
    satellite 卫星 wèi xīng
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    Kepler's third law 开普勒第三定律 kāi pǔ lēi dì sān dìng lǜ
    centre of mass 质心 zhì xīn
    geostationary 地球同步 dì qiú tóng bù
    equator 赤道 chì dào
    angular speed 角速度 jiǎo sù dù
    13.4

    Gravitational potential

    Syllabus
    1. define gravitational potential at a point as the work done per unit mass in bringing a small test mass from infinity to the point
    2. use $\phi = -GM/r$ for the gravitational potential in the field due to a point mass
    3. understand how the concept of gravitational potential leads to the gravitational potential energy of two point masses and use $E_P = -GMm/r$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Gravitational potential 引力势 $\phi$ at a point is the work done per unit mass in bringing a small test mass from infinity 无穷远 to that point:

    $$\phi = \frac{W}{m}.$$

    Unit: $\text{J kg}^{-1}$.

    The potential is taken as zero at infinity. As the test mass falls in towards the source, gravity does the work for you, so $\phi$ is negative everywhere except at infinity. For a point mass $M$ at distance $r$:

    $$\phi = -\frac{G M}{r}.$$

    $\phi$ is a scalar 标量. For several masses, add the potentials.

    A graph of gravitational potential against distance r: phi = minus GM over r is negative everywhere, deepest near the surface R and rising towards zero at large r — a potential well
    The gravitational potential well: $\phi = -GM/r$ is negative, rising to zero at infinity

    The two-mark definition, and why it is negative. Gravitational potential at a point is the work done per unit mass in bringing a small test mass from infinity to the point. Potential is defined as zero at infinity; gravity is attractive, so as the test mass comes in from infinity the field does work on it and the mass gives out energy — the work that an external agent must do is negative. Hence the potential at every finite distance is below zero. (Electric potential near a positive charge is positive for the opposite reason: that field repels, so work must be done to bring a positive test charge in.)

    Similarities and differences with electric potential. Both are defined as work done per unit mass or per unit positive charge from infinity, both are scalars, both vary as $1/r$ from a point source and both are zero at infinity. The difference: gravitational potential is always negative, because gravity only attracts, whereas electric potential can be positive or negative depending on the sign of the charge.

    Reading a potential graph. Two graphs appear in questions. On $\phi$ against $r$ the curve is $-GM/r$: the surface value $\phi_{\text{s}} = -GM/R$ gives the mass of the planet, and the gradient at any point gives the field strength there, since $g = -\dfrac{\Delta\phi}{\Delta r}$ — field strength is the negative of the potential gradient (this is the "relationship between potential and field strength" a question may ask for). On $\phi$ against $1/r$ the graph is a straight line through the origin with gradient $-GM$, which is the neater way to extract $M$.

    Worked example. The Moon is an isolated uniform sphere of mass $7.3 \times 10^{22}\ \text{kg}$ and radius $1.7 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$. Calculate the gravitational potential at its surface, and the minimum speed with which a particle must leave the surface to escape.

    $\phi = -\dfrac{GM}{R} = -\dfrac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 7.3 \times 10^{22}}{1.7 \times 10^{6}} = -2.9 \times 10^{6}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}$. To escape, the particle's kinetic energy per unit mass must equal the depth of the potential well: $\tfrac{1}{2}v^{2} = 2.9 \times 10^{6}$, so $v = \sqrt{2 \times 2.9 \times 10^{6}} = 2.4 \times 10^{3}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. The minus sign carries the meaning: energy of $2.9\ \text{MJ}$ per kilogram must be supplied to lift the particle out.

    Gravitational potential energy of two point masses

    If a test mass $m$ sits where the potential is $\phi$, the gravitational potential energy 重力势能 of the pair is

    $$E_{\text{P}} = m \phi = -\frac{G M m}{r}.$$

    Like the potential, $E_{\text{P}}$ is negative and reaches zero only at infinite separation. Closer masses have more negative potential energy (more tightly bound).

    Link with $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg\Delta h$

    For small height changes near the surface, $r$ barely changes, so $\Delta E_{\text{P}} \approx mg\Delta h$. For large changes (a satellite moving to a higher orbit) use $-GMm/r$ at each radius and take the difference:

    $$\Delta E_{\text{P}} = GMm\left(\frac{1}{r_{1}} - \frac{1}{r_{2}}\right) \quad (r_{2} > r_{1}),$$

    which is positive (energy must be supplied to raise the satellite).

    Worked example. A satellite of mass $1200\ \text{kg}$ is moved from a circular orbit of radius $7.0 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$ to one of radius $8.0 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$ around the Earth ($GM = 4.0 \times 10^{14}\ \text{m}^{3}\ \text{s}^{-2}$). Find the changes in its gravitational potential energy, its kinetic energy and its total energy.

    $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = GMm\left(\dfrac{1}{r_{1}} - \dfrac{1}{r_{2}}\right) = 4.0 \times 10^{14} \times 1200 \times \left(\dfrac{1}{7.0 \times 10^{6}} - \dfrac{1}{8.0 \times 10^{6}}\right) = +8.6 \times 10^{9}\ \text{J}$. In a circular orbit $E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2}mv^{2} = \dfrac{GMm}{2r}$, so $\Delta E_{\text{K}} = \dfrac{GMm}{2}\left(\dfrac{1}{r_{2}} - \dfrac{1}{r_{1}}\right) = -4.3 \times 10^{9}\ \text{J}$: the higher satellite moves more slowly. The total energy $E_{\text{K}} + E_{\text{P}} = -\dfrac{GMm}{2r}$ rises by $+4.3 \times 10^{9}\ \text{J}$, which is the energy the rocket motor must supply. A satellite's total energy is negative — it is bound — and it becomes less negative as the orbit widens.

    Escape velocity (from conservation of energy)

    To escape from radius $r$ to infinity, an object's kinetic energy 动能 must equal the size of its gravitational potential energy:

    $$\tfrac{1}{2} m v_{\text{esc}}^{2} = \frac{G M m}{r}, \qquad v_{\text{esc}} = \sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{r}}.$$

    At the Earth's surface, the escape velocity 逃逸速度 is $\approx 11\ \text{km s}^{-1}$. It does not depend on the object's mass.

    Worked example. Find the escape velocity from the Earth's surface. (For the Earth, $GM = 4.0 \times 10^{14}\ \text{m}^{3}\ \text{s}^{-2}$, $R = 6.4 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$.)

    $$v_{\text{esc}} = \sqrt{\frac{2GM}{R}} = \sqrt{\frac{2 (4.0 \times 10^{14})}{6.4 \times 10^{6}}} \approx 1.1 \times 10^{4}\ \text{m s}^{-1}\ (= 11\ \text{km s}^{-1}).$$

    Worked example. A particle is projected vertically upwards from the surface of an isolated planet of radius $R$, where the gravitational potential is $\phi_{\text{s}}$. Show that it just reaches a distance $r$ from the centre if its launch speed $v$ satisfies $\tfrac{1}{2}v^{2} = -\phi_{\text{s}}\left(1 - \dfrac{R}{r}\right)$, and deduce the escape speed.

    Potential varies as $1/r$, so at distance $r$ it is $\phi_{\text{s}}R/r$. When the particle stops, its kinetic energy per unit mass has all become potential energy per unit mass: $\tfrac{1}{2}v^{2} = \phi(r) - \phi_{\text{s}} = \phi_{\text{s}}\dfrac{R}{r} - \phi_{\text{s}} = -\phi_{\text{s}}\left(1 - \dfrac{R}{r}\right)$, which is positive because $\phi_{\text{s}}$ is negative. Letting $r \to \infty$ gives $\tfrac{1}{2}v_{\text{esc}}^{2} = -\phi_{\text{s}} = GM/R$ — the escape-speed result again, now read straight off the potential.

    Explore

    Gravitational potential

    V = −GM / r

    Potential ∝ −1/r — deep near the mass, flattening with distance.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    gravitational potential 引力势 yǐn lì shì
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    infinity 无穷远 wú qióng yuǎn
    gravitational potential energy 重力势能 zhòng lì shì néng
    escape velocity 逃逸速度 táo yì sù dù
    Exercise sheet
    13.4

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    gravitational field a region of space in which a mass experiences a force
    gravitational field strength the gravitational force per unit mass acting on a small test mass placed at the point
    field line (direction) the direction of the force on a small test mass placed at that point
    Newton's law of gravitation the gravitational force between two point masses is proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of their separation
    gravitational potential the work done per unit mass in bringing a small test mass from infinity to the point
    gravitational potential energy (two point masses) the work done in bringing the two masses from infinity to their separation, $E_{\text{P}} = -GMm/r$
    geostationary orbit an orbit with a period of 24 hours, from west to east, directly above the equator, so the satellite stays above the same point on the surface
    escape speed the minimum speed at which an object must leave the surface to reach infinity with zero kinetic energy
    centre of mass (binary star) the point about which both stars orbit, dividing their separation in the inverse ratio of their masses
    13.4

    Exam tips

    • Newton's law of gravitation $F = GMm/r^2$ (inverse-square); field strength $g = GM/r^2$ — and quote the derivation as two lines, the law and the definition of $g$.
    • Distinguish gravitational potential ($\phi = -GM/r$, always negative, zero at infinity) from field strength; $g$ is the negative gradient of the $\phi$$r$ graph.
    • For an orbit set gravity $=$ centripetal force to get $T^2 \propto r^3$; a geostationary orbit has $T = 24\ \text{h}$ plus two more features: above the equator, west to east.
    • Use the orbital radius (centre to centre, $R_{\text{p}} + h$), never the height, and for a binary star the separation $d$ in the force but the orbit radius $r_{\text{A}}$ in the centripetal term.
    • Energy changes come from $-GMm/r$ at each radius; for a circular orbit $E_{\text{K}} = GMm/2r$ and the total energy is $-GMm/2r$.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining potential as "force per unit mass" or field strength as "work done per unit mass". Swap them and both marks go.
    • Saying the potential is negative "because gravity attracts" and stopping there. The mark needs the work argument: zero at infinity, and the field does the work as the mass comes in.
    • Using the height above the surface as $r$ in $GM/r^{2}$ or $T^{2} \propto r^{3}$. Add the planet's radius first.
    • Writing Kepler's law as $T \propto r$ or $T^{2} \propto r^{2}$. It is $T^{2} \propto r^{3}$: a straight line only on $T^{2}$ against $r^{3}$.
    • Making "geostationary" mean only "24-hour period". Without the equatorial plane and the west-to-east direction it is not geostationary.
    • Forgetting that a satellite's kinetic energy falls when it is raised to a higher orbit, even though energy had to be supplied.
  • 14

    Temperature

    14.1

    Thermal equilibrium

    Syllabus
    1. understand that (thermal) energy is transferred from a region of higher temperature to a region of lower temperature
    2. understand that regions of equal temperature are in thermal equilibrium

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Heat 热量 (thermal energy) flows from a higher temperature to a lower temperature. When two bodies touch, energy moves until their temperatures are equal — they reach thermal equilibrium 热平衡. At equilibrium there is no net flow of energy.

    Two regions at the same temperature 温度 are in thermal equilibrium with each other — no net energy flows, even though particles still exchange energy.

    Temperature decides the direction of heat flow. It is not a measure of how much thermal energy 热能 a body holds. A small cup of boiling water (100 °C) holds far less energy than a swimming pool at 25 °C, but a piece of metal put in the cup gains energy while one put in the pool loses it.

    Heat flows from a hot body at temperature T1 to a cold body at T2 until both reach the same temperature T_eq, when there is no net flow
    Heat flows from hot to cold until both reach the same temperature — thermal equilibrium

    The examiner's wording. Two objects are in thermal equilibrium when there is no net transfer of thermal energy between them; that happens when they are at the same temperature. Asked for "the reason why two objects at the same temperature are in thermal equilibrium", the one mark is: there is no net flow of thermal energy between them — energy still passes both ways, but equally. Thermal energy is the energy transferred because of a temperature difference; temperature is what decides the direction.

    Worked example. Two metal cuboids P and Q are in thermal contact and in thermal equilibrium. State what this means, and describe what happens when a hotter cuboid is placed against them.

    No net thermal energy passes between P and Q, because they are at the same temperature. A hotter cuboid transfers thermal energy to them (from higher to lower temperature) until all three reach one common temperature; then, and only then, is the whole group in thermal equilibrium.

    Explore

    Thermal equilibrium route

    Watch energy transfer until two objects reach the same temperature.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    thermal equilibrium 热平衡 rè píng héng
    heat 热量 rè liàng
    thermal energy 热能 rè néng
    temperature 温度 wēn dù
    Exercise sheet
    14.2

    Measuring temperature

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a physical property that varies with temperature may be used for the measurement of temperature and state examples of such properties, including the density of a liquid, volume of a gas at constant pressure, resistance of a metal, e.m.f. of a thermocouple
    2. understand that the scale of thermodynamic temperature does not depend on the property of any particular substance
    3. convert temperatures between kelvin and degrees Celsius and recall that $T/\text{K} = \theta/\text{ }^{\circ}\text{C} + 273.15$
    4. understand that the lowest possible temperature is zero kelvin on the thermodynamic temperature scale and that this is known as absolute zero

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A mercury-in-glass thermometer
    A thermometer measures temperature on a defined scale.

    Any physical property that changes in a repeatable way with temperature can make a thermometer 温度计. Examples:

    • volume of a liquid — a liquid-in-glass thermometer (mercury or alcohol). As the temperature rises, the liquid expands and rises up a narrow capillary 毛细管.
    • volume of a gas at constant pressure — a gas thermometer. The gas volume rises in step with the absolute temperature.
    • resistance of a metal — a resistance thermometer. A metal's resistance 电阻 rises nearly in step with temperature over a wide range.
    • e.m.f. of a thermocouple — a thermocouple 热电偶 is two different metals joined at two points; the electromotive force 电动势 it makes depends on the temperature difference between the joins.

    Different thermometers can read slightly differently if the property does not change in a straight line; they agree only at the calibration 校准 points.

    Fixed points and calibration. A thermometer is calibrated at two fixed points 固定点 that are easy to reproduce — the ice point ($0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$, pure melting ice) and the steam point ($100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$, steam above boiling water at standard pressure). The value of the property is measured at each, and the scale between them is drawn assuming the property changes linearly with temperature. That assumption is the weakness: mercury's expansion, a metal's resistance and a thermocouple's e.m.f. all vary slightly differently between the fixed points, so two thermometers that agree at $0$ and $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ can disagree at $50\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$.

    A graph of a thermometric property against true temperature: the straight line assumed between the ice point and the steam point, and the real, slightly curved variation of the property; at a true temperature of 50 degrees the linear scale reads 55 degrees
    Calibrated at two fixed points and assumed linear in between, a thermometer reads a temperature that depends on how its own property really varies

    Why a liquid-in-glass thermometer does not measure thermodynamic temperature (the one-mark reason): its reading depends on the property of a particular substance — the expansion of mercury or alcohol — and on the assumption that this expansion is linear between the fixed points. The thermodynamic scale depends on no substance at all.

    Why water is a poor thermometric liquid. Its density does not change steadily with temperature: it is greatest at $4\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$, so between $0$ and $8\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ two different temperatures give the same density and the reading is ambiguous, and the change per degree is small, so the thermometer is insensitive. Mercury's density falls steadily and almost linearly over the whole range, which is why it was chosen.

    Worked example. A platinum resistance thermometer is a coil of platinum wire in a glass tube, connected to a circuit that measures its resistance. Explain how it measures temperature, and give one disadvantage compared with a thermocouple.

    The resistance of the platinum increases with temperature in a known, almost linear way; the resistance is measured at the ice point and the steam point, and any other temperature is read from where the measured resistance falls on the linear scale between them (or from a calibration graph). Disadvantage: the coil, tube and the fluid around them have a large thermal capacity, so the thermometer responds slowly and cannot follow a rapidly changing temperature; it is also bulky and needs a circuit to read it. (Its advantages: accurate, stable and usable over a very wide range.)

    A constant-volume gas thermometer: a bulb of gas connected to a mercury manometer, with the pressure read from the height difference h between the two mercury levels
    A constant-volume gas thermometer — the gas pressure is found from the height difference h

    Worked example. In a constant-volume gas thermometer the pressure of the gas is $1.05 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$ when the bulb is in melting ice and $1.19 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$ when it is in a warm room. Find the thermodynamic temperature of the room, and explain why this thermometer, unlike a liquid-in-glass one, gives thermodynamic temperature directly.

    For a fixed mass of gas at constant volume the pressure is proportional to the thermodynamic temperature, so $\dfrac{T}{273.15} = \dfrac{1.19 \times 10^{5}}{1.05 \times 10^{5}}$, giving $T = 310\ \text{K}$ ($36\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$). The pressure of a (nearly) ideal gas depends only on its temperature, not on which gas it is, so the reading does not rely on the property of a particular substance — the defining feature of the thermodynamic scale.

    A thermal-camera (infrared) image of fast food: a paper bag of fries glowing bright yellow and orange next to a drinks cup that appears dark, all on a purple background
    A thermal (infrared) camera maps temperature to colour: the hot fries glow bright orange, the cold drink stays dark
    Explore

    Temperature scale lab

    Kelvin index = Celsius index + 2.73

    Slide Celsius temperature and see the Kelvin scale shift by 273.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    thermometer 温度计 wēn dù jì
    capillary 毛细管 máo xì guǎn
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    thermocouple 热电偶 rè diàn ǒu
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    calibration 校准 jiào zhǔn
    fixed points 固定点 gù dìng diǎn
    Exercise sheet
    14.2

    Thermodynamic temperature scale

    The thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度 (or absolute temperature 绝对温度) scale does not depend on any one substance — only on the laws of thermodynamics. Its unit is the kelvin 开尔文 (K).

    Absolute zero

    The lowest possible temperature is zero kelvin ($0\ \text{K}$), called absolute zero 绝对零度. There a system has its least possible internal energy 内能 — particles have no random motion to speak of. Nothing can be cooled below this.

    As the exam asks it. "State the magnitude and unit of absolute zero on the thermodynamic scale": $0\ \text{K}$ (the unit is the kelvin). "State the temperature of absolute zero on the Celsius scale": $-273.15\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ (accept $-273\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$). "What is absolute zero?": the temperature at which a system has its minimum internal energy — the particles have the least kinetic and potential energy they can have — and below which it is impossible to go. The thermodynamic scale is fixed by absolute zero and by the triple point 三相点 of water, defined as $273.16\ \text{K}$; it does not depend on the property of any particular substance.

    A graph of gas pressure against temperature in degrees Celsius: a straight line measured between 0 and 100 °C, extended back as a dashed line to meet zero pressure at about −273 °C
    Extrapolating the pressure–temperature line back to zero pressure gives absolute zero, about −273 °C

    Celsius scale

    The Celsius 摄氏度 scale $\theta$ is shifted from the thermodynamic scale by a fixed amount:

    $$T / \text{K} = \theta / {}^{\circ}\text{C} + 273.15.$$

    So $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C} = 273.15\ \text{K}$ and $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C} = 373.15\ \text{K}$. A kelvin and a degree Celsius are the same size, so a temperature difference of $1\ \text{K}$ equals $1\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ — but the absolute values differ by $273.15$.

    In gas-law calculations you must always use absolute temperatures in kelvin. Using °C gives wrong answers.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    absolute temperature 绝对温度 jué duì wēn dù
    thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度 rè lì xué wēn dù
    kelvin 开尔文 kāi ěr wén
    absolute zero 绝对零度 jué duì líng dù
    internal energy 内能 nèi néng
    Celsius 摄氏度 shè shì dù
    triple point 三相点 sān xiāng diǎn
    14.3

    Specific heat capacity

    Syllabus
    1. define and use specific heat capacity
    2. define and use specific latent heat and distinguish between specific latent heat of fusion and specific latent heat of vaporisation

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The specific heat capacity 比热容 $c$ of a substance is the energy 能量 needed to raise the temperature of unit mass by one kelvin:

    $$c = \frac{Q}{m \Delta T} \qquad\Longleftrightarrow\qquad Q = m c \Delta T.$$

    Unit: $\text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.

    The two-mark definition: specific heat capacity is the energy required per unit mass of the substance to raise its temperature by one kelvin (or by one degree). Both "per unit mass" and "per unit temperature rise" are needed; "the energy to heat 1 kg by 1 K" scores, "the energy to heat the substance" does not.

    Examples:

    • water: $c \approx 4200\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$ (high — why water is a good coolant and why oceans steady the climate).
    • aluminium: $c \approx 900\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.
    • copper: $c \approx 385\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.
    A bar chart of specific heat capacities: water 4200, ice 2100, aluminium 900 and copper 385 J per kg per K — water is far higher than the solids
    Water's specific heat capacity is far higher than common solids — why it is such a good coolant

    To find an unknown $c$ by experiment: supply known energy $Q$ electrically ($Q = VIt$, from the power 功率), then measure the temperature rise $\Delta T$ of a known mass 质量 $m$. Then $c = Q/(m\Delta T)$. Reduce heat loss with insulation 隔热 and use a rise of about 10 K (big enough to measure well, small enough to limit losses).

    Worked example. How much energy is needed to heat $0.50\ \text{kg}$ of water from $20\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ to $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$? (Specific heat capacity of water $c = 4200\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.)

    A temperature difference is the same in K and °C, so $\Delta T = 80$:

    $$Q = mc\Delta T = 0.50 \times 4200 \times 80 = 1.68 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J}\ (= 168\ \text{kJ}).$$

    When two bodies reach thermal equilibrium with no heat lost to the surroundings, the energy gained by the colder one equals the energy lost by the hotter one:

    $$m_{1} c_{1} (T_{\text{eq}} - T_{1}) = m_{2} c_{2} (T_{2} - T_{\text{eq}}).$$

    Worked example. $0.20\ \text{kg}$ of water at $80\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ is mixed with $0.30\ \text{kg}$ of water at $20\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$, with no heat lost. Find the final temperature.

    The heat lost by the hot water equals the heat gained by the cold water (the $c$ of water cancels):

    $$0.20\,(80 - T_{\text{eq}}) = 0.30\,(T_{\text{eq}} - 20) \quad\Rightarrow\quad T_{\text{eq}} = 44\ ^{\circ}\text{C}.$$

    Worked example. A beaker of mass $42\ \text{g}$ and specific heat capacity $840\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$ contains $120\ \text{g}$ of a liquid. A heater supplies energy at $810\ \text{W}$ and the temperature of the beaker and liquid rises from $19\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ to $47\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ in $15\ \text{s}$. Find the specific heat capacity of the liquid. The experiment is then repeated with water in place of the liquid; state and explain how the temperature rise differs.

    Energy supplied $Q = Pt = 810 \times 15 = 1.22 \times 10^{4}\ \text{J}$, $\Delta T = 28\ \text{K}$. It heats both the beaker and the liquid: $Q = m_{\text{b}}c_{\text{b}}\Delta T + m_{\text{l}}c_{\text{l}}\Delta T$, so $1.215 \times 10^{4} = 0.042 \times 840 \times 28 + 0.120 \times c_{\text{l}} \times 28$, i.e. $1.215 \times 10^{4} = 988 + 3.36c_{\text{l}}$, giving $c_{\text{l}} = 3.3 \times 10^{3}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$. Forgetting the beaker is the usual lost mark. With water ($c = 4200$, higher) the same energy in the same time produces a smaller temperature rise, since $\Delta T = Q/(mc)$ and $mc$ is larger. If energy is lost to the surroundings the true $Q$ absorbed is less than $Pt$, so a value of $c$ found this way is an overestimate.

    Worked example. Two metal blocks X and Y are placed in contact and insulated from the surroundings. X (mass $0.50\ \text{kg}$, initially $80\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$, $c = 390\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$) and Y (mass $0.50\ \text{kg}$, initially $20\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$, $c = 900\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$) reach a common final temperature. Explain, in terms of energy, why the final temperature is nearer to Y's starting temperature, and find it.

    Thermal energy flows from X (hotter) to Y until they are in thermal equilibrium; the energy lost by X equals the energy gained by Y. Because Y has the larger specific heat capacity, a given amount of energy changes its temperature less than it changes X's, so Y warms by fewer degrees than X cools and the final temperature lies nearer to $20\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$. Numerically: $0.50 \times 390 \times (80 - T) = 0.50 \times 900 \times (T - 20)$, so $390(80 - T) = 900(T - 20)$, $31200 + 18000 = 1290T$, $T = 38\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$.

    Worked example. An aluminium block has volume $3.612 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$ and density $2.70 \times 10^{3}\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$. Find the energy needed to raise its temperature by $40\ \text{K}$ ($c = 900\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$).

    Mass $= \rho V = 2.70 \times 10^{3} \times 3.612 \times 10^{-3} = 9.75\ \text{kg}$, so $Q = mc\Delta T = 9.75 \times 900 \times 40 = 3.5 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J}$. A mass hidden behind a density and a volume is a common first step.

    Explore

    Energy to heat it: E = mcΔT

    Pick a material, set the mass and the temperature rise, and read the energy. Water needs far more energy than the metals.

    Explore

    Specific heat capacity

    Q = mcΔT

    The heat needed is proportional to the temperature rise — the gradient depends on mass and the material's specific heat capacity.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    specific heat capacity 比热容 bǐ rè róng
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    insulation 隔热 gé rè
    Exercise sheet
    14.3

    Specific latent heat

    When a substance changes state (solid ↔ liquid, or liquid ↔ gas) at constant temperature, energy must be supplied (or removed) with no temperature change. This energy is the latent heat 潜热.

    The specific latent heat 比潜热 $L$ is the energy to change the state of unit mass at constant temperature:

    $$L = \frac{Q}{m} \qquad\Longleftrightarrow\qquad Q = m L.$$

    Unit: $\text{J kg}^{-1}$.

    The two-mark definition: specific latent heat is the energy required per unit mass to change the state of a substance without a change of temperature. "Without a change in temperature" (or "at constant temperature") is the second mark and the one most often missed. Add "from solid to liquid" for fusion or "from liquid to gas" for vaporisation when a particular one is asked for.

    Two kinds:

    • specific latent heat of fusion 熔化 $L_{\text{f}}$ — for melting or freezing (solid ↔ liquid).
    • specific latent heat of vaporisation 汽化 $L_{\text{v}}$ — for boiling or condensing (liquid ↔ gas).

    For water at atmospheric pressure: $L_{\text{f}} \approx 3.34 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}$ (at $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$); $L_{\text{v}} \approx 2.26 \times 10^{6}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}$ (at $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$). So $L_{\text{v}}$ is about 7 times $L_{\text{f}}$.

    A heating curve of temperature against energy for water: ice warms up a slope, melts on a flat plateau at 0 degrees, water warms up a steeper slope, boils on a long flat plateau at 100 degrees, then steam warms — the flat plateaus are the phase changes at constant temperature
    Heating curve: the sloped parts warm the substance ($mc\Delta T$); the flat plateaus are the phase changes ($mL$)

    Worked example. A $2.0\ \text{kW}$ heater boils water already at $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$. How long does it take to turn $0.10\ \text{kg}$ of this water into steam? ($L_{\text{v}} = 2.26 \times 10^{6}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}$, no heat lost.)

    The energy needed is $Q = mL_{\text{v}} = 0.10 \times 2.26 \times 10^{6} = 2.26 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J}$. From $Q = Pt$,

    $$t = \frac{Q}{P} = \frac{2.26 \times 10^{5}}{2000} \approx 110\ \text{s}.$$

    Worked example. Water in a kettle stays at $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ while it boils, even though the element keeps heating it. Explain this with reference to molecular energies (3 marks).

    Temperature is a measure of the mean kinetic energy of the molecules. During boiling the energy supplied is used to separate the molecules — to do work against the attractive forces between them and against the atmosphere as the vapour expands — so it increases the potential energy of the molecules, not their kinetic energy. With the mean kinetic energy unchanged, the temperature stays constant until all the water has become steam.

    Why $L_{\text{v}} > L_{\text{f}}$

    Two reasons, both from the particle picture of matter:

    1. Bonds: in melting, only some of the intermolecular 分子间 bonds break; the particles stay close as a liquid. In boiling, all the bonds must break so the particles can separate. Breaking all of them needs more energy.
    2. Work against the atmosphere: when a liquid turns to gas it expands hugely (vapour has about $10^{3}$ times the liquid's volume 体积), so it does work pushing back the surrounding atmospheric pressure 大气压强. That work comes from the energy supplied.

    Write both reasons and name the energies: the marks are for bonds broken (potential energy increased) — some in melting, all in boiling, and work done against the atmosphere in the large expansion. "Boiling needs more energy" restates the question.

    Worked example. A dish holds $7.2 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{m}^{3}$ of a liquid of density $710\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$ and specific latent heat of vaporisation $3.6 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}$. It evaporates completely. Find the energy absorbed, and suggest, with a reason, whether the substance's specific latent heat of fusion is likely to be smaller or larger than this.

    Mass $= \rho V = 710 \times 7.2 \times 10^{-5} = 5.1 \times 10^{-2}\ \text{kg}$, so the energy absorbed is $Q = mL_{\text{v}} = 5.1 \times 10^{-2} \times 3.6 \times 10^{5} = 1.8 \times 10^{4}\ \text{J}$. Its $L_{\text{f}}$ is likely to be smaller: melting breaks only some of the intermolecular bonds and the volume barely changes, whereas vaporising breaks them all and does work against the atmosphere — for water $L_{\text{f}}$ is about a seventh of $L_{\text{v}}$.

    Multi-step problems

    If a problem mixes temperature change and a phase change 相变 (e.g. ice at $-5\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ warming to water at $30\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$):

    1. heat the solid from $-5\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ to $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$: $Q_{1} = m c_{\text{ice}} \times 5$.
    2. melt at $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$: $Q_{2} = m L_{\text{f}}$.
    3. heat the water from $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ to $30\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$: $Q_{3} = m c_{\text{water}} \times 30$.

    Total: $Q_{1} + Q_{2} + Q_{3}$. A phase change is at constant temperature, so use $mL$ there, not $mc\Delta T$.

    A multi-step heating problem in three stages: warm the ice from -5 to 0 degrees (Q1 = m c times 5), melt it at 0 degrees (Q2 = m L_f), then warm the water to 30 degrees (Q3 = m c times 30); add Q1 + Q2 + Q3
    Split a mixed problem into stages — warm, change state, warm — then add the energies

    When a question gives heater power $P$ and asks for the time, use $Q = Pt$ (assuming no heat loss). Insulating (lagging) the container and using a small mass are common ways to improve the experiment.

    Worked example. An ice cube of mass $37.0\ \text{g}$ at $0.0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ is dropped into $208\ \text{g}$ of water at $26.4\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ in an insulated beaker. Find the final temperature when all the ice has melted. ($c_{\text{water}} = 4.20\ \text{kJ kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$, $L_{\text{f}} = 334\ \text{kJ kg}^{-1}$.)

    The ice gains energy twice — to melt, then to warm from $0$ to $T$ — and the water loses energy cooling from $26.4$ to $T$. Working in grams and kilojoules: $37.0 \times 0.334 + 37.0 \times 4.20 \times 10^{-3}\,T = 208 \times 4.20 \times 10^{-3}\,(26.4 - T)$, i.e. $12.4 + 0.155T = 23.1 - 0.874T$, so $1.03T = 10.7$ and $T = 10\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$. Three energy terms, one equation; the commonest error is to forget that the melted ice must also be warmed.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    volume 体积 tǐ jī
    specific latent heat 比潜热 bǐ qián rè
    latent heat 潜热 qián rè
    fusion 熔化 róng huà
    vaporisation 汽化 qì huà
    specific latent heat of fusion 熔化 róng huà
    specific latent heat of vaporisation 汽化 qì huà
    atmospheric pressure 大气压强 dà qì yā qiáng
    phase change 相变 xiāng biàn
    intermolecular 分子间 fèn zǐ jiān
    14.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    thermal equilibrium the state of two objects between which there is no net transfer of thermal energy; they are at the same temperature
    thermal energy energy transferred from one object to another because of a temperature difference
    thermodynamic temperature scale a temperature scale that does not depend on the property of any particular substance, fixed by absolute zero and the triple point of water
    absolute zero the lowest possible temperature, $0\ \text{K}$ ($-273.15\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$), at which a system has its minimum internal energy
    kelvin and Celsius $T/\text{K} = \theta/^{\circ}\text{C} + 273.15$; a temperature difference is the same number in both
    specific heat capacity the energy required per unit mass of a substance to raise its temperature by one kelvin
    specific latent heat the energy required per unit mass to change the state of a substance without a change of temperature
    specific latent heat of fusion the specific latent heat for the change from solid to liquid
    specific latent heat of vaporisation the specific latent heat for the change from liquid to gas
    14.3

    Exam tips

    • Thermal equilibrium means no net flow of thermal energy (equal temperature); the thermodynamic scale does not depend on any particular substance and is fixed by absolute zero and the triple point.
    • Convert temperatures with $T/\text{K} = \theta/^\circ\text{C} + 273.15$ and use kelvin in energy and gas equations; a temperature difference is the same in K and °C.
    • Use $Q = mc\Delta T$ for heating and $Q = mL$ for a change of state (no temperature change) — never mix the two, and in a mixing problem write one equation: energy lost $=$ energy gained, with every term.
    • A container heated with the liquid takes its share of the energy: include $m_{\text{beaker}}c_{\text{beaker}}\Delta T$.
    • For a "why" about latent heat, name the energies: potential energy of the molecules rises (bonds broken, work against the atmosphere), kinetic energy and hence temperature do not.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining specific heat capacity without "per unit mass" or without "per kelvin". Both are needed; the unit $\text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$ is the reminder.
    • Leaving "at constant temperature" out of the latent-heat definition. That phrase is what distinguishes latent heat from heating.
    • Using $mc\Delta T$ across a change of state, or $mL$ for a temperature rise.
    • Forgetting the beaker, the calorimeter or the melted ice's own warming in an energy equation.
    • Saying the thermodynamic scale "uses kelvin" as its defining feature. The feature is that it depends on no particular substance.
    • Adding $273.15$ to a temperature difference. Differences are the same in both scales.
  • 15

    Ideal gases

    15.1

    The mole

    Syllabus
    1. understand that amount of substance is an SI base quantity with the base unit mol
    2. use molar quantities where one mole of any substance is the amount containing a number of particles of that substance equal to the Avogadro constant $N_{\text{A}}$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Amount of substance 物质的量 is an SI base quantity. Its unit is the mole 摩尔 (mol) — one of the seven SI base units, with the kilogram, metre, second, ampere and kelvin 开尔文 from Topic 1.

    One mole contains the Avogadro number of particles
    One mole contains the Avogadro number of particles

    One mole of any substance has a number of particles equal to the Avogadro constant 阿伏伽德罗常量:

    $$N_{\text{A}} = 6.02 \times 10^{23}\ \text{mol}^{-1}.$$

    A "particle" means whatever you are counting — atoms 原子 for a monatomic 单原子 element like helium, molecules 分子 for $\text{O}_{2}$ or $\text{H}_{2}\text{O}$. Always say what you are counting.

    For $n$ moles, the number of particles is $N = n N_{\text{A}}$.

    The molar mass 摩尔质量 $M_{\text{m}}$ is the mass of one mole ($\text{kg mol}^{-1}$ or $\text{g mol}^{-1}$). Mass of $n$ moles is $M = n M_{\text{m}}$. Mass of one particle is $m_{0} = M_{\text{m}} / N_{\text{A}}$.

    The examiner's wording. The Avogadro constant is the number of atoms (or molecules) in one mole of a substance — one mark; adding "in $0.012\ \text{kg}$ of carbon-12" is accepted but not needed. Asked for "the relationship between $N_{\text{A}}$, $R$ and $k$", write $k = R/N_{\text{A}}$ (or $R = N_{\text{A}}k$).

    Worked example. Oxygen has a molar mass of $32\ \text{g mol}^{-1}$. Find the mass of one oxygen molecule, and the number of molecules in $8.0\ \text{g}$ of oxygen.

    $m_{0} = \dfrac{M_{\text{m}}}{N_{\text{A}}} = \dfrac{0.032}{6.02 \times 10^{23}} = 5.3 \times 10^{-26}\ \text{kg}$. $8.0\ \text{g}$ is $n = 8.0/32 = 0.25\ \text{mol}$, so $N = nN_{\text{A}} = 1.5 \times 10^{23}$ molecules. Keep molar masses in $\text{kg mol}^{-1}$ when the answer is in kilograms — the factor of $1000$ is the usual slip.

    Explore

    Mole particle count lab

    particles = n x Avogadro constant

    Change amount of substance and see particle number scale directly.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mole 摩尔 mó ěr
    amount of substance 物质的量 wù zhì dì liàng
    kelvin 开尔文 kāi ěr wén
    Avogadro constant 阿伏伽德罗常量 ā fú gā dé luó cháng liàng
    atom 原子 yuán zi
    monatomic 单原子 dān yuán zi
    molecules 分子 fèn zǐ
    molecule 分子 fèn zǐ
    molar mass 摩尔质量 mó ěr zhì liàng
    Exercise sheet
    15.2

    Equation of state of an ideal gas

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a gas obeying $pV \propto T$, where $T$ is the thermodynamic temperature, is known as an ideal gas
    2. recall and use the equation of state for an ideal gas expressed as $pV = nRT$, where $n =$ amount of substance (number of moles) and as $pV = NkT$, where $N =$ number of molecules
    3. recall that the Boltzmann constant $k$ is given by $k = R/N_{\text{A}}$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Rows of compressed gas cylinders
    Compressed gas cylinders store a fixed mass of gas at high pressure.

    An ideal gas 理想气体 obeys $pV \propto T$ exactly, where $T$ is the thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度.

    The equation of state 状态方程 can be written two equal ways:

    $$p V = n R T \qquad\text{or}\qquad p V = N k T.$$

    Here:

    • $p$pressure 压强 (Pa).
    • $V$volume 体积 (m³).
    • $T$ — thermodynamic temperature in kelvin (never °C).
    • $n$ — number of moles; $N$ — number of molecules.
    • $R$molar gas constant 摩尔气体常量, $R = 8.31\ \text{J mol}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.
    • $k$Boltzmann constant 玻尔兹曼常量, $k = 1.38 \times 10^{-23}\ \text{J K}^{-1}$.

    Since $N = n N_{\text{A}}$, we get $k = R/N_{\text{A}}$: $k$ is the gas constant per molecule, as $R$ is per mole.

    The two-mark definition. An ideal gas is one that obeys $pV = nRT$ (or $pV \propto T$, with $T$ the thermodynamic temperature) at all values of pressure, volume and temperature. Both marks need the equation (or the proportionality with $T$ named as thermodynamic) and "at all values" or "for all $p$, $V$ and $T$". Asked to "state the meaning of each symbol in $pV = NkT$": $p$ is the pressure, $V$ the volume, $N$ the number of molecules, $k$ the Boltzmann constant and $T$ the thermodynamic temperature — a real gas is nearly ideal at low pressure and high temperature, where its molecules are far apart.

    Using the equation of state

    List the variables you have, find the unknown, and choose the form that matches your "amount" (moles → $nRT$; molecules → $NkT$). Always use SI units: Pa, m³, K.

    Worked example. A cylinder of volume $0.020\ \text{m}^{3}$ holds gas at $27\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ and a pressure of $2.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$. How many moles of gas are there? ($R = 8.31\ \text{J mol}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.)

    Convert to kelvin: $T = 27 + 273 = 300\ \text{K}$. Then from $pV = nRT$,

    $$n = \frac{pV}{RT} = \frac{(2.0 \times 10^{5})(0.020)}{8.31 \times 300} \approx 1.6\ \text{mol}.$$

    If a fixed amount of gas changes from state 1 to state 2:

    $$\frac{p_{1} V_{1}}{T_{1}} = \frac{p_{2} V_{2}}{T_{2}}.$$

    Worked example. A fixed mass of gas at $300\ \text{K}$ occupies $0.50\ \text{m}^{3}$. It is heated to $450\ \text{K}$ at constant pressure. Find the new volume.

    At constant pressure $V/T$ is constant, so

    $$V_{2} = V_{1}\,\frac{T_{2}}{T_{1}} = 0.50 \times \frac{450}{300} = 0.75\ \text{m}^{3}.$$

    Worked example. A sealed vessel of volume $0.0500\ \text{m}^{3}$ contains $0.0424\ \text{kg}$ of an ideal gas at $227\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ and $1.37 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$. Find the amount of gas, the mass of one molecule, and the mean-square speed of its molecules.

    $T = 227 + 273 = 500\ \text{K}$. $n = \dfrac{pV}{RT} = \dfrac{1.37 \times 10^{5} \times 0.0500}{8.31 \times 500} = 1.65\ \text{mol}$. The molar mass is $0.0424/1.65 = 0.0257\ \text{kg mol}^{-1}$, so one molecule has mass $0.0257/(6.02 \times 10^{23}) = 4.3 \times 10^{-26}\ \text{kg}$. From $\tfrac{1}{2}m\langle c^{2}\rangle = \tfrac{3}{2}kT$, $\langle c^{2}\rangle = \dfrac{3kT}{m} = \dfrac{3 \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 500}{4.27 \times 10^{-26}} = 4.8 \times 10^{5}\ \text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$ (an r.m.s. speed of about $700\ \text{m s}^{-1}$).

    Worked example. Cylinder X (volume $0.0260\ \text{m}^{3}$, $0.740\ \text{mol}$) and cylinder Y (volume $0.0180\ \text{m}^{3}$, $0.320\ \text{mol}$) contain ideal gas and are in thermal equilibrium with each other at $290\ \text{K}$. Find the pressure in each, and explain what happens to the number of molecules in each cylinder if a tap joining them is opened.

    $p_{\text{X}} = \dfrac{nRT}{V} = \dfrac{0.740 \times 8.31 \times 290}{0.0260} = 6.86 \times 10^{4}\ \text{Pa}$ and $p_{\text{Y}} = \dfrac{0.320 \times 8.31 \times 290}{0.0180} = 4.28 \times 10^{4}\ \text{Pa}$. Gas flows from the higher pressure (X) to the lower (Y) until the pressures are equal; the temperature is unchanged, so the final pressure is $p = \dfrac{(n_{\text{X}} + n_{\text{Y}})RT}{V_{\text{X}} + V_{\text{Y}}} = 5.8 \times 10^{4}\ \text{Pa}$, and X ends with $n_{\text{X}} = pV_{\text{X}}/RT = 0.63\ \text{mol}$ — it loses about $0.11\ \text{mol}$ to Y.

    A pressure–volume diagram of a cycle: state X at pressure 2p and volume V, cooled at constant volume to Y at pressure p, heated at constant pressure to Z at volume 2V, then compressed back to X; the temperatures at X, Y and Z are T, T/2 and T
    A cycle on a $p$$V$ diagram: a vertical line is constant volume, a horizontal line constant pressure, and $pV/T$ is the same at every state

    Worked example. A fixed amount of ideal gas at temperature $T$ is in state X, with pressure $2p$ and volume $V$. It is cooled at constant volume to state Y, where its pressure is $p$; then heated at constant pressure to state Z, where its volume is $2V$; then returned to X. Find the temperatures at Y and Z, and describe how the internal energy changes round the cycle.

    X to Y is at constant volume, so $p/T$ is constant: halving the pressure halves the temperature, $T_{\text{Y}} = T/2$. Y to Z is at constant pressure, so $V/T$ is constant: doubling the volume doubles the temperature, $T_{\text{Z}} = T$. The internal energy of an ideal gas depends only on temperature, so it falls from X to Y (by $\tfrac{3}{2}nR \cdot T/2$), rises by the same amount from Y to Z, and is unchanged from Z back to X. Read each leg off the diagram before writing an equation: vertical means constant $V$, horizontal means constant $p$.

    Special cases:

    • constant temperature (Boyle's law 玻意耳定律): $p_{1} V_{1} = p_{2} V_{2}$.
    • constant pressure (Charles's law 查理定律): $V / T = \text{constant}$.
    • constant volume (pressure law 气体压强定律): $p / T = \text{constant}$.

    A common mistake is using °C instead of K — $pV \propto T$ only holds with $T$ in kelvin.

    Two pressure-volume curves: at constant temperature pV is constant, so each graph is a hyperbola; a higher temperature gives a curve further from the origin
    Boyle's law: at constant temperature $pV$ is constant, so a $p$$V$ graph is a hyperbola
    A graph of gas volume against temperature in degrees Celsius at constant pressure: a straight line through the measured points, extended back as a dashed line to meet zero volume at about
    At constant pressure the volume of a gas rises linearly with temperature, reaching zero at absolute zero (Charles's law)
    Explore

    The ideal gas (Boyle)

    p = k / V

    At constant temperature p ∝ 1/V — squeeze the volume and pressure rises.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    equation of state 状态方程 zhuàng tài fāng chéng
    ideal gas 理想气体 lǐ xiǎng qì tǐ
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度 rè lì xué wēn dù
    volume 体积 tǐ jī
    molar gas constant 摩尔气体常量 mó ěr qì tǐ cháng liàng
    Boltzmann constant 玻尔兹曼常量 bō ěr zī màn cháng liàng
    Boyle's law 玻意耳定律 bō yì ěr dìng lǜ
    Charles's law 查理定律 chá lǐ dìng lǜ
    pressure law 气体压强定律 qì tǐ yā qiáng dìng lǜ
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    15.3

    Kinetic theory of gases

    Syllabus
    1. state the basic assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases
    2. explain how molecular movement causes the pressure exerted by a gas and derive and use the relationship $pV = \frac{1}{3}Nm\langle c^2 \rangle$, where $\langle c^2 \rangle$ is the mean-square speed (a simple model considering one-dimensional collisions and then extending to three dimensions using $\frac{1}{3}\langle c^2 \rangle = \langle c_x^2 \rangle$ is sufficient)
    3. understand that the root-mean-square speed $c_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ is given by $\sqrt{\langle c^2 \rangle}$
    4. compare $pV = \frac{1}{3}Nm\langle c^2 \rangle$ with $pV = NkT$ to deduce that the average translational kinetic energy of a molecule is $\frac{3}{2}kT$, and recall and use this expression

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Kinetic theory: gas pressure
    A scuba diver underwater
    A scuba diver breathes compressed gas; its pressure, volume and temperature are all linked.

    The kinetic theory 分子动理论 explains a gas's large-scale behaviour from the random motion 无规则运动 of its molecules.

    Assumptions

    For an ideal gas:

    1. a large number of identical molecules in continuous random motion.
    2. the molecules' own volume is too small to matter compared with the container.
    3. the time of each collision is too short to matter compared with the time between collisions.
    4. intermolecular 分子间 forces are ignored except during collisions (molecules go in straight lines between them).
    5. collisions (with the walls and with each other) are elastic — an elastic collision 弹性碰撞 loses no kinetic energy, so the gas does not cool down by itself.
    6. Newton's laws apply.
    Molecules moving in straight lines in a box, labelled with the kinetic-theory assumptions: many identical molecules in random motion, negligible own volume, no forces between collisions, and elastic collisions
    The key assumptions of the kinetic theory of an ideal gas

    These assumptions become poor at very high pressure (molecular volume matters) or very low temperature (intermolecular forces matter).

    As the exam asks it. "State two (or three) basic assumptions of the kinetic theory": choose from the molecules are in continuous random motion; the volume of the molecules is negligible compared with the volume of the gas; there are no forces between the molecules except during collisions; the collisions are perfectly elastic; the time of a collision is negligible compared with the time between collisions. "State what is meant by an elastic collision": one in which the total kinetic energy is conserved (as well as momentum). "Use the assumptions to suggest why the gas at the surface of a star, at very high pressure, is not ideal": the molecules are so close together that their own volume is not negligible compared with the gas volume, and intermolecular forces act between them — the two assumptions that fail when a gas is compressed.

    Worked example. A balloon contains $0.40\ \text{mol}$ of hydrogen ($m = 3.34 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$ per molecule) in $9.8 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$. Estimate the average separation of the molecules, the gravitational force between neighbouring molecules, and comment on the kinetic-theory assumption this tests.

    $N = 0.40 \times 6.02 \times 10^{23} = 2.4 \times 10^{23}$ molecules, so each occupies $V/N = 4.1 \times 10^{-26}\ \text{m}^{3}$ and the average separation is $d = (V/N)^{1/3} = 3.4 \times 10^{-9}\ \text{m}$. The gravitational force between two molecules is $F = \dfrac{Gm^{2}}{d^{2}} = \dfrac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times (3.34 \times 10^{-27})^{2}}{(3.4 \times 10^{-9})^{2}} = 6 \times 10^{-47}\ \text{N}$ — some $10^{20}$ times smaller than a molecule's own weight ($mg = 3.3 \times 10^{-26}\ \text{N}$). Forces between molecules really are negligible except during collisions, as the theory assumes.

    Pressure of a gas — outline of the derivation

    Take a cubic box of side $L$ with $N$ molecules, each of mass $m$. Look at one molecule moving along the $x$-axis with velocity $u_{1}$.

    A cube of gas of side  with one molecule shown moving with a velocity component  directed at right angles towards one face
    The pressure derivation considers one molecule's velocity component $u_x$ normal to a face of a cube of gas
    • one collision with the right wall: velocity reverses to $-u_{1}$, change in momentum 动量 $\Delta p_{x} = -2 m u_{1}$. By Newton's third law the wall gets an impulse 冲量 of $+2 m u_{1}$.
    • time between hits on that wall: travel $2L$ there and back, so $\Delta t = 2L/u_{1}$.
    • average force from this molecule: $F_{1} = \Delta p / \Delta t = m u_{1}^{2} / L$.
    • add over all molecules: $F = (Nm/L)\langle u_{x}^{2} \rangle$, where $\langle u_{x}^{2} \rangle$ is the mean square 均方 of the $x$-velocity.
    • pressure: $p = F/L^{2} = N m \langle u_{x}^{2} \rangle / V$.

    In 3-D, by symmetry $\langle u_{x}^{2} \rangle = \tfrac{1}{3} \langle c^{2} \rangle$, where $\langle c^{2} \rangle$ is the mean-square speed 均方速率. So

    $$p V = \tfrac{1}{3} N m \langle c^{2} \rangle.$$

    "Explain how molecular movement causes the pressure exerted by a gas" (3 marks). The molecules move randomly and collide with the walls of the container; at each collision a molecule's momentum changes (it rebounds), so by Newton's second law the wall exerts a force on it, and by the third law it exerts an equal force on the wall; the very many collisions each second produce a steady total force on the wall, and the pressure is that force per unit area. The syllabus phrase "a simple model considering one-dimensional collisions" means the derivation above: it is sufficient to follow one molecule bouncing between two opposite faces and then average.

    The density form. Since $Nm$ is the total mass of the gas and $Nm/V$ is its density $\rho$, the same result reads $p = \tfrac{1}{3}\rho\langle c^{2}\rangle$ — the version to use when a question gives a density instead of $N$ and $m$.

    Worked example. An ideal gas at a pressure of $1.6 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$ has a density of $1.9\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$. Show that the r.m.s. speed of its molecules is about $500\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.

    $\langle c^{2}\rangle = \dfrac{3p}{\rho} = \dfrac{3 \times 1.6 \times 10^{5}}{1.9} = 2.53 \times 10^{5}\ \text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$, so $c_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{2.53 \times 10^{5}} = 503\ \text{m s}^{-1} \approx 500\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. In a "show that", keep an extra figure ($503$) before comparing with the value given.

    Root-mean-square speed

    The square root of $\langle c^{2} \rangle$ is the root-mean-square 均方根 (r.m.s.) speed:

    $$c_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{\langle c^{2} \rangle}.$$

    It is a useful single measure of how fast the molecules move, slightly larger than the mean speed (squaring weights fast molecules more).

    Root-mean-square speed built in four steps: take the speeds, square each one, take the mean of the squares, then take the square root
    Root-mean-square speed: square each speed, take the mean, then the square root
    The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution of molecular speeds: at a lower temperature the curve is tall and narrow; at a higher temperature it is broader and shifted to higher speeds. The root-mean-square speed is marked
    The spread of molecular speeds: a higher temperature broadens the curve and shifts it to faster speeds
    Two sketch graphs: mean-square speed against thermodynamic temperature is a straight line through the origin, steeper for a lighter gas; r.m.s. speed against temperature is a curve through the origin rising as the square root of T
    The two graphs the exam asks you to sketch: $\langle c^{2}\rangle \propto T$ is a straight line through the origin, so $c_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ rises as $\sqrt{T}$
    Explore

    Boyle's law

    p ∝ 1/V

    At constant temperature, pressure is inversely proportional to volume — squash the gas and the pressure rises.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mean-square speed 均方速率 jūn fāng sù lǜ
    kinetic theory 分子动理论 fèn zǐ dòng lǐ lùn
    random motion 无规则运动 wú guī zé yùn dòng
    intermolecular 分子间 fèn zǐ jiān
    elastic collision 弹性碰撞 tán xìng pèng zhuàng
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    impulse 冲量 chōng liàng
    mean square 均方 jūn fāng
    root-mean-square 均方根 jūn fāng gēn
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    15.3

    Average translational kinetic energy

    Compare the two expressions for $pV$:

    $$p V = N k T \quad\text{and}\quad p V = \tfrac{1}{3} N m \langle c^{2} \rangle.$$

    Set them equal, cancel $N$, and multiply by $\tfrac{3}{2}$:

    $$\tfrac{3}{2} k T = \tfrac{1}{2} m \langle c^{2} \rangle.$$

    The right side is the average translational kinetic energy 平动动能 $\langle E_{\text{k}} \rangle$ of one molecule. So

    $$\langle E_{\text{k}} \rangle = \tfrac{1}{2} m \langle c^{2} \rangle = \tfrac{3}{2} k T.$$

    This is a key result: the average translational kinetic energy of an ideal-gas molecule depends only on the thermodynamic temperature, not on the type of gas or its pressure.

    A straight line through the origin of average kinetic energy against temperature, showing that the average KE is proportional to the thermodynamic temperature
    Average molecular KE is proportional to thermodynamic temperature: $\langle E_k \rangle = \tfrac32 kT$

    Worked example. Find the root-mean-square speed of oxygen molecules at $300\ \text{K}$. (Mass of one $\text{O}_{2}$ molecule $= 5.3 \times 10^{-26}\ \text{kg}$, $k = 1.38 \times 10^{-23}\ \text{J K}^{-1}$.)

    From $\tfrac{1}{2}m\langle c^{2}\rangle = \tfrac{3}{2}kT$, the mean-square speed is $\langle c^{2}\rangle = 3kT/m$:

    $$c_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{\frac{3kT}{m}} = \sqrt{\frac{3 (1.38 \times 10^{-23})(300)}{5.3 \times 10^{-26}}} \approx 480\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    Worked example. The surface of the Moon reaches about $400\ \text{K}$ in sunlight. Calculate the r.m.s. speed of hydrogen molecules ($m = 3.34 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$) at this temperature, and use the Moon's escape speed of $2.4\ \text{km s}^{-1}$ to suggest why the Moon has no hydrogen atmosphere.

    $c_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{\dfrac{3kT}{m}} = \sqrt{\dfrac{3 \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 400}{3.34 \times 10^{-27}}} = 2.2 \times 10^{3}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. This r.m.s. speed is close to the escape speed, and the speeds are spread widely about it, so a large fraction of the molecules move faster than $2.4\ \text{km s}^{-1}$ at any moment and escape; over time the hydrogen is lost.

    Worked example. The gas at the surface of a star is mainly hydrogen atoms ($m = 1.67 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$) with an r.m.s. speed of $9300\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the temperature of the surface.

    $T = \dfrac{m\langle c^{2}\rangle}{3k} = \dfrac{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times 9300^{2}}{3 \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23}} = 3.5 \times 10^{3}\ \text{K}$.

    Worked example. For a fixed sample of gas, a graph of $pV$ against $kT$ is a straight line through the origin of gradient $7.2 \times 10^{22}$. When $pV = 270\ \text{J}$ the r.m.s. speed of the molecules is $1900\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the number of molecules and the mass of one molecule in u.

    From $pV = NkT$ the gradient is $N = 7.2 \times 10^{22}$. From $pV = \tfrac{1}{3}Nm\langle c^{2}\rangle$: $m = \dfrac{3pV}{N\langle c^{2}\rangle} = \dfrac{3 \times 270}{7.2 \times 10^{22} \times 1900^{2}} = 3.1 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg} = \dfrac{3.1 \times 10^{-27}}{1.66 \times 10^{-27}} = 1.9\ \text{u}$ — hydrogen molecules, within the rounding.

    Comparing gases and samples. At the same temperature every gas has the same average kinetic energy per molecule, so $\langle c^{2}\rangle \propto 1/m$: hydrogen ($M_{\text{m}} = 2$) and oxygen ($M_{\text{m}} = 32$) have $\dfrac{c_{\text{H}}}{c_{\text{O}}} = \sqrt{\dfrac{32}{2}} = 4$. Two samples at the same $T$ — X with $N$ molecules of mass $m$ in volume $V$, Y with $2N$ molecules of mass $2m$ in volume $2V$ — have the same pressure ($p = NkT/V$ and both $N$ and $V$ double), the same average kinetic energy per molecule, but Y's molecules have half the mean-square speed ($3kT/2m$) and Y has twice the internal energy (twice as many molecules).

    Consequences

    • doubling the absolute temperature doubles the average KE of each molecule, so $\langle c^{2} \rangle$ doubles and $c_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ grows by $\sqrt{2}$.
    • for two gases at the same temperature, the lighter gas has a larger $\langle c^{2} \rangle$. Hydrogen molecules move faster on average than oxygen molecules in the same room.
    • total translational KE of $N$ molecules: $\tfrac{3}{2} N k T = \tfrac{3}{2} n R T$.

    Internal energy of an ideal gas

    For an ideal gas the molecules are point particles with no intermolecular potential energy and (in this simple model) no rotation or vibration. So the internal energy 内能 is just the total kinetic energy 动能:

    $$U = \tfrac{3}{2} N k T = \tfrac{3}{2} n R T.$$

    So the internal energy of an ideal gas is proportional to the thermodynamic temperature — doubling $T$ doubles $U$.

    As the exam asks it. "Use one of the basic assumptions to explain what can be deduced about the potential energy of the molecules": there are no forces between the molecules (except in collisions), so there is no potential energy associated with their separation — the random-motion energy is entirely kinetic. "Explain why the internal energy of an ideal gas is directly proportional to thermodynamic temperature" (2 marks): the internal energy is the sum of the kinetic and potential energies of the molecules; the potential energy is zero (no intermolecular forces), and the average kinetic energy of a molecule is $\tfrac{3}{2}kT$, proportional to $T$; so the total, $U = \tfrac{3}{2}NkT$, is proportional to $T$. "Derive $\tfrac{3}{2}kT$" (2 marks): equate $pV = NkT$ with $pV = \tfrac{1}{3}Nm\langle c^{2}\rangle$, cancel $N$, and rearrange to $\tfrac{1}{2}m\langle c^{2}\rangle = \tfrac{3}{2}kT$ — show the cancelling and the factor of $\tfrac{3}{2}$.

    Worked example. A sample of $0.26\ \text{m}^{3}$ of an ideal gas is at $2.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$ and $290\ \text{K}$. Find the number of molecules, the average translational kinetic energy of a molecule, and the internal energy of the gas.

    $N = \dfrac{pV}{kT} = \dfrac{2.0 \times 10^{5} \times 0.26}{1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 290} = 1.3 \times 10^{25}$. $\langle E_{\text{k}}\rangle = \tfrac{3}{2}kT = 1.5 \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 290 = 6.0 \times 10^{-21}\ \text{J}$. $U = N\langle E_{\text{k}}\rangle = 1.3 \times 10^{25} \times 6.0 \times 10^{-21} = 7.8 \times 10^{4}\ \text{J}$ — or directly $U = \tfrac{3}{2}pV = 7.8 \times 10^{4}\ \text{J}$, a neat check.

    Changing pressure at fixed temperature

    Doubling $p$ at fixed $T$ (by squeezing the gas to half its volume) does not change $\langle E_{\text{k}} \rangle$ — that depends only on $T$. There are more wall collisions per second, but each molecule has the same average kinetic energy.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    internal energy 内能 nèi néng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    average translational kinetic energy 平动动能 píng dòng dòng néng
    translational kinetic energy 平动动能 píng dòng dòng néng
    15.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    mole the amount of substance containing a number of particles equal to the Avogadro constant
    Avogadro constant the number of atoms or molecules in one mole of a substance, $6.02 \times 10^{23}\ \text{mol}^{-1}$
    ideal gas a gas that obeys $pV = nRT$ (equivalently $pV \propto T$, $T$ thermodynamic) at all values of $p$, $V$ and $T$
    Boltzmann constant the gas constant per molecule, $k = R/N_{\text{A}}$
    elastic collision a collision in which the total kinetic energy is conserved
    mean-square speed the mean of the squares of the speeds of the molecules, $\langle c^{2}\rangle$
    root-mean-square speed the square root of the mean-square speed, $c_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{\langle c^{2}\rangle}$
    average translational kinetic energy of a molecule $\tfrac{1}{2}m\langle c^{2}\rangle = \tfrac{3}{2}kT$, depending only on thermodynamic temperature
    internal energy of an ideal gas the total kinetic energy of its molecules, $\tfrac{3}{2}NkT$, since there is no potential energy
    15.3

    Exam tips

    • Use $pV = nRT$ ($n$ in mol) or $pV = NkT$ ($N$ molecules), with temperature in kelvin and volume in $\text{m}^{3}$ ($1\ \text{cm}^{3} = 10^{-6}\ \text{m}^{3}$).
    • Learn the kinetic-theory assumptions word for word (random motion, negligible molecular volume, no intermolecular forces except in collisions, elastic collisions, negligible collision time), and know which two fail at high pressure.
    • Mean translational KE $= \frac{3}{2}kT$ — it depends only on temperature; at the same $T$ a lighter molecule is faster, $\langle c^{2}\rangle \propto 1/m$.
    • For a "show that" about pressure, give the chain: collisions with the wall, change of momentum, force (Newton's second and third laws), force per unit area.
    • $p = \tfrac{1}{3}\rho\langle c^{2}\rangle$ when a density is given; $U = \tfrac{3}{2}NkT = \tfrac{3}{2}pV$ when the internal energy is asked.

    Common mistakes

    • Using °C in $pV = nRT$ or in $\langle E_{\text{k}}\rangle = \tfrac{3}{2}kT$. Convert first; a temperature ratio only works in kelvin.
    • Defining an ideal gas by "obeys $pV = nRT$" alone. Add "at all values of $p$, $V$ and $T$".
    • Confusing $n$ (moles) with $N$ (molecules), or $R$ with $k$. $N = nN_{\text{A}}$ and $k = R/N_{\text{A}}$.
    • Giving "molecules move randomly" as the reason for pressure. The mark is for the change of momentum at the wall and the resulting force per unit area.
    • Sketching $c_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ against $T$ as a straight line. $\langle c^{2}\rangle$ is linear in $T$; $c_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ rises as $\sqrt{T}$.
    • Saying a molecule's kinetic energy changes when the pressure is doubled at constant temperature. Only the number of collisions per second changes.
  • 16

    Thermodynamics

    16.1

    Internal energy

    Syllabus
    1. understand that internal energy is determined by the state of the system and that it can be expressed as the sum of a random distribution of kinetic and potential energies associated with the molecules of a system
    2. relate a rise in temperature of an object to an increase in its internal energy

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The internal energy 内能 $U$ of a system is the sum of:

    • the random kinetic energies 动能 of its molecules 分子 — they fly through space (translational 平动 motion), and unless they are single atoms they also spin (rotational 转动) and shake (vibrational 振动), and
    • the potential energies from the forces between the molecules.

    For a real solid, liquid or gas, both parts matter. In the ideal-gas 理想气体 model the intermolecular 分子间 forces are ignored, so the molecular potential energy is zero and the internal energy is purely kinetic.

    The two-mark definition. The internal energy of a system is the sum of the random distribution of the kinetic and potential energies of its molecules (or atoms). Both marks need "sum of kinetic and potential energies" and "random" (or "of the molecules") — leaving out "random" describes the energy of a moving object, not its internal energy. For an ideal gas, "with reference to kinetic and potential energy": the internal energy is the total kinetic energy of the molecules only, because there are no intermolecular forces and therefore no potential energy.

    Five gas molecules drawn as discs, each with an arrow showing it moving in a random direction, and short springs linking neighbouring molecules to stand for the forces between them: the arrows are the molecules' kinetic energy and the springs are the potential energy
    Internal energy is the molecules' random kinetic energy (the arrows) plus the potential energy of the forces between them (the springs)

    Two key points:

    1. $U$ depends only on the state of the system (its temperature 温度, pressure 压强, volume 体积, amount of substance 物质的量) — not on the path taken to get there.
    2. $U$ is a sum over the molecules, not the kinetic energy of the whole object moving. A moving train of gas has bulk kinetic energy, but that is separate from $U$$U$ is the energy of the random molecular motion.

    Temperature and internal energy

    Raising an object's temperature raises the random kinetic energy of its molecules, and so raises its internal energy.

    For an ideal gas every molecule has average translational kinetic energy $\tfrac{3}{2} k T$ (Topic 15). With zero intermolecular potential energy, the total internal energy is

    $$U = \tfrac{3}{2} N k T = \tfrac{3}{2} n R T.$$

    So the internal energy of an ideal gas is directly proportional to the thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度. Doubling $T$ doubles $U$. This is only exact for an ideal gas.

    During a phase change 相变 (melting or boiling) of a real substance, $U$ rises because the molecular potential energy rises (bonds breaking), even though the temperature stays constant.

    Describing a change in internal energy — always name both energies. A three-mark "describe and explain, with reference to molecular kinetic and potential energies" answer says what happens to each:

    • a gas heated at constant volume: the kinetic energy of the molecules increases, because temperature is a measure of their mean kinetic energy; the potential energy is unchanged (no work is done, the molecules' separation does not change); so the internal energy increases.
    • a wire stretched within its elastic limit at constant temperature: the kinetic energy of the atoms is unchanged (same temperature); the potential energy increases, because the atoms are pulled further apart against the interatomic forces; so the internal energy increases.
    • ice melting at $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$: the kinetic energy is unchanged (constant temperature); the potential energy increases as the bonds between molecules are broken and the separation grows; so the internal energy increases by the latent heat supplied.

    Worked example. A fixed mass of ideal gas is heated at constant pressure. Sketch the variation of its internal energy $U$ with its volume $V$.

    At constant pressure $V \propto T$ (Charles's law) and for an ideal gas $U \propto T$, so $U \propto V$: a straight line through the origin. The origin is on the line because at absolute zero both $V$ (extrapolated) and $U$ are zero.

    Explore

    The spread of molecular energies

    Internal energy is the total random kinetic + potential energy of the molecules. Heat the gas and the whole speed distribution shifts to higher energy.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    internal energy 内能 nèi néng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    molecules 分子 fèn zǐ
    molecule 分子 fèn zǐ
    translational 平动 píng dòng
    rotational 转动 zhuǎn dòng
    vibrational 振动 zhèn dòng
    ideal-gas 理想气体 lǐ xiǎng qì tǐ
    intermolecular 分子间 fèn zǐ jiān
    ideal gas 理想气体 lǐ xiǎng qì tǐ
    temperature 温度 wēn dù
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    volume 体积 tǐ jī
    amount of substance 物质的量 wù zhì dì liàng
    thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度 rè lì xué wēn dù
    phase change 相变 xiāng biàn
    Exercise sheet
    16.2

    Work done on or by a gas

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use $W = p\Delta V$ for the work done when the volume of a gas changes at constant pressure and understand the difference between the work done by the gas and the work done on the gas
    2. recall and use the first law of thermodynamics $\Delta U = q + W$ expressed in terms of the increase in internal energy, the heating of the system (energy transferred to the system by heating) and the work done on the system

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The rotor of a steam turbine
    A steam turbine does work as expanding steam pushes its blades around.
    A gas in a cylinder pushing a piston of cross-sectional area A outwards by a distance Δx against an external pressure p; the gas volume rises by the swept amount ΔV = A Δx, so the gas does work W = p ΔV on the surroundings
    A gas pushing a piston of area $A$ out by $\Delta x$ does work $W = p\,\Delta V$ on the surroundings (swept volume $\Delta V = A\,\Delta x$)

    When a gas changes volume against an outside pressure, mechanical work is done. At constant pressure $p$ with a small volume change $\Delta V$, the size of the work is

    $$W = p \Delta V.$$

    Worked example. A gas at a constant pressure of $1.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$ expands from $2.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$ to $5.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$. Find the work done by the gas.

    $$W = p\,\Delta V = (1.0 \times 10^{5})(5.0 \times 10^{-3} - 2.0 \times 10^{-3}) = 300\ \text{J}.$$

    Worked example. An ideal gas of mass $0.35\ \text{kg}$ is heated at a constant pressure of $2.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$; its internal energy rises by $7600\ \text{J}$ and its volume increases by $1.2 \times 10^{-2}\ \text{m}^{3}$. Find the work done by the gas and the thermal energy supplied. The gas is then heated at constant volume until its internal energy rises by the same $7600\ \text{J}$; explain why less thermal energy is needed.

    Work done by the gas $= p\Delta V = 2.0 \times 10^{5} \times 1.2 \times 10^{-2} = 2400\ \text{J}$, so the work done on it is $W = -2400\ \text{J}$. First law: $q = \Delta U - W = 7600 - (-2400) = 1.0 \times 10^{4}\ \text{J}$. At constant volume no work is done ($\Delta V = 0$, $W = 0$), so the whole of the thermal energy goes into internal energy: $q = \Delta U = 7600\ \text{J}$. The extra $2400\ \text{J}$ at constant pressure was the work the gas did pushing back the surroundings as it expanded.

    Worked example. An aluminium block of volume $3.612 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$ is heated from $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ to $40\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$; its volume increases by $1.0 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{m}^{3}$ against atmospheric pressure ($1.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$). Compare the work it does on the atmosphere with the thermal energy it receives ($m = 9.75\ \text{kg}$, $c = 900\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$).

    Work done by the block $= p\Delta V = 1.0 \times 10^{5} \times 1.0 \times 10^{-5} = 1.0\ \text{J}$; thermal energy $q = mc\Delta T = 9.75 \times 900 \times 40 = 3.5 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J}$. The work is about $3 \times 10^{-6}$ of the heating, so for a solid $\Delta U \approx q$: solids and liquids barely expand, and $p\Delta V$ only matters for a gas.

    A pressure-volume graph with a horizontal orange line at constant pressure p running from volume V1 to V2; the rectangle beneath the line is shaded and labelled work done W = p times Delta V, and an arrow above the line shows the gas expanding from V1 to V2
    On a pressure–volume graph, the work done at constant pressure is the area under the line: $W = p\,\Delta V$

    Sign convention in this syllabus

    This syllabus writes the first law as $\Delta U = q + W$, where $W$ is the work done on the gas and $q$ is the energy put in by heating.

    Two cylinder diagrams. Compression: a piston is pushed into the gas so the volume falls, and the work done on the gas is positive. Expansion: the gas pushes the piston out so the volume rises, and the work done on the gas is negative
    Work done on the gas: positive when it is compressed, negative when it expands
    • when the gas is compressed, $\Delta V$ is negative and the work done on the gas is positive — the gas gains energy.
    • when the gas expands, $\Delta V$ is positive and the work done on the gas is negative — the gas loses energy (it does work on the surroundings).

    Watch which form a question wants:

    • "work done on the gas" — positive when compressing.
    • "work done by the gas" — the opposite sign, positive when expanding.

    At constant volume ($\Delta V = 0$), no work is done.

    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    16.2

    First law of thermodynamics

    A power station with cooling towers
    A power station is a heat engine: it converts heat into useful work.

    The first law of thermodynamics 热力学第一定律 says that energy is conserved when heat and work pass between a system and its surroundings:

    $$\Delta U = q + W,$$

    where $\Delta U$ is the rise in internal energy, $q$ is the energy added by heating (positive in, negative out), and $W$ is the work done on the gas (positive when compressed). This is conservation of energy 能量守恒 for a gas.

    As the exam asks it. "State the first law of thermodynamics, identifying any symbols" (2 marks): the increase in internal energy of a system, $\Delta U$, is equal to the sum of the thermal energy transferred to the system by heating, $q$, and the work done on the system, $W$: $\Delta U = q + W$. Every symbol must be defined with its direction — "to the system" and "on the system" are what make the signs mean something. "State two ways in which the first law says the internal energy of a system may be changed": by heating (thermal energy transferred into or out of the system) and by doing work on or by the system.

    A box labelled gas, the system, with a blue arrow labelled q, energy in by heating, entering from the left and an orange arrow labelled W, work done on the gas, entering from the right; below the box is the equation Delta U = q + W with a note that each term is positive when energy goes into the gas
    Both heating ($q$) and work done on the gas ($W$) put energy in, raising the internal energy by $\Delta U$

    Worked example. A gas absorbs $500\ \text{J}$ of heat while it expands and does $200\ \text{J}$ of work on its surroundings. Find the change in its internal energy.

    The gas does work, so the work done on it is $W = -200\ \text{J}$:

    $$\Delta U = q + W = 500 + (-200) = 300\ \text{J}.$$

    Explaining with the first law. A three-mark "use the first law to explain" answer has three steps: say what $q$ is (and its sign), say what $W$ is (and its sign), then combine them for $\Delta U$ — and, if asked, say what the change in internal energy means for the molecules.

    Three cards: a bicycle pump used quickly, with no heating and positive work done on the air so the internal energy rises; a wire stretched at constant temperature, with no heating and positive work so the potential energy of its atoms rises; a puddle evaporating, heated by the surroundings while its vapour does work on the atmosphere, its molecules separating
    The three classic first-law explanations: give $q$ with its sign, $W$ with its sign, then $\Delta U$
    • Why a bicycle pump gets hot when used quickly: the air is compressed, so work is done on it ($W > 0$); the compression is fast, so there is no time for thermal energy to leave ($q \approx 0$); therefore $\Delta U = W > 0$ — the internal energy, and so the temperature, of the air rises, and the pump warms up.
    • A spring stretched at constant temperature within its elastic limit: work is done on the spring by the stretching force ($W > 0$); there is no thermal energy transfer ($q = 0$); so the internal energy increases — stored as the elastic potential energy of the atoms, which are pulled further apart.
    • Water evaporating from a puddle on a hot day: thermal energy is transferred to the water from the surroundings ($q > 0$); the vapour formed occupies a far larger volume than the liquid, so the system does work on the atmosphere ($W < 0$); the internal energy still increases ($q$ is larger than the work done), and the increase is potential energy — the molecules are separated against the attractive forces between them.

    Reading the equation

    $\Delta U$ is fixed by the change of state (for an ideal gas, by the change in temperature). The same $\Delta U$ can come from different mixes of $q$ and $W$:

    • all heat, no work: $\Delta U = q$ (constant-volume heating).
    • all work, no heat: $\Delta U = W$ (insulated compression or expansion).

    Standard processes

    For an ideal gas, $\Delta U = \tfrac{3}{2} n R \Delta T$ — it depends only on $\Delta T$.

    A pressure-volume graph with four lines from one common starting point: a horizontal line (constant pressure), a vertical line (constant volume), a curve falling to the right (isothermal, with T constant), and a steeper curve below it (adiabatic, with no heat flow)
    The four standard processes, all starting from the same state
    Process What stays constant $\Delta U$ $W$ (on gas) $q$
    Isothermal $T$ $0$ $W$ $-W$
    Constant volume $V$ $\tfrac{3}{2}n R \Delta T$ $0$ $\Delta U$
    Constant pressure $p$ $\tfrac{3}{2}n R \Delta T$ $-p \Delta V$ $\Delta U - W$
    Adiabatic (no heat) varies $W$ $0$

    Read each row with the first law $\Delta U = q + W$:

    • Isothermal 等温 (constant $T$): $\Delta T = 0$, so $\Delta U = 0$. Then $q = -W$ — any heat that goes in comes straight back out as work.
    • Adiabatic 绝热 (no heat flow): $q = 0$, so $\Delta U = W$. The gas warms up only because work is done on it.
    • Constant volume (sealed rigid container): no work is done ($\Delta V = 0$), so all the heat goes into internal energy: $q = \Delta U$.
    • Constant pressure (gas pushing a piston 活塞): the gas does work as it expands, so the heat you supply does two jobs — it raises the internal energy and does the expansion work.

    So for the same rise in internal energy, heating at constant pressure needs more thermal energy than heating at constant volume, by exactly the work $p\Delta V$ the gas does while expanding — the constant-volume gas keeps every joule; the constant-pressure gas hands some back to the surroundings.

    Worked example: two-step process

    A sample of ideal gas at temperature $T$ with internal energy $U$ goes through:

    1. compression to temperature $3T$; work $W$ is done on the gas.
    2. cooling at constant volume to temperature $2T$.
    A bar chart of internal energy at three states: height U at temperature T (start), rising to 3U after step 1 compresses the gas to 3T, then falling to 2U after step 2 cools it at constant volume to 2T
    Internal energy tracks temperature: $U \to 3U$ on compressing to $3T$, then $3U \to 2U$ on cooling to $2T$

    Step 1 ($T \to 3T$): $U = \tfrac{3}{2}nRT$, so $U \to 3U$, giving $\Delta U_{1} = 2U$. $W_{1} = +W$. So $q_{1} = \Delta U_{1} - W_{1} = 2U - W$.

    Step 2 ($3T \to 2T$, constant volume): $\Delta U_{2} = -U$. $W_{2} = 0$. So $q_{2} = -U$ (heat flows out).

    Check: total $\Delta U = 2U - U = U$, taking the gas from $T$ to $2T$ ($U \to 2U$) — consistent.

    Worked example: a cycle on a $p$$V$ diagram

    A rectangular cycle ABCDA on a pressure–volume diagram: heating at constant volume from A to B, expansion at constant pressure from B to C, cooling at constant volume from C to D, and compression at constant pressure from D back to A; the enclosed area is the net work done by the gas
    A cycle: for each leg decide $W$ from the volume change and $\Delta U$ from the temperature change, and $q$ follows from the first law

    A fixed mass of ideal gas is taken round the cycle ABCDA: A to B at constant volume $V_{1}$ (pressure $p_{1} \to p_{2}$), B to C at constant pressure $p_{2}$ (volume $V_{1} \to V_{2}$), C to D at constant volume, D to A at constant pressure $p_{1}$. Complete a table of the signs of $q$, $W$ and $\Delta U$ for each leg, and explain the internal-energy change from B to C.

    Leg Process $W$ (on gas) $\Delta U$ $q$
    A → B constant volume, pressure rises $0$ (no volume change) $+$ (temperature rises, $pV$ larger) $+$ ($q = \Delta U$)
    B → C constant pressure, expands $-$ (gas does work $p_{2}(V_{2} - V_{1})$) $+$ ($T \propto V$ at constant $p$) $+$ (and larger than $\Delta U$)
    C → D constant volume, pressure falls $0$ $-$ $-$ (thermal energy leaves)
    D → A constant pressure, compressed $+$ (work done on the gas $p_{1}(V_{2} - V_{1})$) $-$ $-$ (larger in size than $\Delta U$)

    From B to C the gas expands at constant pressure, so its temperature rises ($V/T$ constant) and its internal energy increases; it does work on the surroundings ($W$ negative), so the thermal energy supplied must cover both: $q = \Delta U - W$, larger than the rise in internal energy. Round the whole cycle $\Delta U = 0$ (the gas returns to its starting state), so the net thermal energy in equals the net work done by the gas — the area enclosed by the rectangle, $(p_{2} - p_{1})(V_{2} - V_{1})$.

    Heat capacity at constant volume

    For constant-volume heating of an ideal gas, $q = \Delta U = \tfrac{3}{2} n R \Delta T$. So the molar heat capacity 热容 at constant volume is $\tfrac{3}{2} R$ for a monatomic 单原子 ideal gas. (You are not required to use the symbol $C_V$, but the result $q = \tfrac{3}{2} n R \Delta T$ for constant-volume heating is.)

    Two containers. Constant volume: a sealed rigid box heated from below; no work is done so all the heat raises the internal energy. Constant pressure: a box with a free piston on top that moves out as it is heated, so the heat raises the internal energy and also does work
    At constant volume all the heat raises $U$ ($q = \Delta U$); at constant pressure the gas also does work

    Heating without a temperature change

    If heat is supplied during a phase change at constant pressure (e.g. boiling water), the temperature stays constant but the internal energy still rises (the latent heat 潜热 separates the molecules), and the gas does expansion work. The first law still holds: $\Delta U = q + W$.

    Explore

    Work done on a gas

    Push the piston in and you do work on the gas (W = pΔV); the first law says that work plus the heat added equals the rise in internal energy.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    latent heat 潜热 qián rè
    piston 活塞 huó sāi
    first law of thermodynamics 热力学第一定律 rè lì xué dì yí dìng lǜ
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    isothermal 等温 děng wēn
    adiabatic 绝热 jué rè
    heat capacity 热容 rè róng
    monatomic 单原子 dān yuán zi
    16.2

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    internal energy the sum of the random distribution of the kinetic and potential energies of the molecules of a system
    internal energy of an ideal gas the total random kinetic energy of its molecules, since with no intermolecular forces there is no potential energy
    first law of thermodynamics the increase in internal energy of a system equals the thermal energy transferred to the system by heating plus the work done on the system: $\Delta U = q + W$
    work done on a gas at constant pressure $W = p\Delta V$ in size; positive when the gas is compressed, negative when it expands (the gas then does work on its surroundings)
    thermal energy transfer (heating) energy transferred to or from a system because of a temperature difference; $q$ is positive when it enters
    isothermal change a change at constant temperature, so for an ideal gas $\Delta U = 0$ and $q = -W$
    adiabatic change a change with no thermal energy transfer, $q = 0$, so $\Delta U = W$
    16.2

    Exam tips

    • First law: $\Delta U = q + W$ — define every symbol with its direction: $q$ is energy transferred to the system by heating, $W$ is work done on the system.
    • For an ideal gas, internal energy depends only on temperature ($\Delta U \propto \Delta T$) and is kinetic energy only; for a solid or liquid the potential energy changes too.
    • Work done by a gas at constant pressure $= p\Delta V$; read the sign from expansion (by) or compression (on), and remember that at constant volume $W = 0$.
    • A "describe and explain" answer names both kinetic and potential energy and says what happens to each; an "explain using the first law" answer gives $q$, $W$ and then $\Delta U$, each with its sign.
    • Round a complete cycle $\Delta U = 0$, so net heating equals net work done by the gas — the area enclosed on the $p$$V$ diagram.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining internal energy as "the total energy of the molecules" or forgetting "random" or "potential". The mark scheme wants the sum of random kinetic and potential energies.
    • Using $W = p\Delta V$ with the wrong sign. When the gas expands the work done on it is negative.
    • Saying the internal energy of an ideal gas rises when it is compressed isothermally. At constant temperature $\Delta U = 0$: the work done on it leaves again as heat.
    • Treating a phase change as $\Delta U = 0$ because the temperature is constant. The potential energy rises; $\Delta U$ is the latent heat minus any expansion work.
    • Forgetting that a gas heated at constant pressure does work, so it needs more heating than at constant volume for the same $\Delta U$.
    • Applying $\Delta U = \tfrac{3}{2}nR\Delta T$ to a real gas, a liquid or a solid. It is the ideal-gas result only.
  • 17

    Oscillations

    17.1

    Simple harmonic motion: definition

    Syllabus
    1. understand and use the terms displacement, amplitude, period, frequency, angular frequency and phase difference in the context of oscillations, and express the period in terms of both frequency and angular frequency
    2. understand that simple harmonic motion occurs when acceleration is proportional to displacement from a fixed point and in the opposite direction
    3. use $a = -\omega^2 x$ and recall and use, as a solution to this equation, $x = x_0 \sin \omega t$
    4. use the equations $v = v_0 \cos \omega t$ and $v = \pm \omega \sqrt{x_0^2 - x^2}$
    5. analyse and interpret graphical representations of the variations of displacement, velocity and acceleration for simple harmonic motion

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    SHM: spring, circle and graph in phase
    A pendulum clock
    A pendulum clock keeps time using simple harmonic motion.

    A particle moves with simple harmonic motion 简谐运动 (SHM) when its acceleration 加速度 is:

    • proportional to its displacement from a fixed equilibrium 平衡 point, and
    • directed back towards that point — opposite in sign to the displacement.

    The defining equation is

    $$a = -\omega^{2} x,$$

    where $x$ is the displacement 位移 from equilibrium and $\omega$ is a positive constant, the angular frequency 角频率. The minus sign means "directed back towards equilibrium".

    The two-mark definition. Simple harmonic motion is motion in which the acceleration is proportional to the displacement from a fixed point and is always directed towards that point (in the opposite direction to the displacement). Both halves are needed. "The significance of the minus sign": the acceleration is in the opposite direction to the displacement — always towards the equilibrium position. "State what is meant by the frequency of the oscillations": the number of complete oscillations per unit time.

    Many systems do this near a stable equilibrium: a mass on a spring 弹簧, a pendulum 单摆 (small swing), a floating block pushed down, the charge on a capacitor 电容器 in an LC circuit, atoms in a solid.

    A mass on a spring shown above and below the equilibrium line; in each case the acceleration arrow points back towards equilibrium, opposite to the displacement arrow
    Acceleration always points back towards equilibrium, opposite to the displacement

    Key terms

    • displacement $x$ — distance from equilibrium at a moment (a vector along the line of motion).
    • amplitude 振幅 $x_{0}$ — the largest displacement from equilibrium. Always positive.
    • period 周期 $T$ — the time for one full oscillation.
    • frequency 频率 $f$ — the number of oscillations per second; $f = 1/T$. Unit: Hz.
    • angular frequency $\omega$$\omega = 2\pi/T = 2\pi f$. Unit: $\text{rad s}^{-1}$.
    • phase difference 相位差 — the fraction of a cycle (in radians) by which one oscillation leads or lags another. A quarter-cycle apart is a phase difference of $\pi/2$.

    So $T = 2\pi/\omega$ and $f = \omega/(2\pi)$ — given any one of $\omega$, $f$, $T$ you can find the others.

    Worked example. A mass on a spring oscillates with SHM of amplitude $0.050\ \text{m}$ and frequency $2.5\ \text{Hz}$. Find its maximum acceleration.

    The angular frequency is $\omega = 2\pi f = 2\pi \times 2.5 = 15.7\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. The acceleration is largest at the extremes, where $|a| = \omega^{2}x_{0}$:

    $$a_{\text{max}} = \omega^{2}x_{0} = 15.7^{2} \times 0.050 \approx 12\ \text{m s}^{-2}.$$

    Showing that a motion is simple harmonic

    The exam's favourite four-mark derivation, and the recipe is always the same: (1) displace the object by $x$ from equilibrium; (2) find the resultant restoring force, which comes out as $F = -(\text{constant}) \times x$; (3) apply Newton's second law, $a = F/m = -(\text{constant}/m)\,x$; (4) this has the form $a = -\omega^{2}x$, so the motion is simple harmonic with $\omega^{2} = \text{constant}/m$, and $T = 2\pi/\omega$. Say in words why the force points back towards equilibrium and why it is proportional to $x$ — those are the marks, not the algebra.

    Two systems shown displaced from equilibrium: a floating block pushed down a distance x, so that an extra volume Ax is submerged and there is an extra upthrust ρgAx upwards; and a U-tube of liquid with the left column x above and the right column x below the equilibrium level, so that a column of liquid of height 2x is unbalanced
    Two "show that it is SHM" set-ups: find the extra force when the system is displaced by $x$, and show it is proportional to $x$ and directed back

    Worked example. A mass $m$ hangs from a spring of spring constant $k$. Show that, when displaced and released, it moves with simple harmonic motion, and find the period.

    At equilibrium the spring tension balances the weight. Displace the mass a distance $x$ downwards: the tension increases by $kx$ (Hooke's law), so there is a resultant force $kx$ upwards, towards equilibrium. Newton's second law: $a = -\dfrac{k}{m}x$. This is $a = -\omega^{2}x$ with $\omega^{2} = k/m$, so the motion is simple harmonic and $T = 2\pi/\omega = 2\pi\sqrt{m/k}$. (A trolley held between two identical springs has both pulling it back, $F = -2kx$, so $\omega^{2} = 2k/m$.)

    Worked example. A cuboidal block of cross-sectional area $A$ and mass $m$ floats in a liquid of density $\rho$ with its base a depth $h$ below the surface. It is pushed down a small distance $x$ and released. Show that it oscillates with simple harmonic motion and find the period in terms of $h$ and $g$.

    When the block is pushed down by $x$ an extra volume $Ax$ is submerged, so the upthrust 浮力 increases by the weight of that extra liquid, $\rho g A x$; this extra force acts upwards, towards the equilibrium position. Hence $a = -\dfrac{\rho g A}{m}x$: proportional to $x$ and opposite in direction, so the motion is simple harmonic with $\omega^{2} = \rho g A/m$. At equilibrium the upthrust on the submerged volume $Ah$ equals the weight, $\rho g A h = mg$, so $m = \rho A h$ and $\omega^{2} = g/h$: $T = 2\pi\sqrt{h/g}$ — the same form as a pendulum of length $h$.

    Worked example. A U-tube of cross-sectional area $A$ contains liquid of density $\rho$; the column in each arm has length $L$. The liquid is displaced so that one surface is $x$ above its equilibrium level and the other $x$ below. Show that the liquid oscillates with simple harmonic motion.

    The two surfaces now differ in height by $2x$, so a column of liquid of height $2x$ is unbalanced: the restoring force on the liquid is the weight of that column, $2x\rho g A$, directed so as to level the surfaces. The mass being moved is the whole liquid, $2L\rho A$. So $a = -\dfrac{2x\rho g A}{2L\rho A} = -\dfrac{g}{L}x$: simple harmonic, with $\omega^{2} = g/L$ and $T = 2\pi\sqrt{L/g}$. Note that $\rho$ and $A$ cancel — the period depends on neither the liquid nor the tube.

    Explore

    Swing a pendulum

    Set it swinging, then change the start angle — the time for one swing stays the same (that is what makes it a good clock). Now make the string longer, or move to the Moon, and watch the period change.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    simple harmonic motion 简谐运动 jiǎn xié yùn dòng
    spring 弹簧 tán huáng
    pendulum 单摆 dān bǎi
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    equilibrium 平衡 píng héng
    angular frequency 角频率 jiǎo pín lǜ
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    capacitor 电容器 diàn róng qì
    amplitude 振幅 zhèn fú
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    phase difference 相位差 xiàng wèi chā
    upthrust 浮力 fú lì
    Exercise sheet
    17.1

    Displacement, velocity, acceleration in SHM

    If the particle starts at $x = 0$ moving in the positive direction at $t = 0$, then

    $$x = x_{0} \sin (\omega t).$$

    Differentiating once gives the velocity 速度:

    $$v = x_{0} \omega \cos(\omega t) = v_{0} \cos(\omega t),$$

    where $v_{0} = x_{0} \omega$ is the maximum speed (as the particle passes through equilibrium).

    Differentiating again gives the acceleration:

    $$a = -x_{0} \omega^{2} \sin(\omega t) = -\omega^{2} x,$$

    which is the SHM defining equation again. (If the particle instead starts at the extreme position $x = x_{0}$ at $t = 0$, use $x = x_{0} \cos(\omega t)$. Choose the one that fits the start conditions.)

    Velocity in terms of displacement

    A useful relation that does not use time:

    $$v = \pm \omega \sqrt{x_{0}^{2} - x^{2}}.$$
    • at equilibrium ($x = 0$): $v = \pm \omega x_{0}$ (maximum speed). Both signs, because the particle passes through equilibrium twice each cycle.
    • at the extremes ($x = \pm x_{0}$): $v = 0$ (at rest for an instant).

    Worked example. The same oscillation has amplitude $x_{0} = 0.050\ \text{m}$ and angular frequency $\omega = 15.7\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. Find the speed when the displacement is $x = 0.030\ \text{m}$.

    $$v = \omega\sqrt{x_{0}^{2} - x^{2}} = 15.7\sqrt{0.050^{2} - 0.030^{2}} = 15.7 \times 0.040 \approx 0.63\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$
    A graph of velocity against displacement for simple harmonic motion: an ellipse centred on the origin, crossing the displacement axis at plus and minus the amplitude, where the velocity is zero, and the velocity axis at plus and minus the maximum speed
    Velocity against displacement is an ellipse: $v = 0$ at the extremes and $v = \pm\omega x_{0}$ through equilibrium — read $x_{0}$ and $v_{0}$ from where it cuts the axes, then $\omega = v_{0}/x_{0}$

    Reading the $v$$x$ graph. Its width gives the amplitude ($x = \pm x_{0}$ where $v = 0$) and its height the maximum speed ($v = \pm\omega x_{0}$ at $x = 0$), so $\omega = v_{0}/x_{0}$ and the period follows. Asked to sketch $a$ against $x$ on the same axes, draw the straight line through the origin with negative gradient $-\omega^{2}$, reaching $\mp\omega^{2}x_{0}$ at $x = \pm x_{0}$.

    Worked example. The velocity of an oscillating block varies with time as $v = 0.56\sin(5.1t)$, with $v$ in $\text{m s}^{-1}$ and $t$ in seconds. Find the amplitude, the period and the maximum acceleration.

    Compare with $v = v_{0}\sin\omega t$: $v_{0} = 0.56\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ and $\omega = 5.1\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. Since $v_{0} = \omega x_{0}$, the amplitude is $x_{0} = 0.56/5.1 = 0.11\ \text{m}$; $T = 2\pi/\omega = 1.2\ \text{s}$; $a_{\text{max}} = \omega^{2}x_{0} = \omega v_{0} = 5.1 \times 0.56 = 2.9\ \text{m s}^{-2}$. (Because this $v$ is a sine, the block was at an extreme at $t = 0$: its displacement is a cosine.)

    SHM as the shadow of circular motion. A ball moving round a circle of radius $R$ at angular speed $\omega$, lit from the side, casts a shadow that moves back and forth with simple harmonic motion of amplitude $R$ and the same $\omega$: the shadow's displacement is $x = R\cos\omega t$ (if it starts at an extreme), its maximum speed is $R\omega$ and its maximum acceleration $R\omega^{2}$. For a circle of diameter $0.46\ \text{m}$ and $\omega = 1.9\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$ the shadow has amplitude $0.23\ \text{m}$, $v_{0} = 0.44\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ and $a_{\text{max}} = 0.83\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ — greatest in size at the two ends of its path and always directed back towards the centre.

    Graphs against time

    For $x = x_{0}\sin\omega t$:

    • $x$ vs $t$ — a sine curve, amplitude $x_{0}$, period $T = 2\pi/\omega$.
    • $v$ vs $t$ — a cosine curve, leading $x$ by $\pi/2$, amplitude $\omega x_{0}$.
    • $a$ vs $t$ — a negative sine curve, out of phase with $x$ by $\pi$ (180°), amplitude $\omega^{2} x_{0}$.
    A displacement against time graph for simple harmonic motion: a sine curve of amplitude x0 starting from zero
    Displacement varies sinusoidally with time in simple harmonic motion
    Displacement, velocity and acceleration against time drawn as three stacked curves over one period; velocity is a cosine leading displacement by a quarter cycle and acceleration is a negative sine exactly out of phase with displacement, with dashed lines linking corresponding points
    Velocity leads displacement by a quarter cycle; acceleration is exactly out of phase with displacement

    Graph of $a$ against $x$

    A straight line through the origin with negative gradient $-\omega^{2}$. So you can read $\omega$ from the graph: gradient $= -\omega^{2}$, so $\omega = \sqrt{|\text{gradient}|}$, then $T = 2\pi / \omega$. This is a common exam pattern.

    A graph of acceleration against displacement: a straight line passing through the origin sloping downwards, with gradient minus omega squared
    The acceleration–displacement graph is a straight line through the origin with gradient $-\omega^{2}$

    Worked example. A graph of the height $h$ of an object of mass $36\ \text{kg}$ undergoing vertical simple harmonic motion shows $h$ varying between $2\ \text{m}$ and $10\ \text{m}$, with one complete oscillation every $4.0\ \text{s}$. Find the amplitude, the angular frequency, the maximum speed, the maximum acceleration and the maximum kinetic energy.

    Amplitude $x_{0} = (10 - 2)/2 = 4.0\ \text{m}$ (half the peak-to-peak range; the equilibrium height is $6\ \text{m}$). $\omega = 2\pi/T = 2\pi/4.0 = 1.57\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. $v_{\text{max}} = \omega x_{0} = 6.3\ \text{m s}^{-1}$; $a_{\text{max}} = \omega^{2}x_{0} = 9.9\ \text{m s}^{-2}$; $E_{\text{K,max}} = \tfrac{1}{2}mv_{\text{max}}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2} \times 36 \times 6.28^{2} = 7.1 \times 10^{2}\ \text{J}$. Reading the amplitude as the full height range instead of half of it is the commonest slip here.

    Worked example. A small object rests on a horizontal platform that oscillates vertically with simple harmonic motion of amplitude $6.0\ \text{mm}$. Find the highest frequency at which the object stays in contact with the platform throughout, and state where in the motion contact is first lost.

    The object leaves the platform when the platform's downward acceleration exceeds $g$ — at the top of the oscillation, where the acceleration is greatest and directed downwards: the platform then falls away faster than the object can. The limit is $\omega^{2}x_{0} = g$: $\omega = \sqrt{9.81/0.0060} = 40\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$, so $f = \omega/2\pi = 6.4\ \text{Hz}$. Below this the normal contact force at the top is small but positive; above it, zero.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    17.2

    Energy in simple harmonic motion

    Syllabus
    1. describe the interchange between kinetic and potential energy during simple harmonic motion
    2. recall and use $E = \frac{1}{2}m\omega^2x_0^2$ for the total energy of a system undergoing simple harmonic motion

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A simple harmonic oscillator keeps swapping energy between two forms:

    • kinetic energy 动能 $E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$.
    • potential energy $E_{\text{P}}$ (elastic for a spring, gravitational for a pendulum).

    With no damping 阻尼, the total energy is constant (this is conservation of energy 能量守恒).

    Maximum and minimum

    • at equilibrium ($x = 0$): $v$ is largest, so $E_{\text{K}}$ is largest and $E_{\text{P}}$ is smallest (zero, by choice).
    • at the extremes ($x = \pm x_{0}$): $v = 0$, so $E_{\text{K}} = 0$ and $E_{\text{P}}$ is largest.

    Total energy

    Using $v_{\text{max}} = \omega x_{0}$:

    $$E_{\text{total}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v_{\text{max}}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2} m \omega^{2} x_{0}^{2}.$$

    Two key facts: the total energy is proportional to the square of the amplitude (doubling $x_{0}$ gives four times the energy), and to $\omega^{2}$.

    Energy against displacement

    Using $v^{2} = \omega^{2}(x_{0}^{2} - x^{2})$:

    $$E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m \omega^{2} (x_{0}^{2} - x^{2}), \qquad E_{\text{P}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m \omega^{2} x^{2}.$$

    So $E_{\text{K}}$ is a downward parabola (peak at $x = 0$, zero at $x = \pm x_{0}$) and $E_{\text{P}}$ is an upward parabola (zero at $x = 0$, largest at $x = \pm x_{0}$). Their sum is constant.

    A graph against displacement showing kinetic energy as a downward parabola, potential energy as an upward parabola, and their constant sum as a horizontal line for the total energy
    Kinetic and potential energy swap over a cycle while the total energy stays constant

    Worked example. A $0.20\ \text{kg}$ mass oscillates with amplitude $x_{0} = 0.050\ \text{m}$ and angular frequency $\omega = 15.7\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. Find the total energy of the oscillation.

    The total energy equals the maximum kinetic energy, as the mass passes through $x = 0$ at $v_{\text{max}} = \omega x_{0}$:

    $$E = \tfrac{1}{2} m \omega^{2} x_{0}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2}(0.20)(15.7)^{2}(0.050)^{2} \approx 0.062\ \text{J}.$$

    This stays constant, swapping between kinetic and potential form twice each cycle.

    Describing the interchange without calculation. At an extreme of the motion the oscillator is momentarily at rest: its kinetic energy is zero and its potential energy is a maximum. As it moves towards equilibrium the restoring force does work on it, so potential energy is converted to kinetic energy; at the equilibrium position the kinetic energy is a maximum and the potential energy a minimum. Beyond it the kinetic energy is converted back to potential energy until the other extreme. The total stays constant, and the exchange happens twice per oscillation, so the energy graphs against time have twice the frequency of the displacement graph.

    Worked example. A pendulum bob of mass $0.81\ \text{kg}$ swings with small oscillations of amplitude $32\ \text{mm}$ and period $1.9\ \text{s}$. Find the total energy of the oscillation, and state what happens to it if the amplitude falls to $16\ \text{mm}$.

    $\omega = 2\pi/1.9 = 3.31\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$; $E = \tfrac{1}{2}m\omega^{2}x_{0}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2} \times 0.81 \times 3.31^{2} \times 0.032^{2} = 4.5 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}$. Halving the amplitude quarters the energy ($E \propto x_{0}^{2}$), to $1.1 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}$; the difference has been dissipated as thermal energy by air resistance.

    Explore

    Energy in SHM

    Watch energy swap between kinetic and potential as the oscillator moves — fastest (max KE) at the centre, still (max PE) at the ends.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    damping 阻尼 zǔ ní
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    17.3

    Damped oscillations

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a resistive force acting on an oscillating system causes damping
    2. understand and use the terms light, critical and heavy damping and sketch displacement–time graphs illustrating these types of damping
    3. understand that resonance involves a maximum amplitude of oscillations and that this occurs when an oscillating system is forced to oscillate at its natural frequency

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A resistive force (friction 摩擦力, drag 阻力, air resistance 空气阻力) causes damping — the amplitude shrinks over time as energy is lost as heat. Three named cases:

    Light damping

    The amplitude shrinks slowly over many cycles (a light damping 轻阻尼 case). The system still oscillates near its natural frequency, but each cycle is smaller than the last. A car's suspension is light-to-medium damped, so bumps die away but the ride stays smooth.

    A displacement against time graph showing an oscillation whose amplitude slowly decreases, bounded by a smooth decaying envelope
    In light damping the amplitude dies away slowly over many cycles

    Critical damping

    The least damping that brings the system back to equilibrium without overshooting and without oscillating — a critical damping 临界阻尼 case. It returns in the shortest time. A galvanometer 检流计 or analogue voltmeter 电压表 is critically damped so the needle settles quickly.

    Heavy damping

    So much resistance that the system returns slowly, with no oscillation, but more slowly than the critical case — a heavy damping 过阻尼 case. A door with a strong closer is heavily damped.

    On a displacement–time graph: light damping is a wave whose size dies away smoothly; critical damping returns quickly with no overshoot; heavy damping returns slowly.

    A displacement against time graph comparing a critically damped curve that returns to equilibrium quickly without overshooting and an overdamped (heavily damped) curve that returns more slowly
    Critical damping returns to equilibrium fastest without overshoot; overdamping returns more slowly

    As the exam asks it. Damping is the decrease in the amplitude of an oscillation caused by a resistive force that dissipates the oscillator's energy. In light damping the system oscillates with an amplitude that decreases gradually (exponentially) with time; the period is almost unchanged. In critical damping the system returns to equilibrium in the shortest possible time without oscillating. In heavy damping it returns to equilibrium slowly, without oscillating. Sketching them: the light-damping curve is a sine wave inside a shrinking envelope; the critical and heavy curves both fall to zero without crossing the axis, the heavy one more slowly.

    Worked example. A bar magnet hangs from a spring with one pole inside a coil that is connected through a switch to a resistor. The magnet is set oscillating. Explain why the oscillations die away more quickly when the switch is closed.

    The moving magnet changes the magnetic flux linking the coil, so an e.m.f. is induced (Faraday's law); with the switch closed a current flows through the resistor and dissipates energy as heat. By Lenz's law the induced current opposes the motion of the magnet — an extra resistive force. That energy comes from the oscillation, so the amplitude decreases faster: the circuit adds damping. With the switch open there is an e.m.f. but no current, so no extra energy loss.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    air resistance 空气阻力 kōng qì zǔ lì
    friction 摩擦力 mó cā lì
    drag 阻力 zǔ lì
    light damping 轻阻尼 qīng zǔ ní
    critical damping 临界阻尼 lín jiè zǔ ní
    galvanometer 检流计 jiǎn liú jì
    voltmeter 电压表 diàn yā biǎo
    heavy damping 过阻尼 guò zǔ ní
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    17.3

    Forced oscillations and resonance

    Close-up of guitar strings
    A plucked guitar string vibrates at its resonant frequencies.

    A forced oscillation 受迫振动 is driven by an outside periodic force at a frequency $f_{\text{d}}$ chosen by the experimenter. The system then oscillates at this driving frequency 驱动频率 $f_{\text{d}}$, not at its own natural frequency. A plot of amplitude against $f_{\text{d}}$ is a resonance curve 共振曲线 with a peak.

    Resonance

    Resonance 共振 happens when the driving frequency equals the system's natural frequency 固有频率 $f_{0}$. At resonance the amplitude is largest and the energy transfer from the driver is most efficient.

    Resonance curves: amplitude plotted against driving frequency for light, medium and heavy damping, each rising to a peak near the natural frequency and falling away on either side; lighter damping gives a sharper, higher peak
    The amplitude of a forced oscillation peaks at resonance, when the driving frequency equals the natural frequency
    A black-and-white photograph of the Tacoma Narrows Bridge roadway twisted far over to one side while a man clings to it
    Resonance can destroy. In 1940 the wind pushed the Tacoma Narrows Bridge close to its natural frequency; with little damping the twisting grew and grew until the deck ripped apart. Engineers now design bridges and buildings so their natural frequencies avoid such driving forces

    Examples:

    • a swing pushed at the right rate builds up a large amplitude.
    • a wine glass broken by a sound at its natural ringing frequency.
    • a building shaken by an earthquake whose frequency matches a natural frequency — engineers design buildings so their natural frequencies avoid the main earthquake range.

    The peak's shape depends on damping: lighter damping → a sharper, higher peak; heavier damping → a broader, lower peak, shifted slightly to lower frequency.

    The two-mark definition. Resonance is the condition in which a system is forced to oscillate at its natural frequency, and the amplitude of the oscillation is a maximum (the transfer of energy from the driver is greatest). Both parts — driving frequency equal to natural frequency, and maximum amplitude — are needed.

    Worked example. A ball on a stretched string has a natural frequency of $4.0\ \text{Hz}$. The string is driven by a vibration generator whose frequency is increased slowly from $0$ to $10\ \text{Hz}$. Sketch the variation of the amplitude of the ball with the driving frequency, and state the effect of adding damping.

    The curve starts at a small, non-zero amplitude at low frequency, rises to a sharp peak at $4.0\ \text{Hz}$, and falls away towards zero at high frequency; the peak is at the natural frequency, and only there is the amplitude a maximum. More damping makes the peak lower and broader and shifts it slightly to a lower frequency; the amplitude far from resonance hardly changes.

    Explore

    Resonance

    Drive the swing at different frequencies. Far from its natural frequency it barely moves; tune them to match and the amplitude explodes — resonance, the same effect that can shake a bridge apart.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    natural frequency 固有频率 gù yǒu pín lǜ
    forced oscillation 受迫振动 shòu pò zhèn dòng
    resonance 共振 gòng zhèn
    driving frequency 驱动频率 qū dòng pín lǜ
    resonance curve 共振曲线 gòng zhèn qū xiàn
    17.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    simple harmonic motion motion in which the acceleration is proportional to the displacement from a fixed point and is always directed towards that point
    amplitude the maximum displacement from the equilibrium position
    period the time for one complete oscillation
    frequency the number of complete oscillations per unit time
    angular frequency $\omega = 2\pi f = 2\pi/T$; the rate at which the phase of the oscillation changes
    phase difference the fraction of a cycle, expressed as an angle, by which one oscillation leads or lags another
    damping the reduction in amplitude of an oscillation caused by a resistive force that dissipates its energy
    critical damping the damping that returns a displaced system to equilibrium in the shortest time without oscillation
    natural frequency the frequency at which a system oscillates when displaced and left to oscillate freely
    resonance the forced oscillation of a system at its natural frequency, at which the amplitude is a maximum
    17.3

    Exam tips

    • The SHM condition is $a = -\omega^2 x$ (acceleration proportional to displacement, directed back to equilibrium); to show a motion is SHM, find the restoring force, show it is proportional to $x$ and directed back, and read off $\omega^{2}$.
    • Learn $x = x_0\sin\omega t$ (or cos), $v_{max} = \omega x_0$, $a_{max} = \omega^2 x_0$ and $v = \pm\omega\sqrt{x_0^2 - x^2}$; KE and PE interchange with the total energy constant, $E = \tfrac{1}{2}m\omega^{2}x_{0}^{2} \propto x_{0}^{2}$.
    • Velocity is zero at the extremes and maximum at the centre; acceleration is greatest at the extremes and zero at the centre.
    • The amplitude is half the peak-to-peak range of a displacement graph; $\omega$ comes from the period, or from the gradient of $a$$x$, or from $v_{0}/x_{0}$.
    • Resonance occurs when the driving frequency equals the natural frequency; damping lowers and broadens the peak.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining SHM as "oscillation about an equilibrium position". The mark scheme wants acceleration proportional to displacement and directed towards the fixed point.
    • Saying the minus sign means the acceleration is negative. It means the acceleration is opposite in direction to the displacement.
    • Sketching $v$ against $x$ as a straight line. It is an ellipse; $a$ against $x$ is the straight line.
    • Taking the amplitude as the whole range of the displacement. It is half the range.
    • Defining resonance as "a large amplitude". It is forced oscillation at the natural frequency, giving the maximum amplitude.
    • Calling critical damping "no damping", or heavy damping "the fastest return". Critical damping is the fastest return without oscillation; heavy damping is slower.
  • 18

    Electric fields

    18.1

    Electric fields

    Syllabus
    1. understand that an electric field is an example of a field of force and define electric field as force per unit positive charge
    2. recall and use $F = qE$ for the force on a charge in an electric field
    3. represent an electric field by means of field lines

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A lightning strike at night
    Lightning is a giant spark driven by a huge electric field.

    An electric field 电场 is a region where a charge feels a force from other charges. The electric field strength 电场强度 $E$ at a point is the force per unit positive charge on a small positive test charge 检验电荷 placed there:

    $$E = \frac{F}{q}.$$

    Unit: $\text{N C}^{-1}$ (the same as $\text{V m}^{-1}$, as we will see). $E$ is a vector 矢量, pointing the way the force acts on a positive charge. The force on a charge $q$ is

    $$F = qE,$$

    opposite to the field if $q$ is negative.

    The two-mark definition. Electric field strength at a point is the force per unit positive charge acting on a small (test) charge placed at that point. Three words carry the marks: force per unit charge (not "force on a charge"), positive (which fixes the direction), and small or test (so the charge does not disturb the field it is measuring). The multiple-choice version offers "force per unit charge acting on a small mass" and "force per unit mass" as distractors: a field is defined by a charge, never by a mass.

    Worked example. A proton accelerates at $2.00\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ in an electric field, with no other force acting. Find the field strength. ($m_{\text{p}} = 1.67 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$, $e = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$.)

    $qE = ma$, so

    $$E = \frac{m a}{q} = \frac{(1.67 \times 10^{-27})(2.00)}{1.60 \times 10^{-19}} = 2.09 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{V m}^{-1} = 20.9\ \text{nV m}^{-1}.$$

    The same rearrangement the other way round gives the acceleration of an electron in a field of $1500\ \text{V m}^{-1}$: $a = eE/m_{\text{e}} = (1.60 \times 10^{-19})(1500)/(9.11 \times 10^{-31}) = 2.6 \times 10^{14}\ \text{m s}^{-2}$, enormous because the electron's mass is so small. Gravity ($9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$) is negligible beside it, which is why exam questions about electrons between plates ignore weight.

    Field lines

    • field lines 场线 point the way the force acts on a positive test charge.

    • lines start on positive charges and end on negative charges (or go to infinity).

    • lines never cross; closer lines mean a stronger field.

    • every line carries an arrow; lines meet the surface of a conductor at right angles.

    What a field line represents. Asked "state what is represented by an electric field line", give both halves: its direction shows the direction of the force on a positive charge placed there, and the spacing of the lines shows the strength of the field (closer lines, stronger field). A sketch is marked on exactly these points: arrows drawn, lines not crossing, even spacing where the field is uniform, and radial lines for a point charge or a sphere.

    Examples: a positive point charge 点电荷 has radial lines pointing out; a negative one has lines pointing in; two opposite charges (a dipole 偶极子) have lines curving from + to −; two parallel charged plates give a uniform field 匀强场 of equally spaced parallel lines.

    Four electric field-line patterns: a) uniform field between parallel plates, b) a dipole with lines curving from positive to negative, c) radial lines out from a positive point charge, d) a charged sphere above an earthed plate
    Field-line patterns for parallel plates, a dipole, a point charge, and a charged sphere above an earthed plate
    A hollow charged conductor with radial, evenly spaced field lines pointing outwards and no field inside, beside graphs of E against r (zero inside, jumping to E0 at the surface, then falling as 1 over r squared) and V against r (constant inside, then falling as 1 over r)
    A charged hollow conductor: the field outside is that of a point charge at the centre; inside, the field is zero and the potential is constant

    A charged conducting sphere

    The charge on an isolated 孤立的 conductor 导体 sits on its outer surface, spread evenly when the sphere is on its own. Outside the sphere the field lines are radial, evenly spaced and pointing outwards (for positive charge), exactly the pattern of a point charge at the centre. Inside a hollow (or solid) conductor the field is zero: the fields of all the surface charges cancel everywhere inside, so no field line enters. Two graphs follow, and both are exam favourites. The field strength $E$ is zero out to the radius $R$, jumps to its surface value $E_0$ and then falls as $1/r^{2}$; the potential $V$ is constant inside (a zero field means a zero potential gradient) and then falls as $1/r$.

    Reading the graphs. Given an $E$$x$ graph for a charged sphere, the radius is the distance at which $E$ jumps from zero, and the charge comes from any point on the curve: $Q = 4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2} E$. Given "$E_0$ at the surface", the value at $2R$ is $E_0/4$ and at $3R$ is $E_0/9$: sketch the curve through those points, starting at $E_0$ on the surface line, never from the origin.

    A Van de Graaff generator: a large polished metal dome on a clear column, with a moving rubber belt inside and a small discharge sphere on a stand beside it
    A Van de Graaff generator stores a large static charge on its metal dome, making a strong electric field around it
    Explore

    Electric fields

    E ∝ Q / r²

    A charge sets up a radial field — out for +, in for −, obeying the inverse-square law.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electric field 电场 diàn chǎng
    force
    electric field strength 电场强度 diàn chǎng qiáng dù
    test charge 检验电荷 jiǎn yàn diàn hè
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    field lines 场线 chǎng xiàn
    field line 场线 chǎng xiàn
    conductor 导体 dǎo tǐ
    point charge 点电荷 diǎn diàn hè
    dipole 偶极子 ǒu jí zi
    uniform field 匀强场 yún qiáng chǎng
    isolated 孤立的 gū lì de
    potential gradient 电势梯度 diàn shì tī dù
    Exercise sheet
    18.2

    Uniform electric fields

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use $E = \Delta V / \Delta d$ to calculate the field strength of the uniform field between charged parallel plates
    2. describe the effect of a uniform electric field on the motion of charged particles

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Between two parallel plates a distance $d$ apart with potential difference 电势差 $V$ between them, the field is uniform (apart from edge effects) with size

    Between parallel plates a distance d apart with voltage V, the field is E = V/d
    Between parallel plates the field is uniform, E = V/d
    $$E = \frac{V}{d}.$$

    It points from the higher-potential plate to the lower one. The unit $\text{V m}^{-1}$ comes straight from this and equals $\text{N C}^{-1}$.

    Worked example. Two parallel plates $5.0\ \text{mm}$ apart have a p.d. of $200\ \text{V}$ between them. Find the field strength, and the force on an electron in the gap. ($e = 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$.)

    $$E = \frac{V}{d} = \frac{200}{5.0 \times 10^{-3}} = 4.0 \times 10^{4}\ \text{V m}^{-1}, \qquad F = qE = (1.6 \times 10^{-19})(4.0 \times 10^{4}) = 6.4 \times 10^{-15}\ \text{N}.$$

    Which changes the field? Two things only: $E = V/d$ rises if the p.d. is increased or the plates are moved closer. A resistor in series with the supply changes nothing: no current flows once the plates are charged, so there is no p.d. across the resistor and the plates sit at the full supply voltage. Between plates at $+800\ \text{V}$ and $+1300\ \text{V}$ the field points from the higher potential to the lower; two positive potentials change nothing about the direction rule.

    A charged particle in a uniform field

    A charge $q$ in a uniform field feels a constant force $F = qE$, so a constant acceleration $a = qE/m$ — just like a mass in a uniform gravitational field.

    • released at rest, it speeds up along the field (positive charge) or against it (negative charge), gaining kinetic energy 动能.
    • entering at right angles to the field, it follows a parabolic 抛物线 path — like a projectile 抛体 in gravity. This is how a cathode-ray tube 阴极射线管 used to steer its beam.
    A charged particle entering the uniform field between two parallel plates at right angles to the field and curving into a parabolic path as it crosses
    A charge entering a uniform field at right angles follows a parabolic path, like a projectile
    A negatively charged oil drop between a positive top plate and an earthed bottom plate, held stationary because the upward electric force qE balances the downward weight mg; the field E = V/d points downwards
    A charged oil drop held stationary between horizontal plates: the electric force balances the weight, so q = mgd/V

    Two forces, not one. A charged oil drop "held stationary" between horizontal plates is the exam's favourite equilibrium 平衡: both an electric force and its weight act on it (the multiple-choice distractor is "electric force only"), and they are equal and opposite. For a negative drop the electric force is opposite to the field, so the top plate must be positive to hold it up.

    Worked example. An oil drop of mass $2.6 \times 10^{-15}\ \text{kg}$ carries a charge of $-4.8 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$ and is held stationary in a vacuum between horizontal plates $2.0\ \text{cm}$ apart. Find the p.d. between the plates, and say which plate is positive.

    $$qE = mg \;\Rightarrow\; \frac{qV}{d} = mg \;\Rightarrow\; V = \frac{m g d}{q} = \frac{(2.6 \times 10^{-15})(9.81)(0.020)}{4.8 \times 10^{-19}} = 1.1 \times 10^{3}\ \text{V}.$$

    The drop is negative, so the force on it is against the field; for the force to be upwards the field must point down, so the top plate is positive. Notice that the charge is $3e$, three excess electrons, which is how Millikan showed that charge comes in multiples of $e$.

    Worked example. Two parallel plates in a vacuum are $0.041\ \text{m}$ apart with a p.d. of $250\ \text{V}$ between them. An electron is released from rest at the negative plate. Find (a) the field strength, (b) the force on the electron and its acceleration, (c) the time it takes to reach the positive plate, (d) its kinetic energy on arrival. ($m_{\text{e}} = 9.11 \times 10^{-31}\ \text{kg}$.)

    (a) $E = V/d = 250/0.041 = 6.1 \times 10^{3}\ \text{V m}^{-1}$. (b) $F = eE = (1.60 \times 10^{-19})(6.1 \times 10^{3}) = 9.8 \times 10^{-16}\ \text{N}$; $a = F/m_{\text{e}} = 1.07 \times 10^{15}\ \text{m s}^{-2}$, towards the positive plate. (c) From rest with constant acceleration, $d = \tfrac{1}{2} a t^{2}$, so $t = \sqrt{2d/a} = \sqrt{2 \times 0.041 / (1.07 \times 10^{15})} = 8.8 \times 10^{-9}\ \text{s}$. (d) Energy method, no kinematics needed: $E_{\text{k}} = qV = (1.60 \times 10^{-19})(250) = 4.0 \times 10^{-17}\ \text{J}$, so $v = \sqrt{2E_{\text{k}}/m_{\text{e}}} = 9.4 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. (Check: $v = at = (1.07 \times 10^{15})(8.8 \times 10^{-9}) = 9.4 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.)

    Worked example (deflection). An electron travelling horizontally at $2.0 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ enters the field between two horizontal plates $18\ \text{mm}$ apart with a p.d. of $400\ \text{V}$. The plates are $30\ \text{mm}$ long. Find the deflection 偏转 of the electron by the time it leaves the field.

    The horizontal motion is unaffected: time in the field $t = 0.030/(2.0 \times 10^{7}) = 1.5 \times 10^{-9}\ \text{s}$. Vertically, $a = eE/m_{\text{e}} = eV/(m_{\text{e}} d) = (1.60 \times 10^{-19})(400)/[(9.11 \times 10^{-31})(0.018)] = 3.9 \times 10^{15}\ \text{m s}^{-2}$, so the deflection is $y = \tfrac{1}{2} a t^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2}(3.9 \times 10^{15})(1.5 \times 10^{-9})^{2} = 4.4 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}$, less than the half-gap of $9\ \text{mm}$, so the electron does leave the field. Its vertical velocity on exit is $at = 5.9 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$, so it leaves at $\tan\theta = 5.9/20$, about $16°$; the path is a parabola, and after the plates (no field) it travels in a straight line in the direction it had on exit.

    Explore

    Uniform electric field lab

    Follow how a charge behaves between parallel plates.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chā
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    parabolic 抛物线 pāo wù xiàn
    projectile 抛体 pāo tǐ
    cathode-ray tube 阴极射线管 yīn jí shè xiàn guǎn
    equilibrium 平衡 píng héng
    deflection 偏转 piān zhuǎn
    Exercise sheet
    18.3

    Coulomb's law

    Syllabus
    1. understand that, for a point outside a spherical conductor, the charge on the sphere may be considered to be a point charge at its centre
    2. recall and use Coulomb’s law $F = Q_1Q_2 / (4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^2)$ for the force between two point charges in free space

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    For two point charges $Q_{1}$ and $Q_{2}$ a distance $r$ apart in free space, each feels a force of size

    $$F = \frac{Q_{1} Q_{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}.$$

    This is Coulomb's law 库仑定律. Here $\varepsilon_{0} = 8.85 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{F m}^{-1}$ is the permittivity of free space 真空电容率, and $1/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0}) \approx 9.0 \times 10^{9}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{C}^{-2}$. The force is along the line joining the charges: repulsive for like charges, attractive for opposite charges.

    Stating the law in words. "State Coulomb's law" wants a sentence, not a formula: the (electric) force between two point charges is directly proportional to the product of the charges and inversely proportional to the square of their separation. Both proportionalities are needed, and the charges must be point charges (or spheres treated as point charges at their centres) in a vacuum.

    Coulomb's law direction: two like charges (both positive) are pushed apart; a positive and a negative charge are pulled together
    Like charges repel; opposite charges attract — the force is along the line joining them

    Worked example. Find the electrostatic force between point charges of $+2.0\ \text{nC}$ and $+3.0\ \text{nC}$ placed $4.0\ \text{cm}$ apart. ($1/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0}) = 9.0 \times 10^{9}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{C}^{-2}$.)

    $$F = \frac{Q_{1}Q_{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} = \frac{(9.0 \times 10^{9})(2.0 \times 10^{-9})(3.0 \times 10^{-9})}{(0.040)^{2}} \approx 3.4 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{N (repulsive).}$$

    Worked example. In a hydrogen atom the proton and the electron may be treated as point charges $120\ \text{pm}$ apart. Find the electric force between them, and compare it with their gravitational attraction. ($m_{\text{p}} = 1.67 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$, $m_{\text{e}} = 9.11 \times 10^{-31}\ \text{kg}$, $G = 6.67 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{kg}^{-2}$.)

    $$F_{\text{E}} = \frac{e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} = \frac{(8.99 \times 10^{9})(1.60 \times 10^{-19})^{2}}{(1.20 \times 10^{-10})^{2}} = 1.6 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{N (attractive).}$$

    Gravity: $F_{\text{G}} = G m_{\text{p}} m_{\text{e}}/r^{2} = (6.67 \times 10^{-11})(1.67 \times 10^{-27})(9.11 \times 10^{-31})/(1.20 \times 10^{-10})^{2} = 7.0 \times 10^{-48}\ \text{N}$, about $10^{39}$ times smaller. Inside atoms, gravity is irrelevant.

    Worked example. Two identical oil droplets in a vacuum have their centres $3.8 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{m}$ apart. Each carries the same charge, and they repel with a force of $1.0 \times 10^{-15}\ \text{N}$. Find the charge on each droplet, and the number of excess electrons it carries.

    $$F = \frac{Q^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} \;\Rightarrow\; Q = \sqrt{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} F r^{2}} = \sqrt{\frac{(1.0 \times 10^{-15})(3.8 \times 10^{-6})^{2}}{8.99 \times 10^{9}}} = 1.3 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{C},$$

    that is $1.3 \times 10^{-18}/1.60 \times 10^{-19} \approx 8$ electrons. Identical objects with the same sign of charge always repel; do not write "attract" for the direction.

    Worked example. A charged sphere X is fixed on an insulating stand. A second sphere Y, of mass $2.0\ \text{g}$, hangs beside it on an insulating thread and settles in equilibrium with the thread at $12°$ to the vertical, its centre $5.0\ \text{cm}$ from the centre of X on the same horizontal level. Find the electric force on Y and, if the spheres carry equal charges, the charge on each.

    Sphere Y hanging on an insulating thread near a charged sphere X fixed on an insulating stand, the thread at an angle theta to the vertical, with the three forces on Y (tension, weight, electric repulsion from X) and the closed force triangle beside it, tan theta = F over mg
    A charged sphere hanging near a charged sphere: three forces balance, the tension along the thread, the weight and the horizontal electric repulsion, so tan θ = F/mg

    Three forces act on Y: its weight $mg$ (down), the tension 张力 $T$ (along the thread) and the electric force $F$ (horizontal, away from X because like charges repel). Resolving, $T\cos\theta = mg$ and $T\sin\theta = F$, so

    $$F = mg\tan\theta = (2.0 \times 10^{-3})(9.81)\tan 12° = 4.2 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{N}.$$

    Then $F = Q^{2}/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2})$ gives $Q = \sqrt{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} F r^{2}} = \sqrt{(4.2 \times 10^{-3})(0.050)^{2}/(8.99 \times 10^{9})} = 3.4 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{C}$. A closed vector triangle of the three forces is an equally good method; the exam accepts either, but it must show all three forces.

    Worked example (helium). A helium atom may be modelled as a nucleus of charge $+2e$ with two electrons in diametrically opposite circular orbits of radius $170\ \text{pm}$. Find the resultant force 合力 on one electron, and hence its orbital speed.

    Two forces act on the electron: attraction to the nucleus, at distance $r$, and repulsion from the other electron, at distance $2r$ on the far side:

    $$F_{\text{res}} = \frac{2e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} - \frac{e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} (2r)^{2}} = \frac{e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}\left(2 - \tfrac{1}{4}\right) = 1.75 \times \frac{(8.99 \times 10^{9})(1.60 \times 10^{-19})^{2}}{(1.70 \times 10^{-10})^{2}} = 1.4 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{N},$$

    towards the nucleus. This resultant is the centripetal force, $F = m_{\text{e}} v^{2}/r$, so $v = \sqrt{F r/m_{\text{e}}} = \sqrt{(1.4 \times 10^{-8})(1.70 \times 10^{-10})/(9.11 \times 10^{-31})} = 1.6 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. The trap is to forget the second electron, or to put it at distance $r$ rather than $2r$.

    Spheres treated as point charges

    A spherical conductor with total charge $Q$ gives, at any point outside, the same field as a point charge $Q$ at its centre (measure $r$ from the centre). Inside a hollow charged conductor the field is zero, so the conductor is an equipotential 等势面.

    Explore

    Coulomb's law

    F ∝ Qq / r²

    Like charges repel, unlike attract — and the force follows 1/r².

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Coulomb's law 库仑定律 kù lún dìng lǜ
    permittivity of free space 真空电容率 zhēn kōng diàn róng lǜ
    tension 张力 zhāng lì
    resultant force 合力 hé lì
    equipotential 等势面 děng shì miàn
    Exercise sheet
    18.4

    Electric field due to a point charge

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use $E = Q / (4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^2)$ for the electric field strength due to a point charge in free space

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Coulomb's law gives the force between two charges. Divide it by the test charge ($E = F/q$) and you are left with the field of the source charge $Q$ alone. The field at distance $r$ from a point charge $Q$ is

    $$E = \frac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}.$$

    It points out from a positive $Q$, in towards a negative $Q$, and falls as $1/r^{2}$ — just like gravitational field 重力场 strength, except gravity is always attractive. For several charges, add the fields as a vector sum 矢量和.

    Worked example. The Earth may be treated as a uniform conducting sphere of radius $6.37 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$ carrying a total charge of $-4.80 \times 10^{5}\ \text{C}$ spread over its surface. Find the electric field strength at the surface, and compare it with the gravitational field strength there. ($M_{\text{E}} = 5.98 \times 10^{24}\ \text{kg}$.)

    $$E = \frac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} R^{2}} = \frac{(8.99 \times 10^{9})(4.80 \times 10^{5})}{(6.37 \times 10^{6})^{2}} = 106\ \text{V m}^{-1},$$

    directed towards the centre (the charge is negative). Gravity: $g = GM/R^{2} = 9.83\ \text{N kg}^{-1}$, so $E/g \approx 11$; in symbols $E/g = Q/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} G M)$, which shows that the ratio depends only on the charge-to-mass ratio of the sphere. A charged sphere of mass $m$ and charge $q$ would need $qE = mg$ to float in this field: $q/m = g/E = 0.093\ \text{C kg}^{-1}$.

    Worked example. Point charges of $+4.0\ \text{nC}$ and $+1.0\ \text{nC}$ are $30\ \text{cm}$ apart. Where on the line joining them is the resultant field zero?

    Between the charges the two fields point in opposite directions; call the distance from the $4.0\ \text{nC}$ charge $x$. Zero resultant needs equal magnitudes:

    $$\frac{4.0}{x^{2}} = \frac{1.0}{(0.30 - x)^{2}} \;\Rightarrow\; \frac{0.30 - x}{x} = \frac{1}{2} \;\Rightarrow\; x = 0.20\ \text{m},$$

    twice as far from the larger charge. For opposite charges the fields between them point the same way and never cancel: the zero lies outside, beyond the smaller charge.

    Explore

    Field around a point charge

    Change the charge. Field lines point away from positive and toward negative, and crowd together where the field is strongest.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gravitational field 重力场 zhòng lì chǎng
    vector sum 矢量和 shǐ liàng hé
    Exercise sheet
    18.5

    Electric potential

    Syllabus
    1. define electric potential at a point as the work done per unit positive charge in bringing a small test charge from infinity to the point
    2. recall and use the fact that the electric field at a point is equal to the negative of potential gradient at that point
    3. use $V = Q / (4\pi\varepsilon_0 r)$ for the electric potential in the field due to a point charge
    4. understand how the concept of electric potential leads to the electric potential energy of two point charges and use $E_P = Qq / (4\pi\varepsilon_0 r)$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Electric potential 电势 $V$ at a point is the work done per unit positive charge in bringing a small positive test charge from infinity 无穷远 to that point:

    $$V = \frac{W}{q}.$$

    Unit: $\text{V}$. The potential is zero at infinity. For a positive source charge $V > 0$ everywhere outside; for a negative source charge $V < 0$.

    The two-mark definition. Electric potential at a point is the work done per unit positive charge in bringing a small test charge from infinity to the point. The marks are for work done per unit (positive) charge and from infinity to the point. The potential of a positive charge is positive because work must be done on a positive test charge to push it in against the repulsion; near a negative charge the field does the work, so the potential is negative. "Explain why the potential near an isolated proton is positive" is answered in exactly those words.

    Potential due to a point charge

    $$V = \frac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r}.$$

    Note the $1/r$ here (compared with $1/r^{2}$ for the field). $V$ is a scalar 标量; for several charges, add the potentials (with sign).

    Worked example. Find the electric potential $4.0\ \text{cm}$ from a point charge of $+3.0\ \text{nC}$. ($1/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0}) = 9.0 \times 10^{9}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{C}^{-2}$.)

    $$V = \frac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r} = \frac{(9.0 \times 10^{9})(3.0 \times 10^{-9})}{0.040} \approx 6.8 \times 10^{2}\ \text{V}.$$

    Because potential is a scalar, the potential from several charges is simply their sum (each with its own sign) — no directions to resolve.

    Potential along the line joining two charged spheres X and Y: for like charges the potential is positive everywhere with a minimum where the gradient, and so the field, is zero; for opposite charges the potential passes through zero between the spheres
    Potential along the line between two charged spheres: like charges give a minimum (field zero there); opposite charges give a zero crossing

    Two charged spheres on a line

    The exam's favourite structured question puts two charged spheres X and Y some distance apart and draws the potential $V$ along the line joining their centres (or asks you to reason from it). Everything follows from two facts: potential is a scalar that adds with sign, and the field is the negative gradient of the graph.

    • Sign of the charges. If $V$ is positive along the whole line, both charges are positive; if $V$ changes sign, the charges are opposite (positive near the positive sphere).
    • Where the field is zero. Where the curve has a minimum (gradient zero). For like charges this lies between them, closer to the smaller charge: $Q_{\text{X}}/x^{2} = Q_{\text{Y}}/(d - x)^{2}$. For opposite charges there is no such point between them: the curve crosses zero there, but its gradient is not zero, so the field is not.
    • Ratio of the charges. Where $V = 0$ between opposite charges, $Q_{\text{X}}/x = Q_{\text{Y}}/(d - x)$: the distances give the ratio directly. For like charges use the minimum instead (the square root of the field condition).
    • Force on a charge placed at P. Read the gradient at P by drawing a tangent 切线; then $E$ is minus the gradient, and $F = qE$.

    Worked example. Two isolated charged metal spheres X and Y have their centres $1.2\ \text{m}$ apart in a vacuum. The potential along the line between them is positive everywhere and has a minimum at $x = 0.50\ \text{m}$ from the centre of X. State three conclusions, and then find the force on a proton held at $x = 0.60\ \text{m}$, where the gradient of the graph is $+180\ \text{V m}^{-1}$.

    Conclusions: (1) both spheres are positively charged, because the potential is positive everywhere; (2) the electric field is zero at $x = 0.50\ \text{m}$, where the gradient is zero; (3) the charge on Y is larger, because the zero-field point lies closer to X; in fact $Q_{\text{Y}}/Q_{\text{X}} = (0.70/0.50)^{2} = 2.0$. At $x = 0.60\ \text{m}$: $E = -180\ \text{V m}^{-1}$ (pointing towards X, since $V$ rises towards Y), so $F = eE = (1.60 \times 10^{-19})(180) = 2.9 \times 10^{-17}\ \text{N}$ towards X. Released, the proton accelerates towards X, its acceleration increasing as the gradient steepens; it needs an external force to hold it still.

    Describing the motion. "A positively charged particle is placed at P and released. Describe and explain its motion." The examiner wants: the direction (towards lower potential, down the slope of the $V$ graph); that the force, and so the acceleration, is not constant (it follows the gradient, which changes along the line); and that the particle speeds up throughout, since the force stays in the direction of motion. If P is the zero-field point the particle stays at rest, in unstable equilibrium: a nudge either way sends it off.

    Two 1/r curves of potential V against distance r from a point charge on one axis: a positive source charge gives a positive potential falling towards zero, a negative source charge gives a negative potential rising towards zero
    The potential near a point charge varies as 1/r — positive for a positive charge, negative for a negative one

    Link between field and potential

    The field equals the negative potential gradient 电势梯度:

    $$E = -\frac{dV}{dx}.$$

    Between parallel plates $V$ changes evenly with position, giving $E = V/d$ as before. The minus sign means the field points towards lower potential. For a point charge, $-\dfrac{dV}{dr} = \dfrac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} = E$.

    The one-line relationship. "State the relationship between electric field and electric potential": the field strength is equal to the negative of the potential gradient, $E = -\Delta V/\Delta x$. On a $V$$x$ graph $E$ is minus the gradient of a tangent; on a $V$$r$ graph for a point charge the gradient is steepest close to the charge, where the field is strongest, and the sign of $E$ is fixed by "the field points towards lower potential". The uniform-field version $E = V/d$ is the same statement with a constant gradient.

    Equipotentials. An equipotential surface joins points of equal potential; no work is done moving a charge along it, so the field is always at right angles to it. Around a point charge the equipotentials are concentric spheres, growing further apart as $V$ falls; between parallel plates they are planes parallel to the plates. The surface of a conductor is an equipotential, which is why field lines meet it at right angles.

    Two graphs against distance for a uniform field: a) potential falling steadily from +V to zero with gradient minus V over d, b) the field strength constant at V over d
    In a uniform field the potential falls steadily with distance, so the field strength $V/d$ is constant

    Electric potential energy

    A charge $q$ at a point of potential $V$ has electric potential energy 电势能 $E_{\text{P}} = qV$. For two point charges $Q$ and $q$ a distance $r$ apart:

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \frac{Qq}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r}.$$
    • like charges: $E_{\text{P}} > 0$ — stored energy that would be released if they flew apart.
    • opposite charges: $E_{\text{P}} < 0$ — a bound 束缚 system; energy must be supplied to separate them.

    In both cases $E_{\text{P}} \to 0$ as $r \to \infty$.

    Worked example. The proton and the electron in a hydrogen atom are $5.3 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{m}$ apart. Find the electric potential energy of the pair.

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \frac{Qq}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r} = \frac{(8.99 \times 10^{9})(+1.60 \times 10^{-19})(-1.60 \times 10^{-19})}{5.3 \times 10^{-11}} = -4.3 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{J} = -27\ \text{eV}.$$

    The negative sign is part of the answer: the charges are opposite, so energy ($4.3 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{J}$) must be supplied to pull them apart to infinity. (The electron also has kinetic energy of half that size, so the energy needed to ionise 电离 the atom is $13.6\ \text{eV}$; the "worked-example pattern" below shows why.)

    Charge through a p.d. A charge $q$ moved through a potential difference $V$ changes its potential energy by $qV$, which is why an electron accelerated from rest through $250\ \text{V}$ arrives with $250\ \text{eV}$ of kinetic energy whatever the shape of the field. For an MCQ about "moving P a distance $x$ along the field lines", the work done is $qEx$, and its potential energy falls if it moves the way the force pushes it.

    Electric potential energy against separation: like charges give a positive curve falling towards zero (energy released if they fly apart); opposite charges give a negative curve rising towards zero — a bound well that needs energy supplied to separate them
    Electric PE of two charges: positive for like charges, a negative well for opposite charges

    Worked-example pattern

    An electron 电子 orbits a nucleus 原子核 of charge $+Ze$ at distance $r$. The Coulomb attraction provides the centripetal force 向心力:

    $$\frac{Z e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} = \frac{m_{e} v^{2}}{r}, \qquad v = \sqrt{\frac{Z e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} m_{e} r}}.$$

    The total energy is kinetic plus potential:

    $$E_{\text{total}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m_{e} v^{2} - \frac{Z e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r} = -\frac{Z e^{2}}{8\pi\varepsilon_{0} r},$$

    which is negative (a bound state).

    Gravitational versus electric

    The two field theories look alike:

    Quantity Gravitational Electric
    Source mass $M$ (always positive) charge $Q$ (can be ±)
    Field strength $g = GM/r^{2}$ $E = Q/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2})$
    Force on test object $F = mg$ $F = qE$
    Potential $\phi = -GM/r$ $V = Q/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r)$
    PE of two $-GMm/r$ $Qq/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r)$
    Nature always attractive attractive or repulsive

    The minus sign in the gravitational potential 引力势 reflects that gravity is always attractive; the electric potential takes the sign of the source charge.

    Similarity and difference (a standard two-marker). Both potentials are proportional to $1/r$, both are zero at infinity, and both are scalars; but gravitational potential is always negative (the force is always attractive) whereas electric potential takes the sign of the charge and can be positive. For the fields: both obey an inverse-square law and both are drawn as radial lines around a point source, but gravitational field lines only ever point inwards (attraction), while electric field lines point outwards from a positive charge and inwards to a negative one.

    Explore

    Electric potential

    V = kQ / r

    Potential ∝ 1/r around a charge — steep near it, flattening out.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    infinity 无穷远 wú qióng yuǎn
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    centripetal force 向心力 xiàng xīn lì
    electric potential 电势 diàn shì
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    tangent 切线 qiè xiàn
    negative potential gradient 电势梯度 diàn shì tī dù
    electric potential energy 电势能 diàn shì néng
    bound 束缚 shù fù
    ionise 电离 diàn lí
    gravitational potential 引力势 yǐn lì shì
    Exercise sheet
    18.5

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    electric field a region in which a charge experiences an (electric) force
    electric field strength the force per unit positive charge acting on a small (test) charge placed at the point
    electric field line a line whose direction shows the direction of the force on a positive charge; the spacing of the lines shows the field strength
    Coulomb's law the force between two point charges is directly proportional to the product of the charges and inversely proportional to the square of their separation
    electric potential the work done per unit positive charge in bringing a small test charge from infinity to the point
    field and potential the electric field strength is equal to the negative of the potential gradient: $E = -\Delta V/\Delta x$
    electric potential energy (of two charges) the work done in bringing the charges from infinity to their separation; $Qq/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r)$
    equipotential a surface (or line) on which every point has the same potential; the field is at right angles to it
    uniform field a field with the same strength and direction at every point, shown by parallel, evenly spaced field lines
    18.5

    Exam tips

    • Four formulae, two with $r^{2}$ and two with $r$: $F = Q_1 Q_2 / 4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^{2}$ and $E = Q/4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^{2}$ (inverse square), $V = Q/4\pi\varepsilon_0 r$ and $E_{\text{P}} = Qq/4\pi\varepsilon_0 r$. Decide which one before you write.
    • Distinguish a uniform field ($E = V/d$, between plates) from a radial field ($E = Q/4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^{2}$, outside a point charge or a sphere); $r$ for a sphere is measured from the centre, not the surface.
    • The field points from high to low potential and $E$ is minus the potential gradient: draw a tangent on a $V$$x$ graph to find it.
    • Field is a vector (add components, subtract opposing ones); potential is a scalar (add with sign). Between like charges there is a zero-field point; between opposite charges a zero-potential point.
    • A charged particle in a uniform field: $F = qE$, $a = qE/m$, $E_{\text{k}} = qV$; along the field it is the vertical half of projectile motion, and motion at right angles to the field is unaffected.
    • The data sheet gives both $\varepsilon_0 = 8.85 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{F m}^{-1}$ and $1/(4\pi\varepsilon_0) = 8.99 \times 10^{9}\ \text{m F}^{-1}$; either works, do not mix them up.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining field strength as "the force on a charge" or "force per unit mass". It is the force per unit positive charge on a small positive charge.
    • Forgetting to square $r$ in Coulomb's law and in the field, or squaring it in the potential ($V \propto 1/r$).
    • Using the diameter, or the distance from the surface of a sphere, instead of the centre-to-centre distance.
    • Sketching $E$ for a sphere from the origin. It is zero inside and starts at $E_0$ on the surface; $V$ is constant inside, not zero.
    • Field lines without arrows, crossing, or unevenly spaced in a uniform field; lines not at right angles to a conductor.
    • Dropping the negative sign on the potential energy of opposite charges, or taking the direction of $E$ from the sign of $V$ instead of from its gradient.
    • Forgetting the second electron in the helium atom, or placing it at distance $r$ rather than $2r$.
    • Using $E = V/d$ for a point charge, or $E = Q/4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^{2}$ between plates.
    • Giving an electron weight, or using the proton's mass for an electron; in electrons-between-plates questions the weight is negligible.
    • Leaving out the weight in an "oil drop held stationary" question, or getting the polarity of the top plate backwards.
  • 19

    Capacitance

    19.1

    Capacitance

    Syllabus
    1. define capacitance, as applied to both isolated spherical conductors and to parallel plate capacitors
    2. recall and use $C = Q/V$
    3. derive, using $C = Q/V$, formulae for the combined capacitance of capacitors in series and in parallel
    4. use the capacitance formulae for capacitors in series and in parallel

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Electrolytic capacitors on a circuit board
    Capacitors store electric charge in a circuit.

    A capacitor 电容器 stores charge. The simplest one is two parallel conductor 导体 plates with an insulator 绝缘体 (a dielectric 电介质, or just vacuum 真空 / air) between them. Connected to a battery, charge $+Q$ builds up on one plate and $-Q$ on the other, with a potential difference 电势差 $V$ across the gap.

    A parallel-plate capacitor: a plate with charge +Q and a plate with charge -Q separated by an insulating dielectric, connected to a battery that gives a potential difference V across the gap
    A parallel-plate capacitor: equal and opposite charges on two plates with a p.d. $V$ across the gap

    How the plates become charged. Connect the plates to a battery and electrons flow, through the battery, from the plate joined to the positive terminal 接线端 to the plate joined to the negative terminal. One plate is left with charge $+Q$ and the other gains $-Q$: the charges are always equal and opposite, so the capacitor as a whole stays neutral. The flow stops when the p.d. between the plates equals the e.m.f. of the battery. Nothing crosses the gap; the insulator is what keeps the charge separated.

    The capacitance 电容 $C$ of any capacitor (or any isolated conductor) is

    $$C = \frac{Q}{V}.$$

    This applies to:

    • an isolated sphere holding charge $Q$ at potential $V$ (zero at infinity). For radius $r$, $V = Q/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0}r)$, so $C = 4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r$.
    • a parallel-plate capacitor: charges $\pm Q$ on the plates, p.d. $V$ between them.

    Unit: farad 法拉 (F) $= \text{C V}^{-1}$. A farad is huge, so real capacitors run from $\text{pF}$ to $\text{mF}$.

    Capacitance is constant for a given capacitor (set by its size and dielectric). Doubling the charge doubles the voltage, so $C = Q/V$ stays the same.

    The two-mark definitions. For a parallel-plate capacitor: the charge on one plate per unit potential difference between the plates. For an isolated sphere (or any isolated conductor): the charge on the conductor per unit potential. The examiner looks for "charge per unit p.d." (or "per unit potential") and, for the plates, that the charge is the charge on one plate and the p.d. is that between the plates. "The charge stored" is accepted; "the total charge on both plates" is not, because that total is zero.

    What sets the capacitance. For parallel plates the capacitance is proportional to the plate area and inversely proportional to the separation $x$ ($C \propto 1/x$: halve the gap and the capacitance doubles), and it rises when a dielectric replaces the air. A question that states "$C$ is inversely proportional to $x$" and then moves the plates apart at constant charge is asking for $V = Q/C \propto x$: the p.d. rises in proportion. At constant p.d. (still connected to the supply) it is the charge that falls instead.

    Worked example. A $100\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor is charged to $12\ \text{V}$. Find the charge stored.

    $$Q = CV = (100 \times 10^{-6})(12) = 1.2 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{C}\ (= 1.2\ \text{mC}).$$

    Worked example. An isolated metal sphere of radius $15\ \text{cm}$ is charged to a potential of $9.0 \times 10^{3}\ \text{V}$. Find its capacitance and its charge. It is then discharged to earth through a $120\ \text{M}\Omega$ resistor: find the time constant of the discharge.

    $$C = 4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r = \frac{0.15}{8.99 \times 10^{9}} = 1.7 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{F} = 17\ \text{pF}, \qquad Q = CV = (1.67 \times 10^{-11})(9.0 \times 10^{3}) = 1.5 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{C}.$$

    The time constant is $RC = (1.2 \times 10^{8})(1.67 \times 10^{-11}) = 2.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{s}$: even through an enormous resistance the sphere loses its charge in milliseconds, because its capacitance is so small. Notice that $4\pi\varepsilon_{0} = 1/(8.99 \times 10^{9})$, so $C = r/(8.99 \times 10^{9})$ with $r$ in metres.

    Several real capacitors of very different sizes: four large metal electrolytic cans standing upright, and a row of much smaller film and ceramic capacitors below, with a ruler for scale
    Real capacitors range from large electrolytic cans (high capacitance) down to tiny film and ceramic types -- from pF up to mF

    Combining capacitors

    Capacitors in parallel share the same p.d. $V$. The total charge is the sum:

    $$Q_{\text{total}} = C_{1} V + C_{2} V + \ldots, \qquad\text{so}\qquad C_{\text{parallel}} = C_{1} + C_{2} + \ldots$$

    A parallel combination has larger capacitance than any one capacitor.

    Two capacitors C1 and C2 connected side by side across the same potential difference V, with charges q1 and q2 adding to Q, equivalent to a single capacitor C
    Capacitors in parallel share the same p.d.; the charges add

    Capacitors in series carry the same charge $Q$. The total p.d. is the sum:

    $$V_{\text{total}} = \frac{Q}{C_{1}} + \frac{Q}{C_{2}} + \ldots, \qquad\text{so}\qquad \frac{1}{C_{\text{series}}} = \frac{1}{C_{1}} + \frac{1}{C_{2}} + \ldots$$

    A series combination has smaller capacitance than any one capacitor.

    Two capacitors C1 and C2 connected in a line carrying the same charge Q, with p.d.s V1 and V2 adding to V, equivalent to a single capacitor C
    Capacitors in series carry the same charge; the p.d.s add

    Note: these rules are the opposite of those for resistors (resistors sum in series; capacitors sum in parallel), because $C = Q/V$ has $V$ on the bottom while $R = V/I$ has $I$ on the bottom.

    Deriving the two rules

    "Derive an expression for the combined capacitance" is a show that question, and the mark scheme wants the physics stated, not just the algebra.

    • Series. The capacitors carry the same charge $Q$: the plate joined to the positive terminal loses electrons to the far plate of the next capacitor, so every plate in the chain holds $\pm Q$. The p.d.s add: $V = V_{1} + V_{2}$. With $V_{1} = Q/C_{1}$ and $V_{2} = Q/C_{2}$, and the combination defined by $V = Q/C$, dividing through by $Q$ gives $1/C = 1/C_{1} + 1/C_{2}$.
    • Parallel. The capacitors have the same p.d. $V$, because each is connected directly across the supply. The charges add: $Q = Q_{1} + Q_{2} = C_{1}V + C_{2}V$, and $Q = CV$ for the combination, so $C = C_{1} + C_{2}$.

    Two capacitors in series always give less than the smaller one; two equal capacitors $C$ give $C/2$ in series and $2C$ in parallel.

    Reducing a network of three capacitors: two capacitors in parallel are first replaced by one capacitor equal to their sum, which is then in series with the third, giving the reciprocal rule; the final single capacitor is shown
    A network is reduced one step at a time: combine the parallel pair first, then the series pair

    Worked example. A $6.0\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor is in series with a parallel pair of $2.0\ \mu\text{F}$ and $4.0\ \mu\text{F}$. Find the total capacitance, and the charge on each capacitor when $12\ \text{V}$ is applied across the network.

    Parallel pair: $2.0 + 4.0 = 6.0\ \mu\text{F}$. In series with $6.0\ \mu\text{F}$: $1/C = 1/6.0 + 1/6.0$, so $C = 3.0\ \mu\text{F}$. Total charge $Q = CV = (3.0 \times 10^{-6})(12) = 3.6 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{C}$: this is the charge on the $6.0\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor (series, same charge), and it is shared by the parallel pair in the ratio of their capacitances (same p.d., $6.0\ \text{V}$ across each): the $2.0\ \mu\text{F}$ holds $1.2 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{C}$ and the $4.0\ \mu\text{F}$ holds $2.4 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{C}$. Check: they add to $3.6 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{C}$.

    Worked example. Capacitors X and Y, each of capacitance $C$, are connected in series across a supply of voltage $V$; capacitors P and Q, each $C$, are connected in parallel across an identical supply. Compare the charge drawn from each supply and the energy stored in each arrangement.

    Series: $C_{\text{s}} = C/2$, charge $Q_{\text{s}} = CV/2$, energy $\tfrac{1}{2} C_{\text{s}} V^{2} = CV^{2}/4$. Parallel: $C_{\text{p}} = 2C$, charge $2CV$, energy $CV^{2}$. The parallel arrangement draws four times the charge and stores four times the energy, because at the same supply voltage the energy is $\tfrac{1}{2} C V^{2}$ and the capacitance is four times larger. Asked which arrangement stores more energy from a given supply, the answer is always parallel.

    Explore

    Capacitance

    Q = C·V

    Charge stored is proportional to voltage — the gradient is the capacitance C.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    capacitor 电容器 diàn róng qì
    conductor 导体 dǎo tǐ
    insulator 绝缘体 jué yuán tǐ
    dielectric 电介质 diàn jiè zhì
    vacuum 真空 zhēn kōng
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chā
    terminal 接线端 jiē xiàn duān
    capacitance 电容 diàn róng
    farad 法拉 fǎ lā
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    19.2

    Energy stored in a capacitor

    Syllabus
    1. determine the electric potential energy stored in a capacitor from the area under the potential–charge graph
    2. recall and use $W = \frac{1}{2}QV = \frac{1}{2}CV^2$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Charging a capacitor from $0$ to $Q$ needs work, because each extra bit of charge is pushed against the p.d. already there. When the charge is $q$, the p.d. is $V(q) = q/C$, so adding a small charge $dq$ needs work $V\,dq$. The total work is

    $$W = \int_{0}^{Q} \frac{q}{C}\, dq = \frac{Q^{2}}{2 C}.$$

    Using $V = Q/C$, this is the energy 能量 stored:

    $$W = \tfrac{1}{2} Q V = \tfrac{1}{2} C V^{2} = \frac{Q^{2}}{2C}.$$

    Worked example. Find the energy stored in a $100\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor charged to $12\ \text{V}$.

    $$W = \tfrac{1}{2}CV^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2}(100 \times 10^{-6})(12)^{2} = 7.2 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}\ (= 7.2\ \text{mJ}).$$

    Worked example. The graph of charge $Q$ against p.d. $V$ for a capacitor is a straight line through the origin passing through $(10\ \text{V},\ 1.2 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{C})$. Find the capacitance and the energy stored at $10\ \text{V}$, and then the extra energy stored when the p.d. is raised to $12\ \text{V}$.

    The gradient of $Q$ against $V$ is $C = 1.2 \times 10^{-3}/10 = 1.2 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{F} = 120\ \mu\text{F}$. Energy is the area under the line: $\tfrac{1}{2}QV = \tfrac{1}{2}(1.2 \times 10^{-3})(10) = 6.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}$. At $12\ \text{V}$: $\tfrac{1}{2}CV^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2}(1.2 \times 10^{-4})(12)^{2} = 8.6 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}$, so the extra energy is $2.6 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}$. Do not find the extra energy from the extra charge as $\tfrac{1}{2}(\Delta Q)V$: energy is not proportional to charge, so subtract the two areas.

    Reading the $Q$$V$ graph

    A plot of $V$ against $Q$ is a straight line through the origin with gradient $1/C$. The energy stored is the area under the line up to a given charge $Q$, which is the triangle $\tfrac{1}{2} Q V$. The factor $\tfrac{1}{2}$ is there because the average p.d. during charging is $V/2$ (it grows from zero to $V$), not $V$.

    A graph of potential difference against charge: a straight line through the origin, with the triangle beneath it up to charge Q0 shaded as the stored energy half Q0 V0
    The energy stored is the area under the potential–charge line (the triangle $\tfrac{1}{2}QV$)

    Why charging is "half efficient"

    Connect a capacitor $C$ to an ideal battery of e.m.f. $V$ through a wire. The capacitor stores $\tfrac{1}{2} C V^{2}$, but the battery supplies charge $Q = CV$ at e.m.f. $V$, giving out $QV = CV^{2}$. The other half is lost as heat in the wire — whatever the wire's resistance.

    Sharing charge between capacitors

    Charge sharing: a capacitor C charged to V is connected across an uncharged capacitor 3C; afterwards both have the same p.d. V over 4, the charge Q is shared 1 to 3, and three quarters of the stored energy has gone
    Connecting a charged capacitor to an uncharged one: charge is conserved, the p.d. equalises, and energy is lost

    A fully charged capacitor X (capacitance $C$, p.d. $V$, charge $Q = CV$) is disconnected from its supply and connected across an uncharged capacitor Y of capacitance $3C$. Charge flows until the two p.d.s are equal. Two principles settle everything:

    1. Charge is conserved. The total charge is still $Q$, now spread over a parallel pair of total capacitance $4C$, so the common p.d. is $V' = Q/(4C) = V/4$. X keeps $Q/4$ and Y takes $3Q/4$ (charge in the ratio of the capacitances, since the p.d. is the same).
    2. Energy is not conserved. Before: $\tfrac{1}{2} C V^{2}$. After: $\tfrac{1}{2}(4C)(V/4)^{2} = \tfrac{1}{8} C V^{2}$. Three-quarters of the energy has gone: it is dissipated 耗散 as heat in the connecting wires (and as a spark or electromagnetic radiation) while the charge moves, however small the resistance.

    Worked example. A $220\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor charged to $9.0\ \text{V}$ is connected across an uncharged $440\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor. Find the final p.d. and the energy lost.

    $Q = CV = (220 \times 10^{-6})(9.0) = 1.98 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{C}$; total capacitance $660\ \mu\text{F}$, so $V' = 1.98 \times 10^{-3}/(660 \times 10^{-6}) = 3.0\ \text{V}$. Energy before: $\tfrac{1}{2}(220 \times 10^{-6})(9.0)^{2} = 8.9 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}$; after: $\tfrac{1}{2}(660 \times 10^{-6})(3.0)^{2} = 3.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}$; lost: $5.9 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}$, two-thirds of the original. A capacitor connected to another of capacitance $kC$ always loses the fraction $k/(k+1)$.

    Explore

    Energy in a capacitor

    E = ½C·V²

    Stored energy grows with the square of the voltage.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    dissipated 耗散 hào sàn
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    19.3

    Capacitor discharging through a resistor

    Syllabus
    1. analyse graphs of the variation with time of potential difference, charge and current for a capacitor discharging through a resistor
    2. recall and use $\tau = RC$ for the time constant for a capacitor discharging through a resistor
    3. use equations of the form $x = x_0 e^{-(t/RC)}$ where $x$ could represent current, charge or potential difference for a capacitor discharging through a resistor

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A capacitor $C$ charged to $V_{0}$ is connected through a switch to a resistor 电阻器 of resistance 电阻 $R$. When the switch closes at $t = 0$, the capacitor discharges.

    A circuit with a supply of e.m.f. V0, a two-way switch with positions A and B, a capacitor in the middle branch and a resistor in series with an ammeter; position A charges the capacitor and position B discharges it through the resistor
    A capacitor charges through switch A, then discharges through the resistor via switch B

    Setting up the equation

    By Kirchhoff's second law 基尔霍夫第二定律 around the loop, $V_{C} = V_{R}$. Using $V_{C} = Q/C$, $V_{R} = IR$ and $I = -dQ/dt$:

    $$\frac{Q}{C} = -R \frac{dQ}{dt}.$$

    This is solved by an exponential decay 指数衰减 with time constant $RC$.

    Discharge equations

    Charge $Q$, p.d. $V$ and current $I$ all decay exponentially with the same time constant:

    $$Q = Q_{0} e^{-t / (RC)}, \qquad V = V_{0} e^{-t / (RC)}, \qquad I = I_{0} e^{-t / (RC)},$$

    with $I_{0} = V_{0}/R$.

    A graph of current against time during discharge: an exponential decay from the initial current I0 = V0/R, with the area under the curve shaded to show that it equals the charge Q0 that flows, and the time constant RC marked where the current has fallen to 0.37 of its initial value
    The discharge current starts at $V_0/R$ and decays with the same time constant; the area under the curve is the charge that has flowed

    Reading the three graphs. All three curves have the same shape and the same time constant, so one measurement of $\tau$ from any of them gives $RC$. The current is largest the instant the switch closes, $I_{0} = V_{0}/R$, because the full p.d. $V_{0}$ is then across the resistor; it falls as the p.d. falls. The area under the $I$$t$ graph is the charge that has flowed, so the total area is $Q_{0} = CV_{0}$, and the charge that flows in the first time constant is $Q_{0}(1 - e^{-1}) = 0.63\,Q_{0}$. The gradient of the $Q$$t$ graph is $-I$: steepest at the start, flattening as the current dies away. (During charging through a resistor the current has the same decaying shape, while $V$ and $Q$ rise as $V_{0}(1 - e^{-t/RC})$, the mirror image of the discharge curve.)

    A graph of charge against time during discharge: an exponential decay curve starting at Q0 and falling to Q0/e at time equal to RC
    Charge decays exponentially during discharge, falling to $Q_0/e$ after one time constant $RC$

    Time constant

    $$\tau = RC$$

    is the time constant 时间常数 (in seconds: $\Omega \cdot \text{F} = \text{s}$). It is the time for a decaying quantity to fall to $1/e \approx 0.37$ (about 37%) of its starting value. After $2\tau$ it is at about 13.5%; after $5\tau$, below 1%.

    Worked example. A $100\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor charged to $12\ \text{V}$ is discharged through a $47\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor. Find the time constant and the voltage after one time constant.

    $$\tau = RC = (47 \times 10^{3})(100 \times 10^{-6}) = 4.7\ \text{s}.$$

    After one time constant the voltage falls to $1/e$ of its start: $V = 12 \times 0.37 \approx 4.4\ \text{V}$.

    Worked example. A $470\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor is charged to $24\ \text{V}$ and then discharged through a $5.6\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor. Find (a) the initial charge and energy, (b) the time constant and the initial current, (c) the p.d. after $4.0\ \text{s}$, (d) the time for the p.d. to fall to $6.0\ \text{V}$.

    (a) $Q_{0} = CV_{0} = (470 \times 10^{-6})(24) = 1.1 \times 10^{-2}\ \text{C}$; $W = \tfrac{1}{2}CV_{0}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2}(470 \times 10^{-6})(24)^{2} = 0.135\ \text{J}$. (b) $\tau = RC = (5.6 \times 10^{3})(470 \times 10^{-6}) = 2.6\ \text{s}$; $I_{0} = V_{0}/R = 24/5600 = 4.3\ \text{mA}$. (c) $V = V_{0} e^{-t/RC} = 24\, e^{-4.0/2.63} = 24 \times 0.219 = 5.3\ \text{V}$. (d) Rearrange with logarithms: $t = -RC \ln(V/V_{0}) = -2.63 \ln(6.0/24) = 2.63 \times 1.386 = 3.6\ \text{s}$.

    Keep the time constant unrounded ($2.632\ \text{s}$) inside the calculation and round only the answers. The rearrangement in (d) is the one most often asked and most often botched: $\ln(V/V_{0})$ is negative, so $t$ comes out positive.

    Worked example. From a discharge graph, the p.d. across a $2200\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor falls from $6.0\ \text{V}$ to $2.2\ \text{V}$ in $4.5\ \text{s}$. Find the resistance of the resistor.

    $2.2/6.0 = 0.367 \approx 1/e$, so $4.5\ \text{s}$ is one time constant: $R = \tau/C = 4.5/(2200 \times 10^{-6}) = 2.0 \times 10^{3}\ \Omega$. If the fall is not to $1/e$, use $RC = -t/\ln(V/V_{0})$; the answer is the same either way.

    To find $\tau$ from a curve: read the time to fall to $1/e$ of the start. Or take logs: $\ln(V/V_{0}) = -t/(RC)$, so a plot of $\ln V$ against $t$ is a straight line with gradient $-1/(RC)$.

    A graph of natural-log of voltage against time during discharge: the data lie on a straight line of gradient minus one over RC, used to find the time constant
    A graph of $\ln V$ against time is a straight line of gradient $-1/(RC)$

    Using the logarithmic graph. In an experiment, plot $\ln V$ (or $\ln I$) on the $y$-axis against $t$. The points should lie on a straight line: its gradient is $-1/(RC)$, so $RC = -1/\text{gradient}$, and its intercept 截距 on the $\ln V$ axis is $\ln V_{0}$. A straight line is the test that the decay really is exponential; a curve means it is not. Take the gradient from two points far apart on the best-fit line, not from two data points, and quote $RC$ in seconds.

    Reading graphs during discharge

    • $Q$ against $V_{C}$: since $Q = C V$ always, this is a straight line through the origin with gradient $C$. Discharge moves the point from $(V_{0}, Q_{0})$ down to $(0,0)$.
    • $I$ against $V_{C}$: since $I = V_{C}/R$, this is a straight line through the origin with gradient $1/R$, so you can find $R$.

    Common exam questions

    Given a discharge curve $V(t)$ or $Q(t)$:

    • read the start value $V_{0}$ or $Q_{0}$ at $t = 0$.
    • read the time to fall to $V_{0}/e$ → time constant $\tau = RC$.
    • given $R$, find $C = \tau / R$ (or the other way round).
    • predict a later value with the exponential formula.

    A capacitor as a smoothing component

    A rectified alternating voltage shown as a row of positive half-sine humps, with a smoothing capacitor's output drawn over it: the output follows each hump up to its peak, then decays slowly as the capacitor discharges through the load until the next hump catches it again; the small up-and-down of the output is labelled ripple
    A capacitor across the load of a rectifier charges at each peak and discharges through the load in between, turning the humps into a nearly steady output with a small ripple

    A rectifier 整流器 (Topic 21) turns an alternating voltage into a series of positive humps. A capacitor connected across the load smooths them. Near each peak 峰值 the diodes conduct and the capacitor charges to the peak voltage; as the supply voltage falls away the diodes stop conducting and the capacitor discharges through the load resistor, holding the output up until the next hump rises above it and recharges the capacitor. The output therefore falls only a little between peaks; the rise and fall that remains is the ripple 纹波.

    How much it falls depends on the time constant of the discharge, $RC$, compared with the time between peaks. A larger capacitance, or a larger load resistance (a smaller load current), gives a larger $RC$, a slower decay and a smaller ripple; a heavily loaded supply (small $R$) has a larger ripple. Asked to sketch the smoothed output, draw it touching each peak, decaying slightly between them, and never falling to zero.

    Explore

    Charge / discharge curve

    The voltage rises (or decays) exponentially with time constant τ = RC.

    Explore

    Discharging a capacitor

    Q = Q₀·b

    Charge decays exponentially through the resistor.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    resistor 电阻器 diàn zǔ qì
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    Kirchhoff's second law 基尔霍夫第二定律 jī ěr huò fū dì èr dìng lǜ
    exponential decay 指数衰减 zhǐ shù shuāi jiǎn
    time constant 时间常数 shí jiān cháng shù
    intercept 截距 jié jù
    rectifier 整流器 zhěng liú qì
    peak 峰值 fēng zhí
    ripple 纹波 wén bō
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    19.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    capacitance (parallel-plate capacitor) the charge on one plate per unit potential difference between the plates
    capacitance (isolated conductor) the charge on the conductor per unit potential
    farad one coulomb per volt
    capacitors in series the same charge on each; the p.d.s add; $1/C = 1/C_{1} + 1/C_{2}$
    capacitors in parallel the same p.d. across each; the charges add; $C = C_{1} + C_{2}$
    energy stored the work done in charging the capacitor, equal to the area under the potential–charge graph; $W = \tfrac{1}{2}QV = \tfrac{1}{2}CV^{2}$
    time constant the product $RC$; the time for the charge (or p.d., or current) to fall to $1/e$ of its initial value
    19.3

    Exam tips

    • $C = Q/V$ defines capacitance; for an isolated sphere $C = 4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r$. Energy stored $W = \tfrac{1}{2}QV = \tfrac{1}{2}CV^{2} = Q^{2}/2C$: pick the form that uses what you know, and remember that energy is not proportional to charge.
    • Combine capacitors the opposite way to resistors (parallel add, series reciprocal), and reduce a network one step at a time.
    • Charge sharing: charge is conserved, energy is not. Find the common p.d. from the total charge and the total capacitance first, then the energies.
    • Discharge: $x = x_{0} e^{-t/RC}$ for $Q$, $V$ and $I$ alike; $t = -RC \ln(x/x_{0})$; $\tau = RC$ is in seconds ($\Omega \cdot \text{F} = \text{s}$) and is the time to fall to $37\%$, not to zero.
    • Graphs: the initial current is $V_{0}/R$; the area under $I$$t$ is charge; the gradient of $Q$$t$ is $-I$; $\ln V$ against $t$ is a straight line of gradient $-1/(RC)$ and intercept $\ln V_{0}$.
    • Convert $\mu\text{F}$ and $\text{k}\Omega$ before multiplying: $\text{k}\Omega \times \mu\text{F}$ gives milliseconds, not seconds.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining capacitance as "the charge stored" or "the charge on both plates". It is the charge on one plate per unit p.d. between the plates.
    • Adding capacitors in series as if they were resistors, or forgetting to invert the reciprocal sum at the end.
    • After charge sharing, using the supply voltage in $\tfrac{1}{2}CV^{2}$ instead of the new common p.d., or claiming the energy is conserved.
    • Drawing the discharge current starting from zero. It starts at its largest value, $V_{0}/R$.
    • Treating $\tau$ as the time to discharge completely; after $5\tau$ about $1\%$ remains.
    • Dropping the minus sign in $t = -RC \ln(V/V_{0})$ and reporting a negative time.
    • Finding the extra energy on raising the p.d. from the extra charge alone: subtract two areas (or two $\tfrac{1}{2}CV^{2}$ values).
    • Sketching a smoothed output that falls to zero between peaks, or saying a larger load resistance gives a larger ripple.
  • 20

    Magnetic fields

    20.1

    The magnetic field

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a magnetic field is an example of a field of force produced either by moving charges or by permanent magnets
    2. represent a magnetic field by field lines

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Iron filings around bar magnets
    Iron filings trace the field lines around bar magnets.

    A magnetic field 磁场 is a region where a moving charge (or a current 电流) feels a force. It is made by:

    • moving charges (usually a current in a wire), or
    • permanent magnets 永磁体 (where it comes from tiny atomic currents).

    "State what is meant by a magnetic field." A region in which a force acts on a moving charge, a current-carrying conductor or a magnetic material. The mark scheme wants the word force and one of those three objects; "a region around a magnet" on its own scores nothing.

    Field lines

    • field lines 场线 point from N to S outside a magnet, and S to N inside (so they form closed loops).
    • lines never cross; closer lines mean a stronger field.
    Curved magnetic field lines run from the N pole to the S pole outside a bar magnet, closer together near the poles
    The field of a bar magnet: lines run from N to S, strongest near the poles
    Hundreds of tiny iron filings sprinkled on paper around a bar magnet, lined up into curved lines that join the N and S poles
    Iron filings around a bar magnet line up along the field, showing its real shape

    Patterns to know:

    • bar magnet 条形磁铁 — curved lines from N to S outside, strongest near the poles.
    • long straight wire — circles around the wire; the direction comes from the right-hand grip rule 右手定则 (thumb along the current, fingers curl the way the field points).
    • flat circular coil — the field through the centre is at right angles to the coil; the coil acts like a small bar magnet.
    • long solenoid 螺线管 — the field inside is nearly uniform along the axis, like a stretched bar magnet; outside it falls off fast.
    Concentric circular magnetic field lines around a straight current-carrying wire, with the current going into the page
    Field around a long straight wire
    Magnetic field lines of a solenoid: uniform and parallel inside, spreading out at the ends like a bar magnet, with N and S ends marked
    Field of a solenoid

    Drawing the wire's field. "Draw four field lines" around a straight wire is marked on three things: the lines are concentric circles centred on the wire; their spacing increases with distance (the field weakens with distance from the wire); and every line carries an arrow in the direction given by the right-hand grip rule (current into the page: clockwise; current out of the page: anticlockwise). Draw them as circles, not free-hand ovals.

    A flat circular coil seen edge-on: the current comes out of the page on one side (dot) and goes into the page on the other (cross); field lines loop around each wire, all passing up through the centre of the coil in the same direction, so the coil acts like a short bar magnet
    A flat circular coil seen edge-on: the field loops around each side of the coil and passes through the centre at right angles to the coil's plane

    For a flat circular coil the loops around the two sides of the coil reinforce through the centre, so the field there is at right angles to the plane of the coil and strongest at the centre; seen from one face the coil is a north pole (the field leaves it), from the other a south pole. A long solenoid is many such coils in a row: the field inside is uniform and parallel to the axis, and the lines emerge from one end (its N end) and return outside to the other.

    An iron core 铁芯 inside a solenoid greatly increases the field, because the iron's atomic magnets line up and add to it. This is why electromagnets 电磁铁 and transformers 变压器 have iron cores.

    The syllabus calls this a ferrous 含铁的 core: iron, steel or another magnetic material. Asked why a core increases the field, say that the core becomes magnetised 被磁化 by the solenoid's field and that its own field adds to the field of the current.

    An MRI scanner: a large white ring-shaped magnet with a patient table sliding into its bore
    An MRI scanner is built around a very strong, very uniform magnetic field — a solenoid the size of a room
    Explore

    Magnetic field lab

    Move between magnetic arrangements and see how field patterns change.

    Explore

    Current field rule lab

    Connect current direction to the circular magnetic field around a wire.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    magnetic field 磁场 cí chǎng
    bar magnet 条形磁铁 tiáo xíng cí tiě
    field lines 场线 chǎng xiàn
    field line 场线 chǎng xiàn
    current 电流 diàn liú
    force
    permanent magnet 永磁体 yǒng cí tǐ
    right-hand grip rule 右手定则 yòu shǒu dìng zé
    long solenoid 螺线管 luó xiàn guǎn
    solenoid 螺线管 luó xiàn guǎn
    iron core 铁芯 tiě xīn
    electromagnet 电磁铁 diàn cí tiě
    transformer 变压器 biàn yā qì
    ferrous 含铁的 hán tiě de
    magnetised 被磁化 bèi cí huà
    Exercise sheet
    20.2

    Force on a current-carrying conductor

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a force might act on a current-carrying conductor placed in a magnetic field
    2. recall and use the equation $F = BIL \sin \theta$, with directions as interpreted by Fleming's left-hand rule
    3. define magnetic flux density as the force acting per unit current per unit length on a wire placed at right-angles to the magnetic field

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A current $I$ in a wire of length $L$ in a magnetic field of flux density $B$ feels a force

    $$F = B I L \sin\theta,$$

    where $\theta$ is the angle between the wire and the field. The force is largest when the wire is at right angles to the field ($F = BIL$) and zero when the wire is along the field.

    Worked example. A wire of length $0.20\ \text{m}$ carries a current of $3.0\ \text{A}$ at right angles to a magnetic field of flux density $0.50\ \text{T}$. Find the force on it.

    $$F = BIL = 0.50 \times 3.0 \times 0.20 = 0.30\ \text{N}.$$

    Two conditions for a force. A copper wire in a magnetic field feels a force only if (1) it carries a current, and (2) the current is not parallel to the field (some part of the wire is at right angles to $B$). A wire with no current, or one lying along the field lines, feels nothing: $\sin\theta = 0$.

    Worked example (the current balance). A horizontal wire of length $5.0\ \text{cm}$ lies at right angles to the field between the poles of a magnet standing on a top-pan balance. With no current the balance reads $102.30\ \text{g}$; with a current of $2.5\ \text{A}$ it reads $102.86\ \text{g}$. Find the flux density.

    By Newton's third law the force on the wire is matched by an equal and opposite force on the magnet, so the balance reading changes by the magnetic force: $F = \Delta m\, g = (0.56 \times 10^{-3})(9.81) = 5.5 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{N}$. Then $B = F/(IL) = 5.5 \times 10^{-3}/(2.5 \times 0.050) = 4.4 \times 10^{-2}\ \text{T}$ ($44\ \text{mT}$). The reading rose, so the force on the magnet is downwards and the force on the wire is upwards; reversing the current would make the reading fall by the same amount.

    Three end views of a rectangular coil in a horizontal field: with the coil plane parallel to the field the two vertical sides feel equal and opposite vertical forces that form a couple turning the coil; with the coil tilted the forces are unchanged but their separation is smaller; with the coil plane at right angles to the field the forces are in line and there is no turning effect
    A rectangular coil in a uniform field, seen end-on: the forces on the two sides that cross the field form a couple whose turning effect is largest when the coil's plane is parallel to the field and zero when it is perpendicular

    Worked example (forces on a coil). A rectangular coil PQRS with sides PS and QR of length $8.0\ \text{cm}$ carries a current of $1.2\ \text{A}$ in a horizontal field of $0.30\ \text{T}$, with the plane of the coil parallel to the field. Describe the forces on the coil.

    Sides PS and QR are at right angles to the field, so each feels $F = BIL = 0.30 \times 1.2 \times 0.080 = 2.9 \times 10^{-2}\ \text{N}$; the currents in them run in opposite directions, so by Fleming's rule the forces are equal and opposite, one up and one down. Sides PQ and SR are parallel to the field and feel no force. The two forces form a couple 力偶 that turns the coil about its axis; as the coil turns the forces stay the same size but their perpendicular separation shrinks, so the turning effect falls to zero when the plane of the coil is at right angles to the field. This is the principle of the electric motor and of the moving-coil meter.

    Magnetic flux density

    This equation also defines the magnetic flux density 磁通密度 $B$:

    $$B = \frac{F}{IL} \quad\text{(wire at right angles to the field).}$$

    So $B$ is the force per unit current per unit length on a wire at right angles to the field. Unit: tesla 特斯拉, $\text{T} = \text{N A}^{-1}\ \text{m}^{-1}$.

    The two-mark definitions. Magnetic flux density is the force per unit current per unit length acting on a (straight) conductor placed at right angles to the field. Both "per unit current" and "per unit length" are needed, and so is "at right angles" (or "perpendicular"): without it the definition is false, because the force also depends on the angle. The tesla is the flux density that produces a force of one newton on one metre of conductor carrying a current of one ampere at right angles to the field: $1\ \text{T} = 1\ \text{N A}^{-1}\ \text{m}^{-1}$.

    Direction — Fleming's left-hand rule

    Use the left hand (Fleming's left-hand rule 弗莱明左手定则): first finger = Field, second finger = Current, thumb = force (thrust). Hold the three at right angles.

    Three mutually perpendicular arrows from one point: thumb is force or motion, first finger is field, second finger is current
    Fleming's left-hand rule: thumb = force, first finger = field, second finger = current
    Explore

    Feel the force on the wire

    A current in a magnetic field feels a force F = BIL at right angles to both — reverse the current or flip the magnet and the force jumps the other way.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    couple 力偶 lì ǒu
    magnetic flux density 磁通密度 cí tōng mì dù
    tesla 特斯拉 tè sī lā
    Fleming's left-hand rule 弗莱明左手定则 fú lái míng zuǒ shǒu dìng zé
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    20.3

    Force on a moving charge

    Syllabus
    1. determine the direction of the force on a charge moving in a magnetic field
    2. recall and use $F = BQv \sin \theta$
    3. understand the origin of the Hall voltage and derive and use the expression $V_{\text{H}} = BI / (ntq)$, where $t = \text{thickness}$
    4. understand the use of a Hall probe to measure magnetic flux density
    5. describe the motion of a charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the direction of motion of the particle
    6. explain how electric and magnetic fields can be used in velocity selection

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A charge $Q$ moving at velocity 速度 $v$ through a field feels

    $$F = B Q v \sin\theta,$$

    with $\theta$ the angle between $v$ and $B$. Same left-hand rule (the second finger is the motion of a positive charge — reverse it for a negative charge). The force is largest when $v$ is at right angles to $B$, and zero when $v$ is along $B$.

    Two situations with no force. A charged particle in a magnetic field feels no force when it is stationary (no $v$) or when it moves parallel or antiparallel to the field ($\sin\theta = 0$). Contrast the electric field, which pushes a stationary charge just as hard: that difference is the whole point of the velocity selector below.

    Circular motion in a uniform field

    A charge moving at right angles to a uniform field 匀强场 feels a force at right angles to both $v$ and $B$. This force does no work (always at right angles to the motion), so the kinetic energy 动能 and speed stay constant — the particle moves in a circle. Set the magnetic force equal to the centripetal force 向心力:

    $$B Q v = \frac{m v^{2}}{r}, \qquad r = \frac{m v}{B Q}.$$

    Worked example. A proton (mass $1.7 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$, charge $1.6 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$) moves at $2.0 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ at right angles to a $0.50\ \text{T}$ field. Find the radius of its circular path.

    $$r = \frac{mv}{BQ} = \frac{(1.7 \times 10^{-27})(2.0 \times 10^{6})}{(0.50)(1.6 \times 10^{-19})} \approx 0.043\ \text{m}.$$

    So the radius depends on the momentum 动量 $mv$. The period is

    $$T = \frac{2\pi m}{B Q},$$

    which does not depend on the speed — a faster particle goes in a bigger circle but takes the same time per turn. If $v$ also has a part along $B$, that part is unchanged, and the path is a helix 螺旋.

    A positive charge in a uniform magnetic field into the page follows a circular path, with the magnetic force always pointing to the centre
    Circular path of a charged particle in a magnetic field

    "Explain why the path is circular." The magnetic force is always at right angles to the velocity, so it changes the direction of motion but not the speed, and its magnitude $BQv$ is constant because $B$, $Q$ and $v$ are constant. A force of constant size that stays perpendicular to the velocity is exactly a centripetal force, so the path is a circle. Give all three ideas: perpendicular, constant magnitude, speed unchanged.

    Worked example. Electrons moving at $1.7 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ enter a uniform field of flux density $4.8\ \text{mT}$ at right angles to it. Find the radius of their path. The electrons are then replaced by positrons 正电子 (same mass, charge $+e$) moving at $3.4 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ along the same initial line: describe how the path changes.

    $$r = \frac{mv}{BQ} = \frac{(9.11 \times 10^{-31})(1.7 \times 10^{7})}{(4.8 \times 10^{-3})(1.60 \times 10^{-19})} = 2.0 \times 10^{-2}\ \text{m}.$$

    The positrons are deflected the opposite way (positive charge, so Fleming's rule with the second finger along the motion gives a force in the opposite direction), and since $r \propto v$ their radius is twice as large, $4.0\ \text{cm}$. Their period is the same ($T = 2\pi m/BQ$ has no $v$ in it): they go round a bigger circle at twice the speed.

    Hall effect

    A slab of conductor carrying current $I$, in a field $B$ at right angles to the current, develops a voltage across its faces — the Hall voltage 霍尔电压 $V_{\text{H}}$ (the Hall effect 霍尔效应).

    The moving charges feel a magnetic force $BQv_{\text{d}}$ ($v_{\text{d}}$ is the drift velocity 漂移速度), so they build up on one face, making an electric field 电场 $E$ that opposes more build-up. At steady state $eE = Bev_{\text{d}}$, so $E = B v_{\text{d}}$. With $V_{\text{H}} = E w$ and $I = n e v_{\text{d}} w t$:

    $$V_{\text{H}} = \frac{B I}{n t q},$$

    where $q$ is the carrier charge. A Hall probe 霍尔探头 uses this to measure $B$: pass a known current through a thin semiconductor 半导体 slab and read $V_{\text{H}}$ (largest when the slab is at right angles to $B$).

    A current-carrying slab in a magnetic field into the page: charges build up on opposite faces, creating the Hall voltage across them
    The Hall effect

    Deriving $V_{\text{H}} = BI/(ntq)$ (the exam asks for this in full). Take a slice of width $d$, across which the Hall voltage appears, and thickness $t$ along $B$, so the current passes through a cross-section $A = dt$. (1) At steady state the electric force on a carrier balances the magnetic force: $qE = Bqv$, so $E = Bv$. (2) The Hall field is uniform across the width, so $V_{\text{H}} = Ed = Bvd$. (3) The current is $I = nAvq = n\,dt\,vq$, so $v = I/(n\,dt\,q)$. Substituting: $V_{\text{H}} = Bd \cdot I/(n\,dt\,q) = BI/(ntq)$. Two things to notice: the voltage appears across the faces perpendicular to the magnetic force, not across the ends where the current enters; and it is larger for a semiconductor, whose number density $n$ is millions of times smaller than a metal's, which is why probes use a semiconductor slice.

    Using a Hall probe. The reading is proportional to $B$ but also depends on the orientation: it is a maximum when the plane of the slice is at right angles to the field and zero when the field lies in the plane of the slice. So (1) rotate the probe until the reading is largest, and (2) calibrate 校准 it in a known field, since $V_{\text{H}} \propto B$ at fixed current.

    Worked example. A Hall probe gives a maximum reading of $24\ \text{mV}$ in a uniform field of $32\ \text{mT}$. In a second field, with the probe again turned for a maximum, the reading is $15\ \text{mV}$. Find the second flux density.

    $V_{\text{H}} \propto B$ (same probe, same current): $B = 32 \times 15/24 = 20\ \text{mT}$. If the probe had been left at some other angle the reading would be smaller and $B$ would be underestimated, which is why "rotate for a maximum" is part of the method.

    Velocity selector

    A velocity selector 速度选择器 uses crossed electric and magnetic fields to let through only one speed. With the electric force $qE$ and magnetic force $qvB$ set to oppose each other, the net force is zero only when

    $$qE = qvB \quad\Rightarrow\quad v = \frac{E}{B}.$$

    Particles at speed $E/B$ go straight through; faster or slower ones are deflected.

    Charged particles passing through crossed electric and magnetic fields; only those with v = E/B travel straight through the slit, while faster and slower ones are deflected
    Velocity selector

    Deriving and explaining the selector. The magnetic force on a positive ion moving through the crossed fields is $BQv$, at right angles to its motion; the electric field is applied so that the electric force $QE$ is in the opposite direction (the plates must be arranged so that the field points against the magnetic force). For the ion to pass straight through, $QE = BQv$, so $v = E/B$, independent of the charge and the mass. A faster ion has a larger magnetic force and bends towards the magnetic-force side; a slower one is pushed the other way by the unchanged electric force. Asked "explain how an electric field can make the particle reach Z", say which direction the electric force must have, that it must equal the magnetic force in size, and give $E = Bv$. This is velocity selection 速度选择.

    Explore

    Force on a moving charge

    F = BQv

    The magnetic force on a charge is proportional to its speed (for a fixed field and charge).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    uniform field 匀强场 yún qiáng chǎng
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    electric field 电场 diàn chǎng
    velocity selector 速度选择器 sù dù xuǎn zé qì
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    centripetal force 向心力 xiàng xīn lì
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    helix 螺旋 luó xuán
    positrons 正电子 zhèng diàn zi
    Hall effect 霍尔效应 huò ěr xiào yìng
    Hall voltage 霍尔电压 huò ěr diàn yā
    drift velocity 漂移速度 piāo yí sù dù
    Hall probe 霍尔探头 huò ěr tàn tóu
    semiconductor 半导体 bàn dǎo tǐ
    calibrate 校准 jiào zhǔn
    velocity selection 速度选择 sù dù xuǎn zé
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    20.4

    Force between parallel currents

    Syllabus
    1. sketch magnetic field patterns due to the currents in a long straight wire, a flat circular coil and a long solenoid
    2. understand that the magnetic field due to the current in a solenoid is increased by a ferrous core
    3. explain the origin of the forces between current-carrying conductors and determine the direction of the forces

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Two long parallel wires each sit in the other's magnetic field. Using Fleming's left-hand rule: parallel currents (same direction) attract; antiparallel currents (opposite directions) repel. This is the basis of the SI definition of the ampere.

    Two long parallel wires P and Q carrying currents in the same direction: the field of P at the position of Q is into the page, and by Fleming's left-hand rule the force on Q is towards P; the force on P is equally towards Q, so the wires attract
    Parallel currents attract: each wire sits in the other's field, and Fleming's left-hand rule gives a force towards the other wire

    Explaining the force (a standard three-marker). (1) The current in P produces a magnetic field around it (circles centred on P). (2) At Q this field is at right angles to the current in Q, so Q, a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field, feels a force $BIL$. (3) Fleming's left-hand rule gives its direction: towards P for currents in the same direction, away for opposite currents. By Newton's third law the force on P is equal and opposite, so both wires attract (or both repel) with the same force. Doubling the current in one wire doubles the force on both: the force on Q rises because $I_{\text{Q}}$ has doubled, the force on P because the field it sits in has doubled.

    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    20.5

    Electromagnetic induction

    Syllabus
    1. define magnetic flux as the product of the magnetic flux density and the cross-sectional area perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic flux density
    2. recall and use $\Phi = BA$
    3. understand and use the concept of magnetic flux linkage
    4. understand and explain experiments that demonstrate: • that a changing magnetic flux can induce an e.m.f. in a circuit • that the induced e.m.f. is in such a direction as to oppose the change producing it • the factors affecting the magnitude of the induced e.m.f.
    5. recall and use Faraday's and Lenz's laws of electromagnetic induction

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The transformer: turns ratio
    Electromagnetic induction

    Magnetic flux

    The magnetic flux 磁通量 $\Phi$ through a flat area $A$ at right angles to $B$ is

    $$\Phi = B A.$$

    If the area's normal is at angle $\theta$ to $B$, use $\Phi = B A \cos\theta$. Unit: weber 韦伯, $\text{Wb} = \text{T m}^{2}$. For a coil 线圈 of $N$ turns, the flux linkage 磁链 is $N\Phi = N B A$.

    The two-mark definitions. Magnetic flux is the product of the magnetic flux density and the area (of the circuit) perpendicular to the field. Flux linkage is the product of the flux and the number of turns of the coil, $N\Phi$, in weber-turns. Say "perpendicular" (or "normal to the field"): $\Phi = BA$ is only true for the component of the area at right angles to $B$.

    Worked example. A small coil of 64 turns and cross-sectional area $0.71\ \text{cm}^{2}$ is placed inside a long solenoid, on its axis, where the flux density is $2.5\ \text{mT}$. Find the flux linkage of the coil.

    The flux through the coil uses the coil's own area, not the solenoid's: $\Phi = BA = (2.5 \times 10^{-3})(0.71 \times 10^{-4}) = 1.8 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{Wb}$, so the flux linkage is $N\Phi = 64 \times 1.8 \times 10^{-7} = 1.1 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{Wb}$. When the solenoid's current changes, the e.m.f. induced in the small coil is the rate of change of this linkage.

    Faraday's and Lenz's laws

    When the flux linkage through a circuit changes, an electromotive force 电动势 (e.m.f.) is induced — this is electromagnetic induction 电磁感应.

    Faraday's law 法拉第定律: the induced e.m.f. equals the rate of change of flux linkage:

    $$|\varepsilon| = N\frac{d\Phi}{dt}.$$

    Worked example. A coil of $200$ turns and area $0.010\ \text{m}^{2}$ sits with its plane at right angles to a $0.50\ \text{T}$ field. The field falls steadily to zero in $0.20\ \text{s}$. Find the average induced e.m.f.

    The flux linkage changes from $N\Phi = NBA = 200 \times 0.50 \times 0.010 = 1.0\ \text{Wb}$ to zero, so

    $$|\varepsilon| = \frac{\Delta(N\Phi)}{\Delta t} = \frac{1.0}{0.20} = 5.0\ \text{V}.$$

    Lenz's law 楞次定律: the induced e.m.f. acts to oppose the change that makes it. This is conservation of energy 能量守恒 — if it reinforced the change, energy would come from nothing. Combined:

    $$\varepsilon = -\frac{d(N\Phi)}{dt}.$$

    What changes the flux?

    • changing $B$ (moving a magnet near a coil),
    • changing area $A$ (a rod sliding along rails),
    • changing orientation (a coil turning in a field — the a.c. generator, next topic).
    Two graphs against time: the flux density through a coil rises steadily, stays constant, then falls steeply to zero; below it the induced e.m.f. is a constant negative value while the flux rises, zero while it is constant, and a larger positive value while it falls
    The induced e.m.f. is minus the gradient of the flux-linkage graph: constant while the flux changes steadily, zero while it is constant, and larger and reversed when the flux falls faster

    Reading an e.m.f. off a flux graph. The induced e.m.f. is the gradient of the flux-linkage graph (with a minus sign for Lenz). A steadily rising flux gives a constant e.m.f.; a constant flux gives zero e.m.f. however large the flux is; a faster fall gives a larger e.m.f. of the opposite sign. "Sketch the variation with time of the e.m.f." is answered by differentiating the flux graph by eye, section by section.

    Worked example. The 64-turn coil above sits in a solenoid whose flux density rises uniformly from $0$ to $2.5\ \text{mT}$ in $40\ \text{ms}$ and is then held steady. Find the e.m.f. induced in the coil during the rise, and afterwards.

    During the rise the flux linkage grows steadily to $1.1 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{Wb}$: $\varepsilon = \Delta(N\Phi)/\Delta t = 1.1 \times 10^{-5}/0.040 = 2.8 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{V}$ ($0.28\ \text{mV}$), constant while the rise lasts. Afterwards the flux linkage is constant, so the e.m.f. is zero, even though the coil is still in a strong field: it is the change that induces.

    Worked example (flux cutting). An aircraft with a wingspan 翼展 of $60\ \text{m}$ flies horizontally at $250\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ where the vertical component of the Earth's field is $45\ \mu\text{T}$. Find the e.m.f. between the wingtips.

    In time $\Delta t$ the wing sweeps out an area $L v \Delta t$, cutting flux $B L v \Delta t$, so $\varepsilon = BLv = (45 \times 10^{-6})(60)(250) = 0.68\ \text{V}$. Only the component of $B$ perpendicular to the swept area counts (here the vertical one). There is a p.d. between the wingtips but no current, because there is no complete circuit; Fleming's rules give which tip is positive.

    Demonstrations

    • moving a bar magnet into a coil deflects a galvanometer 检流计; the deflection reverses when the magnet is pulled out (Lenz's law), and is larger for faster motion (Faraday's law).
    A bar magnet is pushed into a coil connected to a sensitive galvanometer, inducing an e.m.f. that deflects the needle
    Demonstrating electromagnetic induction
    • a copper disc swinging into a field is quickly slowed — eddy currents 涡流 are induced that oppose the motion.
    A metal plate swinging between the poles of a magnet is rapidly slowed as eddy currents are induced in it that oppose the motion
    Eddy-current damping

    Electromagnetic braking, explained with Lenz's law. A vehicle's aluminium disc rotates between the poles of an electromagnet. The disc cuts the field lines, so an e.m.f. is induced in it; the disc is a conductor, so eddy currents flow; by Lenz's law these currents produce forces that oppose the motion of the disc, slowing the vehicle. The kinetic energy is converted to thermal energy in the disc. The braking is stronger at high speed (a larger rate of flux cutting, so larger currents) and fades as the vehicle slows; it cannot hold a stationary vehicle, because no motion means no induced current.

    A magnet oscillating in a coil. A bar magnet on a spring oscillates in and out of a coil connected to a resistor. The changing flux linkage induces an e.m.f.; with the circuit complete a current flows and, by Lenz's law, the coil's field opposes the magnet's motion, so the oscillation is damped: energy leaves the oscillation as heat in the resistor and the amplitude decays. Open the switch and the e.m.f. is still induced but no current flows, so the coil no longer damps the motion.

    What makes the induced e.m.f. larger

    From $\varepsilon = N\,d\Phi/dt$ with $\Phi = BA$: more turns $N$, a stronger $B$, a larger area $A$, or a faster change — each gives a larger induced e.m.f.

    Finding the direction with Lenz's law. Push the N pole of a magnet towards a coil and the induced current makes the near face of the coil a north pole, to repel the approaching magnet; pull it away and the near face becomes a south pole, to attract it. In each case the person moving the magnet does work against that force, and that work is the source of the electrical energy: Lenz's law is conservation of energy in disguise. Two sentences to learn: the induced e.m.f. acts in such a direction as to produce effects that oppose the change producing it (Lenz), and the induced e.m.f. is proportional to the rate of change of flux linkage (Faraday).

    Explore

    Electromagnetic induction

    Move the magnet through the coil — a current is induced only while the field is changing. Faster gives more current; flip the magnet to reverse it.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    coil 线圈 xiàn quān
    magnetic flux 磁通量 cí tōng liàng
    electromagnetic induction 电磁感应 diàn cí gǎn yìng
    weber 韦伯 wéi bó
    flux linkage 磁链 cí liàn
    Lenz's law 楞次定律 léng cì dìng lǜ
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    Faraday's law 法拉第定律 fǎ lā dì dìng lǜ
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    wingspan 翼展 yì zhǎn
    galvanometer 检流计 jiǎn liú jì
    eddy currents 涡流 wō liú
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    20.5

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    magnetic field a region in which a force acts on a moving charge, a current-carrying conductor or a magnetic material
    magnetic flux density the force per unit current per unit length on a straight conductor placed at right angles to the field
    tesla the flux density producing a force of 1 N on 1 m of conductor carrying 1 A at right angles to the field
    magnetic flux the product of the flux density and the area perpendicular to the field, $\Phi = BA$
    flux linkage the product of the flux through a coil and its number of turns, $N\Phi$
    weber one tesla metre squared
    Faraday's law the induced e.m.f. is proportional to the rate of change of flux linkage
    Lenz's law the induced e.m.f. acts in such a direction as to produce effects that oppose the change producing it
    Hall voltage the p.d. that develops across a current-carrying slice in a magnetic field, $V_{\text{H}} = BI/(ntq)$
    20.5

    Exam tips

    • Force on a current $F = BIL\sin\theta$; on a moving charge $F = BQv\sin\theta$; direction from Fleming's left-hand rule with the second finger along the conventional current (reverse it for an electron).
    • A charge moving at right angles to $B$ moves in a circle: $BQv = mv^{2}/r$, so $r = mv/(BQ)$ and $T = 2\pi m/(BQ)$, independent of speed. A component of $v$ along $B$ is unchanged: a helix.
    • Crossed fields: $v = E/B$ passes undeflected. Hall probe: $V_{\text{H}} = BI/(ntq)$, largest with the slice at right angles to $B$; semiconductor because $n$ is small.
    • Induction: e.m.f. $=$ rate of change of flux linkage $N\Phi$ (Faraday); its direction opposes the change (Lenz). On a flux–time graph the e.m.f. is the gradient: constant change gives a constant e.m.f., no change gives zero.
    • Flux cutting: $\varepsilon = BLv$ for a conductor of length $L$ moving at $v$ at right angles to $B$ (area swept per second times $B$).
    • Definitions carry the words "per unit current per unit length", "at right angles", "area perpendicular to the field" and "rate of change of flux linkage": each is a mark.

    Common mistakes

    • Leaving "at right angles to the field" out of the definition of flux density, or defining the tesla without the 1 N, 1 m, 1 A.
    • Using the right hand for the force on a current (the left-hand rule), or pointing the second finger along the electron's motion instead of the conventional current.
    • Saying a stationary charge feels a magnetic force, or that a charge moving along the field lines does.
    • Explaining circular motion without saying the force is perpendicular to the velocity and constant in size; or claiming the magnetic force changes the speed.
    • Using the solenoid's area instead of the small coil's when finding its flux linkage.
    • Saying "a large flux induces an e.m.f.": only a changing flux linkage does. A coil at rest in a steady field has no e.m.f.
    • Quoting Lenz's law as "the current opposes the magnet" without "the change producing it", or Faraday's law without "rate of change" or without "flux linkage".
    • Drawing straight-wire field lines as evenly spaced circles or without arrows; drawing a solenoid's field lines crossing inside it.
    • Forgetting that doubling the current in one of two parallel wires doubles the force on both (Newton's third law).
  • 21

    Alternating currents

    21.1

    Alternating current basics

    Syllabus
    1. understand and use the terms period, frequency and peak value as applied to an alternating current or voltage
    2. use equations of the form $x = x_0 \sin \omega t$ representing a sinusoidally alternating current or voltage
    3. recall and use the fact that the mean power in a resistive load is half the maximum power for a sinusoidal alternating current
    4. distinguish between root-mean-square (r.m.s.) and peak values and recall and use $I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = I_0 / \sqrt{2}$ and $V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = V_0 / \sqrt{2}$ for a sinusoidal alternating current

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An electrical substation with transformers
    A substation's transformers step alternating voltage up or down.

    An alternating current 交流电 (a.c.) keeps reversing direction. Mains supply is sinusoidal a.c.: $I$ or $V$ follows a sine wave in time:

    $$I = I_{0} \sin (\omega t), \qquad V = V_{0} \sin (\omega t).$$

    (For a purely resistive load the voltage 电压 and current 电流 are in phase, which is the case in this syllabus.)

    Two current–time graphs: a steady horizontal line for direct current, and a sine wave of peak current I0 and period T for alternating current
    A steady direct current compared with a sinusoidal alternating current of peak $I_0$ and period $T$

    Key terms

    • period 周期 $T$ — the time for one full cycle. Unit: s.
    • frequency 频率 $f$ — cycles per second; $f = 1/T$. Mains is often $50\ \text{Hz}$ or $60\ \text{Hz}$.
    • angular frequency 角频率 $\omega = 2\pi f = 2\pi/T$.
    • peak value 峰值 $I_{0}$ or $V_{0}$ — the largest value in a cycle (also called the amplitude).
    • peak-to-peak value 峰峰值 $2 I_{0}$ — from $+I_{0}$ to $-I_{0}$. Useful when reading an oscilloscope.

    The two-mark definitions. The frequency of an alternating current is the number of complete cycles per unit time (say "per second" or "per unit time", and "complete cycles" or "oscillations"). The period is the time for one complete cycle, and the peak value is the maximum value of the current or voltage during a cycle. Note that the mean value of a sinusoidal current over a cycle is zero, which is exactly why the r.m.s. value is needed to describe it.

    Reading the equation. In $V = V_{0} \sin(\omega t)$ the number in front is the peak value and the number multiplying $t$ is $\omega = 2\pi f$; the angle $\omega t$ is in radians 弧度, so set the calculator to radians before evaluating. A supply written with $\cos$ instead of $\sin$ is the same wave starting at its peak rather than at zero.

    Worked example. The output of a supply is $V = 320 \sin(100\pi t)$ (volts, seconds). Find the peak value, the frequency, the period and the r.m.s. value, and the first time after $t = 0$ at which $V = 160\ \text{V}$.

    Peak $V_{0} = 320\ \text{V}$. $\omega = 100\pi\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$, so $f = \omega/2\pi = 50\ \text{Hz}$ and $T = 1/f = 0.020\ \text{s}$. $V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = 320/\sqrt{2} = 226\ \text{V}$. For $V = 160\ \text{V}$: $\sin(100\pi t) = 0.5$, so $100\pi t = \pi/6$ and $t = 1/600 = 1.7 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{s}$. (For $V = 18\cos(40\pi t)$ the same reading gives $V_{0} = 18\ \text{V}$, $f = 20\ \text{Hz}$, $T = 50\ \text{ms}$, and a sketch that starts at $+18\ \text{V}$.)

    Reading a CRO trace

    Same as for any wave (Topic 7), using a cathode-ray oscilloscope 示波器:

    • horizontal divisions × time-base 时基 → period $T$, so $f = 1/T$.
    • vertical divisions × $y$-gain → peak voltage $V_{0}$ (measure centre to peak, or peak-to-peak then halve).
    Explore

    Alternating current

    I = a sin(bt)

    AC is a sine wave — amplitude is the peak, b sets the frequency.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    alternating current 交流电 jiāo liú diàn
    current 电流 diàn liú
    voltage 电压 diàn yā
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    angular frequency 角频率 jiǎo pín lǜ
    peak value 峰值 fēng zhí
    peak-to-peak value 峰峰值 fēng fēng zhí
    radians 弧度 hú dù
    cathode-ray oscilloscope 示波器 shì bō qì
    time-base 时基 shí jī
    Exercise sheet
    21.1

    Power delivered to a resistor

    For a resistive load $R$, the instant power 功率 is $P(t) = I(t)^{2} R$. With $I = I_{0}\sin(\omega t)$:

    The power in a resistor pulses; its average is half the peak power
    The power in a resistor pulses; its average is half the peak
    $$P(t) = I_{0}^{2} R \sin^{2}(\omega t).$$

    This is always positive, with peak $I_{0}^{2} R$ and minimum zero, oscillating at twice the frequency of $I$. The mean of $\sin^{2}(\omega t)$ over a cycle is $\tfrac{1}{2}$, so the average power is

    $$\langle P \rangle = \tfrac{1}{2} I_{0}^{2} R = \tfrac{1}{2} P_{\text{peak}}.$$

    Average a.c. power in a resistor is half the peak power.

    "Show by calculation that the mean power is half the peak power." A supply of peak value $12\ \text{V}$ drives a $680\ \Omega$ resistor. Peak power: $P_{0} = V_{0}^{2}/R = 12^{2}/680 = 0.212\ \text{W}$, the instantaneous power at the moment the voltage is at its peak. Mean power: use the r.m.s. value, $V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = 12/\sqrt{2} = 8.49\ \text{V}$, so $\langle P \rangle = V_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2}/R = 8.49^{2}/680 = 0.106\ \text{W}$, exactly half. The two calculations must be shown separately; writing "$\tfrac{1}{2}$ of $0.212$" scores nothing, because that is the thing being shown. The $\tfrac{1}{2}$ is $(1/\sqrt{2})^{2}$: squaring the r.m.s. factor.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    21.1

    Root-mean-square (r.m.s.) values

    The r.m.s. current $I_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ is the steady direct current that would give the same average power in the same resistance 电阻 $R$. From $\langle P \rangle = I_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2} R = \tfrac{1}{2} I_{0}^{2} R$:

    $$I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \frac{I_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}, \qquad V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \frac{V_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}.$$
    An a.c. sine voltage of peak V0, with a dashed horizontal line at V0 divided by root 2 marking the r.m.s. value — the steady d.c. level that gives the same average power
    The r.m.s. value is the steady d.c. level ($V_0/\sqrt{2}$) that delivers the same average power as the a.c.

    Worked example. An a.c. supply has a peak voltage of $12\ \text{V}$. Find its r.m.s. voltage.

    $$V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \frac{V_{0}}{\sqrt{2}} = \frac{12}{\sqrt{2}} \approx 8.5\ \text{V}.$$

    The $\sqrt{2}$ comes from the name root-mean-square 均方根: $I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{\langle I^{2} \rangle}$ and $\langle \sin^{2}\rangle = \tfrac{1}{2}$. (Only the sinusoidal case is needed.)

    The two-mark definition. The r.m.s. value of an alternating current is the value of the direct (steady) current that would dissipate the same (mean) power in the same resistor. "By reference to the heating effect" means exactly this sentence: same resistor, same power (or same heating), direct current. A definition that only says "$I_{0}/\sqrt{2}$" scores nothing, because that formula is true only for a sine wave.

    Two graphs: a square-wave current that is plus 2 amps for half a cycle and minus 1 amp for the other half, and its square, 4 and 1, with the mean square of 2.5 marked; the root of the mean square is 1.6 amps
    Root-mean-square, taken literally: square the current, average the squares over a cycle, take the square root. For a non-sinusoidal current this is the only way; $I_0/\sqrt{2}$ applies to a sine wave alone

    Worked example (non-sinusoidal). A current through a resistor is $+2.0\ \text{A}$ for the first half of each cycle and $-1.0\ \text{A}$ for the second half, a square wave 方波. Find its r.m.s. value and the mean power in a $10\ \Omega$ resistor.

    Square the current: $4.0\ \text{A}^{2}$ for half the time and $1.0\ \text{A}^{2}$ for the other half, so the mean square is $(4.0 + 1.0)/2 = 2.5\ \text{A}^{2}$ and $I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{2.5} = 1.6\ \text{A}$. Mean power $= I_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2} R = 2.5 \times 10 = 25\ \text{W}$. The sign of the current does not matter to the heating (it is squared away), and $I_{0}/\sqrt{2}$ would have given the wrong answer, $1.4\ \text{A}$: that shortcut is for sine waves only.

    Why r.m.s. matters

    Quoted a.c. values are r.m.s. values. "$230\ \text{V}$ mains" means $V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = 230\ \text{V}$, with peak $V_{0} = 230\sqrt{2} \approx 325\ \text{V}$. Components must be rated for the peak, not the r.m.s. Average power then takes the d.c. form:

    $$\langle P \rangle = I_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2} R = V_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2} / R = V_{\text{r.m.s.}} I_{\text{r.m.s.}}.$$

    Worked example. A heater of resistance $50\ \Omega$ is connected to the $230\ \text{V}$ r.m.s. mains. Find the r.m.s. current and the average power dissipated.

    $$I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \frac{V_{\text{r.m.s.}}}{R} = \frac{230}{50} = 4.6\ \text{A}, \qquad \langle P \rangle = V_{\text{r.m.s.}} I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = 230 \times 4.6 \approx 1.1 \times 10^{3}\ \text{W}.$$

    Worked example. A sinusoidal supply of r.m.s. value $4.2\ \text{V}$ and frequency $50\ \text{kHz}$ is connected across a $150\ \Omega$ resistor. Find the peak current, the mean power, and write down an equation for the current.

    $V_{0} = 4.2\sqrt{2} = 5.9\ \text{V}$, so $I_{0} = V_{0}/R = 5.9/150 = 0.040\ \text{A}$ (or $I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = 4.2/150 = 0.028\ \text{A}$ and then $\times\sqrt{2}$). Mean power $= V_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2}/R = 4.2^{2}/150 = 0.12\ \text{W}$. With $\omega = 2\pi f = 2\pi \times 5.0 \times 10^{4} = 3.1 \times 10^{5}\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$: $I = 0.040 \sin(3.1 \times 10^{5} t)$ (amps, seconds). Keep the two families apart: peak values go into the equation and into component ratings; r.m.s. values go into power.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    root-mean-square 均方根 jūn fāng gēn
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    square wave 方波 fāng bō
    21.2

    Rectification

    Syllabus
    1. distinguish graphically between half-wave and full-wave rectification
    2. explain the use of a single diode for the half-wave rectification of an alternating current
    3. explain the use of four diodes (bridge rectifier) for the full-wave rectification of an alternating current
    4. analyse the effect of a single capacitor in smoothing, including the effect of the values of capacitance and the load resistance

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Waveforms on an oscilloscope screen
    An oscilloscope shows how a voltage varies with time.

    Rectification 整流 turns an alternating voltage into a one-direction (d.c.-like) voltage, using diodes 二极管 (which conduct in only one direction).

    "State what is meant by rectification." The conversion of an alternating current (or voltage) into a direct current (or voltage): one that flows in one direction only, however much it varies. A diode conducts only when it is forward-biased 正向偏置, that is, when its anode (the flat end of the symbol's triangle) is more positive than its cathode (the bar); otherwise it is reverse-biased and behaves like an open switch. Treat it as ideal: zero resistance one way, infinite the other.

    Half-wave rectification

    A single diode in series with the load passes only the positive half of each cycle; in the negative half the diode is reverse-biased 反向偏置 and no current flows. This is half-wave rectification 半波整流.

    Output: positive half-waves with flat zero gaps. The mean output is $V_{0}/\pi \approx 0.32 V_{0}$. Drawback: half the input is wasted and the output is very uneven.

    Two voltage–time graphs: the input is a full sine wave; the output keeps only the positive half-cycles with flat gaps where the negative halves are blocked
    In half-wave rectification a single diode passes only the positive half-cycles
    A half-wave rectifier circuit: an a.c. source, a diode in series, and the load resistor across which the output is taken, with a smoothing capacitor drawn in parallel with the load
    The half-wave rectifier the exam asks you to draw: source, diode, load in series, output across the load; a smoothing capacitor, if wanted, goes in parallel with the load, never in series

    Completing the circuit. "Complete the diagram to produce half-wave rectification" needs one diode in series between the supply and the load, with the triangle pointing the way the output current must flow, and $V_{\text{OUT}}$ taken across the load. If a capacitor is to smooth the output it goes across the load (in parallel); a capacitor in series would block the d.c. altogether.

    Full-wave rectification (bridge rectifier)

    A bridge rectifier 桥式整流器 uses four diodes arranged so the current through the load always flows the same way, whichever a.c. terminal is positive — full-wave rectification 全波整流. On each half-cycle a different pair of diodes conducts, but the load always sees the same direction.

    Four diodes arranged in a diamond between the a.c. input terminals P and Q and the load R; diodes 1 and 2 conduct on one half-cycle, 3 and 4 on the other, so the d.c. output keeps the same polarity
    A four-diode bridge sends the load current the same way whichever a.c. terminal is positive

    Explaining the bridge (the standard four-marker). When terminal P is positive, current leaves P, passes through the diode pointing away from P to the top of the load, flows down through the load and returns to Q through the diode pointing towards Q; the other two diodes are reverse-biased and carry nothing. When Q is positive the other pair conducts, but they are arranged so that the current still enters the load at the top: the load current is in the same direction in both half-cycles. Name the diodes in each half-cycle and say which end of the load is positive.

    Completing a bridge. Given a bridge with diodes missing, remember the rule for every diode: conventional current flows through it in the direction of the triangle. Both diodes joined to the positive output terminal must point towards it; both joined to the negative output terminal must point away from it. A bridge with a diode the wrong way round either short-circuits the supply on one half-cycle or passes nothing.

    Output: a continuous run of positive half-waves (no gaps), at twice the input frequency. The mean output is $2V_{0}/\pi \approx 0.64 V_{0}$ — double the half-wave value. It uses all the input and is smoother and easier to filter.

    Two voltage–time graphs: the input is a full sine wave; the output is a continuous run of positive humps with no gaps, at twice the input frequency
    In full-wave rectification every half-cycle is used, giving a continuous run of positive humps

    Drawing the diagrams

    • half-wave: a.c. source — single diode — load $R$, in series.
    • full-wave bridge: four diodes as the arms of a "diamond"; the a.c. input goes to one pair of opposite corners, the load $R$ across the other pair. The diode directions make the load terminals keep the same polarity for either input polarity.

    "State the difference between half-wave and full-wave rectification." In half-wave rectification only one half of each input cycle appears at the output and the other half is blocked (the output is zero for half the time); in full-wave rectification both halves appear, one of them inverted, so there are no gaps and the output has twice the input frequency. A sketch should show, for half-wave, positive humps separated by flat zero sections of equal length; for full-wave, positive humps joined at the zero line.

    Explore

    Rectifier and smoothing route

    Watch alternating input become a smoother direct output.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    rectification 整流 zhěng liú
    diodes 二极管 èr jí guǎn
    diode 二极管 èr jí guǎn
    forward-biased 正向偏置 zhèng xiàng piān zhì
    reverse-biased 反向偏置 fǎn xiàng piān zhì
    half-wave rectification 半波整流 bàn bō zhěng liú
    full-wave rectification 全波整流 quán bō zhěng liú
    bridge rectifier 桥式整流器 qiáo shì zhěng liú qì
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    21.2

    Smoothing with a capacitor

    A rectifier's output is still bumpy. To smooth it, put a capacitor 电容器 $C$ in parallel with the load $R$.

    How it works

    • on the rising part of each pulse, the capacitor charges up to near the peak.
    • on the falling part (and any gap), the diodes are reverse-biased, so the capacitor discharges through the load, keeping current flowing. The voltage falls with time constant 时间常数 $RC$ (Topic 19).
    • at the next peak, the capacitor charges again, and the cycle repeats.

    The output now sits near the peak with small dips. The size of the dips is the ripple 纹波 (this whole step is called smoothing 平滑).

    A voltage–time graph showing the smoothed output (solid line) staying near the peaks with a small ripple, above the unsmoothed full-wave humps (dashed)
    A capacitor across the load smooths the rectified output, leaving only a small ripple
    Full-wave rectified output with three smoothing curves on the same axes: the original RC, a larger capacitance giving a smaller ripple, and a smaller load resistance giving a larger ripple, above the grey unsmoothed humps
    The same rectified supply smoothed with different time constants: a larger $RC$ (more capacitance, or a larger load resistance) decays less between peaks, so the ripple is smaller

    Worked example. A half-wave rectifier fed from a $50\ \text{Hz}$ supply has a $470\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor across its $1.2\ \text{k}\Omega$ load 负载. Estimate the fractional fall in the output between peaks, and say how it changes with a bridge rectifier.

    The peaks are $T = 1/50 = 20\ \text{ms}$ apart (half-wave: one peak per cycle). The time constant is $RC = (1.2 \times 10^{3})(470 \times 10^{-6}) = 0.56\ \text{s}$. Between peaks the capacitor discharges to $V_{0} e^{-t/RC} = V_{0} e^{-0.020/0.56} = 0.965\,V_{0}$, a fall of about $3.5\%$. With full-wave rectification the peaks are $10\ \text{ms}$ apart, so the fall is only $1.8\%$; doubling the capacitance would halve it again. Because $t \ll RC$ the fall is approximately $V_{0}\, t/(RC)$: the ripple is proportional to the time between peaks and inversely proportional to both $R$ and $C$. (A network of capacitors across the output combines by the rules of Topic 19 before it is used here.)

    What reduces the ripple

    • larger $C$ → more stored charge → smaller dip between peaks → smaller ripple.
    • larger $R$ → smaller load current → slower discharge → smaller ripple.
    • higher rectified frequency (full-wave is twice the input) → less time to discharge between peaks → smaller ripple.

    In short, a large $RC$ compared with the time between peaks gives a smoother output.

    Sketching the smoothed output. Draw the unsmoothed humps faintly first. The smoothed curve touches each peak, then falls along a gentle curve (steepest just after the peak) until the next hump rises to meet it, where it turns sharply upwards and follows the hump to the peak. It never falls to zero, and it never rises above the peak. For half-wave rectification the decay has to last through the missing half-cycle as well, so the ripple is about twice that of full-wave for the same $RC$. If the question changes $C$ or $R$, redraw on the same axes: a larger $RC$ hugs the peak line more closely; a smaller $RC$ sags further.

    Purpose in summary

    The smoothing capacitor reduces the ripple, giving a steadier d.c. voltage suitable for sensitive electronics.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    load 负载 fù zài
    smoothing 平滑 píng huá
    capacitor 电容器 diàn róng qì
    time constant 时间常数 shí jiān cháng shù
    ripple 纹波 wén bō
    21.2

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    alternating current a current that reverses its direction periodically (varies sinusoidally with time about zero)
    period the time for one complete cycle
    frequency the number of complete cycles per unit time
    peak value the maximum value of the current or voltage in a cycle
    r.m.s. value the value of the direct (steady) current that would dissipate the same power in the same resistor
    rectification the conversion of an alternating current into a direct (one-direction) current
    half-wave rectification only one half of each cycle is passed to the output; the other half is blocked
    full-wave rectification both halves of each cycle appear at the output in the same direction
    smoothing using a capacitor across the load to reduce the variation (ripple) of a rectified output
    21.2

    Exam tips

    • $V = V_{0} \sin\omega t$ with $\omega = 2\pi f$ in radians per second: read $V_{0}$ and $\omega$ straight off the equation; radian mode for any time calculation.
    • $I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = I_{0}/\sqrt{2}$ and $V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = V_{0}/\sqrt{2}$ for a sine wave only; otherwise square, average, root. Quoted mains values are r.m.s.; components are rated for the peak.
    • Mean power in a resistor is $I_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2}R = V_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2}/R = \tfrac{1}{2} I_{0}^{2} R$, half the peak power; the mean current is zero, the mean power is not.
    • One diode in series gives half-wave rectification; a four-diode bridge gives full-wave, with the load current always in the same direction and the output at twice the input frequency.
    • Smoothing: capacitor across the load; ripple falls with a larger $C$, a larger $R$ (smaller load current) and a higher rectified frequency, because the decay between peaks is $V_{0}e^{-t/RC}$.
    • Sketches are marked on shape: humps that touch the peak line, a decay that never reaches zero, flat zero gaps for half-wave, none for full-wave.

    Common mistakes

    • Using the peak value in a power calculation, or the r.m.s. value as the amplitude in $V = V_{0}\sin\omega t$.
    • Writing $\omega = f$ or $\omega = 2\pi/f$; it is $2\pi f = 2\pi/T$.
    • Defining the r.m.s. value as "the peak divided by $\sqrt{2}$", or leaving out "same power" and "same resistor".
    • Applying $I_{0}/\sqrt{2}$ to a square or triangular wave.
    • Drawing a diode backwards, or a bridge in which two diodes joined to the same output terminal point opposite ways.
    • Putting the smoothing capacitor in series with the load.
    • A smoothed output sketched falling to zero between peaks, or rising above the peak.
    • Saying a larger load resistance gives a larger ripple; a larger $R$ means a smaller current, a slower discharge and a smaller ripple.
    • Stating that full-wave rectification gives a steady d.c.; without a capacitor it is a series of humps with a large ripple.
  • 22

    Quantum physics

    22.1

    Photons: the particle nature of light

    Syllabus
    1. understand that electromagnetic radiation has a particulate nature
    2. understand that a photon is a quantum of electromagnetic energy
    3. recall and use $E = hf$
    4. use the electronvolt (eV) as a unit of energy
    5. understand that a photon has momentum and that the momentum is given by $p = E/c$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Electromagnetic radiation behaves like particles as well as like a wave. The particles of EM radiation are photons 光子 — small packets ("quanta" 量子) of EM energy that travel at the speed of light.

    "State what is meant by a photon" (two marks). A photon is a quantum (a discrete packet) of energy of electromagnetic radiation. Both halves score: quantum or packet (or "discrete amount"), and of electromagnetic radiation (or "of light"). "A particle of light" alone is not enough. That radiation comes in such packets is what the syllabus calls its particulate nature 粒子性: energy is delivered in lumps of $hf$, never in smaller pieces.

    A photon is a packet of EM energy, with energy E = h f
    A photon is a packet of energy, E = hf

    Energy of a photon

    A photon of frequency 频率 $f$ has energy

    $$E = h f,$$

    where $h = 6.63 \times 10^{-34}\ \text{J s}$ is the Planck constant 普朗克常量. Using $c = f\lambda$:

    $$E = \frac{h c}{\lambda}.$$

    Worked example. Find the energy of a photon of green light of wavelength $500\ \text{nm}$. ($h = 6.63 \times 10^{-34}\ \text{J s}$, $c = 3.0 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.)

    $$E = \frac{hc}{\lambda} = \frac{(6.63 \times 10^{-34})(3.0 \times 10^{8})}{500 \times 10^{-9}} \approx 4.0 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}\ (\approx 2.5\ \text{eV}).$$

    Higher-frequency (shorter-wavelength 波长) photons carry more energy: one $\gamma$-ray photon carries far more than one radio photon.

    The electronvolt

    The electronvolt 电子伏特 (eV) is a handy energy unit on the atomic scale:

    $$1\ \text{eV} = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}.$$

    It is the kinetic energy 动能 an electron 电子 gains moving through a potential difference 电势差 of 1 V. For example, a visible photon ($\lambda \approx 500\ \text{nm}$) has energy $\approx 2.5\ \text{eV}$. To go eV → J multiply by $1.60 \times 10^{-19}$; J → eV divide.

    Using the electronvolt. Photon energies, work functions and energy levels are all a few eV, so the exam quotes them that way and expects you to move between units without fuss: a $2.0\ \text{eV}$ work function is $2.0 \times 1.60 \times 10^{-19} = 3.2 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}$; a photon of $4.0 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}$ is $2.5\ \text{eV}$. A useful shortcut for wavelengths: $hc = 1.99 \times 10^{-25}\ \text{J m} = 1240\ \text{eV nm}$, so a $2.0\ \text{eV}$ photon has $\lambda = 1240/2.0 = 620\ \text{nm}$ (red) and a $400\ \text{nm}$ photon carries $3.1\ \text{eV}$.

    Momentum of a photon

    A photon also carries momentum 动量:

    $$p = \frac{E}{c} = \frac{h}{\lambda}.$$

    It has zero rest mass but a non-zero momentum $E/c$. Radiation pressure (photons pushing on a surface) follows from this.

    "Show that $p = h/\lambda$." Start from the two photon relations: $E = hf$ and $p = E/c$. Then $p = hf/c$, and since $c = f\lambda$, $f/c = 1/\lambda$, so $p = h/\lambda$. Give both starting equations and the wave equation; the mark is for the chain, not the result.

    Worked example. A photon in free space has momentum $9.5 \times 10^{-28}\ \text{N s}$. Show that it is a photon of red light.

    $\lambda = h/p = 6.63 \times 10^{-34}/9.5 \times 10^{-28} = 7.0 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m} = 700\ \text{nm}$, which lies at the red end of the visible spectrum ($400$$700\ \text{nm}$). The energy is $pc = 2.9 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J} = 1.8\ \text{eV}$.

    Two panels: photons striking a mirror leave with their momentum reversed, so each transfers twice its momentum and the pressure is 2I over c; photons striking a black surface are absorbed and transfer their momentum once, so the pressure is I over c
    Radiation pressure: force equals the number of photons arriving per second times the change in momentum of each; a mirror doubles the change, an absorber does not

    Radiation pressure 辐射压. A beam of intensity $I$ (power per unit area) falling on area $A$ delivers $IA/(hf)$ photons per second, each with momentum $h/\lambda$. Force is the rate of change of momentum. On a mirror each photon bounces back, so its momentum changes by $2p$ and the force is $F = 2IA/c$ (pressure $2I/c$); on a black surface each photon is absorbed, the change is $p$, and the pressure is $I/c$. Two things follow, and both are examined: the pressure depends on the intensity, not on the colour, because blue light of the same intensity has fewer photons per second but each carries proportionally more momentum; and even sunlight ($I \approx 1\ \text{kW m}^{-2}$) exerts only a few micropascals.

    Worked example. Red light of intensity $160\ \text{W m}^{-2}$ falls normally on a plane mirror; each photon has momentum $9.5 \times 10^{-28}\ \text{N s}$. Find the number of photons hitting $1.0\ \text{m}^{2}$ of the mirror per second, and the pressure on it.

    Photon energy $E = pc = (9.5 \times 10^{-28})(3.00 \times 10^{8}) = 2.85 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}$. Photons per second on $1.0\ \text{m}^{2}$: $160/2.85 \times 10^{-19} = 5.6 \times 10^{20}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. Each is reflected, so the force is $F = 5.6 \times 10^{20} \times 2 \times 9.5 \times 10^{-28} = 1.1 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{N}$ on $1.0\ \text{m}^{2}$: a pressure of $1.1 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{Pa}$ (check: $2I/c = 320/3.00 \times 10^{8} = 1.1 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{Pa}$). Replace the beam with blue light of the same intensity and the pressure is unchanged.

    Worked example. A laser emits $2.0\ \text{mW}$ of light of wavelength $650\ \text{nm}$. Find the number of photons it emits per second, and the force on a surface that absorbs the beam completely.

    $E = hc/\lambda = (6.63 \times 10^{-34})(3.00 \times 10^{8})/(650 \times 10^{-9}) = 3.06 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}$, so the rate is $P/E = 2.0 \times 10^{-3}/3.06 \times 10^{-19} = 6.5 \times 10^{15}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. The force is the momentum delivered per second: $F = P/c = 2.0 \times 10^{-3}/3.00 \times 10^{8} = 6.7 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{N}$ (or $6.5 \times 10^{15} \times h/\lambda$, the same thing).

    Explore

    Energy of a photon

    E = h·f

    Photon energy is proportional to frequency — the gradient is Planck's constant h.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    photon 光子 guāng zi
    quanta 量子 liàng zǐ
    particulate nature 粒子性 lì zi xìng
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    Planck constant 普朗克常量 pǔ lǎng kè cháng liàng
    wavelength 波长 bō cháng
    electronvolt 电子伏特 diàn zi fú tè
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chā
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    Radiation pressure 辐射压 fú shè yā
    Exercise sheet
    22.2

    Photoelectric effect

    Syllabus
    1. understand that photoelectrons may be emitted from a metal surface when it is illuminated by electromagnetic radiation
    2. understand and use the terms threshold frequency and threshold wavelength
    3. explain photoelectric emission in terms of photon energy and work function energy
    4. recall and use $hf = \Phi + \frac{1}{2}m{v_{\text{max}}}^2$
    5. explain why the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons is independent of intensity, whereas the photoelectric current is proportional to intensity

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The photoelectric effect, photon by photon
    A field of solar panels
    Solar cells use the photoelectric effect to turn light into electricity.

    When EM radiation of high enough frequency hits a metal, electrons are emitted. These are photoelectrons 光电子, and the effect is the photoelectric effect 光电效应.

    "State what is meant by the photoelectric effect." The emission of electrons from (the surface of) a metal when electromagnetic radiation of high enough frequency is incident on it. Two marks: emission of electrons and from a metal surface illuminated by electromagnetic radiation (or "when light is shone on it"). It is the syllabus's evidence for the particulate nature of radiation, because a wave could not explain what follows.

    A photon of energy hf hits a metal surface and ejects one electron; the photon's energy splits into the work function (to free the electron) plus the electron's maximum kinetic energy
    One photon gives its energy $hf$ to one electron: part frees it (the work function $\Phi$), the rest is the electron's KE
    Two gold-leaf electroscopes carrying a negatively charged zinc plate: in the first the gold leaf stays deflected; in the second, ultraviolet light shining on the plate makes the leaf fall as charge is lost
    A charged zinc plate loses its charge — the gold leaf falls — when ultraviolet light shines on it

    Threshold frequency and work function

    Each metal has a lowest photon frequency, the threshold frequency 极限频率 $f_{0}$, below which no electrons come out, however bright the light. The work function 逸出功 $\Phi$ is the least energy needed to free an electron from the surface:

    $$\Phi = h f_{0}.$$

    Different metals have different work functions (about $2$$5\ \text{eV}$).

    The two-mark definitions. The work function energy of a metal is the minimum energy needed to remove an electron from the surface of the metal. Both "minimum" and "from the surface" carry marks: an electron deeper in the metal needs more, which is why the equation gives a maximum kinetic energy. The threshold frequency is the minimum frequency of radiation for which photoelectrons are emitted, and the threshold wavelength 极限波长 $\lambda_{0} = c/f_{0} = hc/\Phi$ is the corresponding maximum wavelength: longer wavelengths do nothing.

    Worked example. Light of wavelength $400\ \text{nm}$ falls on four metals whose work functions are: caesium $2.1\ \text{eV}$, sodium $2.3\ \text{eV}$, zinc $4.3\ \text{eV}$, platinum $5.6\ \text{eV}$. Which emit photoelectrons, and with what maximum kinetic energy?

    The photon energy is $hc/\lambda = 1240/400 = 3.1\ \text{eV}$. Emission needs $hf \geq \Phi$, so caesium ($3.1 - 2.1 = 1.0\ \text{eV}$) and sodium ($0.8\ \text{eV}$) emit; zinc and platinum do not, however intense the light. To make zinc emit, the wavelength must fall below $\lambda_{0} = 1240/4.3 = 290\ \text{nm}$, in the ultraviolet, which is why the electroscope demonstration needs a UV lamp on zinc.

    Worked example. A polished magnesium sheet in a vacuum emits electrons only when the ultraviolet frequency is at least $8.8 \times 10^{14}\ \text{Hz}$. It is illuminated at $1.2 \times 10^{15}\ \text{Hz}$. Find the work function and the maximum speed of the photoelectrons.

    $\Phi = hf_{0} = (6.63 \times 10^{-34})(8.8 \times 10^{14}) = 5.8 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}$ ($3.6\ \text{eV}$). Then $\tfrac{1}{2}mv_{\text{max}}^{2} = h(f - f_{0}) = (6.63 \times 10^{-34})(1.2 \times 10^{15} - 8.8 \times 10^{14}) = 2.1 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}$, so $v_{\text{max}} = \sqrt{2 \times 2.1 \times 10^{-19}/9.11 \times 10^{-31}} = 6.8 \times 10^{5}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Subtract the frequencies before multiplying by $h$; rounding $hf$ and $\Phi$ separately loses a significant figure in the small difference.

    Einstein's photoelectric equation

    One photon gives all its energy to one electron. If the photon energy $hf$ is more than the work function, the electron escapes with kinetic energy up to a maximum:

    $$h f = \Phi + \tfrac{1}{2} m v_{\text{max}}^{2}, \qquad\text{so}\qquad \tfrac{1}{2} m v_{\text{max}}^{2} = h(f - f_{0}).$$

    Worked example. A metal has a work function of $2.0\ \text{eV}$. Light made of photons of energy $3.5\ \text{eV}$ shines on it. Find the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons.

    $$\tfrac{1}{2}mv_{\text{max}}^{2} = hf - \Phi = 3.5 - 2.0 = 1.5\ \text{eV}\ (= 2.4 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}).$$

    So the maximum KE of photoelectrons depends linearly on frequency, not on brightness.

    A graph of maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons against frequency of incident radiation: a straight line crossing the frequency axis at the threshold frequency f0 and rising for higher frequencies
    The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons rises linearly with frequency, reaching zero at the threshold frequency $f_0$
    Maximum kinetic energy against frequency for two metals X and Y: two parallel straight lines of gradient h, metal X with the smaller work function cutting the frequency axis at the lower threshold frequency; each line extended backwards meets the energy axis at minus that metal's work function
    Two metals on one graph: parallel lines (the gradient is the Planck constant for both), each cutting the frequency axis at its own threshold and the energy axis at minus its own work function

    Reading the graph. Write the equation as $E_{\text{K,max}} = hf - \Phi$: a straight line of gradient $h$, intercept $-\Phi$ on the energy axis and $f_{0} = \Phi/h$ on the frequency axis. So a graph for two metals shows two parallel lines (same gradient $h$ for every metal), the metal with the larger work function cutting the frequency axis further to the right; the intensity of the light moves neither line. This is how the Planck constant is measured, and "sketch the line for metal Y" is marked on exactly those two features.

    A photocell circuit: radiation falls on the emitter plate inside an evacuated tube, photoelectrons cross to a collector, and a variable reverse p.d. with a microammeter measures the current; at the stopping potential the current is zero
    Investigating the effect: the current measures the rate of emission, and the reverse p.d. that just stops the fastest electrons measures their maximum kinetic energy

    Measuring the maximum kinetic energy. In a photocell the photoelectrons cross a vacuum to a collector and the current is a count of electrons per second. Make the collector negative and the electrons must climb a potential hill; raise the reverse p.d. until the current just reaches zero, the stopping potential 遏止电势 $V_{\text{s}}$, and then $eV_{\text{s}} = E_{\text{K,max}}$. Two results, both examined: at fixed frequency, doubling the intensity doubles the current at low reverse p.d. but leaves $V_{\text{s}}$ unchanged; raising the frequency raises $V_{\text{s}}$ but, at fixed intensity, does not raise the current.

    Why the wave model fails

    A wave model predicts that brightness should set the electrons' kinetic energy, and that emission should happen at any frequency given enough time. But experiments show:

    • no emission below the threshold frequency, however bright.
    • immediate emission at or above the threshold, even when dim.
    • maximum KE depends on frequency, not brightness.
    • the number of photoelectrons (the current) depends on brightness.

    The photon model explains this: light arrives as photons each of energy $hf$. One photon–electron interaction either has enough energy to free the electron ($hf \geq \Phi$) or it does not.

    Why max KE is fixed but current grows with brightness

    A brighter beam of the same frequency has more photons per second, but each still carries $hf$. So the maximum KE of any electron is $hf - \Phi$ (set by $f$ only), while the rate of emission (the current) grows with the number of photons, i.e. with brightness. Doubling the brightness doubles the current but does not change the maximum KE.

    Writing the explanation (a standard three-marker). (1) Each photon interacts with, and gives all its energy to, one electron. (2) The photon energy $hf$ depends only on the frequency, so the maximum energy an electron can leave with, $hf - \Phi$, is fixed by the frequency. (3) Increasing the intensity at the same frequency increases the number of photons per second, so more electrons are emitted per second (a larger current), but each still receives the same energy. A wave, by contrast, would spread its energy over the surface, so a brighter wave should have given faster electrons and a dim one should have needed a delay to accumulate energy; neither happens.

    Explore

    The photoelectric effect

    KEmax = h·f − φ

    Max KE is a straight line in frequency, with intercept −φ (the work function).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    work function 逸出功 yì chū gōng
    photoelectric effect 光电效应 guāng diàn xiào yìng
    photoelectron 光电子 guāng diàn zi
    threshold frequency 极限频率 jí xiàn pín lǜ
    threshold wavelength 极限波长 jí xiàn bō cháng
    stopping potential 遏止电势 è zhǐ diàn shì
    Exercise sheet
    22.3

    Wave–particle duality

    Syllabus
    1. understand that the photoelectric effect provides evidence for a particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation while phenomena such as interference and diffraction provide evidence for a wave nature
    2. describe and interpret qualitatively the evidence provided by electron diffraction for the wave nature of particles
    3. understand the de Broglie wavelength as the wavelength associated with a moving particle
    4. recall and use $\lambda = h/p$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The photoelectric effect is strong evidence for the particle nature of light. But interference 干涉 (Young's double slit, the diffraction grating 衍射光栅) and diffraction 衍射 show its wave nature. So light has both wave and particle sides — this is wave–particle duality 波粒二象性.

    "Describe what is meant by wave–particle duality" (two marks). Electromagnetic radiation (and matter) can exhibit both wave properties, such as interference and diffraction, and particle properties, such as the photoelectric effect (or, for matter, discrete collisions). Asked for one piece of evidence for each nature of radiation, give: particulate, the photoelectric effect (the threshold frequency and the immediate emission); wave, diffraction or interference (Young's slits, a diffraction grating). For matter, the wave evidence is electron diffraction.

    De Broglie hypothesis

    If a wave can act like particles, perhaps particles can act like waves. De Broglie proposed that any moving particle has a de Broglie wavelength 德布罗意波长:

    $$\lambda = \frac{h}{p},$$

    where $p = mv$. Example: an electron at $v = 4.9 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ has $p = 4.46 \times 10^{-23}\ \text{kg m s}^{-1}$, so $\lambda = 1.49 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{m} \approx 0.015\ \text{nm}$ — close to atomic spacings.

    "State what is meant by the de Broglie wavelength." The wavelength associated with a moving particle, or the wavelength of the wave associated with a particle of momentum $p$, given by $\lambda = h/p$ where $h$ is the Planck constant. In "state the formula and the meaning of any other symbol", name $h$ as the Planck constant and $p$ as the momentum of the particle. The wavelength is small because $h$ is small: a $0.10\ \text{kg}$ ball at $10\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ has $\lambda = 6.6 \times 10^{-34}\ \text{m}$, far below any slit or lattice spacing, which is why everyday objects show no diffraction.

    Electron diffraction

    When electrons are fired at a crystal lattice 晶格 (e.g. thin graphite), they make a diffraction pattern of bright rings on a screen — exactly what waves of wavelength $\lambda = h/p$ would do. This is direct evidence for the wave nature of particles (electron diffraction 电子衍射): only waves diffract, yet electrons do.

    A faster electron has more momentum, so a shorter de Broglie wavelength, which diffracts less — the rings move closer together. Slowing the electrons spreads the rings apart. To calculate: $p = \sqrt{2 m E_{\text{K}}}$, and for an electron accelerated through p.d. $V$, $E_{\text{K}} = eV$, so $\lambda = h/\sqrt{2m_{e} e V}$.

    A beam of electrons from an electron gun passes through a thin graphite film and forms concentric bright rings, with a bright central spot, on a fluorescent screen
    Electrons fired at graphite form a ring diffraction pattern — only waves diffract, so electrons behave as waves

    Worked example. An electron is accelerated from rest through a p.d. of $2500\ \text{V}$. Find its de Broglie wavelength. ($m_{e} = 9.11 \times 10^{-31}\ \text{kg}$, $e = 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$, $h = 6.63 \times 10^{-34}\ \text{J s}$.)

    Its kinetic energy is $E_{\text{K}} = eV$, so $\lambda = \dfrac{h}{\sqrt{2 m_{e} e V}}$:

    $$\lambda = \frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2(9.11 \times 10^{-31})(1.6 \times 10^{-19})(2500)}} \approx 2.5 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{m}.$$

    This is close to the spacing between atoms in a crystal, which is why the electrons diffract off the graphite.

    Deriving $\lambda$ for an accelerated electron. An electron of mass $m$ and charge $q$ accelerated from rest through a p.d. $V$ gains kinetic energy $qV = \tfrac{1}{2}mv^{2}$, so $v = \sqrt{2qV/m}$ and $p = mv = \sqrt{2mqV}$; hence $\lambda = h/\sqrt{2mqV}$. Two consequences the exam asks for: increasing $V$ increases the momentum and shortens the wavelength, so the diffraction rings shrink towards the centre; halving the wavelength needs four times the p.d.

    Describing electron diffraction (four marks). (1) Electrons from a heated filament are accelerated through a high p.d. into a beam. (2) The beam meets a thin polycrystalline 多晶的 graphite film; the regular spacing of the carbon atoms, about $10^{-10}\ \text{m}$, acts as a diffraction grating. (3) On a fluorescent screen the electrons produce a bright central spot surrounded by concentric rings. (4) Rings are a diffraction pattern, and diffraction is a wave property, so the electrons are behaving as waves; the ring radii match a wavelength $h/p$, which confirms de Broglie's relation. Sketch the pattern as rings, not spots or a fringe pattern. A faster beam gives rings of smaller radius.

    Explore

    The de Broglie wavelength

    λ = h/p

    A particle's wavelength is inversely proportional to its momentum — faster, heavier particles have shorter waves.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    wave–particle duality 波粒二象性 bō lì èr xiàng xìng
    interference 干涉 gān shè
    diffraction grating 衍射光栅 yǎn shè guāng shān
    diffraction 衍射 yǎn shè
    electron diffraction 电子衍射 diàn zi yǎn shè
    de Broglie wavelength 德布罗意波长 dé bù luó yì bō cháng
    crystal lattice 晶格 jīng gé
    polycrystalline 多晶的 duō jīng de
    Exercise sheet
    22.4

    Energy levels in atoms

    Syllabus
    1. understand that there are discrete electron energy levels in isolated atoms (e.g. atomic hydrogen)
    2. understand the appearance and formation of emission and absorption line spectra
    3. recall and use $hf = E_1 - E_2$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    In an isolated atom, electrons can only sit at certain discrete 分立 energy levels 能级 — never in between. The lowest is the ground state 基态; the others are excited states 激发态.

    By convention, energies are written negative, with $E = 0$ for an electron just free of the atom. For hydrogen the ground state is $E_{1} = -13.6\ \text{eV}$; higher states approach zero.

    An energy-level diagram for hydrogen: horizontal lines at discrete negative energies from the ground state at −13.6 eV up to zero at n=infinity, with downward arrows showing emission transitions
    The electron energy levels of hydrogen are discrete and negative, with the ground state at $-13.6\ \text{eV}$

    Emission spectrum

    When an electron drops from a higher level $E_{2}$ to a lower level $E_{1}$, it emits one photon of energy

    $$h f = E_{2} - E_{1}.$$

    (Both energies are negative; their difference is positive.) Because the levels are discrete, only certain photon energies — and so certain wavelengths — come out. The emission spectrum 发射光谱 is a set of sharp bright lines on a dark background, one line per transition 跃迁. The pattern is a "fingerprint" of the element.

    Explaining a line spectrum (the standard four-marker). (1) The electrons in an isolated atom can only occupy discrete energy levels. (2) An electron in an excited state falls to a lower level and the energy it loses is emitted as one photon. (3) The photon energy equals the difference between the two levels, $hf = E_{2} - E_{1}$, so only certain frequencies (wavelengths) are emitted. (4) Each possible transition gives one line; the same set of levels gives the same lines every time, which is why a spectrum identifies the element. Asked to match lines to transitions: the largest energy gap gives the line of highest frequency and shortest wavelength.

    The emission spectrum of hydrogen: a few sharp coloured lines (violet, blue, cyan, red) on a black background, plotted against wavelength
    The emission spectrum of hydrogen is a set of sharp bright lines on a dark background
    A periodic table where each element's box is replaced by a photograph of its real emission spectrum -- every one a different set of coloured bright lines on black
    Real emission spectra of the elements: each one is a unique set of bright lines -- a fingerprint of that element

    Absorption spectrum

    When white light passes through a cool gas, photons whose energy exactly matches an upward transition are absorbed. The light then shows dark lines on a bright background — the absorption spectrum 吸收光谱. The dark lines sit at the same wavelengths as the emission lines of the same gas.

    Explaining the dark lines. Photons whose energy equals the difference between two levels are absorbed, raising an electron to the higher level; the excited electron soon falls back and re-emits a photon of the same energy, but in a random direction, so almost none of that light continues along the original path. The rest of the white light, whose photons match no gap, passes through unchanged. Hence dark lines at exactly the wavelengths the same gas would emit: the Sun's spectrum shows the absorption lines of the cooler gases in its outer layers.

    The spectrum of the Sun: a continuous rainbow band crossed by several dark vertical absorption lines, plotted against wavelength
    Dark absorption lines in the Sun's spectrum mark the wavelengths absorbed by cooler gas

    Calculations

    For a transition between two known levels:

    $$hf = E_{2} - E_{1}, \qquad \lambda = \frac{hc}{E_{2} - E_{1}}.$$

    Work in consistent units — convert eV to joules (× $1.60 \times 10^{-19}$) before finding $\lambda$ in metres, or use $hc \approx 1240\ \text{eV nm}$ for a quick estimate.

    Four hydrogen energy levels with three transitions to the ground state drawn as arrows, matched to three emission lines on a dark strip at 97, 103 and 122 nm; the largest energy jump gives the shortest wavelength
    From levels to lines: each transition down to the ground state produces one line, and the biggest jump lands furthest towards the short-wavelength end

    Worked example. The lowest four energy levels of hydrogen are $-13.6$, $-3.40$, $-1.51$ and $-0.85\ \text{eV}$. Find the wavelengths of the three lines produced by transitions to the ground state, and the number of lines these four levels can produce altogether.

    Transition $2 \to 1$: $\Delta E = 13.6 - 3.40 = 10.2\ \text{eV}$, so $\lambda = 1240/10.2 = 122\ \text{nm}$. $3 \to 1$: $12.09\ \text{eV}$, $\lambda = 103\ \text{nm}$. $4 \to 1$: $12.75\ \text{eV}$, $\lambda = 97.3\ \text{nm}$: all ultraviolet, the largest jump giving the shortest wavelength. Four levels allow $4 \to 3$, $4 \to 2$, $4 \to 1$, $3 \to 2$, $3 \to 1$ and $2 \to 1$: six lines. The visible red line of hydrogen is $3 \to 2$: $1.89\ \text{eV}$, $656\ \text{nm}$. (Working in joules: $10.2\ \text{eV} = 1.63 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{J}$, $\lambda = hc/E = 1.99 \times 10^{-25}/1.63 \times 10^{-18} = 1.22 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$.)

    Worked example. A laser emits red light of wavelength $650\ \text{nm}$ when electrons drop from one level to another. Find the energy gap between the two levels.

    $\Delta E = hc/\lambda = 1240/650 = 1.91\ \text{eV} = 3.1 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}$. The gap, not either level, fixes the colour: two atoms with different levels but the same gap emit the same line.

    Worked example (annihilation). An electron and a positron, each moving slowly, meet and annihilate 湮灭, producing two identical photons. Find the wavelength of each photon. ($m_{\text{e}} = 9.11 \times 10^{-31}\ \text{kg}$.)

    The rest energy of each particle is $E = mc^{2} = (9.11 \times 10^{-31})(3.00 \times 10^{8})^{2} = 8.2 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{J}$ ($0.51\ \text{MeV}$), and momentum conservation shares the energy between two photons moving in opposite directions, so each carries $8.2 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{J}$: $\lambda = hc/E = 1.99 \times 10^{-25}/8.2 \times 10^{-14} = 2.4 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{m}$, a gamma ray. (Any kinetic energy the pair had is added to the photon energies.)

    Explore

    Make an element's spectral lines

    An electron dropping between fixed energy levels emits a photon of exactly the gap's energy — a fixed wavelength and colour. Each jump is one line of the element's barcode.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    discrete 分立 fēn lì
    energy level 能级 néng jí
    ground state 基态 jī tài
    excited states 激发态 jī fā tài
    excited state 激发态 jī fā tài
    transition 跃迁 yuè qiān
    emission spectrum 发射光谱 fā shè guāng pǔ
    absorption spectrum 吸收光谱 xī shōu guāng pǔ
    annihilate 湮灭 yān miè
    Exercise sheet
    22.4

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    photon a quantum (discrete packet) of energy of electromagnetic radiation
    electronvolt the energy gained by an electron accelerated through a potential difference of one volt; $1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}$
    photoelectric effect the emission of electrons from a metal surface when electromagnetic radiation of high enough frequency is incident on it
    work function energy the minimum energy needed to remove an electron from the surface of the metal
    threshold frequency the minimum frequency of radiation that causes photoelectric emission from a metal
    threshold wavelength the maximum wavelength of radiation that causes photoelectric emission, $\lambda_{0} = hc/\Phi$
    wave–particle duality radiation and matter show both wave properties (diffraction, interference) and particle properties (photoelectric effect, discrete collisions)
    de Broglie wavelength the wavelength associated with a moving particle, $\lambda = h/p$
    energy level one of the discrete energies an electron in an isolated atom may have
    emission line spectrum a set of bright lines of definite wavelengths, each from a transition between two energy levels
    absorption line spectrum dark lines on a continuous spectrum at the wavelengths absorbed by transitions to higher levels
    22.4

    Exam tips

    • Photon: $E = hf = hc/\lambda$, $p = E/c = h/\lambda$. Use $hc = 1240\ \text{eV nm}$ to move between wavelength and energy in eV, then convert to joules only if the answer demands it.
    • Photoelectric equation $hf = \Phi + \tfrac{1}{2}mv_{\text{max}}^{2}$: maximum energy, one photon to one electron; the graph of $E_{\text{K,max}}$ against $f$ has gradient $h$ and intercepts $f_{0}$ and $-\Phi$.
    • Intensity changes the number of photons per second (the current); frequency changes the energy of each (the maximum kinetic energy). Keep those two sentences apart and every explanation writes itself.
    • Evidence: photoelectric effect for particles, diffraction and interference for waves; electron diffraction for the wave nature of matter, with $\lambda = h/p = h/\sqrt{2mqV}$.
    • Line spectra: discrete levels, one photon per transition, $hf = E_{2} - E_{1}$; the biggest gap gives the shortest wavelength; absorption lines sit where emission lines would, because the absorbed light is re-emitted in all directions.
    • Radiation pressure: force $=$ photons per second $\times$ momentum change per photon; $2p$ for a mirror, $p$ for an absorber; pressure depends on intensity, not colour.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining a photon as "a particle of light" without "quantum/packet of energy", or the work function without "minimum" and "from the surface".
    • Saying brighter light gives faster photoelectrons, or that below the threshold frequency emission happens eventually.
    • Mixing eV and joules in one equation; forgetting to subtract the work function; using $\tfrac{1}{2}mv^{2}$ with the maximum kinetic energy in eV.
    • Writing the de Broglie wavelength for an accelerated electron as $h/(mv)$ with $v$ guessed, instead of $h/\sqrt{2mqV}$.
    • Describing electron diffraction as bright fringes or spots; the pattern is concentric rings, and a higher p.d. makes them smaller.
    • Getting the direction of a transition wrong: emission is a fall to a lower level, absorption a rise; the photon energy is the difference, never the energy of one level.
    • Claiming the largest energy gap gives the longest wavelength.
    • Forgetting that a reflected photon changes momentum by $2p$, or that the pressure of blue light of the same intensity is the same as red.
  • 23

    Nuclear physics

    23.1

    Mass-energy equivalence

    Syllabus
    1. understand the equivalence between energy and mass as represented by $E = mc^2$ and recall and use this equation
    2. represent simple nuclear reactions by nuclear equations of the form $^{14}_{7}\text{N} + ^{4}_{2}\text{He} \rightarrow ^{17}_{8}\text{O} + ^{1}_{1}\text{H}$
    3. define and use the terms mass defect and binding energy
    4. sketch the variation of binding energy per nucleon with nucleon number
    5. explain what is meant by nuclear fusion and nuclear fission
    6. explain the relevance of binding energy per nucleon to nuclear reactions, including nuclear fusion and nuclear fission
    7. calculate the energy released in nuclear reactions using $E = c^2 \Delta m$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Einstein's special relativity gives the famous link (mass-energy equivalence 质能等价):

    Mass and energy can change into each other, E = m c squared
    Mass and energy are equivalent and can change into each other
    $$E = m c^{2},$$

    where $c = 3.00 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. A mass $m$ matches an energy 能量 $E$ — the two can change into each other. For a mass change $\Delta m$:

    Worked example. The star Sirius loses mass through nuclear fusion at $1.09 \times 10^{11}\ \text{kg s}^{-1}$. Find the power it radiates.

    Every kilogram that disappears leaves as energy: $P = c^{2} \times (\text{mass lost per second}) = (3.00 \times 10^{8})^{2}(1.09 \times 10^{11}) = 9.8 \times 10^{27}\ \text{W}$. This is the star's luminosity 光度 (Topic 25); the Sun's is $3.8 \times 10^{26}\ \text{W}$, so it loses about $4$ million tonnes a second. The same idea in reverse: a power station producing $1\ \text{GW}$ for a year converts $E/c^{2} = 3.2 \times 10^{16}/9.0 \times 10^{16} = 0.35\ \text{kg}$ of mass, which is why the fuel weighs almost the same afterwards.

    $$\Delta E = c^{2} \Delta m.$$

    In nuclear physics the masses are tiny but $c^{2}$ is huge, so a small mass change means a large energy. A mass change of $1\ \text{u}$ ($1.661 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$) matches $\Delta E \approx 1.49 \times 10^{-10}\ \text{J}$. This gives a conversion you will use again and again:

    $$1\ \text{u} \ \longleftrightarrow\ 931\ \text{MeV}.$$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mass-energy equivalence 质能等价 zhì néng děng jià
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    luminosity 光度 guāng dù
    Exercise sheet
    23.1

    Nuclear reactions

    A nuclear reaction 核反应 is written like

    $$^{14}_{7}\text{N} + {}^{4}_{2}\text{He} \to {}^{17}_{8}\text{O} + {}^{1}_{1}\text{H},$$

    with nucleon number 核子数 conserved (top numbers: $14 + 4 = 17 + 1$) and charge conserved (bottom numbers: $7 + 2 = 8 + 1$) — this is conservation of charge 电荷守恒. Use these to fill in an unknown: identify the species, then balance the top and bottom numbers.

    The decay equations. Alpha decay removes $^{4}_{2}\text{He}$, so $A$ falls by 4 and $Z$ by 2: $^{211}_{84}\text{Po} \to {}^{207}_{82}\text{Pb} + {}^{4}_{2}\text{He}$. Beta-minus decay turns a neutron into a proton, emitting an electron and an antineutrino: $^{15}_{6}\text{C} \to {}^{15}_{7}\text{N} + {}^{0}_{-1}\text{e} + \bar{\nu}$ ($A$ unchanged, $Z$ up by 1). Beta-plus decay turns a proton into a neutron, emitting a positron 正电子 and a neutrino 中微子: $^{18}_{9}\text{F} \to {}^{18}_{8}\text{O} + {}^{0}_{+1}\text{e} + \nu$ ($Z$ down by 1). Gamma emission changes neither number. In a chain of decays just keep the books: a nucleus W that emits $\beta^{-}$, then $\alpha$, then $\beta^{-}$ ends with $A - 4$ and $Z + 1 - 2 + 1 = Z$, an isotope of W. Check both lines of every equation you complete, and remember the neutrino: the mark scheme includes it.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    nuclear reaction 核反应 hé fǎn yìng
    nucleon number 核子数 hé zǐ shù
    conservation of charge 电荷守恒 diàn hè shǒu héng
    positron 正电子 zhèng diàn zi
    neutrino 中微子 zhōng wēi zǐ
    23.1

    Mass defect and binding energy

    The mass of a nucleus 原子核 is less than the total mass of its separate protons 质子 and neutrons 中子. The difference is the mass defect 质量亏损 $\Delta m$:

    $$\Delta m = (Z m_{\text{p}} + N m_{\text{n}}) - m_{\text{nucleus}}.$$

    By $E = mc^{2}$, this "missing" mass was released as energy when the nucleus formed. To pull the nucleus fully apart you must put that energy back — the binding energy 结合能 $B$:

    $$B = \Delta m \cdot c^{2}.$$
    Separate protons and neutrons have total mass Z m_p + N m_n; when they assemble into a nucleus the nucleus has less mass (the mass defect), and that missing mass is released as the binding energy B
    The assembled nucleus has less mass than its separate nucleons; the missing mass is released as binding energy

    Worked example. A helium-4 nucleus has a mass defect of $\Delta m = 0.0304\ \text{u}$. Find its binding energy. ($1\ \text{u}$ corresponds to $931\ \text{MeV}$.)

    $$B = \Delta m \cdot c^{2} = 0.0304 \times 931 \approx 28\ \text{MeV}.$$

    A more tightly bound nucleus has a larger mass defect and larger binding energy. The binding energy per nucleon 比结合能 is $B/A$ (usually in MeV per nucleon) — a measure of how tightly each nucleon is held, useful for comparing nuclides.

    The two-mark definitions. The mass defect of a nucleus is the difference between the total mass of its separate nucleons and the mass of the nucleus. The binding energy is the minimum energy required to separate the nucleus into its individual nucleons (equivalently, the energy released when the nucleus is formed from separate nucleons). Say "separate nucleons" or "individual protons and neutrons"; "the energy holding the nucleus together" scores nothing. Binding energy is released, not stored: the nucleus has less energy than its parts.

    Worked example. The masses are: proton $1.007\,276\ \text{u}$, neutron $1.008\,665\ \text{u}$, polonium-212 nucleus $211.945\,4\ \text{u}$. Find the mass defect and the binding energy per nucleon of $^{212}_{84}\text{Po}$.

    $Z = 84$ protons and $N = 212 - 84 = 128$ neutrons: total $84 \times 1.007\,276 + 128 \times 1.008\,665 = 84.611\,2 + 129.109\,1 = 213.720\,3\ \text{u}$. Mass defect $\Delta m = 213.720\,3 - 211.945\,4 = 1.774\,9\ \text{u}$. Binding energy $= 1.774\,9 \times 931.5 = 1653\ \text{MeV}$, so per nucleon $1653/212 = 7.80\ \text{MeV}$, on the falling part of the curve. Keep every decimal place until the subtraction: the defect is a small difference of two large numbers.

    Binding energy per nucleon vs nucleon number

    A graph of $B/A$ against $A$ has a typical shape:

    • for light nuclei ($A < 20$), $B/A$ rises quickly (with a spike at the very stable $^{4}_{2}\text{He}$).
    • around $A \sim 56$ (iron), $B/A$ reaches its maximum of about $8.8\ \text{MeV}$. Iron-56 is the most stable nucleus.
    • for heavy nuclei ($A > 100$), $B/A$ falls slowly, to about $7.5\ \text{MeV}$ for uranium.

    So the curve is dome-shaped, rising to iron then falling.

    Sketching the curve. The exam gives blank axes ($A$ from 1 to 250, $B/A$ up to about $9\ \text{MeV}$) and marks: a steep rise from near zero at $A = 1$, a maximum near $A = 56$ at about $8.8\ \text{MeV}$, then a slow, gentle fall to about $7.5\ \text{MeV}$ at $A = 238$. Do not start the curve at the origin exactly (hydrogen-1 has no binding energy but is a single point), do not make the fall as steep as the rise, and do not let the curve reach zero on the right. Asked to mark a nucleus that undergoes alpha decay, put X on the far right, $A > 200$; a nucleus that undergoes fusion goes at the far left, $A < 10$; both are at low $B/A$, moving up the curve when they react.

    A graph of binding energy per nucleon in MeV against nucleon number: rising steeply for light nuclei to a peak of about 8.8 MeV near A = 56, then falling slowly for heavy nuclei, with arrows showing that fusion of light nuclei and fission of heavy nuclei both move towards the peak
    Binding energy per nucleon peaks near iron ($A \approx 56$); lighter and heavier nuclei are less tightly bound
    Explore

    Mass defect energy lab

    E = delta m c^2

    Change mass defect and see binding energy rise with E = mc^2.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    neutron 中子 zhōng zǐ
    proton 质子 zhì zi
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    mass defect 质量亏损 zhì liàng kuī sǔn
    binding energy 结合能 jié hé néng
    binding energy per nucleon 比结合能 bǐ jié hé néng
    23.1

    Nuclear fusion and fission

    A nuclear power station cooling tower
    A nuclear power station releases energy by nuclear fission.

    Energy is released when nuclei move towards the iron peak — by joining light nuclei or splitting heavy ones.

    Two ways to release nuclear energy: fusion joins two light nuclei into one heavier nucleus; fission splits one heavy nucleus into two lighter ones
    Fusion joins light nuclei; fission splits a heavy nucleus — both release energy by moving towards the iron peak

    Nuclear fusion

    Nuclear fusion 核聚变 joins two light nuclei into one heavier nucleus:

    $$^{2}_{1}\text{H} + {}^{3}_{1}\text{H} \to {}^{4}_{2}\text{He} + {}^{1}_{0}\text{n} + \text{energy}.$$

    The product has greater binding energy per nucleon than the reactants, so energy is released. Fusion powers stars. It needs very high temperatures (millions of kelvin) so the nuclei have enough kinetic energy 动能 to beat their electrostatic 静电 repulsion and get close enough for the strong nuclear force 强核力 to take over.

    Nuclear fission

    Nuclear fission 核裂变 splits a heavy nucleus into two lighter ones:

    $$^{235}_{92}\text{U} + {}^{1}_{0}\text{n} \to {}^{141}_{56}\text{Ba} + {}^{92}_{36}\text{Kr} + 3\, {}^{1}_{0}\text{n} + \text{energy}.$$

    The products have higher binding energy per nucleon than $^{235}$U, so energy is released. The extra neutrons can cause more fissions — a chain reaction 链式反应 in a large enough mass of fuel (the critical mass 临界质量). This is the basis of nuclear power and weapons.

    "Describe the differences between fission and fusion." Fission: a heavy nucleus (large $A$) splits into two lighter nuclei of roughly similar mass, usually after absorbing a neutron, releasing further neutrons. Fusion: two light nuclei (small $A$) join to form one heavier nucleus; it needs very high temperature and pressure to overcome the electrostatic repulsion between the nuclei. Both release energy, but per kilogram of fuel fusion releases more.

    "Explain, with reference to the curve, why energy is released." In both processes the products lie higher on the binding-energy-per-nucleon curve than the reactants: each nucleon ends up more tightly bound, so the total binding energy increases. The extra binding energy is released (as the kinetic energy of the products and as photons), and the total mass of the products is less than that of the reactants by $\Delta E/c^{2}$. A nucleus near the peak (iron) can release energy by neither process, which is why the stars' fusion stops at iron.

    A branching tree in which one uranium-235 nucleus is split by a neutron into fission fragments plus neutrons, each of which splits a further uranium-235 nucleus, so the number of fissions multiplies generation by generation
    In an uncontrolled chain reaction each fission of uranium-235 releases neutrons that cause more fissions

    Calculating the energy released

    1. find the total mass of the reactants.
    2. find the total mass of the products.
    3. mass change $\Delta m = m_{\text{reactants}} - m_{\text{products}}$ (positive when energy is released).
    4. energy released $\Delta E = c^{2} \Delta m$.

    In kg this gives joules; in atomic mass units use $\Delta E\ (\text{MeV}) = \Delta m\ (\text{u}) \times 931$.

    Worked example. In a nuclear reaction the total mass decreases by $0.020\ \text{u}$. Find the energy released.

    $$\Delta E = \Delta m\ (\text{u}) \times 931 = 0.020 \times 931 \approx 19\ \text{MeV}.$$

    Worked example (fusion). The mass defect of deuterium $^{2}_{1}\text{H}$ is $0.002\,388\ \text{u}$ and that of helium-4 is $0.030\,377\ \text{u}$. Find the energy released when two deuterium nuclei fuse to form one helium-4 nucleus.

    Energy released $=$ (binding energy of the products) $-$ (binding energy of the reactants) $= [0.030\,377 - 2 \times 0.002\,388] \times 931.5 = 0.025\,601 \times 931.5 = 23.8\ \text{MeV}$ ($3.82 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{J}$). Mass defects can be used directly like this because the number of nucleons is the same on both sides; the difference in the defects is the mass converted. Per kilogram of deuterium this is $5.7 \times 10^{14}\ \text{J}$, about a million times a chemical fuel.

    Worked example (fission). $^{235}_{92}\text{U} + {}^{1}_{0}\text{n} \to {}^{141}_{56}\text{Ba} + {}^{92}_{36}\text{Kr} + 3\,{}^{1}_{0}\text{n}$. Masses: U-235 $235.043\,9\ \text{u}$, n $1.008\,665\ \text{u}$, Ba-141 $140.914\,4\ \text{u}$, Kr-92 $91.926\,2\ \text{u}$. Find the energy released.

    Reactants: $235.043\,9 + 1.008\,665 = 236.052\,6\ \text{u}$. Products: $140.914\,4 + 91.926\,2 + 3 \times 1.008\,665 = 235.866\,6\ \text{u}$. $\Delta m = 0.186\,0\ \text{u}$, so $\Delta E = 0.186\,0 \times 931.5 = 173\ \text{MeV} = 2.8 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{J}$ per fission. Count the three neutrons on the right and the one on the left: forgetting one changes the answer by a whole nucleon mass.

    Alpha decay of a uranium-238 nucleus at rest: afterwards the thorium-234 nucleus and the alpha particle move apart with equal and opposite momenta, so the much lighter alpha particle takes almost all of the kinetic energy
    Alpha decay from rest: equal and opposite momenta, so the light alpha particle carries about 98% of the energy released and the heavy nucleus barely recoils

    Worked example (alpha decay and momentum). A stationary $^{238}_{92}\text{U}$ nucleus decays to $^{234}_{90}\text{Th}$ by emitting an $\alpha$-particle; the total kinetic energy released is $4.27\ \text{MeV}$. Find the kinetic energy of the $\alpha$-particle.

    Momentum is conserved and the parent was at rest, so the $\alpha$ and the thorium nucleus have equal and opposite momenta $p$. With $E_{\text{K}} = p^{2}/2m$, the energies are in the inverse ratio of the masses: $E_{\alpha}/E_{\text{Th}} = m_{\text{Th}}/m_{\alpha} = 234/4$. So $E_{\alpha} = 4.27 \times 234/238 = 4.20\ \text{MeV}$ and the thorium recoil 反冲 takes only $0.07\ \text{MeV}$. The $\alpha$-particles from a given decay are all emitted with this one energy, which is the sign that the energy is shared between just two bodies.

    Worked example (a radioactive power source). A space probe is powered by $0.874\ \text{kg}$ of plutonium-238, half-life $87.7$ years, each decay releasing $5.59\ \text{MeV}$. Find the power available at launch.

    Number of nuclei: $N = 0.874/(238 \times 1.661 \times 10^{-27}) = 2.21 \times 10^{24}$. Decay constant: $\lambda = 0.693/(87.7 \times 3.156 \times 10^{7}) = 2.50 \times 10^{-10}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. Activity: $A = \lambda N = 5.53 \times 10^{14}\ \text{Bq}$. Power $= A \times E = 5.53 \times 10^{14} \times 5.59 \times 1.60 \times 10^{-13} = 490\ \text{W}$, falling to half after $87.7$ years. A nuclide with a shorter half-life would give more power per kilogram but would not last the mission; polonium-210 ($138$ days) would be far more powerful at first and useless within two years.

    Explore

    Nuclear fission chain reaction

    A neutron splits a heavy nucleus, releasing energy and more neutrons — which split more nuclei.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    nuclear fusion 核聚变 hé jù biàn
    nuclear fission 核裂变 hé liè biàn
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    electrostatic 静电 jìng diàn
    strong nuclear force 强核力 qiáng hé lì
    chain reaction 链式反应 liàn shì fǎn yìng
    critical mass 临界质量 lín jiè zhì liàng
    recoil 反冲 fǎn chōng
    23.2

    Radioactive decay

    Syllabus
    1. understand that fluctuations in count rate provide evidence for the random nature of radioactive decay
    2. understand that radioactive decay is both spontaneous and random
    3. define activity and decay constant, and recall and use $A = \lambda N$
    4. define half-life
    5. use $\lambda = 0.693 / t_{\frac{1}{2}}$
    6. understand the exponential nature of radioactive decay, and sketch and use the relationship $x = x_0 e^{-\lambda t}$, where $x$ could represent activity, number of undecayed nuclei or received count rate

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Radioactive decay & half-life

    Random and spontaneous

    Radioactive decay is:

    • spontaneous 自发 — it happens with no outside trigger, and the rate is not changed by temperature, pressure or chemical state; and
    • random 随机 — you cannot predict when a given nucleus will decay, only the probability that it decays in a time.

    Evidence for randomness: the count rate fluctuates. A Geiger counter 盖革计数器 next to a source clicks at uneven intervals — never a steady stream — although the long-run mean rate is well-defined.

    A bar chart of the counts recorded in thirty successive ten-second intervals from a long-lived source: the bars vary randomly from one interval to the next about a steady dashed mean line
    Counts in equal time intervals from the same source are never the same twice: the fluctuation is the evidence that decay is random, while the steady mean shows the probability is constant

    The two-mark definitions. Radioactive decay is the spontaneous and random emission of a particle ($\alpha$ or $\beta$) or a photon ($\gamma$) from an unstable nucleus. Spontaneous means the decay is not affected by external factors: temperature, pressure, chemical state, or the presence of other nuclei. Random means it is impossible to predict which nucleus will decay next, or when a given nucleus will decay; only a probability can be given. Evidence for randomness: the count rate fluctuates from one interval to the next, even for a source whose activity is not changing over the experiment.

    A radioactive source inside a cloud chamber, with many thin wispy white beta-particle tracks fanning out from it across the dark vapour
    Each beta particle from the source leaves a thin track in a cloud chamber -- direct evidence of separate, random decays

    Activity and decay constant

    For $N$ undecayed nuclei of a radionuclide 放射性核素, the rate of decay is

    $$A = \lambda N.$$
    • $A$ is the activity 活度 — decays per unit time. Unit: becquerel 贝克勒尔 (Bq) $= \text{s}^{-1}$.
    • $\lambda$ is the decay constant 衰变常数 — the probability per unit time that a nucleus decays. Unit: $\text{s}^{-1}$.

    $\lambda$ is fixed for a nuclide; a larger sample (larger $N$) has proportionally larger activity.

    The one-mark definitions. Activity is the number of decays (of nuclei) per unit time, or the rate of decay. The decay constant is the probability per unit time that a (given) nucleus will decay. Not "the rate of decay": that is the activity. Note the units are the same, $\text{s}^{-1}$, but $A$ counts events and $\lambda$ is a probability per second.

    Worked example. Fluorine-18 has a half-life of $110$ minutes. Show that its decay constant is $1.05 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{s}^{-1}$, and find the activity of $2.1 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{kg}$ of fluorine-18.

    $\lambda = 0.693/(110 \times 60) = 1.05 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. The number of nuclei is the mass divided by the mass of one nucleus: $N = 2.1 \times 10^{-12}/(18 \times 1.661 \times 10^{-27}) = 7.0 \times 10^{13}$. So $A = \lambda N = 1.05 \times 10^{-4} \times 7.0 \times 10^{13} = 7.4 \times 10^{9}\ \text{Bq}$. A tiny mass gives a huge activity because the half-life is short; the same mass of uranium-238 (half-life $4.5 \times 10^{9}$ years) would give about $10^{-5}\ \text{Bq}$.

    Exponential decay

    Since $\lambda$ is the fractional decay rate, $\dfrac{dN}{dt} = -\lambda N$, whose solution is an exponential decay 指数衰减:

    $$N = N_{0} e^{-\lambda t}.$$

    Because $A = \lambda N$, the activity (and any count rate 计数率 proportional to it) decays the same way:

    $$A = A_{0} e^{-\lambda t}.$$

    Why exponential? For each nucleus, $\lambda$ is a fixed probability per unit time, independent of the others and of the nucleus's age. So the same fraction decays in each time interval, which gives exponential decay.

    Writing the explanation (three marks). (1) The decay constant is the probability per unit time of decay and is the same for every nucleus of the nuclide, whatever its age. (2) So the rate of decay, the activity, is proportional to the number of undecayed nuclei present: $A = \lambda N$. (3) A rate of change proportional to the quantity itself gives an exponential change; equivalently, the same fraction of the remaining nuclei decays in every equal time interval, so the number never reaches zero but halves in every half-life.

    Half-life

    The half-life 半衰期 $t_{1/2}$ is the time for the number of undecayed nuclei (or the activity, or the count rate) to fall to half. From $N = N_{0} e^{-\lambda t}$ with $N = N_{0}/2$:

    $$\ln 2 = \lambda t_{1/2}, \qquad \lambda = \frac{\ln 2}{t_{1/2}} \approx \frac{0.693}{t_{1/2}}.$$

    Worked example. A radioactive isotope has a half-life of $6.0$ hours. Find its decay constant.

    Convert the half-life to seconds: $6.0\ \text{h} = 21\,600\ \text{s}$. Then

    $$\lambda = \frac{\ln 2}{t_{1/2}} = \frac{0.693}{21\,600} \approx 3.2 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{s}^{-1}.$$

    A larger decay constant means a shorter half-life. After $n$ half-lives the surviving fraction is $(1/2)^{n}$; after 5 half-lives only about 3% remains.

    The definition of half-life. The time taken for the number of undecayed nuclei (or the activity) of a sample to fall to half its initial value. "Half the atoms decay" is accepted; "half the sample disappears" is not, since the decayed nuclei are still there as the daughter product.

    Two curves against time: the number of nuclei of isotope X falls exponentially from N0 while the number of nuclei of its stable daughter Y rises from zero; the curves cross at one half-life, where each is N0 over 2, and always add up to N0
    A parent decaying into a stable daughter: what X loses, Y gains, so the curves cross after one half-life and the half-life can be read off the crossing

    Reading a two-isotope graph. When X decays to a stable Y, $N_{\text{Y}} = N_{0} - N_{\text{X}} = N_{0}(1 - e^{-\lambda t})$. The half-life is the time at which the curves cross ($N_{\text{X}} = N_{\text{Y}} = N_{0}/2$), or the time for $N_{\text{X}}$ to halve. If the graph gives the initial number $N_{0}$ and the initial mass $m$, the nucleon number follows from $m = N_{0} A u$: for $m = 7.3 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{kg}$ and $N_{0} = 2.0 \times 10^{21}$, $A = m/(N_{0} u) = 7.3 \times 10^{-4}/(2.0 \times 10^{21} \times 1.661 \times 10^{-27}) = 220$.

    Worked example. A sample of a single radioactive isotope has an activity of $180\ \text{Bq}$ at $t = 0$ and $45\ \text{Bq}$ at $t = 8.4$ minutes. Find the half-life and the decay constant, and the activity after a further $8.4$ minutes.

    $45/180 = 1/4 = (1/2)^{2}$: two half-lives in $8.4$ minutes, so $t_{1/2} = 4.2\ \text{min} = 252\ \text{s}$ and $\lambda = 0.693/252 = 2.8 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. After another two half-lives the activity is $45/4 = 11\ \text{Bq}$. When the ratio is not a neat power of two, use $t = \ln(A_{0}/A)/\lambda$: for the activity to fall from $180$ to $50\ \text{Bq}$ takes $\ln(3.6)/2.75 \times 10^{-3} = 466\ \text{s}$. Always convert the half-life to seconds before finding $\lambda$ if the activity is in becquerels.

    A radioactive decay curve: the number of undecayed nuclei against time, an exponential fall in which the number halves over each successive half-life, from  to  to  to
    The number of undecayed nuclei falls by half in each half-life

    Finding $\lambda$ from data

    Given $A_{0}$ and $A$ at time $t$:

    $$\lambda = \frac{1}{t} \ln\frac{A_{0}}{A}, \qquad t_{1/2} = \frac{\ln 2}{\lambda}.$$

    Taking logs of $A = A_{0} e^{-\lambda t}$ gives $\ln A = \ln A_{0} - \lambda t$, so a plot of $\ln A$ against $t$ is a straight line with gradient $-\lambda$. Use this with several data points.

    Count rate is not activity. A detector records only the radiation that reaches it and is absorbed in it: a fraction set by the solid angle it covers, by absorption in the air and in the source itself, and by its efficiency. So the measured count rate is smaller than the activity, but proportional to it, and the half-life obtained from a count-rate graph is correct. Subtract the background radiation 本底辐射 (measured with the source removed) from every reading before taking ratios or logarithms; an unsubtracted background makes the curve flatten and the half-life appear too long.

    Tracers in medicine. Fluorine-18 and oxygen-15 are $\beta^{+}$ emitters used as tracers 示踪剂 in PET scanning (Topic 24): the positron annihilates with an electron, giving two gamma photons that leave in opposite directions and reveal where the tracer is. A short half-life ($110$ minutes, $2$ minutes) is chosen so that the activity falls quickly after the scan and the dose to the patient stays small, at the price of having to make the isotope close to the hospital and use it at once.

    A graph of natural-log of activity against time: the data lie on a straight line falling with gradient minus lambda, confirming exponential decay and giving the decay constant
    A graph of $\ln A$ against time is a straight line of gradient $-\lambda$
    Explore

    Decay equations (α, β, γ)

    Choose a decay type; the daughter nuclide is fixed so the nucleon number A and the proton number Z both balance.

    Explore

    Half-life — watch the nuclei decay

    Each nucleus has a fixed chance of decaying, at random. Move time forward: about half the remaining nuclei decay every half-life — so the count halves, then halves again.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    half-life 半衰期 bàn shuāi qī
    decay constant 衰变常数 shuāi biàn cháng shù
    activity 活度 huó dù
    random 随机 suí jī
    spontaneous 自发 zì fā
    count rate 计数率 jì shù lǜ
    Geiger counter 盖革计数器 gài gé jì shù qì
    radionuclide 放射性核素 fàng shè xìng hé sù
    becquerel 贝克勒尔 bèi kè lēi ěr
    exponential decay 指数衰减 zhǐ shù shuāi jiǎn
    background radiation 本底辐射 běn dǐ fú shè
    tracers 示踪剂 shì zōng jì
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    23.2

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    mass defect the difference between the total mass of the separate nucleons and the mass of the nucleus
    binding energy the minimum energy needed to separate a nucleus into its individual nucleons (the energy released when it forms from them)
    nuclear fusion two light nuclei combine to form a single heavier nucleus
    nuclear fission a heavy nucleus splits into two lighter nuclei of similar mass (usually after absorbing a neutron)
    radioactive decay the spontaneous and random emission of α, β or γ radiation from an unstable nucleus
    spontaneous not affected by external factors such as temperature, pressure or chemical state
    random it cannot be predicted which nucleus will decay, or when a given nucleus will decay
    activity the number of nuclei decaying per unit time
    decay constant the probability per unit time that a nucleus decays
    half-life the time for the number of undecayed nuclei (or the activity) to fall to half its initial value
    23.2

    Exam tips

    • $E = mc^{2}$ with $1\ \text{u} = 931.5\ \text{MeV}$: work in u and MeV for reactions, then convert to joules only if asked ($1\ \text{MeV} = 1.60 \times 10^{-13}\ \text{J}$).
    • Energy released $=$ (total mass before $-$ total mass after) $\times c^{2}$, or (binding energy after $-$ binding energy before). Mass defects can be subtracted directly when the nucleon count is unchanged.
    • The curve: steep rise, peak $8.8\ \text{MeV}$ near $A = 56$, gentle fall. Products higher on the curve means energy released; fusion on the left, fission (and α-decay) on the right.
    • Balance every equation twice: nucleon numbers along the top, proton numbers along the bottom; β decays carry a neutrino or antineutrino.
    • $A = \lambda N$, $\lambda = 0.693/t_{1/2}$ with $t_{1/2}$ in seconds; $N$ from mass: $N = m/(A u)$. Ratios of $1/2$, $1/4$, $1/8$ mean whole half-lives; otherwise $t = \ln(x_{0}/x)/\lambda$.
    • Explanations are marked on the words: constant probability, rate proportional to number, same fraction per interval; fluctuating count rate for randomness; unaffected by external conditions for spontaneous.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining binding energy as "the energy holding the nucleus together" or "the energy stored in the nucleus"; it is the energy to separate the nucleons.
    • Subtracting masses the wrong way round and reporting a negative energy release, or forgetting the neutron(s) on one side of a fission equation.
    • Drawing the binding-energy curve falling as steeply as it rises, or reaching zero at large $A$.
    • Using a half-life in minutes or years with an activity in becquerels; convert to seconds first.
    • Confusing the decay constant (a probability per second) with the activity (decays per second).
    • Saying "half the sample disappears" for a half-life, or that after two half-lives nothing is left.
    • Giving "random" as "it happens at any time" without "cannot predict which nucleus or when", or "spontaneous" without "unaffected by external factors".
    • Treating the count rate as the activity, or forgetting to subtract background.
    • Assuming the α-particle and the recoil nucleus share the energy equally; they share the momentum equally.
  • 24

    Medical physics

    24.1

    Ultrasound

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a piezo-electric crystal changes shape when a p.d. is applied across it and that the crystal generates an e.m.f. when its shape changes
    2. understand how ultrasound waves are generated and detected by a piezoelectric transducer
    3. understand how the reflection of pulses of ultrasound at boundaries between tissues can be used to obtain diagnostic information about internal structures
    4. define the specific acoustic impedance of a medium as $Z = \rho c$, where $c$ is the speed of sound in the medium
    5. use $I_{\text{R}} / I_0 = (Z_1 - Z_2)^2 / (Z_1 + Z_2)^2$ for the intensity reflection coefficient of a boundary between two media
    6. recall and use $I = I_0 e^{-\mu x}$ for the attenuation of ultrasound in matter

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Piezo-electric effect

    A piezo-electric 压电 crystal changes shape a little when a p.d. is put across it, and the reverse: it makes an electromotive force 电动势 (e.m.f.) across itself when its shape is changed. Quartz and PZT are common examples. Two linked effects:

    Applying a p.d. changes the crystal's shape; squeezing the crystal makes an e.m.f.
    Applying a p.d. deforms the crystal; squeezing it makes a p.d.
    • apply a p.d. → the crystal changes shape (used to make vibrations).
    • change the shape (a wave squeezes it) → an e.m.f. appears (used to detect vibrations).

    Piezo-electric transducer

    A transducer 换能器 uses this effect to both make and detect ultrasound 超声波.

    • an alternating p.d. (a few MHz) makes the crystal vibrate at the same frequency, sending out longitudinal 纵波 waves above $20\ \text{kHz}$ ($1$$10\ \text{MHz}$ for medical imaging).
    • the same crystal then detects: returning ultrasound makes it vibrate and produce an e.m.f.

    Generating ultrasound (three marks). (1) An alternating p.d. is applied across the crystal. (2) The crystal changes shape, expanding and contracting at the frequency of the p.d., so it vibrates. (3) The p.d. is chosen at the crystal's resonant frequency, so the vibration is large and the crystal's faces push on the tissue, sending out a longitudinal wave of that frequency. Detecting ultrasound (two marks). The returning wave's pressure variations change the shape of the crystal; a changing shape generates an e.m.f. across it, alternating at the frequency of the wave, which is amplified and recorded. The same crystal is used for both, switched between transmitting and receiving.

    So one transducer is both emitter and detector, switching between sending and listening.

    A cut-away of an ultrasound transducer: a coaxial cable feeding a piezo-electric crystal with electrodes, backing material behind it, a plastic cover and lens in front, all inside an earthed metal case
    A piezo-electric transducer both sends and detects ultrasound using a vibrating crystal

    Pulse-echo imaging

    To see inside the body (pulse-echo 脉冲回波 imaging):

    1. the transducer sends a short pulse into the body.
    2. at each tissue boundary, part of the pulse is reflected and part goes on.
    3. the transducer detects each reflected pulse.
    4. the time delay gives the depth: $d = c t / 2$ (there and back). The echo's amplitude gives the strength of the reflection.

    Worked example. An ultrasound pulse returns to the transducer $60\ \mu\text{s}$ after it was sent. The speed of sound in the tissue is $1500\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the depth of the reflecting boundary.

    The pulse travels there and back, so $d = \dfrac{ct}{2}$:

    $$d = \frac{1500 \times 60 \times 10^{-6}}{2} = 0.045\ \text{m}\ (= 4.5\ \text{cm}).$$
    1. sweeping across the body builds a 2-D image.
    An ultrasound machine screen showing a fan-shaped grey scan of a 20-week fetus in profile
    A real ultrasound image — the fan shape comes from the transducer sweeping across the body. Every bright speck is an echo from a boundary between tissues, and its depth was worked out from the echo's time delay, exactly as in the worked example above

    A coupling gel 耦合剂 is put between the transducer and the skin to push out the air; without it almost all the ultrasound would reflect at the skin–air boundary and never enter the body.

    An A-scan trace on an oscilloscope: a large transmitted pulse, then smaller echo pulses from the fat–muscle boundary and the muscle–bone boundary at later times
    An A-scan shows the transmitted pulse and the echoes from each tissue boundary

    "Outline the use of ultrasound to obtain diagnostic information" (four marks). (1) A pulse of ultrasound is sent into the body by the transducer, which is coupled to the skin with gel. (2) At each boundary between tissues part of the pulse is reflected; the reflected pulse returns to the transducer and is detected. (3) The time delay between emission and echo, with the speed of sound, gives the depth of the boundary ($d = ct/2$). (4) The intensity of the echo, set by the change in acoustic impedance at the boundary, shows what kind of boundary it is. Sweeping the transducer, or using an array, builds up an image.

    Why pulses, and why megahertz. The transducer sends a short pulse and then listens: the echo from every boundary must arrive before the next pulse leaves, otherwise echoes from different pulses could not be told apart, and the crystal cannot transmit and receive at the same moment. The frequency is a compromise: a higher frequency means a shorter wavelength and so finer detail (resolution 分辨率), but it is attenuated more strongly, so a deep organ needs a lower frequency than a shallow one. Typical medical scanning uses $1$$15\ \text{MHz}$, wavelengths of a fraction of a millimetre in tissue.

    Specific acoustic impedance

    The specific acoustic impedance 声阻抗 of a medium is

    $$Z = \rho c,$$

    where $\rho$ is the density 密度 and $c$ the speed of sound. Unit: $\text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. Bone has large $Z$; air has small $Z$; soft tissue is in between.

    Worked example. Find the specific acoustic impedance of soft tissue. (Density $1060\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, speed of sound $1540\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.)

    $$Z = \rho c = 1060 \times 1540 \approx 1.6 \times 10^{6}\ \text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}.$$

    The definition (two marks). The specific acoustic impedance of a medium is the product of its density and the speed of sound in it. Both quantities must be named; "how hard sound finds it to pass" scores nothing. Because $Z$ combines density and speed, two media with very different densities can still have similar $Z$ (water and soft tissue), and it is $Z$, not density alone, that decides how much sound reflects.

    Reflection at a boundary

    At a boundary between media of impedance $Z_{1}$ and $Z_{2}$, the intensity reflection coefficient 强度反射系数 (fraction reflected) is

    $$\frac{I_{\text{R}}}{I_{0}} = \left(\frac{Z_{1} - Z_{2}}{Z_{1} + Z_{2}}\right)^{2}.$$
    • very different impedances: almost all is reflected (skin/air — hence the gel).
    • very similar impedances: almost nothing is reflected, so the boundary cannot be seen.
    • best for imaging: different enough to give an echo, but not so different that nothing passes on.
    At a boundary between media of acoustic impedance Z1 and Z2, the incident pulse splits into a reflected part and a transmitted part; the bigger the impedance difference, the bigger the reflected echo
    At a boundary, part of the pulse reflects and part transmits — a bigger impedance difference gives a bigger echo

    Worked example (why gel). Air: density $1.29\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, speed of sound $343\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Gel: $Z = 1.50 \times 10^{6}\ \text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. Soft tissue: $Z = 1.63 \times 10^{6}\ \text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. Find the intensity reflection coefficient at an air–tissue boundary and at a gel–tissue boundary.

    $Z_{\text{air}} = 1.29 \times 343 = 442\ \text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. Air–tissue: $\left(\dfrac{442 - 1.63 \times 10^{6}}{442 + 1.63 \times 10^{6}}\right)^{2} = 0.9989$: $99.9\%$ of the intensity reflects and only $0.1\%$ enters the body. Gel–tissue: $\left(\dfrac{1.50 - 1.63}{1.50 + 1.63}\right)^{2} = 0.0017$: only $0.2\%$ reflects. So the gel, whose impedance is close to that of skin, replaces the air layer that would otherwise reflect nearly everything, and almost all of the pulse enters the body (and the echoes can get back out again by the same route).

    Worked example. Water: density $1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, speed $1480\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Glass: density $2500\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, speed $5600\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. What fraction of the intensity is reflected at a water–glass boundary?

    $Z_{\text{water}} = 1.48 \times 10^{6}$, $Z_{\text{glass}} = 1.40 \times 10^{7}\ \text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. Coefficient $= \left(\dfrac{1.48 - 14.0}{1.48 + 14.0}\right)^{2} = 0.65$: two-thirds reflected, one-third transmitted. Working in units of $10^{6}$ keeps the arithmetic clean, since the ratio is what matters. A steel implant in tissue ($Z_{\text{steel}} = 4.7 \times 10^{7}$) gives $0.87$: nearly all the pulse reflects from its surface, so nothing behind it can be imaged, but the implant itself shows up very brightly.

    Attenuation

    As ultrasound goes through tissue, its intensity falls with distance:

    $$I = I_{0} e^{-\mu x},$$

    where $\mu$ is the attenuation coefficient 衰减系数 (unit $\text{m}^{-1}$). The same form applies to X-rays.

    A graph of intensity against thickness: both curves fall exponentially, but soft tissue with a small attenuation coefficient falls slowly while bone with a large coefficient falls off fast
    Intensity falls exponentially with thickness; a larger attenuation coefficient (bone) falls off faster
    The intensity budget of one echo: the pulse is attenuated on its way to a boundary, a fraction alpha of what arrives is reflected, and the echo is attenuated again on the way back, so the received intensity is alpha times I0 times e to the minus 2 mu x
    One echo, three factors: attenuation in, reflection, attenuation out. The tissue is crossed twice, so the exponent doubles

    Worked example (an echo's intensity). A pulse of intensity $I_{0}$ passes through $4.0\ \text{cm}$ of tissue with attenuation coefficient $0.50\ \text{cm}^{-1}$ to a boundary whose intensity reflection coefficient is $0.010$. Find the intensity of the echo returning to the transducer, as a fraction of $I_{0}$.

    To the boundary: $e^{-\mu x} = e^{-0.50 \times 4.0} = 0.135$. Reflected: $\times 0.010$. Back through the same $4.0\ \text{cm}$: $\times 0.135$ again. Echo: $I/I_{0} = 0.135 \times 0.010 \times 0.135 = 1.8 \times 10^{-4}$, about $0.02\%$. Two things the examiner checks: the tissue is crossed twice, and the reflection coefficient multiplies the intensity at the boundary, not $I_{0}$. This is why echoes from deep boundaries are amplified more than shallow ones before display.

    Explore

    Ultrasound scan route

    Follow a pulse from transducer to echo image.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    ultrasound 超声波 chāo shēng bō
    piezo-electric 压电 yā diàn
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    transducer 换能器 huàn néng qì
    longitudinal 纵波 zòng bō
    pulse-echo 脉冲回波 mài chōng huí bō
    coupling gel 耦合剂 ǒu hé jì
    resolution 分辨率 fēn biàn lǜ
    specific acoustic impedance 声阻抗 shēng zǔ kàng
    density 密度 mì dù
    intensity reflection coefficient 强度反射系数 qiáng dù fǎn shè xì shù
    attenuation coefficient 衰减系数 shuāi jiǎn xì shù
    Exercise sheet
    24.2

    X-rays

    Syllabus
    1. explain that X-rays are produced by electron bombardment of a metal target and calculate the minimum wavelength of X-rays produced from the accelerating p.d.
    2. understand the use of X-rays in imaging internal body structures, including an understanding of the term contrast in X-ray imaging
    3. recall and use $I = I_0 e^{-\mu x}$ for the attenuation of X-rays in matter
    4. understand that computed tomography (CT) scanning produces a 3D image of an internal structure by first combining multiple X-ray images taken in the same section from different angles to obtain a 2D image of the section, then repeating this process along an axis and combining 2D images of multiple sections

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Production

    X-rays come from an X-ray tube X射线管:

    1. a heated cathode 阴极 emits electrons by thermionic emission 热电子发射.
    2. a high p.d. (tens to hundreds of kV) accelerates the electrons across a vacuum 真空 to a metal target (the anode 阳极, often tungsten).
    3. the electrons hit the target and slow sharply. Most of their kinetic energy 动能 becomes heat; a small part is emitted as X-ray photons 光子 (Bremsstrahlung 轫致辐射, "braking radiation"). Some electrons knock out inner electrons of the metal atoms, and the refilling emits characteristic 特征 X-ray lines.
    A diagram of an X-ray tube: a heated metal filament (cathode) driven by a low voltage, a high voltage accelerating electrons across an evacuated tube to a metal anode with an angled tungsten target, and X-rays leaving the target
    In an X-ray tube electrons from the heated cathode are accelerated onto a metal target anode

    "Explain how X-rays are produced" (four marks). (1) Electrons are emitted from a heated filament (cathode) by thermionic emission. (2) They are accelerated through a high potential difference (tens of kV) across an evacuated tube towards a metal target (the anode). (3) They decelerate rapidly when they strike the target, and (4) the kinetic energy lost is emitted as X-ray photons (with most of it becoming heat in the target, which is why the anode is cooled or rotated).

    Controlling the beam. The intensity (energy per unit area per second) is set by the number of electrons hitting the target per second, so it is controlled by the filament current (a hotter filament emits more electrons); the hardness 硬度, meaning the penetrating power, is set by the photon energies, so it is controlled by the accelerating p.d.: a larger p.d. gives higher-energy, shorter-wavelength, more penetrating X-rays. A metal filter removes the softest X-rays, which would be absorbed in the patient's skin without reaching the detector.

    Worked example (heating of the target). In a tube run at $75\ \text{kV}$ the electron beam current is $30\ \text{mA}$ and $99\%$ of the electrons' energy becomes heat in a tungsten target of mass $15\ \text{g}$ (specific heat capacity $134\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$). Find the rate of temperature rise if no heat were lost.

    Power delivered $= IV = 0.030 \times 75\,000 = 2250\ \text{W}$; heating power $= 0.99 \times 2250 = 2230\ \text{W}$. Then $mc\,\Delta\theta/\Delta t = 2230$, so $\Delta\theta/\Delta t = 2230/(0.015 \times 134) = 1.1 \times 10^{3}\ \text{K s}^{-1}$. A target would melt within seconds, which is why exposures are short and anodes rotate to spread the heat.

    Minimum wavelength

    The most energy one X-ray photon can have is the full kinetic energy of one accelerated electron, lost in a single event. For accelerating p.d. $V$, the KE is $eV$, so

    $$h f_{\text{max}} = e V, \qquad \lambda_{\text{min}} = \frac{h c}{e V}.$$

    This is the short-wavelength cut-off. The continuous Bremsstrahlung spectrum tails off above $\lambda_{\text{min}}$, with sharp characteristic peaks set by the target metal.

    A graph of X-ray intensity against wavelength: a continuous curve starting abruptly at a minimum wavelength , rising to a broad maximum and tailing off, with a few sharp characteristic peaks superimposed
    A typical X-ray spectrum — a continuous Bremsstrahlung curve cut off at $\lambda_0$, with sharp characteristic peaks

    Worked example (minimum wavelength). Electrons are accelerated through $75\ \text{kV}$. Find the maximum photon energy and the minimum wavelength of the X-rays.

    Maximum energy $= eV = 75\ \text{keV} = 75\,000 \times 1.60 \times 10^{-19} = 1.2 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{J}$ (or $0.075\ \text{MeV}$). Then $\lambda_{\text{min}} = hc/(eV) = (6.63 \times 10^{-34})(3.00 \times 10^{8})/(1.2 \times 10^{-14}) = 1.7 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{m}$. The maximum photon momentum is $p = E/c = 4.0 \times 10^{-23}\ \text{N s}$. Doubling the p.d. halves the minimum wavelength.

    Explaining the shape of the spectrum. The spectrum is continuous because each electron may lose any fraction of its energy in one or several decelerations, so photons of every energy up to the maximum are produced. It has a sharp cut-off at $\lambda_{\text{min}}$ because a photon cannot carry more energy than one electron has, $eV$, and that happens only when an electron loses all its energy in a single event. The peaks are characteristic of the target metal: an incoming electron knocks an inner electron out of a target atom, and an outer electron falls into the vacancy, emitting a photon whose energy is the difference between the two levels (Topic 22).

    Imaging with X-rays

    X-rays pass through the patient onto a detector. Tissues that attenuate 衰减 more (bone, high $Z$) cast a stronger shadow and look lighter; tissues that attenuate less (soft tissue, lung) look darker.

    The contrast 对比度 is the difference in attenuation between tissues. A contrast medium 造影剂 (e.g. a barium meal) can be given to make soft tissues stand out.

    A front-view chest X-ray showing white ribs, spine and the heart shadow against the dark grey of the air-filled lungs
    A real chest X-ray: dense bone absorbs more X-rays and looks white; the air-filled lungs let X-rays through and look dark

    Sharpness and contrast. Sharpness 清晰度 is how well defined the edges of structures are in the image: a small X-ray source (a small spot on the target), a stationary patient and a detector close to the patient all improve it. Contrast is the difference in degree of blackening (or brightness) between neighbouring regions of the image, produced by a difference in attenuation. The two are independent: an image can be sharp but have poor contrast, or the reverse.

    The same X-ray beam falling on equal thicknesses of soft tissue and bone: the soft tissue transmits over half the intensity and exposes the detector, while the bone transmits under a fifth, so the two regions of the image differ strongly
    Contrast is a difference in attenuation: bone attenuates about three times more strongly than soft tissue per centimetre, so equal thicknesses give very different exposures

    "Explain why X-ray images of internal structures have good contrast." Bone and soft tissue have very different attenuation coefficients, so equal thicknesses transmit very different intensities and the detector is exposed very differently behind each. Where two soft tissues have similar coefficients (the stomach and its surroundings), a contrast medium with a high attenuation coefficient, such as barium, is swallowed or injected to outline one of them. Using a lower p.d. (softer X-rays) also increases contrast, at the cost of a larger dose.

    Worked example. X-rays pass through $3.0\ \text{cm}$ of soft tissue ($\mu = 0.20\ \text{cm}^{-1}$) in one region of the body and $3.0\ \text{cm}$ of bone ($\mu = 0.60\ \text{cm}^{-1}$) in another. Compare the transmitted intensities.

    Soft tissue: $I/I_{0} = e^{-0.20 \times 3.0} = e^{-0.60} = 0.55$. Bone: $e^{-0.60 \times 3.0} = e^{-1.80} = 0.17$. The soft-tissue region receives more than three times the exposure of the bone region, so the bone appears white and the tissue dark. The ratio of exposures, $e^{(\mu_{\text{bone}} - \mu_{\text{tissue}})x}$, grows with thickness: contrast improves for thicker structures, but so does the total attenuation.

    Attenuation law

    $$I = I_{0} e^{-\mu x}.$$

    Higher-energy X-rays penetrate further (smaller $\mu$); bone has a much larger $\mu$ than soft tissue. To find the thickness for a given fraction, take logs: $x = \dfrac{1}{\mu} \ln\dfrac{I_{0}}{I}$. The half-value thickness 半值厚度 $x_{1/2} = \ln 2 / \mu$ halves the intensity (like half-life in decay).

    Worked example. X-rays pass through $3.0\ \text{cm}$ of tissue with attenuation coefficient $\mu = 40\ \text{m}^{-1}$. Find the fraction of the intensity that gets through.

    $$\frac{I}{I_{0}} = e^{-\mu x} = e^{-40 \times 0.030} = e^{-1.2} \approx 0.30.$$

    Worked example (percentage absorbed). X-rays pass through $2.8\ \text{cm}$ of a medium with attenuation coefficient $1.4\ \text{cm}^{-1}$. What percentage of the X-ray energy is absorbed?

    Transmitted fraction $e^{-1.4 \times 2.8} = e^{-3.92} = 0.020$, so $98\%$ is absorbed. The question asks for what is absorbed, not what gets through: read it twice. The half-value thickness here is $\ln 2/\mu = 0.50\ \text{cm}$, so $2.8\ \text{cm}$ is $5.6$ half-value thicknesses and $(1/2)^{5.6} = 0.02$ checks the answer.

    Worked example (two layers). A beam of intensity $I_{0}$ passes through $2.0\ \text{cm}$ of material P ($\mu = 0.35\ \text{cm}^{-1}$) and then $1.5\ \text{cm}$ of material Q ($\mu = 0.90\ \text{cm}^{-1}$). Find the transmitted intensity.

    The exponentials multiply: $I = I_{0}\, e^{-0.35 \times 2.0}\, e^{-0.90 \times 1.5} = I_{0}\, e^{-(0.70 + 1.35)} = I_{0}\, e^{-2.05} = 0.13\, I_{0}$. Add the exponents ($\mu_{1}x_{1} + \mu_{2}x_{2}$); never add the thicknesses or the coefficients. The order of the layers makes no difference to the total transmitted intensity.

    Computed tomography (CT)

    A computed tomography 计算机断层扫描 (CT) scan builds a 3-D image:

    1. the tube and detectors rotate around the patient, taking many images of one thin slice from different angles.
    2. a computer combines these into a 2-D cross-section of the slice.
    3. the patient is moved along, and the next slice is imaged.
    4. the slices are stacked into a 3-D image.

    CT shows far more than a single X-ray, because overlapping soft tissues are separated by the many-angle reconstruction.

    A CT-scan arrangement: a fan of X-ray beams passes through the patient's body to a curved array of X-ray detectors on the far side, and the tube and detectors rotate around the patient
    In a CT scan the X-ray tube and detectors rotate around the patient to image a slice from many angles

    "Explain how CT scanning produces a three-dimensional image" (five marks). (1) The X-ray tube (and a ring of detectors) rotates around the patient, so that (2) many X-ray images of one slice (section) are taken from different angles. (3) A computer combines them to produce a two-dimensional image of that slice. (4) The patient is moved and the process is repeated for successive slices. (5) The slices are combined to build a 3-D image, which can be rotated and viewed from any angle. Purpose: to image a section of the body without the overlapping of structures that a single X-ray suffers, revealing structures that would be hidden and their positions in depth. The price is a much larger dose than a single X-ray.

    Explore

    X-ray production route

    Follow electrons from cathode to X-ray photons.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    X-ray tube X射线管 X shè xiàn guǎn
    cathode 阴极 yīn jí
    thermionic emission 热电子发射 rè diàn zi fā shè
    vacuum 真空 zhēn kōng
    target
    anode 阳极 yáng jí
    tungsten
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    photon 光子 guāng zi
    Bremsstrahlung 轫致辐射 rèn zhì fú shè
    characteristic 特征 tè zhēng
    hardness 硬度 yìng dù
    attenuate 衰减 shuāi jiǎn
    contrast 对比度 duì bǐ dù
    contrast medium 造影剂 zào yǐng jì
    sharpness 清晰度 qīng xī dù
    half-value thickness 半值厚度 bàn zhí hòu dù
    computed tomography 计算机断层扫描 jì suàn jī duàn céng sǎo miáo
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    24.3

    PET scanning

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a tracer is a substance containing radioactive nuclei that can be introduced into the body and is then absorbed by the tissue being studied
    2. recall that a tracer that decays by $\beta^+$ decay is used in positron emission tomography (PET scanning)
    3. understand that annihilation occurs when a particle interacts with its antiparticle and that mass–energy and momentum are conserved in the process
    4. explain that, in PET scanning, positrons emitted by the decay of the tracer annihilate when they interact with electrons in the tissue, producing a pair of gamma-ray photons travelling in opposite directions
    5. calculate the energy of the gamma-ray photons emitted during the annihilation of an electron-positron pair
    6. understand that the gamma-ray photons from an annihilation event travel outside the body and can be detected, and an image of the tracer concentration in the tissue can be created by processing the arrival times of the gamma-ray photons

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Tracer

    A tracer 示踪剂 is a substance with radioactive nuclei put into the body. It is taken up more by the tissue being studied (e.g. a tumour takes up more glucose-tagged tracer due to its high metabolism 代谢). Its decay is detected from outside.

    In positron emission tomography 正电子发射断层扫描 (PET), the tracer is a $\beta^{+}$ emitter — it gives out a positron 正电子. A common one is fluorine-18 on a glucose analogue (FDG).

    "Explain what is meant by a tracer and how it is used" (three marks). A tracer is a substance containing radioactive nuclei (for PET, a $\beta^{+}$ emitter such as fluorine-18) that is introduced into the body (injected or swallowed), usually bound to a molecule such as glucose, and is absorbed by the tissue being studied; the radiation it emits leaves the body and is detected, so its distribution shows where that tissue is active. The nuclide is chosen with a short half-life, so the activity is high during the scan and the patient's dose afterwards is small, but not so short that it decays before it reaches the tissue: fluorine-18 ($110$ minutes) and oxygen-15 ($2$ minutes, made and used on the spot) are typical.

    Annihilation

    When a particle meets its antiparticle 反粒子 they annihilate 湮灭: their mass turns into electromagnetic energy. In PET:

    • a positron travels a few mm before meeting an electron 电子.
    • they annihilate. Energy and momentum 动量 are conserved.
    • since the total momentum is about zero, two photons are produced going in opposite directions, each $511\ \text{keV}$ ($= m_{e} c^{2}$).
    In PET a positron and electron annihilate inside a detector ring, producing two 511 keV photons that fly off in opposite directions; the two simultaneous arrivals (a coincidence) fix the line the annihilation lay on
    PET: annihilation gives two 511 keV photons in opposite directions; a coincidence fixes the line

    Energy of the annihilation photons

    By energy conservation, the total photon energy equals the pair's rest energy 能量:

    $$2 h f = 2 m_{e} c^{2}, \qquad h f = m_{e} c^{2}.$$

    Each photon has $h f = m_{e} c^{2} \approx 8.2 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{J} \approx 0.51\ \text{MeV}$, with $\lambda \approx 2.4 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{m}$.

    Explaining the annihilation (four marks). (1) The positron emitted by the tracer travels a short distance and meets an electron in the tissue. (2) The pair annihilates: their mass is converted to energy, (3) emitted as two gamma-ray photons, since (4) momentum must be conserved: the pair had almost no momentum, so the two photons must travel in opposite directions with equal momenta. Each photon carries the rest energy of one particle, $0.51\ \text{MeV}$; a single photon could not conserve momentum.

    Worked example. Find the total energy released when a positron and an electron, each moving slowly, annihilate, and the wavelength of each photon.

    $E = 2m_{\text{e}}c^{2} = 2 \times 9.11 \times 10^{-31} \times (3.00 \times 10^{8})^{2} = 1.64 \times 10^{-13}\ \text{J}$ ($1.02\ \text{MeV}$), shared equally: $8.2 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{J}$ each. $\lambda = hc/E = (6.63 \times 10^{-34})(3.00 \times 10^{8})/(8.2 \times 10^{-14}) = 2.4 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{m}$, a gamma ray. If instead the electron and positron each move at $4.9 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ in opposite directions, each has kinetic energy $\tfrac{1}{2}mv^{2} = 1.1 \times 10^{-15}\ \text{J}$, about $1\%$ of its rest energy, and the photons carry $8.3 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{J}$ each: the rest energy dominates, which is why the annihilation photons always have very nearly the same energy.

    Reconstructing the image

    The two photons leave the body in opposite directions and hit detector rings around the patient. Recording the two simultaneous arrivals (a "coincidence") fixes the line the annihilation happened on. Many coincidences from many angles let the computer build a 3-D map of the tracer — showing tissues with high metabolic activity. Comparing the two arrival times can refine the position along that line (time-of-flight PET).

    A coloured PET slice of the brain: a blue background with a ring of yellow and red marking where the glucose tracer collected most
    A finished PET image of the brain: warm colours (red, yellow) mark where the tracer collected -- the most active tissue
    A ring of gamma detectors around a patient: the two photons from an annihilation off centre reach opposite detectors A and B, one slightly later than the other; the pair fixes the line, and the arrival-time difference fixes the position along it
    Locating an annihilation: two photons detected together fix the line, and the difference in their arrival times fixes where on the line

    "Explain how the gamma photons are used to form an image" (four marks). (1) The two photons leave the body in opposite directions and are detected by the ring of detectors. (2) Two photons arriving at (almost) the same time are taken to come from one annihilation, which therefore lies on the line joining the two detectors. (3) The small difference in arrival times gives the position along that line ($d = c\,\Delta t/2$ from the midpoint; a $1\ \text{ns}$ difference is $15\ \text{cm}$, so the timing must be very precise). (4) A computer collects many such events and maps the concentration of tracer in the tissue, producing an image; a higher concentration means more active tissue, such as a tumour. Photons that arrive singly (their partner absorbed in the body) are rejected.

    Explore

    PET scan route

    Follow positron emission to a ring of detected photons.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    tracer 示踪剂 shì zōng jì
    metabolism 代谢 dài xiè
    positron emission tomography 正电子发射断层扫描 zhèng diàn zi fā shè duàn céng sǎo miáo
    positron 正电子 zhèng diàn zi
    antiparticle 反粒子 fǎn lì zi
    annihilate 湮灭 yān miè
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    24.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    piezo-electric effect a crystal changes shape when a p.d. is applied across it, and generates an e.m.f. when its shape is changed
    specific acoustic impedance the product of the density of a medium and the speed of sound in it, $Z = \rho c$
    intensity reflection coefficient the fraction of the incident intensity reflected at a boundary, $(Z_{1} - Z_{2})^{2}/(Z_{1} + Z_{2})^{2}$
    attenuation coefficient the constant $\mu$ in $I = I_{0}e^{-\mu x}$; the larger it is, the faster the intensity falls with thickness
    hardness (of X-rays) the penetrating power of the beam, set by the photon energies (the accelerating p.d.)
    contrast the difference in degree of blackening between neighbouring regions of an image
    sharpness how well defined the edges of structures are in an image
    CT scanning X-ray images of one section taken from many angles are combined by computer into a 2-D image of the slice; successive slices give a 3-D image
    tracer a substance containing radioactive nuclei that is introduced into the body and absorbed by the tissue under study
    annihilation a particle and its antiparticle interact and their mass is converted to energy (photons), with mass–energy and momentum conserved
    24.3

    Exam tips

    • Ultrasound: pulse in, echo back; depth $= ct/2$ (there and back); $Z = \rho c$; reflection coefficient from the two impedances; gel matches impedance to the skin. Attenuation is exponential and an echo crosses the tissue twice.
    • X-rays: production is heated filament, high p.d., sudden deceleration at the target; intensity by filament current, hardness by p.d.; $\lambda_{\text{min}} = hc/(eV)$; $I = I_{0}e^{-\mu x}$ with exponents added for layers; contrast is a difference in $\mu$.
    • CT: many angles, one slice, computer, successive slices, 3-D. Say all five.
    • PET: $\beta^{+}$ tracer, annihilation with an electron, two $0.51\ \text{MeV}$ photons in opposite directions (momentum), coincidence gives the line, timing gives the position.
    • Know the three "explain" answers word for word: how the crystal generates and detects, how X-rays are produced, how the photons locate the tracer.
    • Write units with every impedance ($\text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}$) and coefficient ($\text{cm}^{-1}$ or $\text{m}^{-1}$), and convert $\text{cm}$ to $\text{m}$ only if $\mu$ is in $\text{m}^{-1}$.

    Common mistakes

    • Forgetting the factor of 2 in the depth of a reflecting boundary, or the second pass through the tissue in an echo's intensity.
    • Defining acoustic impedance as "the resistance to sound" instead of density times speed of sound.
    • Quoting the reflection coefficient for gel–skin as "zero"; it is small, and that is the point.
    • Saying the p.d. controls the intensity of the X-ray beam, or that the filament current controls the hardness; it is the other way round.
    • Explaining the minimum wavelength without saying that one electron gives all its kinetic energy to a single photon.
    • Adding thicknesses of different materials before applying $e^{-\mu x}$; add the products $\mu x$ instead.
    • Describing CT as "an X-ray from several angles" without the computer reconstruction, the slice, or the successive slices.
    • Giving one photon for annihilation, or two photons in the same direction; momentum conservation demands two in opposite directions.
    • Confusing the tracer's half-life reasoning: short so that the dose is small, but long enough to reach the tissue and be scanned.
  • 25

    Astronomy and cosmology

    25.1

    Luminosity and radiant flux intensity

    Syllabus
    1. understand the term luminosity as the total power of radiation emitted by a star
    2. recall and use the inverse square law for radiant flux intensity $F$ in terms of the luminosity $L$ of the source $F = L / (4\pi d^2)$
    3. understand that an object of known luminosity is called a standard candle
    4. understand the use of standard candles to determine distances to galaxies

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The luminosity 光度 $L$ of a star is the total power 功率 of radiation it gives out — the energy 能量 radiated per second in all directions. Unit: watt (W).

    The one-mark definition. The luminosity of a star is the total power of radiation emitted by the star (or the total energy emitted per unit time). It is a property of the star alone; how bright it looks from the Earth depends also on how far away it is. Asked for two reasons why some stars appear brighter than others, give exactly those two: a greater luminosity, and a smaller distance (the flux falls as $1/d^{2}$).

    At distance $d$, this power has spread over a sphere of area $4\pi d^{2}$. The radiant flux intensity 辐射通量密度 $F$ (power per unit area) at distance $d$ is

    $$F = \frac{L}{4\pi d^{2}}.$$

    Worked example. The Sun's luminosity is $L = 3.8 \times 10^{26}\ \text{W}$. Find the radiant flux intensity at the Earth, a distance $d = 1.5 \times 10^{11}\ \text{m}$ away.

    $$F = \frac{L}{4\pi d^{2}} = \frac{3.8 \times 10^{26}}{4\pi (1.5 \times 10^{11})^{2}} \approx 1.4 \times 10^{3}\ \text{W m}^{-2}.$$

    Unit: $\text{W m}^{-2}$. This is the inverse-square law 平方反比定律 for flux: doubling the distance cuts the flux to a quarter. A telescope measures $F$; if $L$ is known, the distance follows:

    $$d = \sqrt{\frac{L}{4\pi F}}.$$
    Three large telescope domes silhouetted on a mountain ridge at dusk against a pink sky, with a huge orange full Moon rising directly behind them
    The four units of ESO's Very Large Telescope in Chile, used to measure the flux from distant stars
    A point source of power L emits light through square patches at distances d, 2d and 3d; the patch area grows as the square of the distance (A, 4A, 9A), so the flux per unit area falls as the square of the distance (F, F/4, F/9)
    The same power spreads over a larger area as distance grows, so flux falls as $1/d^{2}$
    Radiant flux intensity plotted against one over distance squared for a single star: the points lie on a straight line through the origin whose gradient is the luminosity divided by four pi
    Plot $F$ against $1/d^{2}$ and the inverse-square law becomes a straight line through the origin; its gradient is $L/4\pi$

    Reading the graph. A graph of $F$ against $1/d^{2}$ for one star is a straight line through the origin with gradient $L/4\pi$, so $L = 4\pi \times \text{gradient}$; a more luminous star gives a steeper line. A star whose galaxy is receding still obeys the inverse-square law, but the light we receive is redshifted, so the flux at each wavelength is shifted along the spectrum, and a detector sensitive to one band may see a different fraction of it.

    Worked example. The Sun has radius $6.96 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m}$ and surface temperature $5780\ \text{K}$. A space probe carrying a $2.0\ \text{m}^{2}$ solar panel is $4.5 \times 10^{10}\ \text{m}$ from the Sun's centre. Find the power falling on the panel when it faces the Sun.

    Luminosity: $L = 4\pi\sigma r^{2}T^{4} = 4\pi(5.67 \times 10^{-8})(6.96 \times 10^{8})^{2}(5780)^{4} = 3.85 \times 10^{26}\ \text{W}$. Flux at the probe: $F = L/(4\pi d^{2}) = 3.85 \times 10^{26}/[4\pi(4.5 \times 10^{10})^{2}] = 1.5 \times 10^{4}\ \text{W m}^{-2}$, eleven times the flux at the Earth. Power on the panel: $P = FA = 1.5 \times 10^{4} \times 2.0 = 3.0 \times 10^{4}\ \text{W}$. The flux is power per unit area perpendicular to the radiation; a tilted panel receives $FA\cos\theta$.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    luminosity 光度 guāng dù
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    radiant flux intensity 辐射通量密度 fú shè tōng liàng mì dù
    inverse-square law 平方反比定律 píng fāng fǎn bǐ dìng lǜ
    Exercise sheet
    25.1

    Standard candles

    A standard candle 标准烛光 is an object whose luminosity is known from its type. Once you find one in a distant galaxy and measure the flux $F$ from it, you get its distance from $d = \sqrt{L/(4\pi F)}$.

    Examples:

    • Cepheid variables 造父变星 (pulsating stars) — the pulsation period is tightly linked to the luminosity, so the period gives $L$.
    • Type Ia supernovae 超新星 — a white dwarf reaching a critical mass and exploding always has about the same peak luminosity.

    A standard candle gives $L$ without first knowing the distance, so it reaches galaxies far beyond parallax 视差.

    The definition. A standard candle is an object (a star or a supernova) of known luminosity. The luminosity is known because it is fixed by a property that can be measured from any distance: the pulsation period of a Cepheid variable, or the type of a supernova.

    Two calculation chains as flow charts: for the distance to a galaxy, identify a standard candle to get its luminosity, measure the flux at the Earth, then use the inverse-square law; for the radius of a star, get the temperature from the peak wavelength with Wien's law, the luminosity from the flux and distance, then the radius from the Stefan–Boltzmann law
    The two recipes of this topic: a distance from a standard candle, and a radius from a spectrum and a flux. Every calculation in the exam is one of them, or a step of one

    "Explain how a standard candle is used to determine the distance of a galaxy" (three marks). (1) A standard candle in the galaxy is identified (a Cepheid variable, whose period gives its luminosity, or a Type Ia supernova) so that its luminosity $L$ is known. (2) The radiant flux intensity $F$ of its light arriving at the Earth is measured. (3) The distance follows from the inverse-square law, $d = \sqrt{L/(4\pi F)}$. The order matters: the luminosity comes from the candle's type, not from the distance, which is the thing being found.

    Worked example. A Type Ia supernova, luminosity $1.0 \times 10^{36}\ \text{W}$ at its peak, is observed with a peak flux of $2.0 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{W m}^{-2}$. How far away is its galaxy?

    $d = \sqrt{L/(4\pi F)} = \sqrt{1.0 \times 10^{36}/(4\pi \times 2.0 \times 10^{-14})} = 6.3 \times 10^{24}\ \text{m}$, about $670$ million light years 光年 ($1\ \text{ly} = 9.5 \times 10^{15}\ \text{m}$). A Cepheid, with a luminosity of order $10^{30}\ \text{W}$, could not be seen at that distance; supernovae are the candles for the far Universe.

    A spiral galaxy seen at an angle, with a bright glowing core, dust lanes winding through its disc, and two small companion galaxies nearby, set against a star field
    The Andromeda Galaxy, our nearest large galaxy, about 2.5 million light-years away — Cepheids in it are standard candles
    A log-log graph of luminosity (in units of the Sun's luminosity) against pulsation period in days for Type I Cepheid variables: the points scatter about a clear rising straight line, so a longer period means a more luminous star
    For Cepheid variables the pulsation period sets the luminosity, making them standard candles
    Explore

    Standard candle distance lab

    brightness proportional to 1 / distance^2

    Move distance and see why brightness falls quickly.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    standard candle 标准烛光 biāo zhǔn zhú guāng
    Cepheid variables 造父变星 zào fù biàn xīng
    Type Ia supernovae 超新星 chāo xīn xīng
    parallax 视差 shì chā
    light years 光年 guāng nián
    supernovae 超新星 chāo xīn xīng
    25.2

    Stellar surface temperature

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use Wien’s displacement law $\lambda_{\text{max}} \propto 1/T$ to estimate the peak surface temperature of a star
    2. use the Stefan–Boltzmann law $L = 4\pi\sigma r^2 T^4$
    3. use Wien’s displacement law and the Stefan–Boltzmann law to estimate the radius of a star

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Wien's displacement law

    A hot body gives out a continuous (blackbody 黑体) spectrum with a peak at a wavelength 波长 $\lambda_{\text{max}}$ set by its temperature 温度. Wien's displacement law 维恩位移定律:

    $$\lambda_{\text{max}} T = \text{constant}, \qquad b \approx 2.90 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m K}.$$

    Worked example. A star's blackbody spectrum peaks at $\lambda_{\text{max}} = 500\ \text{nm}$. Find its surface temperature. ($b = 2.90 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m K}$.)

    $$T = \frac{b}{\lambda_{\text{max}}} = \frac{2.90 \times 10^{-3}}{500 \times 10^{-9}} \approx 5800\ \text{K}.$$

    Hotter stars peak at shorter wavelengths: a cool red star ($\sim 3000\ \text{K}$) peaks in the infrared; the Sun ($\sim 5800\ \text{K}$) peaks near $500\ \text{nm}$; a hot blue-white star ($\sim 20{,}000\ \text{K}$) peaks in the ultraviolet. Measuring $\lambda_{\text{max}}$ gives the surface temperature.

    "State Wien's displacement law" (two marks). The wavelength at which the intensity of the radiation from a black body is a maximum is inversely proportional to its thermodynamic temperature: $\lambda_{\text{max}} \propto 1/T$, or $\lambda_{\text{max}} T = \text{constant}$ ($2.90 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m K}$). Say "wavelength of maximum intensity", not just "the wavelength", and the temperature must be in kelvin. The law describes the peak of the continuous black-body curve, not the spectral lines.

    Three towering columns of brown and gold gas and dust rising against a blue-green nebula, tipped with bright young stars and scattered points of light
    The Pillars of Creation in the Eagle Nebula — clouds of gas and dust lit by hot, newly formed stars
    Black-body intensity-against-wavelength curves at 3000 K, 6000 K and 12000 K: a hotter body has a taller curve at every wavelength and its peak lies at a shorter wavelength, with the visible range shaded
    A hotter black body radiates more, and its peak wavelength shifts towards the blue (Wien's law)

    Stefan–Boltzmann law

    A star, treated as a blackbody sphere of radius $r$ and surface temperature $T$, has luminosity

    $$L = 4\pi \sigma r^{2} T^{4},$$

    where $\sigma = 5.67 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{W m}^{-2}\ \text{K}^{-4}$ is the Stefan–Boltzmann constant 斯特藩-玻尔兹曼常量 (the Stefan–Boltzmann law 斯特藩-玻尔兹曼定律). Two strong dependences:

    • $L \propto r^{2}$ — twice the radius, four times the luminosity (same $T$).
    • $L \propto T^{4}$ — twice the temperature, sixteen times the luminosity (same $r$).

    Worked example. A star has radius $r = 7.0 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m}$ and surface temperature $T = 5800\ \text{K}$. Find its luminosity. ($\sigma = 5.67 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{W m}^{-2}\ \text{K}^{-4}$.)

    $$L = 4\pi\sigma r^{2} T^{4} = 4\pi (5.67 \times 10^{-8})(7.0 \times 10^{8})^{2}(5800)^{4} \approx 3.9 \times 10^{26}\ \text{W}.$$

    Estimating a star's radius

    Combine the two laws:

    1. measure $\lambda_{\text{max}}$ → get $T$ from Wien's law.
    2. find $L$ (e.g. from flux $F$ and distance $d$: $L = 4\pi d^{2} F$).
    3. solve the Stefan–Boltzmann law for $r$: $r = \sqrt{L/(4\pi \sigma T^{4})}$.

    This is how astronomers estimate radii of stars they cannot see as a disc.

    Worked example (the radius of the Sun). The radiant flux intensity of sunlight at the Earth is $1370\ \text{W m}^{-2}$ at a distance of $1.50 \times 10^{11}\ \text{m}$, and the Sun's spectrum peaks at $500\ \text{nm}$. Estimate the radius of the Sun.

    Luminosity: $L = 4\pi d^{2}F = 4\pi(1.50 \times 10^{11})^{2}(1370) = 3.87 \times 10^{26}\ \text{W}$. Temperature: $T = b/\lambda_{\text{max}} = 2.90 \times 10^{-3}/(500 \times 10^{-9}) = 5800\ \text{K}$. Radius: $r = \sqrt{L/(4\pi\sigma T^{4})} = \sqrt{3.87 \times 10^{26}/[4\pi(5.67 \times 10^{-8})(5800)^{4}]} = 6.9 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m}$. Three steps, each a one-line formula; keep the full precision of $L$ and $T$ until the end, because $T$ is raised to the fourth power.

    Worked example. A star in a distant galaxy has a radiant flux intensity of $2.52 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{W m}^{-2}$ at the Earth, a distance of $4.16 \times 10^{17}\ \text{m}$ away, and a surface temperature of $9500\ \text{K}$. Find its radius.

    $L = 4\pi d^{2}F = 4\pi(4.16 \times 10^{17})^{2}(2.52 \times 10^{-8}) = 5.48 \times 10^{28}\ \text{W}$. Then $r = \sqrt{5.48 \times 10^{28}/[4\pi(5.67 \times 10^{-8})(9500)^{4}]} = 3.1 \times 10^{9}\ \text{m}$, about four times the Sun's radius. Check the sense: a star $140$ times as luminous as the Sun but only $1.6$ times as hot must be considerably bigger, since $L \propto r^{2}T^{4}$.

    Why $T^{4}$ matters so much. Two stars of the same radius at $3000\ \text{K}$ and $6000\ \text{K}$ differ in luminosity by $2^{4} = 16$ times; a small error in the temperature is a large error in the luminosity, which is why the peak wavelength must be read carefully and, for a receding galaxy, corrected for redshift (below).

    Explore

    A star's luminosity and radius

    L ∝ r²

    For a given surface temperature, a star's luminosity grows with the SQUARE of its radius (Stefan's law).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    blackbody 黑体 hēi tǐ
    wavelength 波长 bō cháng
    temperature 温度 wēn dù
    Wien's displacement law 维恩位移定律 wéi ēn wèi yí dìng lǜ
    Stefan–Boltzmann constant 斯特藩-玻尔兹曼常量 sī tè fān - bō ěr zī màn cháng liàng
    Stefan–Boltzmann law 斯特藩-玻尔兹曼定律 sī tè fān - bō ěr zī màn dìng lǜ
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    25.3

    Redshift, Hubble's law and the Big Bang

    Syllabus
    1. understand that the lines in the emission and absorption spectra from distant objects show an increase in wavelength from their known values
    2. use $\Delta\lambda / \lambda \approx \Delta f / f \approx v / c$ for the redshift of electromagnetic radiation from a source moving relative to an observer
    3. explain why redshift leads to the idea that the Universe is expanding
    4. recall and use Hubble's law $v \approx H_0 d$ and explain how this leads to the Big Bang theory (candidates will only be required to use SI units)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Cosmological redshift

    The spectral lines 谱线 of light from distant galaxies are seen at longer wavelengths than their known laboratory values — the whole spectrum is stretched towards the red. This is redshift 红移.

    Two spectra compared: for a near star the dark hydrogen absorption lines sit at their laboratory wavelengths; for a distant star the same pattern of lines is shifted towards the red (longer-wavelength) end
    The hydrogen absorption lines of a distant star are shifted to longer wavelengths — a redshift

    Reading it as a Doppler shift, the galaxy is moving away. For $v \ll c$:

    $$\frac{\Delta \lambda}{\lambda} \approx \frac{v}{c},$$

    where $\Delta\lambda = \lambda_{\text{observed}} - \lambda_{\text{emitted}}$ and $v$ is the speed of recession 退行. Example: light emitted at $4.62 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ but seen at $4.91 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ gives $\Delta\lambda = 0.29 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ and

    $$v \approx \frac{\Delta\lambda}{\lambda_{\text{em}}} c \approx 1.9 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    Why redshift means an expanding Universe

    Almost every distant galaxy is redshifted (a few near ones are blueshifted 蓝移 by local motion). So galaxies are, on average, moving apart — not just from us but from each other. The Universe is expanding, with the space between galaxies stretching. More distant galaxies are redshifted more.

    "State what is meant by redshift." The observed wavelength of the radiation (its spectral lines) from a source is longer than the wavelength emitted, because the source is moving away from the observer. It is the Doppler effect 多普勒效应 for light: the fractional change in wavelength equals the fractional change in frequency and, for $v \ll c$, the ratio $v/c$.

    Worked example. A hydrogen line measured in the laboratory at $656.3\ \text{nm}$ is observed in the light from a galaxy at $660.9\ \text{nm}$. Find the galaxy's speed of recession and, using $H_{0} = 2.3 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{s}^{-1}$, its distance.

    $\Delta\lambda = 660.9 - 656.3 = 4.6\ \text{nm}$, so $v = c\,\Delta\lambda/\lambda = (3.00 \times 10^{8})(4.6/656.3) = 2.1 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Distance: $d = v/H_{0} = 2.1 \times 10^{6}/2.3 \times 10^{-18} = 9.1 \times 10^{23}\ \text{m}$ (about $100$ million light years). Divide by the emitted (laboratory) wavelength, and keep the nanometres consistent in the ratio.

    Worked example (the other way round). A galaxy in Corona Borealis recedes at $21\,400\ \text{km s}^{-1}$. At what wavelength is its $656.3\ \text{nm}$ hydrogen line observed?

    $\Delta\lambda = \lambda v/c = 656.3 \times (2.14 \times 10^{7}/3.00 \times 10^{8}) = 46.8\ \text{nm}$, so the line appears at $703\ \text{nm}$, moved from the red almost into the infrared. Every line and the whole continuous spectrum are stretched by the same factor $(1 + v/c) = 1.071$.

    The black-body spectrum of a receding galaxy compared with the spectrum it emits: the observed curve has the same shape but every wavelength is stretched by the same factor, so its peak sits at a longer wavelength
    A receding galaxy's continuous spectrum keeps its shape but slides to longer wavelengths. Wien's law applied to the observed peak gives a temperature that is too low

    A trap the exam sets. If the peak wavelength of a receding galaxy's spectrum is fed straight into Wien's law, the temperature comes out too low, because the observed $\lambda_{\text{max}}$ is longer than the emitted one. Correct the peak first: $\lambda_{\text{emitted}} = \lambda_{\text{observed}}/(1 + v/c)$. Asked to sketch the observed spectrum on the same axes as the emitted one, draw the same shape shifted to longer wavelengths, peak included.

    "Explain how redshift leads to the idea that the Universe is expanding" (three marks). (1) The spectral lines from (almost) all distant galaxies are shifted to longer wavelengths, so (2) by the Doppler effect the galaxies are moving away from us, and (3) the further away a galaxy is, the greater its redshift and so its speed: this is what would be seen from any galaxy if the space between all galaxies were expanding, so the Universe as a whole is expanding, not just moving away from the Earth.

    A deep black field scattered with thousands of faint coloured smudges, spirals and ellipses — each one a distant galaxy, photographed by the Hubble Space Telescope
    The Hubble Ultra Deep Field — almost every point of light is a whole galaxy, most of them redshifted and receding

    Hubble's law

    The link between recession speed $v$ and distance $d$ is Hubble's law 哈勃定律:

    $$v \approx H_{0} \cdot d,$$

    where $H_{0}$ is the Hubble constant 哈勃常数 ($\approx 2.3 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{s}^{-1}$). Always use SI units. Example: a galaxy receding at $1.9 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ is at $d = v/H_{0} \approx 8.3 \times 10^{24}\ \text{m}$.

    "State Hubble's law" (two marks). The speed of recession of a galaxy is (directly) proportional to its distance from the Earth (the observer): $v = H_{0}d$, where $v$ is the recession speed, $d$ the distance and $H_{0}$ the Hubble constant. Identify every symbol when asked. The value of $H_{0}$ is quoted in the exam in SI units ($\text{s}^{-1}$), so $v$ must be in $\text{m s}^{-1}$ and $d$ in metres, never kilometres per second per megaparsec.

    Worked example. A star in a distant galaxy emits radiation whose intensity peaks at $4.62 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$; the peak in the light received at the Earth is at $4.91 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$. Find the star's surface temperature, the galaxy's recession speed, and its distance ($H_{0} = 2.3 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{s}^{-1}$).

    Temperature from the emitted peak: $T = 2.90 \times 10^{-3}/4.62 \times 10^{-7} = 6300\ \text{K}$. Speed: $v = c\,\Delta\lambda/\lambda = (3.00 \times 10^{8})(0.29/4.62) = 1.9 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$, about $6\%$ of $c$. Distance: $d = v/H_{0} = 1.9 \times 10^{7}/2.3 \times 10^{-18} = 8.2 \times 10^{24}\ \text{m}$ (about $870$ million light years). Using the observed peak for the temperature would have given $5900\ \text{K}$, $400\ \text{K}$ too low.

    A graph of recession speed against distance for galaxies: the data lie on a straight line through the origin of gradient H0, showing that speed is proportional to distance
    Hubble's law: a galaxy's recession speed is proportional to its distance, $v = H_0 d$

    From Hubble's law to the Big Bang

    Hubble's law means the galaxies were once together. Running the expansion backwards, all distances shrink to zero at $t = -1/H_{0}$ — the Universe was once a tiny, hugely dense, hot point. This is the Big Bang 大爆炸. The age of the Universe (for steady expansion) is about

    $$T_{\text{age}} \approx \frac{1}{H_{0}} \approx 4.3 \times 10^{17}\ \text{s} \approx 14 \text{ billion years}.$$

    The expansion, the redshift of galaxies, the cosmic microwave background 宇宙微波背景, and the hydrogen/helium abundances are the main evidence for the Big Bang.

    "Explain how Hubble's law leads to the Big Bang theory" (three marks). (1) Galaxies are receding with speeds proportional to their distances, so (2) if time is run backwards, every galaxy, at whatever distance, arrives at the same point at the same time, $t = d/v = 1/H_{0}$ ago; (3) so the Universe must have begun as a single point of enormous density and temperature that has been expanding ever since. The age estimate: $1/H_{0} = 1/(2.3 \times 10^{-18}) = 4.3 \times 10^{17}\ \text{s}$, and dividing by $3.16 \times 10^{7}\ \text{s}$ per year gives $1.4 \times 10^{10}$ years. This assumes the expansion rate has not changed; it is an estimate, not a measurement.

    Distance ladder

    Astronomers combine methods, each calibrated by the one below:

    1. parallax — for nearby stars.
    2. standard candles (Cepheids, Type Ia supernovae) — for galaxies.
    3. Hubble's law ($d = v/H_{0}$, with $v$ from redshift) — for very distant galaxies.
    The cosmic distance ladder: parallax for nearby stars calibrates standard candles for galaxies, which calibrate Hubble's law for very distant galaxies, each rung reaching further
    The distance ladder: each method is calibrated by the one below and reaches further out
    Explore

    Hubble's law

    v = H₀·d

    Recession speed is proportional to distance — the gradient is Hubble's constant.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    spectral lines 谱线 pǔ xiàn
    redshift 红移 hóng yí
    recession 退行 tuì xíng
    blueshifted 蓝移 lán yí
    Doppler effect 多普勒效应 duō pǔ lè xiào yìng
    Hubble's law 哈勃定律 hā bó dìng lǜ
    Hubble constant 哈勃常数 hā bó cháng shù
    Big Bang 大爆炸 dà bào zhà
    cosmic microwave background 宇宙微波背景 yǔ zhòu wēi bō bèi jǐng
    Watch lesson Exercise sheet
    25.3

    Definitions the examiner accepts

    A definition question is marked against fixed wording. Learn these exactly, and give one answer only.

    Term Definition
    luminosity the total power of radiation emitted by a star
    radiant flux intensity the power of radiation received per unit area (at right angles to the radiation), $F = L/(4\pi d^{2})$
    standard candle an object of known luminosity, from which a distance can be found by measuring the flux received
    Wien's displacement law the wavelength of maximum intensity of a black body is inversely proportional to its thermodynamic temperature, $\lambda_{\text{max}} T = \text{constant}$
    Stefan–Boltzmann law the luminosity of a black body of radius $r$ is $L = 4\pi\sigma r^{2}T^{4}$
    redshift the increase in the observed wavelength of radiation from a source moving away from the observer
    Hubble's law the speed of recession of a galaxy is proportional to its distance from the observer, $v = H_{0}d$
    Hubble constant the constant of proportionality in Hubble's law, in $\text{s}^{-1}$; $1/H_{0}$ estimates the age of the Universe
    Big Bang theory the Universe began from a single point of very high density and temperature and has been expanding since
    25.3

    Exam tips

    • Two recipes: distance = candle's $L$, measured $F$, $d = \sqrt{L/(4\pi F)}$; radius = $T$ from $\lambda_{\text{max}}$, $L$ from $F$ and $d$, $r$ from $L = 4\pi\sigma r^{2}T^{4}$. Write each step as its own formula.
    • $F$ is a flux (per square metre), $L$ a power; $L = 4\pi d^{2}F$ links them and $4\pi$ is part of both laws.
    • Wien: $\lambda_{\text{max}}$ in metres, $T$ in kelvin. Stefan–Boltzmann: $r^{2}$ and $T^{4}$; a $10\%$ error in $T$ is a $46\%$ error in $L$.
    • Redshift: $\Delta\lambda/\lambda_{\text{emitted}} = v/c$; then $d = v/H_{0}$ in SI units. Correct a receding galaxy's peak wavelength before using Wien's law.
    • The three "explain" answers (standard candle to distance, redshift to expansion, Hubble's law to the Big Bang) are marked point by point: three statements each, in order.
    • The age of the Universe is $1/H_{0}$, about $14$ billion years; state the assumption of a constant expansion rate.

    Common mistakes

    • Defining luminosity as brightness, or as power per unit area; that is the flux.
    • Finding a standard candle's luminosity from its distance, which is circular; the luminosity comes from its type.
    • Using degrees Celsius in Wien's or Stefan's law, or forgetting the fourth power.
    • Dividing $\Delta\lambda$ by the observed wavelength instead of the emitted one, or mixing nanometres and metres in one ratio.
    • Using $H_{0}$ with $v$ in $\text{km s}^{-1}$; convert to $\text{m s}^{-1}$.
    • Feeding a redshifted peak wavelength into Wien's law and reporting a temperature that is too low.
    • Stating Hubble's law without "proportional" or without saying what $v$ and $d$ are.
    • Explaining the Big Bang without the backward-in-time argument that all galaxies were together at $t = 1/H_{0}$ ago.

Log in or create account

IGCSE, A-Level & AP